AS 53102 Visual KV SG 96M0364 GB WW 0079-3

Visual KV Series
96M0364
INDEX
1 2 3
1
Installation Support Programming
Software
User's Manual
Installation
1. Configuration and 1. Programming
Specifications 1. Introduction
2. Instructions
2. System Installation
3. Access Window
2. Editor
3. Interrupts Visual KV Series
3. Simulator
4. KV-D20 Operator 4. High-speed Counters
Interface Panel
5. KV-10/80 Hardware
4. Monitor
5. Appendices
5. Positioning Control 1
User’s Manual
6. Interrupts, High-speed
6. Handheld
Programmer
7. KV-L2 Serial Interface
Counters, Positioning
Control
7. Serial Communication
Installation
Module
8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O 8. Programming
Module Examples
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima, Higashi-Yodogawa-ku, Osaka, 533-8555, Japan PHONE: +81-6-6379-2211
AUSTRIA GERMANY MALAYSIA SWITZERLAND

Phone: +43-2236-378266-0 Phone: +49-6102-36 89-0 Phone: +60-3-2092-2211 Phone: +41 43 455 77 30
BELGIUM HONG KONG MEXICO TAIWAN
Phone: +32 2 716 40 63 Phone: +852-3104-1010 Phone: +52-81-8220-7900 Phone: +886-2-2718-8700
CANADA HUNGARY NETHERLANDS THAILAND
Phone: +1-905-696-9970 Phone: +36 14 748 313 Phone: +31 40 20 66 100 Phone: +66-2-369-2777 How this manual is organized:
CHINA ITALY POLAND UK & IRELAND The Visual KV Series User’s Manual is composed of 3 separate
Phone: +86-21-68757500 Phone: +39-2-6688220 Phone: +48 71 36861 60 Phone: +44-1908-696900
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
CZECH REPUBLIC JAPAN SINGAPORE USA
Phone: +420 222 191 483 Phone: +81-6-6379-2211 Phone: +65-6392-1011 Phone: +1-201-930-0100 Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.
FRANCE KOREA SLOVAKIA
Phone: +33 1 56 37 78 00 Phone: +82-31-642-1270 Phone: +421 2 5939 6461
A5WW1-MAN-0069
Copyright (c) 1999 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

084024E 0079-3 96M0364 Printed in Japan
Safety Precautions
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:
This instruction manual describes the operation and function of the KV Series PLC.
Read this manual carefully to ensure safe use and maximum performance from your (1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
KV Series PLC. one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defec-
tive must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspec-
Symbols tion and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
messages carefully. does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishan-
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury. (electric dling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Compo-
WARNING shock, burn, etc.) nents which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only sugges-
tions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
CAUTION (3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally
in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifica-
Note: Provides additional information on proper operation. tions state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
Conventions (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
This manual describes the operation/function of all Keyence KV Series PLC. INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note following conventions when you use. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
Visual KV (Series) KV-10AR/AT/DR/DT KV-16AR/AT/DR/DT
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSE-
KV-10xx, 16xx, 24xx, 40xx KV-24AR/AT/DR/DT KV-40AR/AT/DR/DT
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
Conventional KV (Series) KV-10R(W)/T(W) KV-16R(W)/T(W)
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF
KV-300 (Series) KV-24R(W)/T(W) KV-40R(W)/T(W)
KV-10/80 (Series) KV-80R(W)/T(W)
DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED
KV-300 GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
TION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS
AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
General Precautions ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers
or damage limitations may not apply.
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and perfor-
mance of the KV Sereis PLC. BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or
delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifica-
• We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage tions, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/
in the event a problem occurs. Samples.
• Do not open or modify the KV Series PLC or use it in any way other than de-
scribed in the specifications.
• When the KV Series PLC is used in combination with other instruments, func-
tions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and
the surrounding environment.
• Do not use the KV Series PLC for the purpose of protecting the human body.
Note: The built-in display may show the error message "Error 40" blinking the very
first time you turn on the power supply to the Visual KV Series. Press any key
around the display to cancel this message.
The Visual KV Series shows this message when no program is loaded.
(1) 1-419
Note to User
When using the Visual KV Series in the following conditions or environments, be
sure to use the Visual KV Series with sufficient margin regarding the rating and
functions, take appropriate safety precautions such as fail-safe, and contact our
sales personnel if any questions arise.
• Use in conditions or environments not described in this manual
• Use for nuclear power control, railway facilities, air service facilities, vehicles,
combustion devices, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equip-
ment, etc.
• Use for applications where large effects are predicted to be given on human lives
and properties and safety is especially requested.
Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

■ Restriction to be compatible with EMC directives
• When using a relay output type unit (whose model name ends with "R"), connect
spark killers having the appropriate withstand voltage against the load to the
output terminals in parallel to contacts (because the unit discharges when a relay
contact becomes open and noise is generated). In our experiments, we use the
following models of spark killers.
XEB0101 0.1 µF-10 Ω manufactured by OKAYA DENKI SANGYO
The following 1-turn ferrite core is added to the AC power input circuit of the KV-
40AR/T, the KV-24AR/T and to the DC power input circuit of the KV-40DR/T.
ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Note: The contents above do not by themselves ensure that the entire machine
manufactured in accordance with the above contents is compatible with EMC
directives.
You must judge by yourself whether or not the entire machine is compatible with
EMC directives because compatibility may change depending on the component
configuration, wiring and location inside of the machine.
■ Restriction on compatibility with low-voltage directives (IEC-1010-1)

• Use insulated type crimp-style terminals.
• For wiring materials, use lead wires whose sheath is 0.4 mm or more.
• The Visual KV Series is allowed to be installed in a vertical position only.
(Spacers for expansion units are not available.)
• Be sure to use the Visual KV Series inside the control panel.
96M0364
(2)
KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 3 09.8.4, 19:01

Features of the Visual KV Series
● Extremely small
The Visual KV Series is the smallest in the world among AC type PLCs equipped
with screw terminal blocks, and saves installation space.
● Extremely fast
The minimum scan time is 140 µs and minimum instruction execution time is 0.7
µs, which is the fastest control in its class.
● AC power built-in type newly added

AC power built-in type units are newly added. This type can be used in small
spaces where a switching power supply unit cannot be installed.
● Excellent Access Window

An Access Window with two-color backlight is adopted in all models to facilitate
changing and monitoring of device data. Changing between RUN mode and
PROGRAM mode, checking the error code when an error has occurred, etc. can
be performed in a Visual KV Series unit without the need for any handheld
programmer.
The analog trimmer, which has been popular in the conventional KV Series, is
digitized to enable more detail settings. [Digital trimmers]
● User message setting function

In the Access Window, 256 different user messages can be displayed. This
function can be used to give instructions on works on the production line, indicate
abnormalities in the units, etc.
● Program write in RUN mode

Ladder programs can be changed even while the system is running.
● Equipped with two serial ports

Visual KV Series basic units are equipped with two serial ports to connect periph-
eral units, improving the debug environment.
(The KV-10xx is equipped with only one serial port.)
● Easy Ramp-up/down control function

The one-axis motor control function is offered separately from high-speed
counters so that feedback control is enabled.
● Equipped with two 24-bit high-speed 30 kHz, two-phase counters

The Visual KV Series is equipped with two high-speed counters each with a two-
point comparator output function that enables high-speed encoder input.
● Specified frequency pulse output function

High-speed counters can function as pulse oscillators of 50 kHz maximum with
easy setting, without creating a complicated ladder program.
● Frequency counter function

High-speed counters can function as frequency counters with easy setting,
without creating complicated ladder programs.
● Cam switch function

High-speed counters can function as cam switches with easy setting, without
creating complicated ladder programs.
(3)
KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 4 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

● Interrupt function
The Visual KV Series is equipped with four high-speed interrupt inputs of
10 µs maximum.
● Input time constant change function

The time constant can be set in 7 steps from 10 µs to 10 ms.
● Double memory backup functions

In addition to a conventional SRAM battery backup function, the Visual KV Series
is also equipped with an EEPROM backup function.
Compatibility with Conventional KV Series Peripheral Units

The Visual KV Series functions as a high-end compatible model of the conventional
KV Series. Peripheral units of the conventional KV Series such as the ladder support
software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV" and the
handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can be used since they are part of the Visual KV
Series.
However, it should be noted that the contents have changed as follows.
• The internal clock cycle of high-speed counters consists of three types: 1 µs, 10
µs, and 100 µs.
• The time constant for an input relay specified by the HSP instruction is 10 µs.
• The analog trimmer function is set with the Access Window built into the basic
unit.
• The available device setting range of the TMIN instruction is from 0 to 65535.
[Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can display 0 to 9999 .]
• The RUN/PROGRAM LED is displayed in the Access Window provided on the
front face of the basic unit.
• Transistor output is not independent, but is common.
• With the transistor type, the output terminal layout is different.
• The specifications for output current of transistor outputs Nos. 500 to 502 is 100
mA.
• Conventional KV Series expansion units are not available as expansion units for
the Visual KV Series.
• The channel setting switch is not provided for expansion units. Channels are
determined in connection order.
• Scans in expansion I/O units are not synchronous with the scan time in Visual KV
Series basic units.
• Assignment of special utility relays has partially changed.
• Data memory device Nos. DM1000 to DM1999 are assigned as special data
memories.
(4)

Cautions when using the previous version of ladder support software
Pay strict attention to the following items when using the ladder support software.
• When using the ladder support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x", set the model to "KV-300".
• DM0 to DM1999 are only available.
When the ladder support software "LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is
CAUTION used, do not use the monitor’s Change All function. If the Change All function
is used, the basic unit may be damaged. Never use the Change All function.
Peripheral units and other units incompatible with the Visual KV Series
Peripheral units in the conventional KV Series and other units shown below are not
compatible with the Visual KV Series.
• Expansion I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-8ER/8ET/8EX/16EX/
8EYR/8EYT/16EYR/16EYT
• Analog I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-AD4/DA4
Cautions when Using the Serial Port

The KV-16xx/24xx/40xx units are equipped with two RJ-11 modular connectors for
serial communication.
When using them, pay strict attention to the following contents:
• Programs can be transferred and monitored using either communication port A or

B. However, never connect the ladder software and a handheld programmer to
the two ports at the same time.
• The KV-D20 operator interface panel can be connected to either communication
port A or B. However, only one KV-D20 unit can be connected to a single basic
unit.
• Never leave both the KV-D20 operator interface panel and KV-P3E(01) handheld
programmer on simultaneously for a long period of time.
(5)

(6)

How this manual is organized
The Visual KV Series User’s Manual is composed of 3 separate manuals;
1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming. Please read each manual
relevant to your purpose.
1 Installation
Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications [Visual KV Series Only]
Describes the system configuration of the Visual KV Series, the names and functions of
each part, and the specifications.
Chapter 2 System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the installation and connection of each Visual KV Series unit as well as
system maintenance.
Chapter 3 Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the Access Window used for changing and monitoring data.
Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel used for changing, monitoring, and
displaying the status of inside relays, timers, counters and data memories.
Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the hardware specifications and wirings for KV-300 and KV-10/80 Series.
Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

Describes how to use the handheld programmer and memory card.
Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the serial interface modules for KV-300 Series.
Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O module for KV-300 Series
Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O unit for KV-10/80 Series.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the error code list, countermeasures against problems, and error
indications for each unit.
Appendices
The appendix includes a list of ladder program applications and the index.
2 Support Software
Chapter 1 Introduction
Describes the items included in the package, the product outline, the method to connect
a personal computer, the installation method, etc.
(7)

Chapter 2 Editor
Describes the operating procedures in Editor mode.
Chapter 3 Simulator
Describes the operating procedures in Simulator mode.
Chapter 4 Monitor
Describes the operating procedures in Monitor mode.
Appendices
Includes instructions list, devices list, sample program list and quick reference for key
operation and shortcuts.
3 Programming
Chapter 1 Programming
Describes basic knowledge including program creation procedures, device configuration,
relay assignments, special functions to set and confirm Visual KV Series operations, as
well as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the contents described here com-
pletely at first before creating programs.
Chapter 2 Instructions
Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Series.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-183 for details of interrupt instructions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-195 for details of the high-speed
counters used in the application instruction.
Chapter 3 Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

The interrupt processing function executes an interrupt program when an external input
or request from the high-speed counter comparator (interrupt factor) is encountered
during KV operation.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as well as inputs and outputs
encountered during interrupt processing.
Chapter 4 High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, which allow high-
speed pulse measurement and pulse output, independent of the scan time.
Chapter 5 Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]
Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
Chapter 7 Serial Communication

The KV Series can be connected to an external device with an RS-232C interface to
establish communication.
This chapter describes communications specifications, how to connect the KV Series to
external devices, and how to perform communication.
Chapter 8 Programming Examples

Describes the typical programming examples for KV-10/80 Series. These programs can
be used for Visual KV Series. However, pay attention to the I/O addressing compatibility
before use.
(8)

Contents
1 Installation
Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications Visual KV

1.1 System Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 System Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 General Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.2 AC Power Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5
Visual KV Series operation at power interruption ........................................ 1-5
1.2.3 Performance Specifications ................................................................................ 1-6
Data backup function against instantaneous power interruption ................. 1-7
1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ................................................... 1-8
1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit .......................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications ................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................. 1-10
1.4.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-11
KV-10AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-11
KV-10AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-13
1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-14
1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-15
1.4.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7 KV-40AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (40-I/O Basic Unit) .............................................. 1-31
1.7.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-37
1.8 KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit) .................................................. 1-38
1.8.2 Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-38
1.8.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-39
KV-E4X (4-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-39
KV-E8X (8-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-40
KV-E16X (16-I/O expansion input unit) ...................................................... 1-41
1.8.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-42
1.9 KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output Unit) ............. 1-43
1.9.2 Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-43
KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type) ..................................................... 1-44
KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP)] .................. 1-44
KV-E4R [4-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-45
(9)

KV-E4T [4-I/O expansion output unit transistor output type)] .................... 1-46
KV-E8R [8-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-47
KV-E8T(P) [8-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output type)] .............. 1-48
KV-E16R [16-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] ...................... 1-49
KV-E16T(P) [16-I/O expansion input unit (transistor output)] .................... 1-50
1.9.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-51
1.10 KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit) ....................................................... 1-52
1.10.2 Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-53
1.10.3 Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-53
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-53
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-53
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-54
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-56
1.10.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-58
1.11 KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel) ............................................................... 1-59
1.11.2 General Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-60
1.11.3 Functional Specifications .................................................................................. 1-60
1.11.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-61
Chapter 2 System Installation Visual KV

2.1 Installation Environment ............................................................................... 1-64
2.1.1 Installation Environment ................................................................................... 1-64
2.1.2 Installation Position ........................................................................................... 1-65
2.1.3 Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 1-66
Expansion unit spacer ................................................................................ 1-66
2.1.4 Cautions on Wiring for Each Unit ...................................................................... 1-67
Wiring procedures for basic units ............................................................... 1-67
Cautions on wiring for I/O units .................................................................. 1-68
Terminal ..................................................................................................... 1-68
Cautions on grounding ............................................................................... 1-69
2.1.5 Contact Protection ............................................................................................ 1-69
2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units .......................................... 1-70
2.2.1 Visual KV Series Expansion Units .................................................................... 1-70
2.2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units ................................................. 1-71
Connection methods .................................................................................. 1-72
Number of connectable units ..................................................................... 1-73
2.2.3 Confirming the Connection Settings of Expansion Units .................................. 1-74
Expansion unit relay list ............................................................................. 1-74
Connection information for expansion units ............................................... 1-75
Input time constant for expansion units ..................................................... 1-76
Clearing the input value when disconnecting ............................................. 1-76
2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Units and the Basic Unit ...... 1-77
When inputting ........................................................................................... 1-77
In the case of output .................................................................................. 1-77
2.3 Inspection and Maintenance ......................................................................... 1-78
2.3.1 Inspection .........................................................................................................1-78
2.3.2 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 1-78
Chapter 3 Access Window Visual KV

3.1 Overview of the Access Window .................................................................. 1-80
3.1.1 What is the Access Window ............................................................................. 1-80
3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples ........................................................................ 1-80
3.2 Basic Operating Procedures ......................................................................... 1-81
3.2.1 Operation Mode ................................................................................................ 1-81
3.2.2 Access Window Modes ..................................................................................... 1-81
3.2.3 Part Names and Functions of the Access Window ........................................... 1-82
3.2.4 Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock ............................................ 1-82
3.2.5 Turbo Function .................................................................................................. 1-83
3.3 Digital Trimmer Mode .................................................................................... 1-84
3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure ................................................................... 1-84
(10)

Key operation and screen display .............................................................. 1-84
Function and operating procedure ............................................................. 1-84
3.4 Device Mode ...................................................................................................1-87
Devices that can be displayed and changed ............................................. 1-87
Selecting the device and displaying the current value/set value ................ 1-88
Changing a numeric value ......................................................................... 1-89
Holding the setting ..................................................................................... 1-91
3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type .............................................................. 1-91
Data memory (DM) .................................................................................... 1-91
Temporary data memory (TM) ................................................................... 1-91
Timer/counter (T/C) .................................................................................... 1-92
High-speed counter comparator (CTC) ...................................................... 1-92
Trimmer (TRM) .......................................................................................... 1-93
Relay (RLY) ............................................................................................... 1-93
3.5 System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-94
LOAD mode and SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
Display in LOAD/SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
3.6 Message Display ............................................................................................ 1-97
3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status ..................................................................... 1-97
3.6.2 User Messages ................................................................................................. 1-97
How to use the user messages .................................................................. 1-98
Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel Visual KV

4.1 Before Operation .......................................................................................... 1-100
4.1.1 Checking Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-100
4.1.2 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-101
4.1.3 Details about the KV-D20 ............................................................................... 1-102
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-102
Functional specifications .......................................................................... 1-102
Dimensions .............................................................................................. 1-103
4.1.4 Installation and Environment .......................................................................... 1-104
Use environment ...................................................................................... 1-104
Panel mounting ........................................................................................ 1-105
4.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance ........................................................................... 1-106
Inspection ................................................................................................. 1-106
Maintenance ............................................................................................ 1-106
4.2 Overview and Operation .............................................................................. 1-107
4.2.1 Use Examples for the KV-D20 ........................................................................ 1-107
4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series ....................................................................... 1-108
Connection ............................................................................................... 1-108
Precautions .............................................................................................. 1-108
4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20 ................................................................................. 1-109
Switching the display mode ..................................................................... 1-109
Overview of each display mode ............................................................... 1-110
Assignment of relays/DM ......................................................................... 1-111
Other functions ......................................................................................... 1-112
Precautions about screen change function .............................................. 1-115
4.2.4 Operator Mode ................................................................................................ 1-117
Screen selection in operator mode .......................................................... 1-117
Operator screen ....................................................................................... 1-118
Direct access screen ................................................................................ 1-126
KV-I/O monitor screen ............................................................................. 1-127
Switch comment screen ........................................................................... 1-128
Lamp comment screen ............................................................................ 1-128
Screen change permission in operator mode .......................................... 1-129
4.2.5 Device Mode ................................................................................................... 1-130
Device mode ............................................................................................ 1-130
Operation example for device mode ........................................................ 1-132
4.2.6 System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-134
System mode ........................................................................................... 1-134
4.3 Examples of Ladder Programs ................................................................... 1-135
(11)

4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs .................................................................................. 1-135
Before creating ladder programs ............................................................. 1-135
Basic ladder programs ............................................................................. 1-136
4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs ....................................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying user messages ..................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying messages with titles ............................................. 1-145
Example of position control ...................................................................... 1-146
Example of frequency counter ................................................................. 1-149
Example of 24-bit high-speed counter ..................................................... 1-152
Example of cam switch function ............................................................... 1-154
4.4 Appendix ....................................................................................................... 1-158
4.4.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-158
4.4.2 Available Character List .................................................................................. 1-162
4.4.3 Comment Draft Sheet ..................................................................................... 1-163
Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware KV-300, KV-10/80

5.1 System Configuration .................................................................................. 1-166
5.1.1 KV-300 ............................................................................................................ 1-166
5.1.2 KV-10/80 ......................................................................................................... 1-167
5.2 Module/Unit Specifications ......................................................................... 1-168
5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module ............................................................. 1-168
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-168
5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ................................................ 1-169
5.2.3 Wiring: KV-300 CPU ....................................................................................... 1-170
5.2.4 Wiring: KV-C16X/C32X Connector Input Module ........................................... 1-171
5.2.5 Wiring: KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Connector Output Module ............................... 1-172
5.2.6 Wiring: KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module ......................................................... 1-173
5.2.7 Wiring: KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T I/O Terminal Modules ............. 1-174
5.2.8 Module Names and Functions ........................................................................ 1-175
5.2.9 Peripheral Equipment Names and Functions ................................................. 1-176
5.3 Module/Unit Connections ............................................................................ 1-178
5.3.1 Environmental Requirements ......................................................................... 1-178
5.3.2 Installation Guidelines ..................................................................................... 1-178
5.3.3 Assembling the System .................................................................................. 1-179
Connecting modules ................................................................................ 1-179
5.3.4 Mounting to the DIN Rail ................................................................................. 1-180
5.3.5 Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-181
5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and DC Power Distribution Module .... 1-182
KV-U4 AC Power Supply Module ............................................................ 1-182
KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ..................................................... 1-182
5.3.7 I/O Connectors ................................................................................................ 1-183
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-183
KV-C16X/C32X ........................................................................................ 1-184
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S .............................................................................. 1-185
KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T ...................................................... 1-186
5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and Power Distribution ......... 1-187
Transmission distance by cable type ....................................................... 1-187
Connection patterns ................................................................................. 1-187
Incorrect wiring patterns ........................................................................... 1-188
Power distribution .................................................................................... 1-188
5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions ................................................................... 1-189
5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators ............................................................................. 1-191
5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units .............................................................................. 1-192
5.3.12 Mounting Environment .................................................................................... 1-194
Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

6.1 Using the Handheld Programmer ............................................................... 1-196
6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer ............................................................. 1-196
(12)

6.1.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-198
6.2 Basic Operations ......................................................................................... 1-200
6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation ........................................................................ 1-200
6.3 Functions ...................................................................................................... 1-216
Function Nos. list ..................................................................................... 1-216
ALL CLEAR .............................................................................................. 1-217
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR ..................................................... 1-217
COUNTER CLEAR .................................................................................. 1-218
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR ........................................................... 1-218
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR .................................................................. 1-219
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET ........................................................... 1-219
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED .......................................................... 1-220
OFFLINE EDITOR START ...................................................................... 1-221
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP ........................................................................ 1-221
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE ................................... 1-222
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE .................................................. 1-224
RELAY ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 1-226
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY ................................................................ 1-227
READ TRIMMER SETTING ..................................................................... 1-228
SYNTAX CHECK ..................................................................................... 1-228
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK .............................................................. 1-229
6.4 Memory Card ................................................................................................ 1-230
6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] .................................................................. 1-230
6.4.2 Storage Capacity ............................................................................................ 1-230
CLEAR ..................................................................................................... 1-232
NEW ......................................................................................................... 1-233
ACCS ....................................................................................................... 1-234
ACCS: SAVE ........................................................................................... 1-235
ACCS: LOAD ........................................................................................... 1-236
ACCS: VERIFY ........................................................................................ 1-236
ACCS: DELETE ....................................................................................... 1-237
Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module KV-300

7.1 Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.1.1 Features .......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.2 Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-241
7.2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-241
7.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-242
7.2.3 Outline of Operation Modes ............................................................................ 1-244
7.3 Installation .................................................................................................... 1-245
7.3.1 Setting the Operation Mode ............................................................................ 1-245
7.3.2 Communications Protocols ............................................................................. 1-247
7.3.3 Connector Wiring ............................................................................................ 1-248
7.3.4 Connecting to External Units .......................................................................... 1-249
Connecting to An External Display .......................................................... 1-249
Connecting to an IBM PC-AT Computer .................................................. 1-249
Connecting to the KV-10/16/24/40/80 ...................................................... 1-250
Connecting KV-L2s .................................................................................. 1-250
7.4 Software Setup ............................................................................................. 1-252
7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)] .................................................. 1-252
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) from the KV-L2 ........................................................ 1-252
7.5 KV Mode Programming ............................................................................... 1-253
7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode .................................................................................... 1-253
Communications protocol ........................................................................ 1-253
7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure ................................................................. 1-255
Command transmission procedure .......................................................... 1-255
Command/response format ..................................................................... 1-256
Communications commands and responses ........................................... 1-256
Communications commands .................................................................... 1-257
7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data ...................................................... 1-262
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-262
Transmitting Text Data ............................................................................. 1-264
Receiving text data .................................................................................. 1-265
ASCII code/binary conversion function .................................................... 1-266
(13)

Example program ..................................................................................... 1-269
7.6 Display Interface Mode Programming ....................................................... 1-270
7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode .............................................................. 1-270
Communications protocols ....................................................................... 1-270
Communications control procedure ......................................................... 1-271
7.6.2 Command and Response Format ................................................................... 1-273
7.6.3 Commands and Responses ........................................................................... 1-275
List of commands and responses ............................................................ 1-275
Description of commands and responses ................................................ 1-277
End codes ................................................................................................ 1-291
7.7 Non-procedure Mode Programming .......................................................... 1-292
7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode ................................................................. 1-292
Connecting to the KV-L2 .......................................................................... 1-293
7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos. .......................... 1-294
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-294
7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 1-297
Data transmission and internal data memory addresses ......................... 1-297
7.7.4 Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 1-298
Format of received data and data memory addresses ............................ 1-298
7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function ........................................................ 1-300
7.8 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................................... 1-304
7.8.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-305
7.9 Specifications ............................................................................................... 1-306
7.9.1 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-306
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-306
RS-232C connector specifications ........................................................... 1-306
RS-422A terminal block specifications ..................................................... 1-306
7.9.2 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-307
7.10 Command List .............................................................................................. 1-308
7.10.1 List of Commands and Responses ................................................................. 1-308
7.10.2 List of Commands and Responses in Display Interface mode ....................... 1-309
Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module KV-300

8.1 Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-312
Features ................................................................................................... 1-312
8.2 Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-313
8.2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-313
8.3 Installation .................................................................................................... 1-315
8.3.1 Terminal Nos. ................................................................................................. 1-315
8.3.2 Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-316
8.3.3 Example of Voltage I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-317
8.3.4 Example of Current I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-318
8.3.5 Setting I/O Ranges ......................................................................................... 1-319
8.4 Programming ................................................................................................ 1-320
8.4.1 Input Characteristics (A/D) .............................................................................. 1-320
8.4.2 Calculating Input Data (A/D) ........................................................................... 1-321
8.4.3 Output Characteristics (D/A) ........................................................................... 1-322
8.4.4 Calculating Output Data (D/A) ........................................................................ 1-323
8.4.5 Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses ....................................................... 1-324
8.4.6 Reading Analog Input ..................................................................................... 1-325
8.4.7 Measuring Analog Input Average ................................................................... 1-326
8.4.8 Writing Analog Output ..................................................................................... 1-327
8.4.9 Converting Analog Input to Analog Output ..................................................... 1-328
8.5 KV-AN6 Appendices .................................................................................... 1-329
8.5.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-330
8.5.3 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-331
Environmental specifications ................................................................... 1-331
System specifications .............................................................................. 1-331
(14)

8.5.4 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-332
Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit KV-10/80

9.1 Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-334
Features ................................................................................................... 1-334
9.2 Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-335
9.2.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-335
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-335
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-336
9.2.2 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-337
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-337
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-339
9.3 Installation .................................................................................................... 1-342
9.3.1 Installation Procedure ..................................................................................... 1-342
9.3.2 Checking the Installation Environment ........................................................... 1-343
9.3.3 Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode ...................................................................... 1-344
Setting the input mode ............................................................................. 1-344
9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments .................................................................... 1-345
Wiring ....................................................................................................... 1-345
Wiring diagrams ....................................................................................... 1-346
9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80 ........................................................................ 1-348
9.3.6 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 1-349
Inspection and Cleaning .......................................................................... 1-349
9.4 Programming ................................................................................................ 1-350
9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4 .............................................................................. 1-350
A/D Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-350
About Digital Data after A/D Conversion .................................................. 1-351
Calculating Voltage and Current Values from Digital Data ...................... 1-352
9.4.2 Programming the KV-DA4 .............................................................................. 1-353
D/A Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-353
Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output ......... 1-354
Writing Digital Data to Data Memory for D/A Conversion ........................ 1-356
9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables ..................................................................... 1-357
Voltage Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-357
Current Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-358
9.5 Programming Examples .............................................................................. 1-359
Calculating Analog Data Values from Digital Data ................................... 1-359
Writing Data to be Analog-output ............................................................. 1-361
Outputting Analog Trimmer Values .......................................................... 1-364
Outputting Analog Input Data ................................................................... 1-365
Outputting Analog Input from a Pressure Sensor to an Air Valve ............ 1-366
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Voltage Limits and Measuring the
Average Voltage ...................................................................................... 1-367
9.6 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-370
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Error List ....................................................................................................... 1-372
10.1.1 List of Error Codes in Basic Units ................................................................... 1-372
10.1.2 Error indication in Expansion Units ................................................................. 1-374
10.1.3 Program Errors ............................................................................................... 1-375
10.1.4 Memory Card Errors and Other Errors ........................................................... 1-376
10.2 Replacing Relays ......................................................................................... 1-377
Replacement procedure ........................................................................... 1-377
10.3 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-378
10.3.1 Troubleshooting List ....................................................................................... 1-378
10.4 Error Messages ............................................................................................ 1-380
Appendices
Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions [Visual KV Series] .................... 1-382
A.1 System Specifications [Visual KV Series] ....................................................... 1-382
(15)

Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-382
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-383
AC power supply unit ............................................................................... 1-384
A.2 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ..................................................... 1-384
Input specifications .................................................................................. 1-384
Output specifications (relay output): KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AR/DR,
KV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR .............................................................. 1-385
Output specifications (transistor output): KV-10AT(P)/DT(P),
KV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and KV-40AT(P)/DT(P) ............ 1-385
A.3 Expansion Unit Specifications ........................................................................ 1-385
A.4 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-389
Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions [KV-300 Series] ......................... 1-392
B.1 System Specifications [KV-300 Series] .......................................................... 1-392
Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-392
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-393
AC Power supply module/DC power distribution module ........................ 1-394
B.2 Module Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-398
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-398
KV-C16X/C32X Input Modules ................................................................ 1-399
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Output Modules ................................................... 1-400
KV-R8X/R16X I/O Terminal Modules ....................................................... 1-401
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules ..................................... 1-402
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules (RUN Output) .............. 1-403
KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module .............................................................. 1-403
B.3 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-404
Appendix C. Ladder Program List ...................................................................... 1-406
Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6] ..................................... 1-408
Voltage conversion table .......................................................................... 1-408
Current conversion table .......................................................................... 1-409
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS 1-419
2 Support software
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Items Included in the Package ........................................................................ 2-2
1.2 Outline of the Ladder Builder for KV .............................................................. 2-3
1.2.1 Operating environment and system configuration .............................................. 2-3
1.2.2 Features and functions of the Ladder Builder for KV .......................................... 2-4
Features of the Ladder Builder for KV ......................................................... 2-4
Functions of the Ladder Builder for KV ........................................................ 2-6
1.3 Before Programming ....................................................................................... 2-7
Machines to be prepared ............................................................................. 2-7
1.3.1 Differences from the KV IncrediWare (DOS) ...................................................... 2-8
1.3.2 Differences from the Ladder Builder for KV Ver 1.0 ........................................... 2-8
1.4 Installing the Software ..................................................................................... 2-9
1.4.1 Preparation for installation .................................................................................. 2-9
1.4.2 Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 95 ......................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 3.1 ........................................................................ 2-12
1.5 Cautions for Use ............................................................................................ 2-13
1.6 Basic Operations ........................................................................................... 2-14
1.6.1 Program creation flow and available modes ..................................................... 2-14
1.6.2 Starting up and exiting from the software ......................................................... 2-16
1.6.3 Screen ..............................................................................................................2-18
1.6.4 Mouse operation and keyboard operation ........................................................ 2-21
1.6.5 Online Help ....................................................................................................... 2-23
Chapter 2 Editor KV-300

2.1 Outline of the Editor Functions .................................................................... 2-26
2.1.1 Cautions for editing ladder programs ................................................................ 2-26
2.2 Edit Screen ..................................................................................................... 2-27
(16)

2.2.1 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-27
2.2.2 Ladder program window screen ....................................................................... 2-28
2.3 File Management ............................................................................................ 2-29
2.3.1 Creating a new file ............................................................................................ 2-29
2.3.2 Setting the automatic file read function ............................................................. 2-30
2.3.3 Setting automatic file save for the file ............................................................... 2-31
2.3.4 Saving and reading files ................................................................................... 2-32
2.3.5 Reading and saving a file in another format ..................................................... 2-33
2.3.6 Saving a ladder diagram in text format ............................................................. 2-36
2.3.7 Verifying files .................................................................................................... 2-36
2.4 Entering/Deleting Symbols and Connection Lines .................................... 2-37
2.4.1 Entering symbols ..............................................................................................2-37
2.4.2 Deleting symbols ..............................................................................................2-42
2.4.3 Entering contacts/coils directly ......................................................................... 2-42
2.4.4 Changing the device at the current cursor position .......................................... 2-43
2.4.5 Entering/Deleting connection lines ................................................................... 2-44
2.4.6 Canceling edit operations ................................................................................. 2-45
2.5 Entering Comments/Labels ......................................................................... 2-46
2.5.1 Editing comments/labels ................................................................................... 2-46
2.5.2 Editing line comments ....................................................................................... 2-50
2.5.3 Changing ladder lines into comments ............................................................... 2-51
2.6 Edit and Arrangement .................................................................................. 2-52
2.6.1 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-52
2.6.2 Inserting and deleting lines ............................................................................... 2-57
2.7 Jump, Search, and Replace ......................................................................... 2-58
2.7.1 Jump ................................................................................................................. 2-58
2.7.2 Searching for instruction words/operands ........................................................ 2-62
2.7.3 Searching for the device at the cursor position ................................................. 2-63
2.7.4 Replacing operands .......................................................................................... 2-64
2.7.5 Converting a/b contacts .................................................................................... 2-65
2.8 Editing the Mnemonic List ........................................................................... 2-67
2.8.1 Displaying and terminating a mnemonic list ..................................................... 2-67
2.8.2 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-69
2.9 Displaying the Use Status ............................................................................. 2-70
2.9.1 Displaying a use status list ............................................................................... 2-70
2.10 Setting the System ......................................................................................... 2-71
2.10.1 Setting the system ............................................................................................ 2-71
2.11 Entering and Developing Macros ................................................................ 2-72
2.11.1 Creating a macro file ......................................................................................... 2-72
2.11.2 Entering and developing macros ...................................................................... 2-74
2.12 Compilation .................................................................................................... 2-75
2.12.1 Executing compilation ....................................................................................... 2-75
2.12.2 Error display ......................................................................................................2-76
2.12.3 Double coil check ..............................................................................................2-76
2.13 Printing Functions ......................................................................................... 2-77
2.13.1 Printing ..............................................................................................................2-77
2.13.2 Preview display ................................................................................................. 2-81
2.14 Changing the Display Color on the Screen ................................................. 2-82
2.14.1 Changing display colors on the screen ............................................................. 2-82
Chapter 3 Simulator
3.1 Outline of the Simulator Functions .............................................................. 2-84
3.1.1 Outline of the functions ..................................................................................... 2-84
3.1.2 Restrictions in the simulator .............................................................................. 2-84
3.2 Starting up and Exiting from the Simulator ................................................. 2-86
3.2.1 Operating procedure for startup and exit .......................................................... 2-86
3.2.2 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-88
3.3 Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................... 2-89
3.3.1 Outline of the ladder monitor ............................................................................ 2-89
3.3.2 Executing scans ................................................................................................ 2-89
3.3.3 Executing steps .............................................................................................. 2-101
(17)

3.3.4 Jump and search ............................................................................................ 2-105
3.3.5 Stop/reset and device all clear ........................................................................ 2-108
3.4 Monitor All .................................................................................................... 2-109
3.4.1 Outline of monitor all ....................................................................................... 2-109
3.4.2 Displaying, saving, and reading the monitor all window ................................. 2-109
3.4.3 Monitor all window .......................................................................................... 2-113
3.4.4 Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-113
3.4.5 Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-116
3.5 Registration Monitor .................................................................................... 2-119
3.5.1 Outline of the registration monitor ................................................................... 2-119
3.5.2 Displaying, saving, and reading the registration monitor ................................ 2-119
3.5.3 Registration monitor window ........................................................................... 2-122
3.5.4 Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-122
3.5.5 Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-123
3.5.6 Manipulating timing charts .............................................................................. 2-128
3.5.7 Printing out the registration monitor ................................................................ 2-131
Chapter 4 Monitor
4.1 Outline of the Monitor Functions ............................................................... 2-134
4.1.1 Outline of the functions ................................................................................... 2-134
4.1.2 Restrictions in the monitor .............................................................................. 2-134
4.1.3 Precautions for communication ...................................................................... 2-135
4.2 Communicating with the PLC ..................................................................... 2-136
4.2.1 Setting the PLC communication parameters .................................................. 2-136
4.2.2 Setting the comment transfer .......................................................................... 2-138
4.3 Starting up and Exiting from the Monitor .................................................. 2-139
4.3.1 Operating procedures for startup and exit ...................................................... 2-139
4.3.2 Name and function of each part of the screen ................................................ 2-143
4.4 Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................. 2-144
4.4.1 Outline of the ladder monitor .......................................................................... 2-144
4.4.2 Displaying the ladder monitor window ............................................................ 2-144
4.4.3 PLC error check .............................................................................................. 2-144
4.4.4 Starting the monitor ........................................................................................ 2-145
4.4.5 Stopping the monitor ....................................................................................... 2-145
4.4.6 Screen displayed while the monitor is running ............................................... 2-146
4.4.7 Setting the PLC operation mode ..................................................................... 2-147
4.5 Monitor All and Registration Monitor ......................................................... 2-148
4.5.1 Functions of the monitor all window ................................................................ 2-148
4.5.2 Functions of the registration monitor .............................................................. 2-148
4.6 Monitor Function .......................................................................................... 2-149
4.6.1 Disabling the input refresh/Disabling the output ............................................. 2-149
4.6.2 Changing the current values all at once ......................................................... 2-150
4.6.3 Device all clear ............................................................................................... 2-154
Appendices
Appendix A Error Message List ......................................................................... 2-156
A-1 System errors ................................................................................................. 2-156
A-2 Memory errors ................................................................................................ 2-156
A-3 File errors ........................................................................................................ 2-157
A-4 Installation errors ............................................................................................ 2-157
A-5 Errors that occur in the editor ......................................................................... 2-158
A-6 Errors that occur in the monitor/simulator ....................................................... 2-159
A-7 Communication errors (displayed in the monitor) ........................................... 2-159
A-8 PLC errors ...................................................................................................... 2-160
A-9 Errors that occur during compilation ............................................................... 2-161
Appendix B Instruction List ............................................................................... 2-163
B-1 Basic instructions ............................................................................................ 2-163
B-2 Application instructions ................................................................................... 2-164
B-3 Arithmetic instructions ..................................................................................... 2-165
B-4 Interrupt instructions ....................................................................................... 2-166
Appendix C Relay No. List .................................................................................. 2-167
C-1 Relays, timers, counters, and memory numbers for each model ................... 2-167
(18)

Appendix D Special Utility Relay List ................................................................ 2-168
D-1 Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ................................................. 2-168
D-2 Special utility relays for high-speed counter (0) .............................................. 2-168
D-3 Special utility relays for high-speed counter (1) .............................................. 2-169
D-4 Other special utility relays ............................................................................... 2-169
D-5 Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-172
D-6 Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-172
Appendix E Devices for KV-10R(W)/T(W) to 80R(W)/T(W), KV-300 ................ 2-174
E-1 Special utility relays ........................................................................................ 2-174
E-2 Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-176
E-3 Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-176
Appendix F Sample Program List ..................................................................... 2-178
F-1 Description of sample ladder programs .......................................................... 2-178
Appendix G Quick Reference ............................................................................. 2-180
G-1 Editor .............................................................................................................. 2-180
G-2 Simulator ......................................................................................................... 2-188
G-3 Monitor ............................................................................................................ 2-195
Appendix H Notes for Programming ................................................................. 2-201
H-1 Circuits that must be modified ........................................................................ 2-201
H-2 Precautions for programming ......................................................................... 2-202
H-3 Programs which cannot be decompiled .......................................................... 2-203
Appendix I List of Files Used ............................................................................ 2-204
Appendix J Countermeasures for Frequent Communication Errors ............ 2-205
3 Programming
Chapter 1 Programming
1.1 Before Creating Programs .............................................................................. 3-2
1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation ................................................................... 3-2
1.1.2 Scan Time ........................................................................................................... 3-3
Scan time ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Input response time delay ............................................................................ 3-3
1.2 User Memory .................................................................................................... 3-4
1.2.1 Program Capacity ............................................................................................... 3-4
Maximum number of lines in a program ....................................................... 3-4
Calculating the byte count used ................................................................... 3-4
1.3 Device Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-5
1.3.1 Device List .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Relay list ...................................................................................................... 3-5
List of I/O relays in basic units ..................................................................... 3-5
List of relays in expansion units ................................................................... 3-6
1.3.2 Relay No. ............................................................................................................ 3-7
Address No. ................................................................................................. 3-7
Contact No. .................................................................................................. 3-8
Channel No. ................................................................................................. 3-8
1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos. .......................................................................................... 3-8
1.3.4 Input Relays ........................................................................................................3-9
Basic unit ..................................................................................................... 3-9
Expansion unit ........................................................................................... 3-10
1.3.5 Output Relays ...................................................................................................3-10
Output operation time ................................................................................ 3-10
1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-11
Retentive function of internal utility relays .................................................. 3-11
1.3.7 Special Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-12
Description ................................................................................................. 3-12
1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List ................................................................................... 3-14
Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ............................................ 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0) .......................................... 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1) .......................................... 3-15
Other special utility relays .......................................................................... 3-15
1.3.9 Timers and Counters ........................................................................................ 3-18
(19)

Timer/Counter list ....................................................................................... 3-18
Description .................................................................................................3-18
1.3.10 Data Memories .................................................................................................3-19
1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory .................................................................................. 3-21
1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions ................................................................................. 3-22
1.4 Special Functions .......................................................................................... 3-23
1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function ............................................................. 3-23
Setting the input time constant for basic units using special utility relays .. 3-23
1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant ......................................................... 3-24
Modification within the CPU ....................................................................... 3-24
1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode ............................................................................... 3-25
1.4.4 Output Disabled Function ................................................................................. 3-26
1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function ...................................................................... 3-26
1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function ..................................................................... 3-27
1.4.7 Special Functions ............................................................................................. 3-28
Constant Scan Time Mode ........................................................................ 3-28
Output Disabled Function .......................................................................... 3-28
Input Refresh Disabled Function ................................................................ 3-28
1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams .......................................................................... 3-29
1.5.1 Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams ........................................................... 3-29
1.5.2 Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................................... 3-30
1.5.3 Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 3-31
Chapter 2 Instructions
2.1 Instruction List [Visual KV Series] .............................................................. 3-34
2.1.1 Basic Instructions ..............................................................................................3-34
2.1.2 Application Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-36
2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-38
2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-41
2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .............................................................. 3-41
2.2 Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] ................................................. 3-42
2.2.3 Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-48
2.2.4 Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-54
2.3 Convention Details ........................................................................................ 3-55
2.4 Instruction Details .......................................................................................... 3-56
2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions .................................................................................... 3-134
2.5 Programming Notes ..................................................................................... 3-189
Chapter 3 Interrupts Visual KV

3.1 Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-192
3.2 Interrupt Processing .................................................................................... 3-194
3.2.1 Interrupt Processing ........................................................................................ 3-194
3.2.2 Types of Interrupts .......................................................................................... 3-195
3.2.3 Interrupt Priority .............................................................................................. 3-196
3.2.4 Interrupt Program ............................................................................................ 3-196
3.3 Direct Input/Output ...................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.1 Direct Input ..................................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.2 Direct Output ................................................................................................... 3-197
3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs ........................................................... 3-198
3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter .................................................................... 3-198
3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ............................................................... 3-199
3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses .............................................. 3-200
3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between Two Points ........... 3-201
Chapter 4 High-speed Counters Visual KV

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions ............................................................... 3-204
4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters ................................................................. 3-206
(20)

4.2.1 High-speecÛCounters and High-speed Counter Comparators ...................... 3-206
Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators . 3-206
Specifications of high-speed counters ..................................................... 3-208
High-speed counter comparators ............................................................. 3-209
4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters .......................................................... 3-210
4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-211
4.3.1 Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter .................................. 3-211
4.3.2 Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator .................................... 3-211
4.3.3 Comparator Output ......................................................................................... 3-211
4.3.4 Count Input Method ........................................................................................ 3-212
4.3.5 Resetting the High-speed Counter ................................................................. 3-214
4.3.6 Differences with the CTH Instruction between the
Conventional and Visual KV Series ................................................................ 3-216
4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters ............................................................. 3-217
4.4 Extended Functions of High-speed Counters ........................................... 3-221
4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter .............................................................................. 3-221
4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed Counter ......................... 3-223
4.4.3 Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter (single-phase input) ....... 3-224
4.4.4 Ring Counter Function .................................................................................... 3-225
4.4.5 Applications of Ring Counters ........................................................................ 3-226
4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-228
4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .................................................. 3-228
4.5.2 Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ................................... 3-229
4.5.3 Frequency Counter Function .......................................................................... 3-231
4.5.4 Applications of Frequency Counters ............................................................... 3-232
4.5.5 Cam Switch Function ...................................................................................... 3-233
Cam switch mode .................................................................................... 3-233
Multi-step comparator mode .................................................................... 3-234
Setting method ......................................................................................... 3-234
4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode) ....................................... 3-236
4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output ........................................................................... 3-237
4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output .............................................................. 3-237
4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator .................... 3-238
Changing the pulse period and width ....................................................... 3-238
Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value ...................... 3-239
Operation with special utility relays .......................................................... 3-239
4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................................... 3-242
4.7.1 Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .................................. 3-242
4.7.2 Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .......................... 3-245
4.7.3 Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Count ............... 3-249
4.7.4 Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down control) ................ 3-251
Chapter 5 Positioning Control Visual KV

5.1 Outline of Positioning Control .................................................................... 3-254
5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control ................................................................................... 3-254
5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures .......................................... 3-255
5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure ......................................................................... 3-255
5.2.2 Operating Procedure ...................................................................................... 3-257
5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function .............................. 3-258
5.3.1 Connection Example ....................................................................................... 3-258
5.3.2 Tips ................................................................................................................. 3-258
5.3.3 Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ............................. 3-259
Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control KV-300, KV-10/80
6.1 Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-268
6.1.1 Description of Interrupts .................................................................................. 3-268
Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine ...................... 3-268
Types of interrupt ..................................................................................... 3-268
Interrupt priority ........................................................................................ 3-269
Interrupt routine ........................................................................................ 3-269
Direct output ............................................................................................. 3-270
Direct input ............................................................................................... 3-270
(21)

6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions ....................................................................................... 3-271
6.2 Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................................ 3-276
6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................... 3-276
Outline of High-Speed Counters .............................................................. 3-276
Outline of Pulse Output ............................................................................ 3-279
Examples of Pulse Output ....................................................................... 3-284
6.3 Positioning Control ...................................................................................... 3-296
6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control) ................................................. 3-296
Outline of positioning control .................................................................... 3-296
Setting and application of parameters ..................................................... 3-297
Examples of stepping motor control ......................................................... 3-300
Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7.1 Communications Specifications ................................................................ 3-306
7.1.1 Communications Specification ........................................................................ 3-306
7.1.2 Connection with the KV Unit ........................................................................... 3-306
7.1.3 Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer ................................... 3-307
7.2 Serial Communication ................................................................................. 3-308
7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure ............................................................... 3-308
7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses .................................................................. 3-309
7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List ..................................................... 3-310
7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands and Responses to Commands .............. 3-311
7.2.5 Other Response Codes .................................................................................. 3-315
7.2.6 Error Code List ................................................................................................ 3-316
7.2.7 Example Program ........................................................................................... 3-317
7.3 Loading Text Data ........................................................................................ 3-318
7.3.1 Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 3-318
7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 3-319
7.3.3 Sample Program ............................................................................................. 3-320
7.4 ASCII Code List ............................................................................................ 3-321
Chapter 8 Programming Examples

8.1 List ......................................................................................................... 3-324
8.2 Details ......................................................................................................... 3-326
8.2.1 Reference Program Examples ........................................................................ 3-326
Basic Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-326
Application Instructions ............................................................................ 3-334
Arithmetic Instructions .............................................................................. 3-343
(22)

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
See 1-419.
Caution
• No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any form or by any
means without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
• The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
• KEYENCE has thoroughly checked and reviewed this manual. Please contact
the sales office listed at the end of this manual if you have any questions or
comments regarding this manual or if you find an error.
• KEYENCE assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the infor-
mation in this manual, item 3 above notwithstanding.
• KEYENCE will replace any incomplete or incorrectly collated manual.
All company names and product names in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective owners.
(23)

Visual KV
Series
Chapter 1
Configuration and Specifications
This chapter describes the system configuration of the Visual KV Series, the
names and functions of each part, and the specifications.
1.1 System Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 System Configuration .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 AC Power Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Performance Specifications ................................................................................ 1-6
1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ................................................... 1-8
1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit .......................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications ................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................... 1-10
1.4.1 Part Names and Functions ................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams .......................................... 1-11
1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P)) ...................................................................... 1-14
1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio andAmbient Temperature .. 1-15
1.4.5 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5.5 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.5 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7 KV-40AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (40-I/O Basic Unit) ................................................ 1-31
1.7.5 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-37
1.8 KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit) .................................................... 1-38
1.8.2 Input Specifications ............................................................................................. 1-38
1.8.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams ....................................... 1-39
1.8.4 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-42
1.9 KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output Unit) ............... 1-43
1.9.2 Output Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-43
1.9.4 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-51
1.10 KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit) ......................................................... 1-52
1.10.2 Input Specifications ............................................................................................. 1-53
1.10.3 Output Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-53
1.10.5 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-58
1.11 KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel) ................................................................. 1-59
1.11.3 Functional Specifications .................................................................................... 1-60
1.11.4 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 1-61
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 1 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.1 System Configuration

This section describes the Visual KV Series system configuration and each unit
type.
Visual KV
1.1.1 System Configuration

Series
The Visual KV Series system has the following configuration.
■ Basic units: 16 types
10-I/O basic unit 16-I/O basic unit 24-I/O basic unit 40-I/O basic unit
Operator
AC power
interface panel
type
KV-10AR/10AT(P) KV-16AR/16AT(P) KV-24AR/24AT(P) KV-40AR/40AT(P)
KV-D20 DC power
type
KV-10DR/10DT(P) KV-16DR/16DT(P) KV-24DR/24DT(P) KV-40DR/40DT(P)

1
■ Expansion units: 11 types
4-I/O 8-I/O 8-I/O 16-I/O
expansion unit expansion I/O unit expansion unit expansion unit
KV-E4X/ KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) KV-E8X/ KV-E16X

E4R/E4T E8R/E8T(P) E16R/E16T(P)
➮ For more about expanding the system by connecting expansion units, refer to "Connecting Visual KV
Series Expansion Units" (p.1-71).
■ Conventional KV Series peripheral units
Personal computer Z-1 Card reader/writer

IBM PC/AT or * Available for the
compatible machine KV-H4E only
KV-P3E(01) Handheld Programming support software M2/M3 Memory card

programmer KV-H4E [KV IncrediWare (DOS)]
KV-H6WE2
(LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver.1.5)
1-2 Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 2 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

Visual KV
Series
Extension cable for Expansion unit spacer Metal fixture for screw tightening
expansion unit (300 mm) For 4-I/O expansion unit For 10-I/O basic unit OP-35345
For all expansion units OP-35342 For 16-I/O basic unit OP-35346
OP-35361 For 8-I/O expansion unit For 24-I/O basic unit OP-35347
OP-35343 For 40-I/O basic unit OP-35348
For 16-I/O expansion unit For 4- to 16-I/O expansion units
OP-35344 OP-35349
When the ladder support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER

WARNING BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is used, the Change All function on the monitor is
not available. Using the Change All function may damage the basic unit. Never
use the Change All function.
11
Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications 1-3
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 3 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.2 Specifications
1.2 Specifications
This section describes the general specifications and performance specifications for
the Visual KV Series units.
Visual KV
1.2.1 General Specifications

Series
Item Specifications
AC power type DC power type
Power supply KV-10AR/AT(P) KV-16AR/AT(P) KV-10DR/DT(P) KV-16DR/DT(P)
KV-24AR/AT(P) KV-40AR/AT(P) KV-24DR/DT(P) KV-40DR/DT(P)
Input supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (±10%) 24 VDC (+10%, -20%)
Allowable
Less than 40 ms Less than 2 ms
instantaneous time
Basic units KV-10AR/DR: 100 mA or less KV-24AT/DT: 100 mA or less
KV-16AR/DR: 120 mA or less KV-40AT/DT: 120 mA or less
KV-24AR/DR: 140 mA or less KV-10ATP/DTP: 85 mA or less
Internal current KV-10AT/DT: 80 mA or less KV-24ATP/DTP: 105 mA or less
consumption KV-16AT/DT: 90 mA or less KV-40ATP/DTP: 130 mA or less
(converted into KV-E4X: 15 mA or less KV-E8X: 25 mA or less KV-E16X: 35 mA or less
24 VDC value) Expansion KV-E4T: 20 mA or less KV-E8T(P): 40 mA or less KV-E16T: 60 mA or less
1 units KV-E4R: 40 mA or less KV-E8R: 70 mA or less
KV-E4XT(P): 30 mA or less KV-E4XR: 45 mA or less
KV-E16R: 110 mA or less
KV-E16TP: 70 mA or less
KV-D20 Operator interface panel: 60 mA or less
Others
KV-P3E(01) Handheld programmer: 65 mA or less
KV-10DR: 745 mA*1 KV-24DR: 785 mA*1 KV-10AR/AT(P): 0.4 A
KV-10DT: 725 mA*1 KV-24DT: 745 mA*1 KV-16AR/AT(P): 0.5 A
*1 *1
KV-10DTP: 730 mA KV-24DTP: 750 mA KV-24AR/AT(P): 0.6 A
Maximum load current consumption *1 *2
KV-16DR: 765 mA KV-40DR: 790 mA KV-40AR/AT(P): 0.7 A
*1 *2
KV-16DT: 735 mA KV-40DT: 730 mA
*1 *2
KV-16DTP: 745 mA KV-40DTP: 740 mA
Ambient temperature (No freezing) 0 to +50°C (32 to 122° F), 0 to +45°C (32 to 113° F)[KV-P3E(01)]
Relative humidity 35 to 85%, No condensation
Ambient storage temperature -20 to +70°C (-4 to 158° F), No freezing
1,500 VAC for 1 minute
Withstand voltage (Between power terminal and I/O terminals as well as between entire
external terminals and case)
1,500 Vp-p or more, pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns (by noise simulator)
Noise immunity
In conformance with EN standard (EN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-6)
2
Shock 150 m/s (150 G), working time: 11 ms, twice in each of X, Y and Z axis directions
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 1.5 mm or less, 2 hours in each of X, Y and
Vibration
Z axis directions (1 G or less when attached to DIN rail)
50 MΩ or more
Insulation resistance (Between power terminal and I/O terminals as well as between
entire external terminals and case by 500 VDC megohmmeter)
Operating atmosphere No excessive dust or corrosive gases allowed.
KV-10AR: Approx. 250 g KV-10DR: Approx. 150 g KV-16AR: Approx. 300 g
KV-16DR: Approx. 190 g KV-24AR: Approx. 350 g KV-24DR: Approx. 240 g
KV-40AR: Approx. 450 g KV-40DR: Approx. 330 g KV-10AT(P): Approx. 240 g
Basic units
KV-10DT(P): Approx. 140 g KV-16AT(P): Approx. 280 g KV-16DT(P): Approx. 180 g
KV-24AT(P): Approx. 330 g KV-24DT(P): Approx. 210 g KV-40AT(P): Approx. 410 g
Weight KV-40DT(P): Approx. 280 g
KV-E4X: Approx. 80 g KV-E8X: Approx. 100 g KV-E16X: Approx. 130 g
Expansion KV-E4T: Approx. 80 g KV-E8T(P): Approx. 100 g KV-E16T(P): Approx. 130 g
units KV-E4R: Approx. 100 g KV-E8R: Approx. 130 g KV-E16R: Approx. 130 g
KV-E4XT(P): Approx. 100 g KV-E4XR: Approx. 120 g
Others KV-P3E(01): Approx. 230 g KV-D20: Approx. 160 g
*1. Configured with KV-E16R (x4), KV-E16X (x4) and KV-P3E(01).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 4 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.2 Specifications
1.2.2 AC Power Specifications

Item Specifications
Method Switching method
Ripple noise 240 mVp-p or less
Visual KV
AC power current KV-10Ax: 0.4 A KV-16Ax: 0.5 A
Series
consumption KV-24Ax: 0.6 A KV-40Ax: 0.7 A
AC power input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (± 10%)
AC power factor 60%
1.
Output voltage 24 VDC± 10%
KV-10Ax: 0.4 A KV-16Ax: 0.6 A
Output capacity
KV-24Ax: 0.6 A KV-40Ax: 0.7 A
KV-10Ax: 14 W KV-16Ax: 21 W
Power consumption
KV-24Ax: 21W KV-40Ax: 24 W
Rated voltage: 240 VAC, rated current: 3.15 A,
Used fuse
Characteristics: Fast-melting type
1. Includes the internal current consumption and current consumption of expansion units.
Note: The maximum output capacity available with the AC type service power
output is the output capacity of each basic unit subtracted by the internal current
consumption of the basic unit, connected expansion units, and connected peripheral
units.
11
Visual KV Series operation at power interruption
■ Drop in supply voltage
When the supply voltage drops, the Visual KV Series stops operating and the
output turns off.
■ Detection of instantaneous power interruption
• An AC type basic unit continues operating against instantaneous power interrup-
tion of less than 40 ms. A DC type basic unit continues operating against
instantaneous power interruption of less than 2 ms.
• An AC type basic unit may or may not accept instantaneous power interruption of
40 ms or more. A DC type basic unit may or may not accept instantaneous power
interruption of 2 ms or more.
• When accepting instantaneous power interruption, a basic unit stops operating
and the output turns off.
■ Automatic recovery
• Once the supply voltage recovers, the Visual KV Series restarts operation auto-
matically.
Instantaneous power interruption:
Less than 40 ms
▲
Rated voltage Rated voltage
Instantaneous power interruption:

40 ms or more
Rated voltage
▲
Rated voltage
Note: If the supply voltage increases gradually or drops, the Visual KV Series may
repeat operation and then stop. If problems continue to occur with equipment and
other operations from repetitive starts and stops, provide a protection circuit so that
the output shuts down until the voltage reaches the rated value.
■ Time until start of operation

• The time period from when the power is turned on until operation starts varies
depending on the conditions, including the supply voltage, system configuration,
and operating environment. The minimum time is approximately 1.2 ms.
• When a user program is changed, it will be saved in the EEPROM when the
power is next turned on. Therefore, in such a case, the time period from when the
power is turned on until operation starts is longer than usual.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 5 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.2 Specifications
1.2.3 Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Arithmetic operation control method Stored program method
I/O control method Refresh method
Visual KV
Program language Ladder chart method + Expanded ladder method

Series
Basic instruction: 28 types Application instruction: 22 types

Instruction types
Arithmetic instruction: 26 types Interrupt instruction: 4 types
Minimum scan time 140 µs
Basic instruction: 0.7 µs
Instruction processing speed
Application instruction: 6.4 µs
2,000 steps (KV-10xx, KV-16xx)
Program capacity
Maximum number of connected expansion units 8 (7 for KV-40xx)
Number of I/O points 10 to 152
(including 10 to 40 I/O points of basic unit) (when maximum number of expansion units are connected)
Internal utility relay 2,304: 1000 to 1915 and 3000 to 17915
Special utility relay 160: 2000 to 2915
Data memory (16 bits) 2,000 words: DM 0000 to DM1999
Temporary data memory (16 bits) 32 words: TM00 to TM31
250 in all:
0.1-sec timer: TMR (0 to 6553.5 secs)
1 Timer/counter
0.01-sec timer: TMH (0 to 655.35 secs)
0.001-sec timer: TMS (0 to 65.535 secs)
UP counter: C
Up/down counter: UDC
Digital trimmer 2 (set in Access Window)
High-speed counter 2 of 30 kHz, 2-phase high-speed counter (0 to 65535 count)1.
4 (2 for each high-speed counter)
High-speed counter comparator
Direct output is enabled.
Positioning control function Independent 1 axis, 50 kHz maximum
Memory switches 16
Data Backup Program memory EEPROM which can be overwritten 100,000 times or more
function against Data memory, counter, internal Can be backed up with electrical double-layer capacitor
instantaneous utility relay, and contact for 20 days or more at 25° C: KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P)
power comment (Held devices are set for 2 months or more at 25° C (77° F): Any other model
interruption by the MEMSW instruction.) Can be backed up with EEPROM in all models.
Self-diagnosis CPU and RAM errors
Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) 2.
Memory card M-2/M-3
Peripherals Card reader/writer Z-1 3.
Programming support software LADDER BUILDER for KV
(Windows version) 4. (KV-H6WE2)
KV IncrediWare (DOS) (KV-H4E)
Number of contact comments stroable 1,000 max.
1. When high-speed counters are set using the MEMSW instruction, 24-bit data can be
counted.
2. Comments cannot be handled in the handheld programmer KV-P3E(01).
3. The card reader/writer Z-1 can be used with the programming support software "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)".
4. When the programming support software "LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is used,
the Change All function on the monitor is not available. Using the Change All function may
damage the basic unit. Never use the Change All function.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 6 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.2 Specifications
Data backup function against instantaneous power interruption

■ Electrical double-layer capacitor built into the basic unit
Contents of data memories, current values of counters, and the contents of internal
utility relays in a Visual KV Series basic unit are saved in RAM backed up with an
electrical double-layer capacitor built into the Visual KV Series basic unit by the Data
Visual KV
backup function against instantaneous power interruption.
Series
The backup time varies depending on the ambient temperature.
If power to the Visual KV Series basic unit remains OFF for more than the holding
time by the RAM, the data may be cleared or become corrupted.
To avoid the data being cleared, save the data in the EEPROM using the backup
function to the EEPROM.
➮ For writing to and reading from the EEPROM, refer to "LOAD mode and SAVE mode" (p.1-96).
When a user program is written, it is saved in RAM. The next time the power is
turned on, the user program is automatically transferred from RAM to the EEPROM
and is also saved in the EEPROM. If power to the Visual KV Series basic unit will
remain OFF for more than the backup time by the RAM, turn the power off immedi-
ately after writing a user program, and then turn the power on again so that the user
program is transferred to the EEPROM.
11
• Data backup function by electrical double-layer capacitor built into the
basic unit
Visual KV Series: 2 months or more at 25°C (77°F)
(20 days or more at 25°C (77°F) in KV-10xx)
■ EEPROM
The Visual KV Series basic unit is equipped with a backup function to save pro-
grams, contents of data memories, current values of counters, etc. in the EEPROM.
Even if the power is interrupted or power to the Visual KV Series basic unit remains
OFF, the data is still saved. When the power turns ON again, the contents of the
EEPROM is automatically read. (The contents of data memories and current values
of counters should be read by manipulating the Access Window.)
When data is changed and the power is turned off without saving the changed data,
the changes are saved only in the built-in electrical double-layer capacitor and are
not saved in the EEPROM.
If the Visual KV Series basic unit remains OFF for 2 months or more at 25°C (77°F)
(20 days or more at 25°C (77°F) in KV-10xx) while the data is backed up only with
the built-in electrical double-layer capacitor, the saved contents may be cleared or
become corrupted.
If the Visual KV Series basic unit will remain OFF for a long period of time, save the
data in the EEPROM.
➮ Refer to "LOAD mode and SAVE mode" (p.1-96).
• Data backup function with the EEPROM

Visual KV Series: 10 years or more at 25°C (77°F)
(available number of overwrites: 100,000 times or more)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 7 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units
1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic

Units
This section describes the common I/O specifications of Visual KV Series basic
Visual KV
units. There are two types of basic units, AC power type and DC power type. Two
Series
types of output types are offered: relay output and transistor output.
1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit

■ Basic unit model designation
The model of a Visual KV Series basic unit is indicated as follows:
KV-10AR
Output type: R = relay output, T = transistor output
Power supply type: A = AC power type, D = DC power type
Number of I/O points: 10 = 10 points, 16 = 16 points,
24 = 24 points, 40 = 40 points
■ Unit type
The following four types of Visual KV Series basic units are offered:
1 AC power/relay output type: KV-10AR/16AR/24AR/40AR

AC power/transistor output type: KV-10AT(P)/16AT(P)/24AT(P)/40AT(P)
DC power/relay output type: KV-10DR/16DR/24DR/40DR
DC power/transistor output type: KV-10DT(P)/16DT(P)/24DT(P)/40DT(P)
1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications

■ Input specifications
5 V mode
Item 24 V mode (Inputs 000 to 007 can be
changed to 5 V input.)
Maximum input rating 26.4 VDC
Input voltage 24 VDC, 5.3 mA 5 VDC, 1.0 mA
Minimum ON voltage 19V 4.5V
Minimum OFF current
2mA 2.5V
(voltage)
Common method COM is shared inside.
10 ms typical
10 µs when HSP instruction is used
Input time constant Variable in 7 steps from 10 µs to
10 ms while special utility relay 2813 is ON
(Set by DM1940)
Interrupt input response 10 µs (representative)
High-speed counter
30 kHz (24V± 10%) (duty: 50%)
input response
* For 5V±10%, refer to the 5 V mode response frequency characteristic chart (representa-
tive example).
5 V mode response frequency characteristic chart
(representative example)
Response 40
frequency 35
30
(kHz)
25
20
15
10
5
0
4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
Input voltage (V)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 8 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units
■ Output specifications (relay output):

KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AR/DR, KV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR
Item Specifications
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load 2 A (inductive load)
Visual KV
4 A (resistive load)
Series
Peak load current 5A
Rising operating time
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
Falling operating time
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Common method Each common terminal is independent.
Electrical service life: 100,000 times or more (20 times/min)
Relay service life
Mechanical service life: 20,000,000 times or more
Relay replacement Not allowed
■ Output specifications (transistor output):

KV-10AT(P)/DT(P), KV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and
KV-40AT(P)/DT(P)
Item Specifications
30 VDC 11
Rated load 0.1 A (500 to 502)
0.3 A (others)
0.2 A (500 to 502)
Peak load current
1 A (others)
Maximum voltage at OFF 30 VDC
Leak current in OFF
100 µA or less
status
Residual voltage in ON
0.8 V or less
status
Rising operation time 10 µs or less (500 to 502) (at 5 to 100 mA)
(OFF ➞ ON) 20 µs or less (others) (at 10 to 300 mA)
Falling operation time 10 µs or less (500 to 502) (at 5 to 100 mA)
(ON ➞ OFF) 100 µs or less (others) (at 10 to 300 mA)
Common method 1 common
Output frequency 50 kHz (500 to 502)
Built-in serial resistance 1.6 KΩ 1/2W (R500 to R502)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 9 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.4 KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit)

This section describes the name and function of each part, the I/O specifications, the
terminal layout, circuit diagrams, and dimensions of the KV-10x x.
Visual KV
1.4.1 Part Names and Functions

Series
1. Input terminal block

9. Input voltage
selector switch
Provided on side
24V
INPUT
000 001 002 003 004 005 IN

C1 C2
4. Input indicator lamps
VOLT
0ch
5V
0 1 2 3 4 5
5. Output indicator lamps

6. Connector (provided on side)
7. Access Window
10. Communication 8. Setting keys

port A KV-10AR 0 1 2 3
5ch
501 502
OUT
3. Power input terminal 24V-OUT-OV 500 C3 C4 503
1 (Power input terminals for AC

power types are provided on
the lower side.)
L ~ N
2. Output terminal block

AC100V-240V 0.4A
50/60Hz
No. Name Function

Input terminal 24 VDC input terminal block (000 to 005 can be changed to 5 V
1
block input).
Output terminal block. Pulse output function is built in 500 to
Output terminal 502 (in transistor output type only).
2
block A 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in R502 (to connect a
motor driver).
Power input
terminal Supplies 24 VDC.
(KV-10DR/DT(P))
3
Power output Supplies 100 to 240 VAC to the power input terminals on the
terminal lower side of the unit, and allows the service power supply to
(KV-10AR/AT(P)) be taken from the 24 VDC terminal.
Input indicator
4 Indicate input status. Each lamp lights up at ON.
lamps
Output indicator
5 Indicate output status. Each lamp lights up at ON.
lamps
Connector
6 Used to connect an expansion unit
(provided on side)
Used to refer to and change the current and set values of
timers and counters as well as the contents of data memories.
7 Access Window The backlight color indicates the operation status.
Lit in green: RUN mode Lit in red: PROGRAM mode
Flashing red: Error status
Used to refer to and change current values, etc. while referring
8 Setting keys
to the Access Window.
Input voltage Changes the input voltage of the basic unit.
9
selector switch : 24 V input : 5 V input
Communication RJ-11 Modular connector for connecting a personal computer,
10
port A handheld programmer, or operator interface panel.
➮ For more about the Access Window, refer to "Chapter 3. Access Window" (p.1-79).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 10 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams

KV-10AR/DR (Relay output type)
■ Terminal layout drawing
Visual KV
Series
000 001 002 003 004 005
C1 C2
501 502
24V 0V 500 C3 C4 503

11
■ Input circuit diagram
Internal circuit
4.3KΩ Photocoupler
insulation
Internal circuit
000 to 005
24V/5V
selector
circuit
C1
C2
C2 C1
005 004 003 002 001 000
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue

Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 11 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

■ Output circuit diagram
Internal circuit
500
501 to 503
Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
C3
C4
501 502
• C3 and C4 are each independent.
24V 0V 500 C3 C4 503
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 12 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

KV-10AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type)

000 001 002 003 004 005
Visual KV
Series
C1 C2
501 502
24V 0V 500 C3 C4 503
11
Internal circuit
4.3KΩ Photocoupler
insulation
Internal circuit
000 to 005
24V/5V
selector
circuit
C1
C2
C2 C1
005 004 003 002 001 000
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue

Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 13 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
501 502
24V 0V 500 C3 R502 503
* For KV-10ATP/DTP
NPN PNP
Insulating 1.6kΩ 1 2 W C3
power
1
Internal circuit
supply R502
Internal 500 to 503

circuit
500 to 503
Insultating
power R502
C3 supply 1.6 kΩ 1 2 W
• 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in R502 • 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in R502
(to connect a motor driver). (to connect a motor driver).
1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P))
L ~ N
L N
AC100V-240V 0.4A
50/60Hz
FG
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 14 08.3.11, 11:09 AM

1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON

Ratio and Ambient Temperature
If the number of I/O points which turn ON at the same time exceeds the
CAUTION specifications range, the unit may be damaged.
Visual KV
Series
The graphs below show the relationship between the ambient temperature and
the continuous simultaneous ON ratio.
Load current L:
(AC power output (Individual current consumption (Service power (Expansion
– = +
capacity at 400 mA) when KV-D20 is connected) output current) unit current
consumption)
Derating when KV-10AR is mounted upward Derating when KV-10AR is mounted in front
110 39 41 42 47 48
(102.2) (105.8) (107.6) 44 (111.2) 110
(116.0)(118.4)
100 100
46 (114.8) 45 (113)
Continuous simultaneous
L=0 L=Max.
90 90
L=1/2Max. L=0,1/2Max. 86%

80 80 79%
L=Max. L=Max.
ON ratio (%)
70 70
ON ratio (%)
63% 64%
60 60
L=0
50 50
L=1/2Max.
40 38% 40
L=Max.
30 30
25%
20 Individual unit 20 Individual unit
10 With expansion unit 10 With expansion unit
0 0
30
(86)
35
(95)
40
(104)
45
(113)
49
(120.2)50
(122)
30
(86)
35
(95)
40
(104)
45
(113)
50
(122)
11
Ambient temperature [°C] Ambient temperature [°C]
[°F] for figure in ( ). [°F] for figure in ( ).
Derating when KV-10AT(P) is mounted upward Derating when KV-10AT(P) is mounted in front
41 43 46 47 110
110
(105.8)(109.4)(114.8)(116.6) 100
100
L=0 90
90
L=1/2Max. 86% 80
80
ON ratio (%)
L=Max. 70
70
ON ratio (%)
68%
60
60 60%
L=0 50
50
40
40
30
30 30%
20 Individual unit
20 Individual unit
10 With expansion unit
10 With expansion unit
0
0 30 35 40 45 50
30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
Derating when KV-10DR is mounted upward Derating when KV-10DR is mounted in front
110 110
45 (113) 48 (118.4)
100 100
90 90
80 80 80%
70 70
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
60 58% 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
Derating when KV-10DT(P) is mounted upward Derating when KV-10DT(P) is mounted in front
110 110
49 (120.2)
100 100
90
88% 90
80 80
70 70
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 15 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.4.5 Dimensions
■ Main unit
Front view Side view (KV-10AR/AT(P)) Side view (KV-10DR/DT(P))

24.5
Visual KV
Series
9.9
35.4 90 35.4 90
17
4.1
3.8 4 3.8 4
55 22 70 22 43
Bottom view (KV-10AR/AT(P))
17.5
1
20.5
■ Metal fixture for screw tightening
4-ø5.0
(Mounting hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
99 111
(2 positions)
40
54 t=2
* Two M3.5 countersunk-head screws are

included for mounting the main unit.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 16 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
Series
9. Input voltage selector switch

Provided on side 24V
INPUT
C1 001 003 005 007 009 IN

000 002 004 006 008
VOLT
0ch
5V
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6. Connector
(provided on side)
10. Communication
7. Access Window
port A
11. Communication 8. Setting keys

0 1 2 3 4 5
port B KV-16AR
5ch
500 501 502 504
OUT
3. Power input terminal 24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 503 505
(Power input terminals for

AC power type are provided
on the lower side.)
11
L ~ N
AC100V-240V
0.5A 50/60Hz
No. Name Function

Input terminal 24 VDC input terminal block
1
block (000 to 007 can be changed to 5 V input).
2
motor driver).
Power input
(KV-24DR/DT(P))
3
Input indicator
lamps
Output indicator
lamps
Connector
6 Used to connect an expansion unit
(provided on side)
8 Setting keys
9
10
11
port B handheld programmer, or operator interface panel.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 17 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
Series
C1 001 003 005 007 009
000 002 004 006 008
500 501 502 504
24V 0V C3 C4 503 505
1
Internal circuit
008 006 004 002 000
009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
Circuit configuration of inputs 000 to 007 Circuit configuration of inputs 008 to 009
Photocoupler Photocoupler
4.3KΩ 4.3KΩ
insulation insulation
Internal circuit
008 to 009
Internal circuit
000 to 007
24V/5V
selector 510Ω
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 18 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit 500 to 501

502 to 505
Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
C3
C4
500 501 502 504

24V 0V C3 C4 503 505
11
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 19 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 001 003 005 007 009

Visual KV
Series
000 002 004 006 008
24V 500 501 502 504
24V 0V C3 R502 503 505

1
Internal circuit
008 006 004 002 000
009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
4.3KΩ 4.3 kΩ insulation
insulation
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
000 to 007 008 to 009
24 V/5 V 510 Ω
selector
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 20 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
24V 500 501 502 504
24V 0V C3 R502 503 505
* For KV-16ATP/DTP
NPN PNP
Insulating 1.6kΩ 1 2 W C3
power
Internal circuit
supply R502
Internal 500 to 505 11

circuit
500 to 505
Insultating
power R502
• A current limiting resistor 1.6 kΩ is built in R502 • A current limiting resistor 1.6 kΩ is built in R502
(to connect a motor driver). (to connect a motor driver).
L ~ N
L N
AC100V-240V
0.5A 50/60Hz
FG
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 21 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


If the number of I/O points which turn ON at the same time exceeds the speci-
CAUTION fications range, the unit may be damaged.
Visual KV
Series
The graphs below show the relationship between the ambient temperature and the
continuous simultaneous ON ratio.
Load current L:
– = +
consumption)
Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V
110 36 37 44 47 49
110
(96.8)(98.6) 40 (104) (111.2) (116.6) (120.2)
100 100
35 (95) 39 41 (105.8) 46 (114.8)
L=0 L=0, 1/2Max.
90 (102.2) 90 91%
L=1/2Max. L=0, 1/2Max.

80 80
L=Max.
ON ratio (%)
L=Max. 75%
70 70
66%
ON ratio (%)
L=Max.
60 60
L=0
50 50% 50 50%
L=1/2Max. 44%
40 38% 40
L=Max.
30 30
20 Individual unit 18% 20 Individual unit
13%
1 0
30 35 40 45
49
(120.2) 50
0
30
(86)
35
(95)
40
(104)
45
(113)
50
(122)
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V
36 37 44 47 49
110 (96.8)(98.6) 40 (104)
110 (111.2) (116.6)(120.2)
100 100
35 (95) 39 41(105.8) L=0 46 (114.8)

L=0, 1/2Max. 91%
90 (102.2) 90
L=1/2Max. L=0, 1/2Max.
80 80
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
L=Max. L=Max. 75%

70 70
L=Max. 66%
60 60
L=0
50 50% 50 50%
L=1/2Max. 44%
40 38% 40
L=Max.
30 30
13%
0 0
49 30 35 40 45 50
30 35 40 45 (120.2) 50 (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
110 110
43 (109.4) 47 (116.6) 44 (111.2) 49 (120.2)
100 100
93%
90 90
80 80
75%
70 70
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
60 60 58%
50 50% 50
40 40
30 30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
110 110
43 (109.4) 47 (116.6) 44 (111.2) 49 (120.2)
100 100
93%
90 90
80 80
75%
ON ratio (%)
70
ON ratio (%)
70
60 60 58%
50 50% 50
40 40
30 30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 22 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.5.5 Dimensions
■ Main unit
24.5
Visual KV
Series
13.3
35.4 90 35.4 90
17
4.1
3.8 4 3.8 4
65 22 70 22 43
Bottom view of AC type
17.5
11
20.5
6-ø5.0
(Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole
99 111
(2 positions)
31
50
64 t=2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 23 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV

Series
9. Input voltage
selector switch
Provided on side
24V
INPUT
C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015 IN

000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014 4. Input indicator
0ch
lamps
VOLT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5V
5. Output indicator
lamps
6. Connector
10. Communication (provided on side)
port A
7. Access Window
11. Communication
port B KV-24AR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8. Setting keys
5ch
500 501 502 503 504 506
24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 C5 C6 505 507 OUT
3. Power input terminal
(Power input terminals for AC
power type are provided on
1 the lower side.)
L ~ N
AC100V-240V
0.6A 50/60Hz
No. Name Function

1
block input).
2
motor driver).
Power input
(KV-24DR/DT(P))
3
Input indicator
lamps
Output indicator
lamps
Connector
6 Used to connect an expansion unit.
(provided on side)
8 Setting keys
9
10
11
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 24 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015
Series
000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014
500 501 502 503 504 506
24V 0V C3 C4 C5 C6 505 507
11
Internal circuit
014 012 010 008 006 004 002 000
015 013 011 009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
4.3KΩ 4.3KΩ insulation
insulation
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
000 to 007 008 to 015
24V/5V
selector 510Ω
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 25 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
500 501 502 503 504 506
24V 0V C3 C4 C5 C6 505 507
1
500
501
502 to 503
504 to 507
C3
C4
C5
C6
• C3 to C6 are each independent.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 26 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015
Visual KV
000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014
Series
V1 V2 500 501 502 503 504 506
24V 0V C3 R500 R501 R502 V3 505 507
11
Internal circuit
014 012 010 008 006 004 002 000
015 013 011 009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
4.3 kΩ insulation 4.3 kΩ insulation
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
000 to 007 008 to 015
24V/5V
selector 510Ω
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 27 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
V1 V2 500 501 502 503 504 506
24V 0V C3 R500 R5O1 R502 V3 505 507
* For KV-24ATP/DTP
NPN PNP
1 Insulating
power
1.6 kΩ 1
2W R500 C3
Internal circuit
supply to R502
Internal 500
to 507
circuit
500 to 507
Insultating
power R500 to R502
• A 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in each of • A 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in each of
R500 to R502 (to connect a motor driver). R500 to R502 (to connect a motor driver).
• V1 to V3 are short-circuited inside (so they can • V1 to V3 are short-circuited inside (so they can
be used as a relay terminal block). be used as a relay terminal block).
L ~ N
L N
AC100V-240V
0.6A 50/60Hz
FG
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 28 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


If the number of I/O points which turn ON at the same time exceeds the speci-
CAUTION fications range, the unit may be damaged.
Visual KV
Series
Load current L:

– = +
consumption)
110 110
29°C 32°C 33°C 37°C 40°C
100 100
31°C 34°C L=0 to Max.

L=0
90 90
L=1/2Max.
80 80
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
L=Max.
70 70
L=0 to Max.
60 60
L=0 56%
50 50
L=1/2Max. 44%
40 40
L=Max.
30 30
11
10 With expansion unit 11% 10 With expansion unit
6%
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
Ambient temperature (°C) Ambient temperature (°C)
110 110
29°C 31°C 36°C 37°C 43°C 44°C 48°C
100 100
35°C 38°C L=0, 1/2Max. 40°C

L=0
90 90 88%
L=1/2Max. L=Max.
80 80
L=0, 1/2Max.
ON ratio (%)
L=Max.
ON ratio (%)
70 70 72%
L=Max. 63%
60 60
L=0
50 50 50%
L=1/2Max. 45%
40 38% 40
L=Max.
30 30
6%
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
110 110
30°C 35°C 37°C 43°C
100 100
90 90
80 80
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
70 70 67%
60 60
50 50
40 42% 44%
40
30 30
20 Individual unit 20
16% Individual unit
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
110 110
47°C 47°C
100 100
90 91% 91%
90
80 79% 80 79%
ON ratio (%)
70
ON ratio (%)
70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 29 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.6.5 Dimensions
■ Main unit
31
Visual KV
Series
5.2
35.4 90 35.4 90
20.5
3.8 4 3.8 4
80 22 70 22 43
17.5
1
20.5
6-ø0.5
(Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
99 111
(2 positions)
48
66
79 t=2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 30 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
Series
1. Input 4. Input 5. Output 6. Connector
terminal indicator indicator (provided
block lamps lamps on side)
9. Input voltage selector
switch
Provided on side
24V
INPUT
C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015 101 103 105 107 IN
000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014 100 102 104 106
VOLT
0ch
5V
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1ch
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10.Communication
port A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11.Communication 5ch
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
port B KV-40AR
3. Power input terminal 24V-OUT-OV

500
C3
501
C4
502
C5
503
C6
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
C7
C8
512
513
514
515 OUT 11
(Power input terminals for
AC power type are provided
on the lower side.)
L ~ N
AC100V-240V
2. Output terminal block 7. Access Window 8. Setting keys
0.7A 50/60Hz
No. Name Function

1
block input).
2
block 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in R502 (to connect a
motor driver).
Power input
(KV-40DR/DT(P))
3
Input indicator
lamps
Output indicator
lamps
Connector
6 Used to connect an expansion unit.
(provided on side)
8 Setting keys
9
10
11
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 31 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
Series
C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015 101 103 105 107
000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014 100 102 104 106
500 501 502 503 504 506 508 510 C7 512 514
24V 0V C3 C4 C5 C6 505 507 509 511 C8 513 515
1
Internal circuit
106 104 102 100 014 012 010 008 006 004 002 000
107 105 103 101 015 013 011 009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
4.3KΩ insulation 4.3KΩ insulation
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
000 to 007 008 to 107
24V/5V
selector 510Ω
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 32 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
500 501 502 503 504 506 508 510 C7 512 514
24V 0V C3 C4 C5 C6 505 507 509 511 C8 513 515
11
500
501
Internal circuit
502 to 503
504 to 507
508 to 511
512 to 515
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 33 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 001 003 005 007 009 011 013 015 101 103 105 107
Visual KV
000 002 004 006 008 010 012 014 100 102 104 106
Series
V1 V2 500 501 502 503 504 506 508 510 512 514
24V 0V C3 R500 R501 R502 V3 505 507 509 511 513 515

1
Internal circuit
106 104 102 100 014 012 010 008 006 004 002 000
107 105 103 101 015 013 011 009 007 005 003 001 C1
Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
type
Sensor
4.3KΩ insulation 4.3KΩ insulation
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
000 to 007 008 to 07
24V/5V
selector 510Ω
circuit
C1 C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 34 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
V1 V2 500 501 502 503 504 506 508 510 512 514
24V 0V C3 R500 R5O1 R502 V3 505 507 509 511 513 515
* For KV-40ATP/DTP
NPN PNP
Insulating 1.6 kΩ 1 2 W R500 C3
power
Internal circuit
supply to R502
500
Internal to 515
circuit
Insultating
500 to 515
R500 to R502
11
power
C3 supply 1.6 kΩ 1
2W
• A 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in each • A 1.6 kΩ current limiting resistor is built in each
of R500 to R502 (to connect a motor driver). of R500 to R502 (to connect a motor driver).
• V1 to V3 are short-circuited inside (so they can • V1 to V3 are short-circuited inside (so they can
be used as a relay terminal block). be used as a relay terminal block).
L ~ N
L N
AC100V-240V
0.7A 50/60Hz
FG
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 35 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


If the number of I/O points which turn ON at the same time exceeds the specifi-
CAUTION cations range, the unit may be damaged.
Visual KV
Series
Load current L:
– = +
consumption)
Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V
33 34
110 (91.4)(93.2) 110 39 40 44 45
(102.2)(104) (111.2) (113)
100 35 (95) 100
32 (89.6)
37 (98.6) 41 L=0
90 90 (105.8)
L=1/2Max. Max
80 L=1/2Max.
80
L=Max. 75%
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
70 70
L=0 70%
60 60
L=0 55%
50 50
40 L=0
L=1/2Max. 40
30 33%
L=Max. 27% 30
L=1/2Max.
L=Max. 16%
6% 8%
0
1 30
(86)
35
(95)
40
(104) (113)
48
45 (118.4) 49
(120.2)
0
30
(86)
35
(95)
40
(104)
45
(113)
50
(122)
Supply voltage: 100 to 240 V 45
110 33 34 110 41 43 (113) 46 48
27 (80.6) (91.4)(93.2) (105.8)(109.4) (114.8)(118.4)
100 31 35 (95)
100
44
90 (87.8) 90 (111.2) 90%
L=0
80 80 83%
L=1/2Max. L=0 75%
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
70 70
L=Max. L=1/2Max.
60 60
L=Max.
50 50 50%
L=0 L=0
40 38% 40 41%
L=1/2Max. L=1/2Max.
30 27% 30
L=Max.
L=Max.
0 49 0
49
30 35 40 45 (120.2) 50 30 35 40 45 (120.2) 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
110 110
33 (91.4) 36 (96.8) 42 (107.6) 46 (114.8)
100
100
90 90
80 80 80%
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
70 70
60 60 60%
53%
50 50
40 40
34% 30
30
0 0
30 35 40 45 50 30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
110 110
36 (96.8) 40 (104) 44 (111.2) 48 (118.4)
100 100
90 90 87%
80 80
ON ratio (%)
ON ratio (%)
70 70
60 60 62.5%
54%
50 50
40 40
30 30% 30
0 49
0
30 35 40 45 (120.2) 50
30 35 40 45 50
(86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 36 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.7.5 Dimensions
■ Main unit

31
Visual KV
Series
20.2
35.4 90 35.4 90
20.5
3.8 4 3.8 4
110 22 70 22 43
17.5
11
20.5
4-ø5.0
(Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
(2 positions) 99 111
78
109 t=2
* Two M3.5 countersunk-head screws

are included for mounting the main unit.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 37 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.8 KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit)

This section describes the name and function of each part, the input specifications,
the terminal layout, circuit diagrams, and dimensions of three types of expansion
input units.
Visual KV
Series

C1 1 3 IN
0 2
0 1
3. READY/ERROR
indicator lamp
4. Expansion cable ch
5. Connector (provided on side)
KV-E4X
READY
/ERROR 2 3
2 Input indicator lamps

V2 V4
V1 V3 V5 IN
No. Name Function

Input terminal
1 24 VDC input terminal block
block
Input indicator
lamps
Indicates operation status of expansion input unit.
READY/ERROR
3 Lit: Normal operation Flashing: Communication error
indicator lamp
Not lit: Power not connected
Used to connect a basic unit or another expansion unit.
A standard expansion cable approximately 60 mm in length is
4 Expansion cable provided.
For extensions, use the optional 300 mm expansion cable
(OP-35361).
5 Connector Used to connect an expansion unit.
1.8.2 Input Specifications

Model KV-E4X KV-E8X KV-E16X
Unit type 4-I/O input 8-I/O input 16-I/O input
Number of inputs 4 8 16
External connection
Terminal block
method
Input voltage 24 VDC, 5.3 mA
Minimum ON voltage 19 V
Maximum OFF current 2 mA
Input impedance 4.3 kΩ
Common method 4 points/common
Input time constant
For both rising (OFF ➞ ON) and falling (ON ➞ OFF) operations,
(Changed in two steps
10 ms: 10 ms ± 20%
by special utility relays
10 µs: 10 µs ± 20%
2609 to 2612)
➮ For more about the general specifications, refer to "General Specifications" (p.1-4).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 38 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.8.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams

KV-E4X (4-I/O expansion input unit)
Visual KV
Series
C1 1 3
0 2
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5
11
Sensor
Photocoupler
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
4.3KΩ
insulation
type
type
type
type
Internal circuit
0 to 3
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
510Ω
Black
Black
Black
Black
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
C1
• V1 to V5 are short-circuited inside

(so they can be used as a relay
C1 1 3 terminal block).
0 2
Internal circuit
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 39 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 1 3 V2
Visual KV
0 2 V1
Series
4 6 V3
C2 5 7 V4

1
Sensor
Photocoupler
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
4.3 kΩ insulation
type
type
type
type
C1
Internal circuit
C2
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Black
Black
Black
Black
510 Ω
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
0 to 3
4 to 7

C1 1 3
V2 • V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited
inside respectively (so they can be used as
V1
relay terminal blocks).
0 2
Internal circuit
4 6
V3
C2 5 7
V4
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
Sensor
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 40 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

KVHKA Chap 01.p65
Blue Blue
C3
C1
Three-wire Three-wire
type Brown Brown type
8
0
Black Black
Blue Blue
41
9
Black Black
Blue Blue
10
Black Black
Blue Blue
11
Black Black
Blue Blue
Sensor
C2
C4
Sensor
Internal circuit
12
Black Black
Blue Blue
C3
C1
5
8
0
13
Black Black
9
1
Blue Blue
2
10

3
6
11
14
Black Black
Blue Blue
C2

4
7
12
15
Black Black
5
C4 13
6
14
7
15
4 to 7
0 to 3
12 to 15
8 to 11
C4
C3
C2
C1
4.3KΩ
510Ω
08.3.11, 11:10 AM
Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications
insulation
Photocoupler
Internal circuit
1-41
11
Visual KV
Series
1.8.4 Dimensions
■ Main unit
Front view Front view Front view Side view

(KV-E4x) (KV-E8x) (KV-E16x)
Visual KV
Series
35.4 90
38 45 65 4 4
43.5
4-ø5.0
1 (Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
99 111
(2 positions)
25
38 t=2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 42 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.9 KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output Unit)
1.9 KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P)
(Expansion Output Unit)
This section describes the name and function of each part, the output specifications,
Visual KV
the terminal layout, circuit diagrams, and dimensions of three types of expansion
Series
input units.

C1 1 3 OUT
0 2
0 1
2.Output indicator lamps
3.READY/ERROR indicator lamp
5.Connector (provided on side)

4.Expansion cable ch
KV-E4R
11
READY
/ERROR 2 3
2.Output indicator lamps
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5 OUT
1.9.2 Output Specifications

No. Name Function
Output terminal block.
Output terminal
1 Transistor output: 30 VDC
block
Relay output: 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Output indicator
lamps
Indicates operation status of expansion output unit.
READY/ERROR
indicator lamp
Not lit: Power not connected
(OP-35361).
5 Connector Allows to connect an expansion unit.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 43 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type)

Model KV-E4R KV-E8R KV-E16R
4-I/O relay 8-I/O relay 16-I/O relay
Unit type
output output output
Number of outputs 4 8 16
Visual KV
Series
Output type Relay

External connection
Terminal block
method
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load voltage
2 A (inductive load) 4 A (resistive load)
2A/point (inductive load)
Rated output current
4 A/point (resistive load) 4A/common
ON resistance 50 mΩ or less
Rising operation time
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
Falling operation time
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Electrical: 100,000 times or more (20 times/min)
Relay service life
Mechanical: 20,000,000 times or more
1 ➮ For more about the general specifications, refer to "General Specifications" (p.1-4).
KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP)]

Model KV-E4T KV-E8T(P) KV-E16T(P)
4-I/O transistor 8-I/O transistor 16-I/O transistor
Unit type
Output type Transistor (NPN/PNP)
External connection
Terminal block
method
Rated load voltage 30 VDC
Rated output current 0.5A/point (NPN), 0.3A/point (PNP)
Leak current in OFF
100 µA or less
status
0.8 V or less
status
Common method Shared inside
50 µs or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
250 µs or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 44 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


KV-E4R [4-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)]
Visual KV
Series
C1 1 3
0 2
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5
11
C1 1 3
0 2
Internal circuit
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5
0 to 3
Internal circuit
C1

terminal block).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 45 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

KV-E4T [4-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output type)]

C1 1 3
Visual KV
0 2
Series
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5

1
C1 1 3
0 2
Internal circuit
V2 V4
V1 V3 V5
Insulating
power
supply
Internal 0 to 3
circuit
C1

terminal block).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 46 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 1 3 V2
Visual KV
Series
0 2 V1
4 6 V3
C2 5 7 V4
■ Output circuit diagram 11
C1 1 3
V2
0 2
V1
Internal circuit
4 6 V3
C2 5 7 V4
0 to 3
Internal circuit

C1 • V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited inside
(so they can be used as relay terminal blocks).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 47 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

KV-E8T(P) [8-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output type)]

C1 1 3 V2
Visual KV
0 2 V1
Series
4 6 V3
C2 5 7 V4
1 *
C1 1 3 V2
0 2 V1
Internal circuit
4 6 V3
C2 5 7 V4
*
* For KV-E8TP
NPN PNP
Insulating
power C2
supply
C1
Internal circuit
0 to 7
Internal
circuit
0 to 7
C1 Insultating
power
C2 supply
• V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited inside • V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited inside

(so they can be used as relay terminal blocks). (so they can be used as relay terminal blocks).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 48 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 1 3 C2 5 7
Visual KV
0 2 4 6
Series
8 10 12 14
C3 9 11 C4 13 15
11
C1 1 3 C2 5 7
0 2 4 6
Internal circuit
8 10 12 14
C3 9 11 C4 13 15
0 to 3
4 to 7
Internal circuit
8 to 11
12 to15
C1
C2
C3 • C1 and C4 are each independent.
C4
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 49 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

KV-E16T(P) [16-I/O expansion input unit (transistor output)]

C1 1 3 C2 5 7
0 2 4 6
Visual KV
Series
8 10 12 14
C3 9 11 C4 13 15
1 * *
C1 1 3 C2 5 7
0 2 4 6
Internal circuit
8 10 12 14
C3 9 11 C4 13 15
* *
* For KV-E16TP
NPN PNP
Insulating C4
power C3
supply
C2
Internal 0 to 15 C1
Internal circuit
circuit
C1 0 to 15
C2 Insultating
C3 power
supply
C4
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 50 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.9.4 Dimensions
■ Main unit
Visual KV
(KV-E4x) (KV-E8 x) (KV-E16 x)
Series
35.4 90
38 45 65 4 4
43.5
4-ø5.0 11
(Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
25
38 t=2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 51 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.10 KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit)

terminal layout, circuit diagrams, and dimensions of two types of expansion I/O
units.
Visual KV
Series

C1 X1 X3 V2 IN
X0 X2 V1
0 1 2 3
4. READY/ERROR indicator lamp
6. Expansion cable ch
KV-E4XR
7. Connector
READY
/ERROR 0 1 2 3
1 C2
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
V3
V4 OUT
No. Name Function

Input terminal
1 24 VDC input terminal block
block
Output terminal block.
Output terminal
2 Transistor output: 30 VDC
block
Relay output: 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Input indicator
lamps
Indicates operation status of expansion I/O unit.
READY/ERROR
indicator lamp
Extinguished: Power not connected
Output indicator
lamps
(OP-35361).
7 Connector Allows to connect an expansion unit.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 52 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.10.2 Input Specifications

Item Specifications
External connection
Terminal block
method
Visual KV
Series
Input time constant
10 ms: 10 ms ± 20%
10 µs: 10 µs ± 20%
2609 to 2612)
1.10.3 Output Specifications

KV-E4XR (Relay output type)
Item Specifications 11
Output type Relay
External connection
Terminal block
method
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load voltage
2 A (inductive load) 4 A(resistive load)
2A/point (inductive load) 4A/point (resistive load)
4A/common
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Relay service life
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type)

Item Specifications
External connection
Terminal block
method
Leak current in OFF
100 µA or less
status
0.8 V or less
status
50 µs or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
250 µs or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 53 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


Visual KV
Series
C1 X1 X3 V2
X0 X2 V1
Y0 Y2 V3
C2 Y1 Y3 V4
1
Internal circuit
V1 X2 X0
V2 X3 X1 C1
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
Sensor
Photocoupler
4.3KΩ insulation
Internal circuit
X0 to X3
510Ω
C1
• V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited inside

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 54 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
Y0 Y2 V3
C2 Y1 Y3 V4
Y0 to Y3
Internal circuit
11
C2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 55 08.3.11, 11:10 AM


C1 X1 X3 V2
Visual KV
Series
X0 X2 V1
Y0 Y2 V3
C2 Y1 Y3 V4
1 ■ Input circuit diagram
Internal circuit
V1 X2 X0
V2 X3 X1 C1
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
Three-wire
type
type
type
type
Sensor
Photocoupler
4.3KΩ insulation
Internal circuit
X0 to X3
510Ω
C1
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 56 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Internal circuit
Visual KV
Series
Y0 Y2 V3
C2 Y1 Y3 V4
* For KV-E4XTP
NPN PNP
Insulating
power
Internal
supply
Y0 to Y3
Internal circuit C2
11
circuit
Y0 to Y3
C2 Insultating
power
supply
• V1 to V2 and V3 to V4 are short-circuited inside (so they can be used as relay terminal blocks).
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 57 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.10.5 Dimensions
■ Main unit
Visual KV
Front view Side view

Series
35.4 90
45 4 4
43.5
4-ø5.0
1 (Mounting
hole)
Main unit
mounting hole*
25
38 t=2

KVHKA Chap 01.p65 58 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.11 KV-D20 (Operator interface panel)
1.11 KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel)

This section describes the name and function of each part, the general specifica-
tions, the functional specifications, and dimensions of the operator interface panel.
Visual KV
Series
1 Customized indicator lamps
1 2 3 4
5 Communication port
(provided on rear face)
2 Liquid crystal
display screen
6 Bit guide 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1 F2 F3 F4
11
3. Customized switches 4. Setting operation switches
N o. N ame Funct ion

Assigned to special utility relays as follows.
Cust omiz ed
1 Lamp 1: 2504 Lamp 2: 2505 Lamp 3: 2506 Lamp 4: 2507
indicat or lamps
When a relay turns ON, the corresponding LED becomes lit.
Liquid cry st al Displays ladder comments (up to 20 characters) and all devices
2
display screen in KV Series.
Assigned to special utility relays as follows.
Cust omiz ed
3 F 1: 2500 F 2: 2501 F 3: 2502 F 4: 2503
swit ch
When a switch is turned on, the corresponding relay turns ON.
S et t ing operat ion
4 Changes screen display.
swit ches
RJ-11 Modular connector.
Used for communication between KV basic units while
Communicat ion
5 connected to the basic unit's communication port with an
port
accessory cable (OP-26487). This port also supplies driving
power for the KV-D20.
Shows the corresponding number of each bit on the KV-I/O
6 B it guide monitor screen, the operator screen, or the 8-bit ON/OFF
indication in the device mode.
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 59 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.11.2 General Specifications

Item Specifications
Supply voltage Supplied from the communication port of the KV (5 VDC)
Current consumption 5 VDC, 180 mA max. (60 mA max. when converted for 24 V)
Visual KV
Series
Ambient temperature 0 to +50°C (32 to122°F), No freezing

Ambient storage
-20 to +70°C (-4 to 158°F), No freezing
temperature
Withstand voltage (Between power terminal and I/O terminal as well as between
entire external terminals and case)
1,500 Vp-p or more, pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns
Noise immunity (by noise simulator)
Conforms to EN standard (EN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-6)
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 1.5 mm, 2 hours in each of X,
Vibration
Y and Z axis directions
50 MΩ or more
Insulation resistance (Between power terminal and I/O terminal as well as between
Operating atmosphere No excessive dust or corrosive gases.
Main unit: Approx. 160 g
1 Weight Communication cable: Approx. 60 g
Mounting fixture: 30 g (2 pieces)
Enclosure rating Built-in panel, IP-65F only for the front operation panel
1.11.3 Functional Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of connectable
1 per basic unit
units
Display screen Blue-negative type backlighted LCD, 20 digits x 4 lines
Character size 2.95 x 4.75 mm (5 x 7 dots)
4 switches assigned to special utility relays
Customized switches
F1: 2500 F2: 2501 F3: 2502 F4: 2503
Setting operation switch
Customized indicator Four red LEDs assigned to special utility relays
lamps Lamp 1: 2504 Lamp 2: 2505 Lamp 3: 2506 Lamp 4: 2507
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 60 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

1.11.4 Dimensions
■ Main unit
Panel thickness:
1.0 to 3.0 mm
Visual KV
Series
75 67
112 5 34
133
(including mounting fixtures)
■ Panel cut size
145 11
+1
68 0
+1
105 0 83
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 61 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Visual KV
Series
KVHKA Chap 01.p65 62 08.3.11, 11:10 AM

Visual KV
Series
Chapter 2
System Installation
This chapter describes the installation and connection of each Visual KV Series
unit as well as system maintenance.
2.1 Installation Environment ......................................................... 1-64

2.1.1 Installation Environment ........................................................................ 1-64
2.1.2 Installation Position ............................................................................... 1-65
2.1.3 Installation Procedure ........................................................................... 1-66
2.1.4 Cautions on Wiring for Each Unit .......................................................... 1-67
2.1.5 Contact Protection ................................................................................. 1-69
2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units .................... 1-70
2.2.1 Visual KV Series Expansion Units ........................................................ 1-70
2.2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units ..................................... 1-71
2.2.3 Confirming the Connection Settings of Expansion Units ....................... 1-74
2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Units and
the Basic Unit ........................................................................................ 1-77
2.3 Inspection and Maintenance ................................................... 1-78
2.3.1 Inspection .............................................................................................. 1-78
2.3.2 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 1-78
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 63 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.1 Installation Environment

This section describes cautions with the environment in which each unit is installed
and the installation position inside the panel.
Visual KV
Series
2.1.1 Installation Environment

Never install a unit in the following locations:
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight

• Locations whose ambient temperature is outside the allowable range of 0 to
+50°C
• Locations whose ambient humidity is outside the allowable range of 35 to 85%
RH
• Locations subject to drastic temperature change where condensation may occur
• Locations with corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations with excessive dust, salt, iron powder, or soot
• Locations subject to direct vibrations and impacts
• Locations subject to splashes of water, oil, chemicals, etc.
• Locations where a strong magnetic or electrical field is generated
2 Units are made of synthetic resin. If the unit surface touches a solvent with a
CAUTION strong dissolving force, it could melt. Keep such solvents away from the units.
1-64 Chapter 2 System Installation
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 64 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.1.2 Installation Position

■ Installation direction
When attaching a unit inside a panel, install the unit so that the front face (equipped
with the Access Window, communication ports, etc.) faces front or upwards.
Visual KV
Series
Front installation Installation on ceiling
Correct Incorrect
Upward installation * Vertical installation
Correct Incorrect
12
* Upward installation does not
comply with CE marking.
■ Distance between adjacent panels/equipment

When installing a unit, keep the distances shown below between the panel or
equipment so that the power supply can release heat.
20 mm
10 mm
Unit
20 mm
Note 1: If the temperature inside the panel exceeds 50°C, which is specified as the
maximum ambient operating temperature, then install heat exchangers, etc. to
reduce the temperature.
Note 2: Ensure sufficient ventilation space so that the power supply can release
heat.
Note 3: Never install a unit just above any equipment which generates a lot of heat.
Chapter 2 System Installation

1-65
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 65 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.1.3 Installation Procedure

This section describes how to attach a connected unit directly to a panel, to a DIN
rail, or to a DIN rail with an expansion unit spacer.
■ Attaching a unit directly to a panel

Visual KV
Series
Attach the metal fixture for screw tightening to each

KV Series unit using the countersunk-head screws
through the countersunk holes. Mount the fixture
directly to the panel.
■ Attaching a unit to a DIN rail

Hang an upper claw of a Visual KV Series basic unit
to the upper side of the DIN rail, and press the basic
unit onto the DIN rain until a click sound is heard.
2 ■ Removing a unit from a DIN rail

Pull a lower claw of a Visual KV Series basic unit
downward from the front direction using a screw-
driver, and then remove the basic unit from the DIN
rail.
Expansion unit spacer

When an expansion unit spacer is attached to a Visual KV Series expansion unit, its
height becomes flush with an AC power type Visual KV Series basic unit.
The procedure to attach a Visual KV Series expansion unit to an expansion unit
spacer is the same as the procedure to attach a Visual KV Series unit to a DIN rail.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the Visual KV Series for DIN rail
mounting.
■ Dimensions for expansion unit spacers
OP-35342 OP-35343 OP-35344

Spacer for 4-I/O Spacer for 8-I/O Spacer for 16-I/O
expansion unit expansion unit expansion unit
ø4.0 ø4.0 ø4.0
42.8 42.8 42.8
28 35 55
38 45 65
25.3 4
66
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 66 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.1.4 Cautions on Wiring for Each Unit

This section describes cautions to keep in mind when wiring is performed for I/O
units.
Be sure to read this section before starting wiring.
Visual KV
Series
Wiring procedures for basic units
The wiring procedures for basic units are described below.
• Turn off the power before starting wiring.

CAUTION
• For the installation position, select a location whose ambient temperature
is 0 to +50°C, whose ambient humidity is 35 to 85% RH, and one which is
not subject to drastic temperature changes.
• If the 24 VDC + output terminal and the 24 VDC - output terminal are
switched, the power supply unit and connected units may be damaged.
Never switch them.
• Be sure that the sum of the current consumption of all connected units
does not exceed the output capacity of the service power supply. If the
system is operating in an overload status, the internal circuits may gener-
ate heat or be damaged. To recover from an overload status, disconnect
some of the connected units.
• Never connect the DC output of any other power supply, either in serial or
parallel, to the 24 VDC output terminals. If the DC output is connected, the
power supply unit may be damaged. 12
■ Wiring for an AC type basic unit
For an AC type basic unit, perform the wiring as shown in the figure below.
KV-16AR
C1 001 003 005 007 009 IN

000 002 004 006 008
0ch
EYENCE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
KV-16AR
5ch
500 501 502 504
24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 503 505 OUT
24 VDC service
power supply
(supplied from
Bottom outside)
Breaker
100 to
240 VAC
±10%
Insulating transformer,
noise filter, etc. Grounding
Note 1: Connect an insulating transformer (1:1) or noise filter to reduce line noise.
Note 2: Use twisted cables to reduce induction effects.
Note 3: When using a basic unit in a location with a lot of noise, the noise may be reduced
by completely grounding the basic unit.

1-67
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 67 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

■ Wiring for a DC type basic unit

For a DC type basic unit, perform the wiring as shown in the figure below.
KV-10DR
Visual KV
Series
000 001 002 003 004 005

IN
C1 C2
0ch
EYENCE 0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3
KV-10DR
5ch
501 502
24V-IN-OV 500 C3 C4 503 OUT
Breaker
24 VDC
external power
supply
Note: Connect the power supply to the power supply input terminals with 24 VDC
output, which offers a sufficient margin of power capacity. Usually, the sum of the
current consumption of all connected units multiplied by 1.5 or more is required for
the power capacity.
Cautions on wiring for I/O units

2 When performing wiring for an I/O unit, pay strict attention to the following contents.
• Separate input lines from output lines in wiring.
• If the wiring for power is located near I/O signal lines, a malfunction may occur
caused by the effects of a high voltage and large current.
• Keep I/O signal lines away from the power wiring by at least 100 mm.
• Separate 24 VDC I/O lines from 100 VAC and 200 VAC lines.
• When using pipes for wiring, make sure that the pipes are securely grounded.
■ When I/O signal lines cannot be separated from the wiring for power
In such a case, perform grounding on the KV side using batch-shielded cables.
(In some environments, grounding should be performed on the reverse side of the
KV.)
KV Shielded cable
Sensor
Input
RL
Output
24 VDC
Ground
Terminal
The terminal screws used are M3. When performing wiring with crimp-style termi-
nals, use the following ones.
Unit: mm
6.0 maximum 6.0 maximum
M3
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 68 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Cautions on grounding
Because the Visual KV Series is constructed to be sufficiently resistant to noise, it
can usually be used without being grounded. However, when the Visual KV Series is
used in an environment with a lot of noise, grounding is required. In such a case,
pay strict attention to the following contents.
Visual KV
Series
• Perform complete grounding for each individual unit. In this case, the ground
resistance should be 100 Ω or less.
• If individual grounding is not possible, perform common grounding. In this case,
the length of each grounding cable should be equal.
Recommended Acceptable Unacceptable
KV Other device KV Other device KV Other device
B
A B A
Complete grounding A=B A>B

A<B
2.1.5 Contact Protection

If inductive loads such as clutches, motors, and solenoids are used, a rush current
may flow when the load power supply is turned on, or a counter electromotive
voltage may be generated when the load power supply is shut down. The rush
12
current and the counter electromotive voltage can contribute considerably to
shortening the service life of the contacts. To prevent this from happening, provide a
contact protection circuit.
■ Contact protection circuit examples
For AC load 1 For DC load 1
Contact Contact
Load CR circuit Load Diode
For AC load 2 For DC load 2
a b
Contact Contact
Zener diode
Varistor
When the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V, provide a protection circuit in position "b".

When the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V, provide a protection circuit in position "a".
Note 1: Use a load coil whose rating is less than the contact capacity.
Note 2: Use a diode whose peak inverse voltage is 10 times or more the circuit
voltage and whose forward current is not less than the load current.
Note 3: Individually attach diodes, varistors, and CR circuits directly to the relay coil
terminal.

1-69
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 69 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units
2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series

Expansion Units
Visual KV
This section describes the method to connect Visual KV Series expansion units to a
Series
Visual KV Series basic unit and the various functions of expansion units.
2.2.1 Visual KV Series Expansion Units

Visual KV Series expansion input units
KV-E4X KV-E8X KV-E16X
Visual KV Series expansion output units
KV-E4R KV-E4T KV-E8R KV-E8T(P) KV-E16R KV-E16T(P)
Visual KV Series expansion I/O units
KV-E4XR KV-E4XT(P)
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 70 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units

• Connect a basic unit and an expansion unit with an expansion cable.
• An expansion cable approximately 60 mm long is provided as standard.
• When extending the expansion cable, use long expansion cables (300 mm)
Visual KV
Series
(OP-35361).
• Up to two expansion cables (300 mm) can be connected to one basic unit.
• The READY/ERROR LED is lit during normal communication, flashes when an
abnormality occurs, and is not lit when the power is not supplied correctly. If this
LED is not lit, check whether the expansion cables are correctly connected.
Standard cable (approx. 60 mm)

Basic unit Expansion unit
Expansion cable
(60 mm)
Long cable (approx. 300 mm)

Basic unit Expansion unit Expansion unit 12
Expansion cable Expansion cable

(300 mm) (300 mm)
Standard cable (approx. 60) + Long cable (approx. 300 mm)
Basic unit Expansion unit Expansion unit
Expansion cable Expansion cable

(60 mm) (300 mm)
Be sure to turn off the power before connecting or disconnecting expansion

CAUTION
cables. If they are connected or disconnected while the power is on, the units
may be damaged or fail.
Note: Keep noise sources such as power cables and electromagnetic switches away
from expansion cables (300 mm) as much as possible.

1-71
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 71 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Connection methods
1. Peel off the tape stuck to the right side of the basic unit.
Visual KV
Series
2. Connect an expansion cable to the connector.
■ When extending a cable

2 Replace a standard expansion cable (60 mm) with an optional expansion cable (300
mm) (OP-35361).
1. Disconnect the standard expansion cable from the expansion unit connector.
2. Connect an optional expansion cable (300 mm) to the expansion unit connector.
3. Connect the optional expansion cable (300 mm) to the basic unit connector.
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 72 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Number of connectable units

● When the basic unit is a KV-10xx/16xx/24xx
Up to four input units and four output units (that is, up to 8 total expansion units)
can be connected to one basic unit.
Visual KV
Expansion units
Series
Basic unit Input Output Input Input Output Output Output Input
Up to 8 units
● When the basic unit is a KV-40xx

Up to three input units and four output units (that is, up to 7 total expansion units)
can be connected to one basic unit.
Expansion units
Basic unit Output Output Input Output Input Output Input
12
Up to 7 units
● When KV-E4XT/KV-E4XR expansion I/O units are connected

One I/O unit is regarded as two units (that is, one input and one output unit). For
example, when only expansion I/O units are connected to one basic unit, up to
four expansion I/O units can be connected. Up to three expansion I/O units can
be connected to a KV-40xx basic unit.
When two expansion I/O units are connected
Expansion units
Basic unit Input I/O I/O Output Output Input
6 units
Input 1 1 1 0 0 1 =4
Output 0 1 1 1 1 0 =4
Note 1: There are no restrictions about the order of connected expansion units.
Note 2: When connecting expansion units to an AC power type basic unit, be sure
that the total current consumption of all connected units does not exceed the output
capacity of the Visual KV Series basic unit. Otherwise, consider to use a DC power
type basic unit in conbination with an external DC power supply having enough
capacity.

1-73
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 73 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.2.3 Confirming the Connection Settings of Expansion Units

Relay No. (unit No., address No., contact No.)
The relay No. of each expansion unit is automatically assigned in the order of con-
nection.
Visual KV
Series
Expansion unit relay list

■ Input units
KV-E4X KV-E8X KV-E16X
Connection
order KV-10/ KV-10/ KV-10/
KV-40 KV-40 KV-40
16/24 16/24 16/24
1st input
100 to 103 200 to 203 100 to 107 200 to 207 100 to 115 200 to 115
unit
2nd input
200 to 203 300 to 303 200 to 207 300 to 307 200 to 215 300 to 315
unit
3rd input
300 to 303 400 to 403 300 to 307 400 to 407 300 to 315 400 to 415
unit
4th input
400 to 403 – 400 to 407 – 400 to 415 –
unit
■ Output units
Connection
KV-E4T/R KV-E8T(P)/R KV-E16T(P)/R
order
2 1st output
600 to 603 600 to 607 600 to 615
unit
2nd output
700 to 703 700 to 707 700 to 715
unit
3rd output
800 to 803 800 to 807 800 to 815
unit
4th output
900 to 903 900 to 907 900 to 915
unit
■ I/O units
KV -E4X R/ T(P )
Connect ion
Input r e la y Out put r e la y
order
KV -10/ 16/ 24 KV -40 KV -10/ 16/ 24 KV -40
1st input
100 to 103 200 to 203 — —
unit
2nd input
200 to 203 300 to 303 — —
unit
3rd input
300 to 303 400 to 403 — —
unit
4t h input
400 to 403 — — —
unit
1st out put
— — 600 to 603 600 to 603
unit
2nd out put
— — 700 to 703 700 to 703
unit
3rd out put
— — 800 to 803 800 to 803
unit
4t h out put
— — 900 to 903 900 to 903
unit
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 74 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Connection information for expansion units

The connection status (connected or unconnected) of a connected expansion unit
can be confirmed using the Access Window, the ladder support software "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV", or the KV-P3E(01) handheld
programmer.
Visual KV
Series
➮ Refer to "Chapter 3. Access Window" (p.1-79), "Chapter 6. Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195), and the
"6.2.9. Displaying the Use Status" (p. 2-70).
The connection information is written to data memory DM1937 as shown in the table
below.
Bit Bit
15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Unused "0" or "1" is written.

("0" is always written.)
DM1937 display digit Indication contents

Connection of expansion input unit with relay Nos. 0100 to 0115
Bit 0*
0: Unconnected or disconnected 1: Connected
Bit 1
Bit 2
Connection of expansion input unit with relay Nos. 0400 to 0415 12
Bit 3
Connection of expansion output unit with relay Nos. 0600 to 0615
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
* Always set to "0" when the KV-40xx is used.
KV-40 KV-E8X KV-E4XT(P) KV-E8R KV-E16T(P)
In the case of connection above, DM1937 is set as follows.

DM1937 (binary)
900 800 700 600 400 300 200 100
Decimal (Hexadecimal)
Normal status: 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 = #118($0076)
KV-E16T
* Always set to "0" when the KV-40xx is used.
KV-E8R KV-E4XT KV-E8X
DM1937 (binary)
When KV-E8X has failed: 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 = #116($0074)
DM1937 (binary)
When KV-E4XT has failed: 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 = #98($0062)

1-75
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 75 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Input time constant for expansion units

The initial setting of the time constant is "10 ms" for each expansion unit.
The input time constant can be set to "10 µs" using the Access Window, the ladder
support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV", or the
KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Visual KV
Series
Change the value of special utility relays 2609 to 2612.

Special utility relay No. Function
Input time constant of expansion input unit with relay Nos.
2609*
0100 to 0115 OFF: 10 ms ON: 10 µs
2610
0200 to 0215 OFF: 10 ms ON: 10 µs
2611
0300 to 0315 OFF: 10 ms ON: 10 µs
2612
0400 to 0415 OFF: 10 ms ON: 10 µs
* Not used for the KV-40xx.
Clearing the input value when disconnecting

The system can be set so that the input value is cleared when disconnection has
occurred for some reason.
This setting can be performed using the Access Window, the ladder support soft-
ware "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV", or the KV-P3E(01)
2 handheld programmer.
Change the value of special utility relay 2613. Enter "0" or "1".
Special utility relay No. Function

Clears input when expansion is disconnected.
2613
OFF: Holds previous value. ON: Clears input.
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 76 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Units

and the Basic Unit
An expansion unit operates at a cycle of 800 µs without depending on the scan time.
When performing input while setting the input time constant of an expansion unit to
Visual KV
10 µs, or when synchronizing the output of a basic unit with the output of an
Series
expansion unit, pay strict attention to the following contents.
When inputting
■ When the scan time is longer than 800 µs (communication cycle) plus 10 µs
(input time constant)
Set the input signal ON time equal to or longer than the scan time.
Scan time
Receive
Communication cycle
in expansion unit
Receive Receive
ON
Input signal
OFF
Incomplete receive OK
■ When the scan time is equal to or shorter than 800 µs (communication 12

cycle) plus 10 µs (input time constant)
Set the input signal ON time to 810 µs or longer.
Scan time
Receive
Communication cycle in
expansion unit
Receive
ON
Input signal
OFF
Incomplete receive OK
In the case of output

The output of an expansion unit is delayed by a maximum of 800 µs from the output
of a basic unit.
When synchronizing the output of an expansion unit with the output of a basic unit,
pay strict attention to the communication cycle.
ON
Output of basic unit
OFF 800µs 800µs
ON
Output of expansion unit
OFF
Note: When the output ON time is 800 µs or shorter, the output may be aborted.

1-77
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 77 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

2.3 Inspection and Maintenance
2.3 Inspection and Maintenance

This section describes the inspection and maintenance procedures for units.
Visual KV
2.3.1 Inspection
Series
While basic units and other units have been used for a long period of time, the
connector connection area may become loose, the battery may wear out, or another
nonconformity may occur in operation.
To avoid any nonconformities, inspect the basic units, other units, and the wiring
periodically.
The major inspection items are as follows.
• Check to ensure that the connector connection area is not disconnected or loose.
• Check to ensure that terminals on terminal blocks are not loose.
• Check to ensure that the wiring cables among units and each equipment are not
damaged.
2.3.2 Maintenance
While basic units and other units have been used for a long period of time, dirt will
adhered. Wipe off any collected dirt with a clean, dry cloth.
Wipe off any dust and dirt that has collected on small and narrow portions with
2 cotton swabs.
Be sure to turn off the power before starting any inspection or maintenance of
CAUTION the units.
KVHKA Chap 02.p65 78 08.3.11, 11:11 AM

Visual KV
Series
Chapter 3
Access Window
This chapter describes the Access Window used for changing and monitoring data.
3.1 Overview of the Access Window ............................................ 1-80

3.1.1 What is the Access Window .................................................................. 1-80
3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples ............................................................. 1-80
3.2 Basic Operating Procedures .................................................. 1-81
3.2.1 Operation Mode .................................................................................... 1-81
3.2.2 Access Window Modes ......................................................................... 1-81
3.2.3 Part Names and Functions of the Access Window ............................... 1-82
3.2.4 Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock ................................ 1-82
3.2.5 Turbo Function ...................................................................................... 1-83
3.3 Digital Trimmer Mode .............................................................. 1-84
3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure ....................................................... 1-84
3.4 Device Mode ............................................................................. 1-87
3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type ................................................... 1-91
3.5 System Mode ............................................................................ 1-94
3.6 Message Display ...................................................................... 1-97
3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status .......................................................... 1-97
3.6.2 User Messages ..................................................................................... 1-97
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 79 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.1 Overview of the Access Window
3.1 Overview of the Access Window

This section describes the outline of the Access Window and examples of how to
use it.
Visual KV
Series
3.1.1 What is the Access Window

The Visual KV Series is equipped with a small, two-color backlighted LCD to easily
show useful information to the user.
3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples

■ As a programming console
Using the Access Window allows the operation mode (RUN or PROGRAM) to be
changed over and set values of counters and timers to be changed without using a
programming console.
■ As a digital thumbwheel switch

By using the Access Window, diversified values can be input. Because external
digital thumbwheel switches are no longer necessary, the numbers of wiring works
and I/O points can both be reduced.
■ As a display unit
By using the Access Window, the number of products and the tact time can be
3 displayed. Because external display units are no longer necessary, the numbers of
wiring works and I/O points can both be reduced.
■ As a device to give instructions to workers

When using a rotating beacon, the occurrence of an error can be noted but the
contents of the error, such as a clogged workpiece, missing workpiece, or incorrect
setup may often be unclear.
The Access Window in the Visual KV Series includes a user message function. By
using the user message function, work efficiency can be greatly improved.
The built-in display may show the error message "Error 40" blinking the very
CAUTION first time you turn on the power supply to the Visual KV Series. Press any key
1-80 Chapter 3 Access Window
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 80 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.2 Basic Operating Procedures

This section describes the operation mode change function of the Visual KV Series,
each mode in the Access Window, as well as basic operating procedures for the
Visual KV
Access Window.
Series
3.2.1 Operation Mode
In the Visual KV Series, two operation modes are offered, RUN mode and PRO-
GRAM mode.
■ RUN mode
In this mode, a program is executed repeatedly.
■ PROGRAM mode
In this mode, program execution is stopped. This mode is used to create or change
a program.
In conventional units, the programming support software ("KV IncrediWare (DOS)"
or "LADDER BUILDER for KV") or a KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is required
to change the operation mode. In the Visual KV Series, each basic unit is equipped
with an Access Window so that the operation mode can be changed over by
pressing the keys provided on the basic unit.
➮ For operating procedures, refer to "3.5 System Mode" (p.1-94).
3.2.2 Access Window Modes

13
Each Visual KV Series basic unit is equipped with an Access Window used for
changing and monitoring the data. When an error occurs, a corresponding error
code can be confirmed in the Access Window. A KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer
is therefore not required any more.
The Access Window offers the following three modes:
■ Digital trimmer mode

Analog Timers (TMIN: Trimmer in) can be set digitally instead of with the conven-
tional physical trimmer pot method. As the result, more detail settings are enabled.
The maximum resolution is 1/65,536.
➮ For the digital trimmer mode, refer to "3.3 Digital Trimmer Mode" (p.1-84).
■ Device mode
In conventional units, the programming support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or
"LADDER BUILDER for KV" or a KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is used to
display internal devices. In the Visual KV Series, internal devices are displayed on
the Access Window and the setting contents can be changed.
➮ For the device mode, refer to "3.4 Device Mode" (p.1-87).
■ System mode
In conventional units, the programming support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or
"LADDER BUILDER for KV" or a KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is used to
change the ladder mode between RUN and PROGRAM modes. In the Visual KV
Series, program execution can be stopped by selecting "Prog" in the system mode.
Also, to save contact comments as well as the contents of data memories and
current values of counters beyond the battery backup period, the EEPROM can be
used using SAVE function in the system mode.
➮ For the system mode, refer to "3.5 System Mode" (p.1-94).
In addition to the above modes, the Access Window also offers the key lock function
to prevent erroneous operations, and the message display function to display error
codes and user messages.
➮ Refer to "Key lock function" (p.1-82), "3.6 Message Display" (p.1-97)
Chapter 3 Access Window 1-81
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 81 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.2.3 Part Names and Functions of the Access Window

1. Device selector window
Visual KV
2. Setting 3.Main
Series
operation display
keys window
3. Main display window 2. Setting

operation
keys
KV-24xx/40xx KV-10xx/16xx

Displays the device type currently selected in the device mode.
2. Setting operation keys
Allows you to change the setting in each mode and change the mode from one
mode to another.
The key layout varies depending on the model. (The keys are located under the
LCD in the KV-10xx/16xx, and on the right side of the LCD in the KV-24xx/40xx.)
3. Main display window
Displays the current value and set value for each device and error messages.
3.2.4 Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock

To change the mode and set/reset the key lock, press the or key while pressing
3 and holding the key.
Key lock Key lock
Digital trimmer mode Device mode
Key lock
key + key
key + key
key + key for 3 secs
System mode
key + key for 3 secs
("+" indicates pressed
simultaneously.)
• Even while the key lock is being set, the mode can still be changed. However,
numeric values (current values, set values, and trimmer values) cannot be
changed. When setting the key lock, "Loc" is displayed in the middle line of the
Access Window. While the key lock is being reset, "UnLoc" is displayed. When
the power is turned on, the previous key lock status (set or reset) which was in
effect when the power was previously turned off is automatically set. The initial
status is "unlock (reset)".
• When the unit is shipped, the digital trimmer mode is selected. After the Access
Window is used, the mode effective at power OFF time is automatically set when
the power is next turned on.
• To set (or reset) the key lock, press and hold the key and the (or ) key at
the same time for 3 seconds.
• While the key lock is being set, the mode can be changed and a display device
can be changed. However, numeric values cannot be changed and the setting
cannot be changed when in system mode.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 82 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.2.5 Turbo Function

In every mode, pressing the or key once increases or decreases the value by 1,
respectively. Also, pressing and holding the or key for a half second or more
automatically increases or decreases the value continuously.
Visual KV
Series
When specifying device Nos. using keys, the turbo function is available in the device
mode, and is used to increase the numeric value addition (subtraction) speed.
■ Quick function
When a key is pressed and held for 0.5 second, key repetition (automatic addition/
subtraction) is activated.
When the key is pressed and held down continuously, the quick function is activated
1.5 seconds later (that is, 2 seconds after the key was first pressed), and the
automatic addition (subtraction) speed is increased.
Note: The quick function is available only when device Nos. of timers, counters,
data memories, and relays are specified.
■ Turbo function
When a key is pressed and held continuously after the quick function is actuated,
the automatic addition (subtraction) speed is increased continuously 2 seconds later.
Note: The turbo function is available only when device Nos. of timers, counters, data
memories, and relays are specified.
■ Super turbo function

When a key is pressed and held continuously after the turbo function is activated, 13
the automatic addition (subtraction) speed is increased continuously 2 seconds later.
Note: The super turbo function is available only when device Nos. of data memories
and relays are specified.
0.5 1.5 2.0 2.0

second seconds seconds seconds
Addition Automatic Quick addition Turbo addition Super turbo
(subtraction) addition (subtraction) (subtraction) addition
of "1" (subtraction) (subtraction)
■ List of turbo function availability in each mode

(❍: Effective)
Super turbo
Mode Quick function Turbo function
function
Digital trimmer mode — — —
DM ❍ ❍ ❍
TM — — —
T/C ❍ ❍ —
Device mode
CTC — — —
TRM — — —
RLY ❍ ❍ ❍
System mode — — —
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 83 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.3 Digital Trimmer Mode

The setting method for Analog Timer (TMIN: Trimmer in) is changed from conven-
tional analog method to digital method, which allows for more detailed settings. This
Visual KV
section describes the function and the operating procedure of the digital trimmer
Series
mode.
3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure

Key operation and screen display
The table below shows the function for each key in the digital trimmer mode.
Setting operation key Function

Allows selection of increment (decrement) quantity.Each time this
key is pressed, increment (decrement) quantity is changed in
sequence “1 ➞ 10 ➞ 100 ➞ 1,000 ➞ 1 ...” (Initial setting: 1)
Increases/decreases current value with selected
/ increment/decrement quantity.
Allows selection of trimmer No.
Trimmer No. Increment (decrement)

quantity
Selected device type

(TRM (= trimmer)
only in this mode)
3
Current value Upper limit value
Function and operating procedure

The Visual KV basic unit is equipped with two trimmers, trimmer No. 0 and trimmer
No. 1. The trimmer No. can be selected and a numeric value can be set using the
setting operation keys. The maximum set value for each trimmer is 65,535.
■ Operating procedure
1. Select the trimmer No.
Each time the key is pressed, trimmer No. 0 and trimmer No. 1 is selected
alternately.
Trimmer No.
Trimmer No.
Change
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 84 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

2. Select the increment (decrement) quantity.

Each time the key is pressed, the increment (decrement) quantity is changed
in the sequence "1 ➞ 10 ➞ 100 ➞ 1,000 ➞ 1 . . ."
Increment (decrement) Increment (decrement)

quantity quantity
Visual KV
Series
Current value
Upper limit value
3. Increase/decrease the current value.

Increase/decrease the current value by pressing the / key. Each time the /
key is pressed, the increment/decrement quantity selected in step 2 above is
added to/subtracted from the current value.
Current value
13
Repeat steps 2 and 3 if necessary.
The change in the current value is immediately reflected (registered) without
regard to the previous setup.
Note 1: Set values of trimmers can be changed in either RUN mode or PROGRAM
mode.
Note 2: The turbo function is not available in key operations in the digital trimmer
mode.
➮ Refer to "Turbo function" (p.1-83)
Note 3: The current value cannot be set to a value less than 0 or larger than the
upper limit value.
Note 4: When the current value of a trimmer is increased/decreased, it is reflected
within 1 scan + 50 ms.
■ Holding the setting

• Each of the trimmers Nos. 0 and 1 holds the current value immediately before the
power is turned off.
• The trimmer No. is held as selected just before the digital trimmer mode was
changed to another mode. If the digital trimmer mode had been selected just
before the power was turned off, the trimmer No. selected at that time is auto-
matically displayed when the power is next turned on. If any mode other than the
digital trimmer mode had been selected just before the power was turned off,
trimmer No. 0 is automatically selected when the digital trimmer mode is selected.
• The increment (decrement) quantity is stored for each of the trimmers Nos. 0 and
1. Even if another mode is selected, the increment (decrement) quantity for each
trimmer is held. However, when the power is turned off or the basic unit is reset,
the increment (decrement) quantity is set to the initial value.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 85 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

■ Upper limit value of the digital trimmer

The upper limit value of the digital trimmer can be set by selecting "TRM" in the
device mode.
➮ Refer to "3.4 Device Mode" (p.1-87)
When the upper limit value of the digital trimmer is set in the device mode, it is
Visual KV
Series
automatically stored in one of the data memories. The table below shows the data
memories used to save these upper limit values.
Data memory No. Setting item
Upper limit value (setting range: 1 to 65,535) of digital trimmer No. 0
DM1938
(Initial value: 0)
Upper limit value (setting range: 1 to 65,535) of digital trimmer No. 1
DM1939
(Initial value: 0)
Note: When DM1938/1939 is set to 0, the upper limit value is regarded as 65,535.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 86 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
3.4 Device Mode

Internal devices can be displayed and set in the Access Window. This section
describes the function and operating procedure of the device mode.
Visual KV
Series
Devices that can be displayed and changed
The following devices can be displayed and changed in the device mode.
• Data memories (DM)
• Temporary data memories (TM)
• Timers and counters (T/C)
• High-speed counter comparators (CTC)
• Trimmers (TRM)
• Relays (RLY) [on/off status]

The table below shows the function of each key in the device mode.
Setting Numeric value change status
Normal status
operation key (while digit is flashing)
Registers/cancels changed value.
Moves to numeric value change * Registers changed value when
status. (on/off status with relays) pressed and held for 3 seconds.
* When pressed and held for 3 * Cancels changed value when
seconds pressed and held for less than 3
seconds.
13
Allows change of a numeric value
/ Allows selection of device No.
of one digit.
Allows selection of a digit to be
Allows selection of device type.
changed.
Device No.
Selected device type
Current value Set value or

(on/off status upper limit value
with relays)
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 87 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
Selecting the device and displaying the current value/set value

Select the device type and the device No. to be displayed.
1. Select the device type.
Visual KV
Series
Select the device type using the key. Each time the key is pressed, the
device type is changed among DM, TM, T/C, CTC, TRM, and RLY in this order
and displayed in the device selector window.
Selected device type Selected device type
2. Select the device No.

Select the device No. of the selected device type using the and keys.
Together with the device No., its current value and set value (upper limit value in
the case of TRM) are displayed.
Device No.
3
If the selected device type is DM, T/C, or RLY, the numeric value addition (sub-
traction) speed is increased when the / key is pressed and held for 2 seconds
or more.
➮ Refer to "Turbo function" (p.1-83)
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 88 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
Changing a numeric value

Change the setting contents of a selected device.
Visual KV
Initially select the device No. to be changed.
Series
1. Select the numeric value change status.
When the key is pressed and held for 3 seconds, a digit to be changed begins
flashing.
Digit whose numeric value

can be changed
Press and hold it for 3 seconds.
In this example, the 5th digit is flashing. When the device No. to be changed
consists of two lines, the 5th digit in the lower line flashes.
2. Select a digit to be changed.

When the key is pressed, a flashing digit is changed.
Digit whose numeric value
can be changed 13
Change order of digits to be changed
In case of 1 line In case of 2 lines
Start
Start
3 seconds
3 seconds
Note: When there are 2 lines, the flashing digit moves among all digits of each line
sequentially. (5th digit of 2nd line ➞ 4th ➞ 3rd ➞ 2nd ➞1st of 2nd line ➞ 5th of 1st
line ➞ 4th ➞ 3rd ➞ 2nd ➞ 1st of 2nd line ➞ 5th of 2nd line....) This continues until
any digit value is changed. After that, the flashing digit moves within the line whose
value has been changed. To change the line, press the key for 3 seconds twice to
enter the change status again.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 89 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
3. Changing a numeric value.

Increase/decrease the numeric value of the selected digit using the / key.
Numeric value is
increased/decreased.
Visual KV
Series
A numeric value can be changed only for the flashing digit. The upper and lower
digits are not changed.
4. Register (reflect) the input.

When the key is pressed and held for 3 seconds, the input value is registered
(reflected).
Press and hold it for

3 seconds.
• When the key is pressed and held for less than 3 seconds only, the input is
canceled and the Access Window returns to normal status.
• When registration is finished, the Access Window returns automatically to
normal status.
Note 1: The device setting can be changed either in RUN mode or PROGRAM
mode.
Note 2: If the key operation is not performed for approximately 25 seconds, the
numeric value change status automatically finishes and the Access Window returns
to normal status.
Note 3: The maximum allowable input value is 65,535 (except for RLY). If a numeric
value larger than 65,535 is entered, it is not accepted.
Note 4: In normal status, 0 is suppressed. In numeric value change status, the zero
suppress function is reset.
Note 5: When a numeric value is input in the device mode, it is reflected within 1
scan + 50 ms.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 90 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
Holding the setting

• Even if the device mode is changed to another mode, the device type and device
No. selected just before the mode change are retained. Device Nos. of other
devices are also retained. When the device type is changed in the device mode,
a selected device No. for each device type is also held.
Visual KV
Series
• When the power is turned off, just the device No. of the selected device type is
held only if the device mode was selected just before the power was turned off.
The held device No. will automatically be displayed when the power is next
turned on. If any mode other than the device mode was selected just before
turning the power off, or if "LoAd" is executed in the system mode, DM will be
automatically selected when the power is next turned on, and the device mode
will be selected.
3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type

This section describes differences in the set value range and the screen display
among device types in the numeric value change status.
Data memory (DM)

Device No.: 0 to 1999
Current value
13
• While the device No. is selected, three types of turbo functions (quick, turbo, and
super turbo) are available.
• The upper limit values of the trimmers Nos. 0 and 1 are written to DM1938 and
DM1939, respectively.
• If an entered current value is larger than the upper limit value, the current value
change is canceled.
Temporary data memory (TM)

Device No.: 0 to 31
Current value
• While the device No. is selected, no turbo function is available.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 91 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
Timer/counter (T/C)
If the device No. has not been registered
Device No.: 0 to 249 yet, horizontal lines are displayed.
Visual KV
Current value
Series
Set value
• If the key is pressed while the 1st digit in the bottom line is flashing, the 1st
digit in the bottom line stops flashing and the 5th digit in the middle line starts
flashing.
• If the key is pressed while the 1st digit in the middle line is flashing, the 1st
digit in the middle line stops flashing and the 5th digit in the bottom line starts
flashing.
• While the device No. is selected, two types of turbo functions (quick and turbo)
are available.
• Unregistered device Nos. cannot be set.
High-speed counter comparator (CTC)

Device No.: 0 to 3
CTH current
value
3 CTC set
value
If both CTCs and CTHs have not
If CTCs have not been registered yet, been registered yet, horizontal
only the middle line is displayed. lines are displayed.
* While the device No. is selected, no turbo function is available.

* In the numeric value change status, a flashing digit is changed in the same way
as T/C. However, if CTCs are not present in the ladder program, horizontal lines
are displayed in the bottom line and a flashing digit is changed only between
CTHs.
* If both CTCs and CTHs have not been registered yet, numeric values cannot be
set.
* CTC0 and CTC1 are high-speed counter comparators for CTH0. CTC2 and
CTC3 are high-speed counter comparators for CTH1. The same value is dis-
played in the middle line for both devices Nos. 0 and 1, or for both devices Nos. 2
and 3.
CTC0 CTC1
The CTH0 value is displayed in the

middle line for both CTC0 and CTC1.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 92 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.4 Device Mode
CTC2 CTC3
Visual KV
Series
The CTH1 value is displayed in the
middle line for both CTC2 and CTC3.
Trimmer (TRM)
Device No.: 0 or 1
Current value
Upper limit value
• While the device No. is selected, no turbo function is available.

• In the numeric value change status, a flashing digit is changed in the same way
as T/C. However, when the upper limit value is changed, numeric values stored
in DM1938 (for the trimmer No. 0) and DM1939 (for the trimmer No. 1) are also
automatically changed.
13
• If an entered upper limit value is smaller than the current value, the current value
is forcibly overwritten to the upper value.
• If an entered current value is larger than the upper limit value, the current value
change is canceled.
Relay (RLY)
Device No.: 0 to 17915
ON/OFF indication
• While the device No. is selected, three types of turbo functions (quick, turbo and
super turbo) are available.
• In the status change status, ON or OFF can be selected at the right end in the
middle line.
Note: On/off status can be changed or registered by pressing key for 3 seconds.
(Except for input relays)
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 93 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.5 System Mode
3.5 System Mode

In the Visual KV Series, the operation mode can be changed between RUN and
PROGRAM modes using the keys provided on the basic unit.
Visual KV
This paragraph describes the function and operating procedure of the system mode.
Series

The table below shows the function of each key in the system mode.
Setting operation key Function

Registers selected mode when pressed and held for 3 seconds.
Allows mode selection (Mode is changed in reverse order
/ between the and keys.)
Functions the same way as the key.
Indicates that the system

mode is selected.
Operation mode
3
In the system mode, "SYS" is displayed in the top line and the currently selected
operation mode in the middle line.
Select and register among "Prog", "run", "LoAd", and "SAVE" offered in the system
mode.
1. Select a desired mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in the order "Prog ➞ run ➞
LoAd ➞ SAVE". When the key is pressed, the mode is changed in reverse
order.
(The key functions in the same way as the key.)
Operation
mode
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 94 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.5 System Mode
2. Register the operation mode selected in step 1 above.

When the key is pressed and held for 3 seconds, the currently selected mode
is registered. When the operation mode is changed, the backlighted color is
changed.
Visual KV
When the operation mode is changed from RUN to PROGRAM
Series
Backlight: Green The backlight is changed to red.

3 seconds.
When the operation mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN
Backlight: Red The backlight is changed to green.
13
3 seconds.
The backlight is green in RUN mode, and red in PROGRAM mode. By checking
the backlight color, the operation mode can be confirmed.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 95 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.5 System Mode
LOAD mode and SAVE mode

Use the LOAD mode and SAVE mode to retain contact comments, data memories,
and counter current values beyond the backup period or to securely hold important
data.
Visual KV
LOAD mode:
Series
In this mode, contact comments, data memories, and counter current values stored
in the EEPROM are loaded into RAM. Contact comments and analog trimmer values
written in the EEPROM and devices specified by the holding function against power
interruption of the MEMSW instruction are read.
➮ For more about the MEMSW instruction, refer to "MEMSW" (p.3-92).
SAVE mode:
In this mode, all of the set comments, data memories, counter current values, high-
speed counter current values, high-speed counter comparator set values, and
analog trimmer values are saved in the EEPROM built in the Visual KV Series basic
unit.
Never change the operation mode while a ladder program is being transferred.
WARNING If the operation mode is changed at this time, the ladder program may not
transfer correctly.
Display in LOAD/SAVE mode

When the key is pressed, loading/saving is completed and "End" is displayed in
the bottom line for 3 seconds.
Note 1: Both LOAD and SAVE modes are available only in PROGRAM mode. If
LOAD or SAVE mode is forcibly executed in RUN mode, the error code "Err210" is
displayed and the Visual KV Series is stopped.
Note 2: If LOAD mode is executed without executing SAVE mode at all, the error
code "Err212" is displayed. (In this case, the Visual KV Series is not stopped.)
Note 3: When LOAD mode is executed, the basic unit is automatically reset and
stopped (in PROGRAM mode).
Note 4: When the setting is changed in the system mode, it is reflected within 1
scan + 50 ms.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 96 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.6 Message Display
3.6 Message Display

This section describes error messages displayed in the error status and user mes-
sages.
Visual KV
Series
3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status
When an error has occurred in the basic unit, "Error" is displayed in the top line of
the Access Window and a corresponding error code is displayed in the middle line.
Red backlight is
flashing.
Error code
• While "Error" and an error code are displayed, a red backlight is flashing.
• When any key is pressed, the error display is cleared (and the error status is
cleared at the same time).
• If two or more errors occur at the same time, the corresponding error codes are
displayed one by one each time a key is pressed. (Up to 16 error codes can be
stored at a time.)
➮ For more about error codes, refer to "10.1 Error List" (p.1-372).
13
3.6.2 User Messages
The user message function allows an arbitrary numeric value from a ladder program
to be displayed in the Access Window.
• "USEr" is displayed in the top line of the Access Window, and a specified No. is
displayed in the middle line.
• While a user message is displayed, a green backlight is flashing.
• When any key is pressed, the user message display is cleared.
Specified No.
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 97 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

3.6 Message Display
How to use the user messages

• Enter a No. (0 to 255) to be displayed in the Access Window to DM1950. Set the
special utility relay 2515 to ON.
• When the special utility relay 2515 changes to OFF, the displayed user message
Visual KV
is deleted.
Series
• When a displayed user message is deleted by pressing any key in the Access
Window, the special utility relay 2515 changes to OFF.
Note 1: Set the special utility relay using the SET/RES instructions.
Note 2: When a displayed user message is to be deleted on the side of the Access
Window, set the special utility relay 2515 to ON using a ladder program as shown
below.
Ladder program example
Condition 1000 1000 #00000 DM1950 2515

DIFU LDA STA SET
00000: Relay No. whose user

message is to be
displayed
KVHKA Chap 03.p65 98 08.3.11, 11:12 AM

Visual KV
Series
Chapter 4
KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel
This chapter describes the KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel used for changing,
monitoring, and displaying the status of inside relays, timers, counters and data
memories.
4.1 Before Operation ......................................................... 1-100

4.1.1 Checking Package Contents ................................................................. 1-100
4.1.2 Part Names and Functions .................................................................... 1-101
4.1.3 Details about the KV-D20 ...................................................................... 1-102
4.1.4 Installation and Environment ................................................................. 1-104
4.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance ................................................................. 1-106
4.2 Overview and Operation ............................................... 1-107
4.2.1 Use Examples for the KV-D20 .............................................................. 1-107
4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series .............................................................. 1-108
4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20 ........................................................................ 1-109
4.2.4 Operator Mode ...................................................................................... 1-117
4.2.5 Device Mode ......................................................................................... 1-130
4.2.6 System Mode ........................................................................................ 1-134
4.3 Examples of Ladder Programs ...................................... 1-135
4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs ......................................................................... 1-135
4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs .............................................................. 1-143
4.4 Appendix .................................................................... 1-158
4.4.1 Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 1-158
4.4.2 Available Character List ........................................................................ 1-162
4.4.3 Comment Draft Sheet ........................................................................... 1-163
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 99 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.1 Before Operation

This section includes the names, functions, and details of the KV-D20 and informa-
tion required before starting operation.
Visual KV
Series
4.1.1 Checking Package Contents

The KV-D20 package includes the following components. Before using the KV-D20,
check that all components have been included in the package.
7 6
5 4
3 2
1 0
KV-D20 Display Modular cable (2.5 m)

OP-26487
Mounting fixture (2 pcs.)
1-100 Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 100 08.3.11, 11:13 AM


This section describes the part names and functions of the KV-D20.
Visual KV
1. Customized lamps 2. LCD display
Series
1 2 3 4
5. Communication port
(rear side)
6. Bit guide 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F1 F2 F3 F4
3. Customized switches 4. Setting operation switch
No. Name Function
Customized Assigned to special utility relays. The LED illuminates when the
1 lamps corresponding relay turns on.
(Lamp 1: 2504, Lamp 2: 2505, Lamp 3: 2506, Lamp 4: 2507)
LCD display Displays comments of up to 20 characters described in ladder
2
programs, or displays all devices used in the KV unit.
Assigned to special utility relays. The relay turns on when the
3
Customized
switches corresponding switch is turned on. 14
(F1: 2500, F2: 2501, F3: 2502, F4: 2503)
Setting operation
4 switches Change screen display.
Used for connection with the KV unit.

Communication Connected to the communication port of the KV basic unit with
5 port the supplied cable (OP-26487).
Also supplies the drive power supply to the KV-D20.
Shows the corresponding number of each bit on the KV-I/O
6 Bit guide monitor screen, the operator screen, or the 8-bit ON/OFF
indication in the device mode.
Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel 1-101
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 101 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.1.3 Details about the KV-D20

This section describes the general specifications, functional specifications, and
dimensions of the KV-D20.
General specifications
Visual KV
Series
Item Specification
Power supply
Supplied from the communication port of the KV (5 VDC)
voltage
Current 5 VDC, 180 mA max.
consumption (60 mA max. when converted for 24 V)
Ambient
0 to +50°C (32 to 122°F), No freezing
temperature
Ambient storage
-20 to 70°C (-4 to 158°F), No freezing
temperature
1500 VAC for 1 min.
Withstand voltage (between power terminal and I/O terminals, and
between external terminals and housing)
1500 V p-p min., Pulse width: 1 µs and 50 ns
Noise immunity (Noise generated by noise simulator),
Conforming to EN standard (EN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-6)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm max. double amplitude in X, Y and Z directions,
Vibration
2 hours respectively
50 MΩ min.
Insulation
(Between power terminal and housing, measured with
resistance
500 VDC megohmmeter)
Environmental
No excessive dust or corrosive gases
restrictions
Display: Approx. 160 g, Communication cable: Approx. 60 g,
Weight
Special mounting fixture: Approx. 30 g (2 pcs.)
4 Structure Built-in panel, IP-65F only for the front operation panel
Functional specifications
Item Specification
Connectable units One KV-D20 for one KV basic unit
Display 20 digits x 4 lines, Blue-negative type backlit LCD
Character size 2.95 mm x 4.75 mm (5 x 7 dots)
Customized 4 switches assigned to special utility relays
switch (F1: 2500, F2: 2501, F3: 2502, F4: 2503)
Setting operation
▲▼
switch
4 Red LEDs, assigned to special utility relays
Customized lamp
(Lamp 1: 2504, Lamp 2: 2505, Lamp 3: 2506, Lamp 4: 2507)
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 102 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Dimensions
■ KV-D20
Panel thickness: 1.2 to 3.0 mm
Visual KV
Series
75 67
112 5 34
133
(Including mounting fixtures)
■ Panel cutout
145
+1
68 0
105
+1
0 83 14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 103 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.1.4 Installation and Environment

This section describes the panel mounting method and precautions for installation.
Use environment
Visual KV
This section describes environment, location, and wiring precautions for the KV-D20.
Series
■ Locations
Avoid installing the KV-D20 in the following locations:
• Locations in which the KV-D20 may be subjected to direct sunlight.
• Locations in which the ambient temperature drops below 0°C (32°F) or exceeds
50°C (122°F).
• Locations in which the relative humidity drops below 35% or exceeds 85%.
• Locations in which condensation occurs due to sudden temperature drops.
• Locations in which there are corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations exposed to dust, salt, metal particles, or greasy fumes.
• Locations in which the KV-D20 may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
• Locations in which water, oil, or chemicals may splash the KV-D20.
• Locations in which a strong magnetic or electric field is generated.
Install the KV-D20 as far as possible from radio transmitters and receivers.
CAUTION
Radio waves generated by the KV-D20 may cause noises on these devices.
4 ■ Precautions for improving noise immunity

• Do not install the KV-D20 inside of a panel along with high-voltage equipment.
• Install the KV-D20 as far as possible from power lines.
• If the KV-D20 is installed near equipment that generates a strong electric or
magnetic field (e.g. solenoids, choppers, etc.), install it as far as possible from the
equipment.
• Precautions for operability and maintenance
To improve safety during operation and maintenance, install the KV-D20 as far
as possible from high-voltage equipment or power equipment.
• Do not install the I/O signal lines in the same conduit as power lines or high
voltage lines. Otherwise, generated noise may cause malfunctions.
If noise causes flicker on the display of the KV-D20, provide ferrite cores on the
modular cable. (It is more effective to wrap the cable once around the ferrite
core.)
Modular cable supplied with the KV-D20
Ferrite cores
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 104 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Panel mounting
■ Precautions
1.2 to 3.0 mm
• Install the KV-D20 by holding the panel at
the front and rear sides with the unit and
mounting fixtures.
Visual KV
Series
Available panel thickness: 1.2 mm to 3.0
mm
* If your panel has a thickness of 3.0 mm
or more, contact your nearest KEYENCE
office listed at the back of this manual.
• To ensure maintainability, operability, and ventilation, keep as much distance as

possible between the KV-D20 and the surrounding structure or components.
• Prevent the KV-D20 from being heated by the heat released by other devices.
• Install the KV-D20 as far as possible from devices that may generate arcs (e.g.
electromagnetic switches, no-fuse circuit breakers, etc.).
■ Mounting method
1. Cut an opening with the following dimensions in the panel to mount the KV-D20.
+1
68 0
+1
105 0
2. Insert the KV-D20 through the opening from the front surface of the panel.
14
7 6
5 4
3 2
1 0
3. Secure the KV-D20 to the panel with the mounting fixtures.
4. Tighten the screws of the fixtures. [Tightening torque: 0.2 N•m (2 kgf•cm) max.]
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 105 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance

This section describes how to inspect and maintain the KV-D20.
Inspection
Visual KV
The KV-D20 may cause malfunctions due to loose modular cable connectors or
Series
mounting fixtures during long-term use.

Be sure to regularly check the KV-D20 unit and connections.
The major items to check are as follows:
• Are the modular cable connectors disconnected or loosened?

• Are the mounting fixtures of the KV-D20 detached or loosened?
Maintenance
Dust adheres to the KV-D20 during long-term use.
Wipe the dust off using a clean dry cloth.
If dust or dirt adheres to a small part, wipe it off using a cotton swab.
CAUTION Be sure to turn off the KV-D20 before inspection or maintenance.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 106 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2 Overview and Operation

4.2.1 Use Examples for the KV-D20
Visual KV
This section includes examples of uses for the KV-D20.
Series
As a handheld programmer
The KV-D20 allows you to change the KV Series’ operating mode (RUN or PRO-
GRAM) or to change the preset values of timers and counters without using the
KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
As a digital switch
Various values can be input with the KV-D20. You can directly change the values
of desired devices without using ladder programs.
Moreover, the KV-D20 can be connected with a cable instead of the I/O unit, so
that the amount of wiring and I/O points can both be reduced.
As a display unit
The KV-D20 can display the number of products or the tact time. Since the KV-D20
can be connected with a cable instead of the I/O unit, the amount of wiring and I/O
points can both be reduced.
As a device to give instructions to workers

When using a rotating beacon, the occurrence of an error can be noted but the
contents of the error, such as a clogged workpiece, missing workpiece, or product
changeover, may often be unclear.
The KV-D20 features a user message function. By using the function, work effi-
ciency can be greatly improved.
A beep function is also available to indicate errors with sound. 14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 107 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series

This section describes how to connect the KV-D20 with the KV Series.
Connection
Visual KV
Series
Open the connector

cover of the KV basic
unit and connect the
modular connector
supplied with the KV-
D20. (Either communi-
cation port A or B can
be used.) Modular cable (2.5 m)
Insert the other end of the modular

cable to the communication port at
the rear of the KV-D20.
Precautions
• Connecting/disconnecting the modular cable can be done at any time regardless
of whether the KV unit is turned on or off.
4 • Both communication ports A and B can be used to connect the KV-D20. How-
ever, do not connect two KV-D20s at the same time.
• When connecting the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer to a KV Series that is
already connected to the KV-D20, set the mode selector switch of the KV-
P3E(01) to "PROGRAM" before connecting it. Do not connect the KV-P3E(01) to
the KV series together with the KV-D20 for a long period of time.
WARNING • Never tie the modular cable together with or route it close to strong electri-
cal lines or output lines. This will cause damage to the KV-D20.
• Prevent a strong force from being applied to the modular cable.
• Be sure to use the modular cable specified by KEYENCE (OP-26487, sup-
plied with the KV-D20). Use of an unspecified cable may cause malfunc-
tions.
• The modular cable cannot be extended.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 108 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20

The KV-D20 has three display modes: operator mode, device mode, and system
mode. This section includes an overview of these modes.
Switching the display mode
Visual KV
Series
The KV series has two operating modes: RUN and PROGRAM.
The KV-D20 allows changes among the operator mode, device mode, and system
mode for the RUN and PROGRAM modes respectively.
RUN mode PROGRAM mode
Operator Operator
mode mode
+ + + +
Device mode System mode Device mode System mode
Customized switches F1 through F4 and customized lamps 1 through 4 can be

used in all modes.
To lock the display screen, press the and ▲ (▼) keys simultaneously for three
seconds to set/reset the key-lock function.
Changes between display modes can be limited by setting special utility relays
2508 and 2509 and data memory DM1676.
➮ Refer to "Screen change function" on page 1-114.
14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 109 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Overview of each display mode

This section includes an overview of the three display modes: operator mode, device
mode, and system mode.
■ Operator mode (➮ page 1-117)

Visual KV
Normally, operators use this mode. It includes the following five screens:
Series
• Operator screen (➮ page 1-118)

Allows you to display five pages (20 lines/page) of devices by writing simple
ladder programs. Contact comments that are entered with alphanumeric charac-
ters can also be displayed. Each device can be displayed along with various
attributes.
• Direct access screen (➮ page 1-126)

This screen corresponds to the digital trimmer mode of the Access Window of the
KV unit. Values in three DM (DM1677, DM1678, and DM1679) can be changed
in real time.
• KV-I/O monitor screen (➮ page 1-127)

Allows simultaneous monitoring of two channels (8 bits x 4 lines) for the I/O
status and unit connection information for the KV Series I/O devices.
• Switch comment screen (➮ page 1-128)

Displays the contact comments for relays (2500 to 2503) assigned to four built-in
customized switches (F1 to F4) of the KV-D20, provided that the comments are
entered with alphanumeric characters.
• Lamp comment screen (➮ page 1-128)

Displays the contact comments for relays (2504 to 2507) assigned to four built-in
4 customized lamps (Lamp 1 to Lamp 4) of the KV-D20, provided that the
comments are entered with alphanumeric characters.
■ Device mode (➮ page 1-130)

This mode corresponds to the device mode of the Access Window of the KV unit.
Allows you to display or change all device values (The digital trimmer value cannot
be changed.).
■ System mode (➮ page 1-134)

This mode corresponds to the system mode of the Access Window of the KV unit.
Allows you to switch the KV unit between RUN and PROGRAM modes using the
KV-D20. However, LOAD/SAVE functions using EEPROM are not available.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 110 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Assignment of relays/DM
In the KV Series, special utility relays 2500 through 2513, DM1580 through 1599,
and DM1670 through 1699 are the devices relevant to the KV-D20. The devices
are assigned as follows:
Visual KV
■ Special utility relays used for the KV-D20
Series
Relay No. Function
2500 Pressing F1 (Customized switch 1) turns on this relay.
2504 Lamp 1 illuminates when this relay is ON.
Change between operator mode and device mode:
2508 OFF: Disable, ON: Enable
The initial setting disables changes to device mode.
Change between operator mode and system mode:
2509 OFF: Disable, ON: Enable
The initial setting disables changes to system mode.
Display language for system messages:
2510 OFF: English, ON: Japanese (katakana)
The initial setting is English.
2511 Beep setting: A beep sounds when this relay is ON.
Reset setting of KV-D20
Used to immediately reflect a change such as screen change permission.
2513
Resets the KV-D20 when this relay is ON. Turns off automatically when the
KV-D20 is reset.
14
2515 User message display (DM1950): ON: Enable, OFF: Disable
Note: To set special utility relay 2513 to reset the KV-D20, turn on (SET) 2513 for
one scan as shown below. The relay is automatically turned off after the KV-D20 is
reset.
XXXX 1000 1000 2513
DIFU SET
xxxx: Condition (Trigger input)
■ Data memory used for the KV-D20
DM No. Function
DM1580 to
Device number to be displayed (first line to 20th line)
DM1599
DM1670 to
Reserved for system
DM1675
DM1676 Permits screen change in operator mode.
DM1677 to
Used for direct access screen
DM1679
DM1680 to
Attributes of displayed device (first line to 20th line)
DM1699
DM1950 Specifies user message display devices.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 111 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Other functions
This section describes other functions of the KV-D20.
User message function

Visual KV
This function corresponds to the user message function of the Access Window of
Series
the KV unit. The Access Window displays numeric values only, but the KV-D20
displays comments as well.
Messages are displayed with 32 characters (16 characters x 2 lines).
The Access Window displays the desired number stored in DM1950 when a certain
relay turns on. However, the KV-D20 displays the contact comment for the device
specified with the value stored in DM1950, in the same manner as the operator
screen.
Note that although the KV unit is running, the Access Window does not display the
correct value while the user message is displayed.
To cancel the user message, press the key. (Pressing the key is effective even
while the key-lock function is set.)
■ Type of device to be displayed

Device Operand value DM1950 setting value
Timer T (0 to 249) 20000 to 20249
Counter C (0 to 249) 21000 to 21249
CTC (0 to 3) 22000 to 22003
CTH (0, 1) 23000 to 23001
4 Temporary data memory TM (0 to 31) 24000 to 24031

Data memory DM (0 to 1999) 30000 to 31999
Relay RLY (0 to 17915) 40000 to 57915
Note: Do not enter a value in DM1950 other than those above.
Example
When the value specifying a certain relay is stored in DM1950 and the relay turns
on, the comment for the relay is displayed on the KV-D20 screen.
The following ladder program displays the message "Add screws" when relay 0001
turns on.
Specified
relay 1000 1000 #40001 DM1950 2515
DIFU LDA STA SET
0001
"ADD SCREW" Instruction to display comment for relay 0001
Contact comment [RLY0001 turns on]
ADD SCREW
Note 1: To enter a space to the left of a contact comment, input "~" (swung dash) at
the left end of the comment with the LADDER BUILDER for KV. Spaces without "~"
at the left end will be ignored. Please note when "~" is used in the middle of a
contact comment, it is displayed as "➞".
Note 2: Contact comments can be displayed only when the LADDER BUILDER for
KV Ver. 1.5 or later is used and the compression transfer of contact comments is not
selected.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 112 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Note 3: Even the contact comments for ladder programs created with LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x or KV-IncrediWare (DOS) can be displayed on the KV-
D20 after being transferred to the KV unit with the LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver.
1.5 or later.
Note 4: "Not transfer" is initially set as the contact comment transfer setting of the
Visual KV
LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5 or later. To display contact comments on the KV-
Series
D20, enable the contact comment transfer setting with the LADDER BUILDER for
KV Ver. 1.5 or later.
➮ Refer to "Chapter 1 Software-Windows [KV-H6WE2]" on page 2-1.
When a system error occurs

The KV-D20 monitors only the communication status with the KV series.
When a system error occurs or communication is disabled in the KV unit, the KV-
D20 displays the message "TIME OUT ERROR".
Display language selection

The KV-D20 allows language selection from "English" or "Japanese" for the mes-
sages defined by the system of the KV Series. The initial setting is English (Refer to
the table below).
To switch the display to Japanese, turn on special utility relay 2510.
English Japanese Description

PRESET Preset value of a timer or counter 14
INC/DEC Increment (decrement) quantity for direct access screen
Nothing (or value 0) is specified to DM1580 or later data
NO PROGRAM
memory.
Preset value for DM1580 or later data memory is out of
OUT OF RANGE
available range.
Unused timer/counter/high-speed counter is specified to
UNUSED
DM1580 or later data memory.
Change to PROG
Screen changes from RUN to PROG in system mode
(Exit RUN)
Change to RUN
Screen changes from PROG to RUN in system mode
(Exit PROG)
Example
Display in system mode
RUN mode PROG mode
English display English display
Japanese display Japanese display
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 113 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Beep function
The KV-D20 features a beep function to provide an audio signal for workers.
The beep sounds while special utility relay 2511 is turned on.
2511 is OFF. 2511 is ON.

Visual KV
Series
Beep
Key-lock function
The key-lock function is used to lock the display screen.
When the key-lock function is set, the current screen is locked regardless of the
display screen mode or status.
To set or reset the key-lock function, press the and ▲ (▼) keys simultaneously for
three seconds.
The key-lock setting is retained even when the KV-D20 is turned off once and on
again.
Key-lock Key-unlock (reset)
Screen retention function

When the KV-D20 is turned on again, it shows the last screen displayed before the
4 power was turned off.
However, the decimal/hexadecimal notation setting in device mode is not retained.
Decimal notation is used when the KV-D20 is turned on again.
Note 1: The status of the KV-D20 is retained by the KV unit.

Note 2: The status of the KV-D20 is retained only for the memory backup period of
the KV unit.
Note 3: To retain the status longer, select "SAVE" in the system mode of the
Access Window of the KV unit.
➮ Refer to "LOAD mode and SAVE mode" on page 1-96.
Screen change function

Setting special utility relay 2508 to "ON" enables switching between the operator
mode and the device mode. Setting special utility relay 2509 to "ON" enables
switching between the operator mode and the system mode.
Setting each bit of DM1676 to "ON" enables the screen change in the operator
mode. The initial setting (DM1676 = #00000) only allows switching between the
operator, switch comment, and lamp comment screens.
When changing the current mode (screen) is disabled during operation, the setting
becomes effective after the current mode (screen) is changed to another mode
(screen). To activate the setting immediately, turn on special utility relay 2513. The
mode is switched to the operator mode when the setting of special utility relays 2508
or 2509 is changed. The mode is switched to the next available mode when the
setting of data memory DM1676 is changed.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 114 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

DM1676 Mode
Bit 0 Operator screen
Bit 1 Direct access screen (DM1677)
Visual KV
Series
Bit 4 KV-I/O monitor screen
Bit 5 Switch comment screen
Bit 6 Lamp comment screen
* Enter "0" in Bits 7 and following.
one scan as shown below. The relay is automatically turned off after the KV-D20 is
reset.
XXXX 1000 1000 2513
DIFU SET
Precautions about screen change function

Disabling mode (screen) change setting
Do not disable the mode (screen) change setting during operation.
■ When change setting is disabled for the current mode (screen):

The setting is not effective until the current mode (screen) is changed to another
mode (screen).
To activate the setting immediately, turn on special utility relay 2513 for one scan.
one scan as shown below. The relay is automatically turned off after the KV-D20 is 14
reset.
XXXX 1000 1000 2513
DIFU SET
When the setting is activated in the operator mode, the screen is switched to the
next available screen.
For example, when the screen change is set to the operator screen, KV-I/O monitor
screen, or switch comment screens while the direct access screen (DM1677) is
displayed, the screen is switched to the KV-I/O monitor screen after the setting is
activated.
Order of change Screen

0 Operator screen
1 Direct access screen (DM1677)
4 KV-I/O monitor screen
5 Switch comment screen
6 Lamp comment screen
When special utility relay 2508 is turned off in the device mode or special utility relay
2509 is turned off in the system mode and the setting is activated, the current mode
is switched to the operator mode.
* When the operator screen is displayed, the screen change setting is not acti-
vated unless it is changed to another screen with the key. Pressing the ▲ or ▼
key only to change pages does not activate the screen change setting.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 115 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

■ When change setting is disabled for the current mode (screen) and the KV-
D20 is turned off:
The setting is activated when the KV-D20 is turned on again. The screen next to the
disabled screen appears.
■ When change setting is disabled to a mode (screen) other than the current
Visual KV
Series
mode (screen):
The change to the specified mode (screen) is disabled. The mode (screen) is not
displayed when screens are switched.
Process when the KV unit status is changed

When a ladder program is written to the KV unit or the unit is switched to PRO-
GRAM mode, the contents of special utility relays 2500 through 2515 are processed
as shown below.
Relays
Operation in KV unit Description
2500 to 2515
The KV is stopped and When this operation is performed in the device
a ladder program is Cleared mode or system mode, the screen is forced to
written. operator mode.
The current screen is the same as the one
The KV is in operation displayed before the ladder program is
and a ladder program Retained changed. When the change to the current mode
is written. is disabled, the setting is activated after the
current mode is changed to another mode.
The KV is set to The current screen and screen change setting
Retained
PROGRAM state. is the same as in RUN state.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 116 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2.4 Operator Mode

The operator mode has five screens: operator screen, direct access screen,
KV-I/O monitor screen, switch comment screen, and lamp comment screen.
This section includes an overview and description of operation of each screen.
Visual KV
Series
Screen selection in operator mode
Press the key to select screens in the operator mode.
The screens are changed in the following order.
Order of change Mode
0 Operator screen
4 KV-I/O monitor screen
5 Switch comment screen
6 Lamp comment screen
* The operator screen appears after the lamp comment screen.

It is necessary to turn on the bit of the desired screen to enable selection in
DM1676.
➮ Refer to "Screen change permission in operator mode" on page 1-129.
The initial setting allows switching between the operator, switch comment, and
lamp comment screens only.
Operator screen (initial screen) 14

➮ Page 1-118
DEFECTIVE: 20PCS
PRODUCED: 456
PRESET CNT: 1000
RLY00010 ON
Direct access screen KV-I/O monitor screen

➮ Page 1-126 (DM1677) ➮ Page 1-127
LED1:MOTOR A RUNNING
LED2:MOTOR B RUNNING
PROCESS SPEED1: 25 LED3:RLY 2506
LED4:RLY 2507
Switch comment screen

(DM1678) ➮ Page 1-128
F1:MOTOR A START
F2:MOTOR A STOP
F3:RLY 2502
F4:RLY 2503
Lamp comment screen

(DM1679) ➮ Page 1-128
PROCESS SPEED3: 25
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 117 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Operator screen
Devices and their attributes can be easily displayed on the KV-D20.
Visual KV
Canceled when is pressed

Series
or when no key is pressed for

25 seconds
1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS 1DEFEC

PRODUCED: 456 PRODUCED: 456 PRODU
PRESET: 1000 PRESET: 1000 PRE
RLY 00010 ON RLY 00010 ON RLY 00
2DEFECTIVE: 20PCS x 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS 1DEFEC

PRODUCED: 456 1.5 sec. PRODUCED: 456 PRODU
RLY00060 ON RLY 00010 ON RLY 00
*1 *3
*2
3DEFECTIVE: 30PCS 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS 1DEFEC
PRODUCED: 456 PRODUCED: 456 PRODU
RLY 00020 ON RLY 00010 ON RLY 00
4DEFECTIVE: 30PCS 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS

PRODUCED: 456 PRODUCED: 456
PRESET: 1000 PRESET: 1000
RLY 00020 ON RLY 00010 ON
4 • Press the ▲ or ▼ key to select the device to

change its value.
5DEFECTIVE: 30PCS
• Only the items that can be changed will flash.
PRODUCED: 456
PRESET: 1000
RLY 00020 ON
Numeric value change mode
• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to switch pages.
• Up to 5 pages can be displayed.
Normal mode
Customized switches F1 through F4 and customized lamps 1 through 4 can be used

in all modes.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 118 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Visual KV
Series
or when no key is pressed
for 25 seconds.
1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS *4 1DEFECTIVE: 9010PCS

x
1.5
sec.
1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS
*3
1DEFECTIVE: PCS 1DEFECTIVE: 10PCS

1DEFECTIVE: 01010PCS
PRODUCED: 456
PRESET: 1000
RLY 00010 ON
• Press the key to move through digits. 14

• Press the s or t key to increment/decrement a value.
• Digits do not shift automatically.
*1. Select the page of the device to change its value and enter the change mode. (The line flashes.)
*2. A line does not flash if it is set to disable the value change by the device attribute display setting. If all
lines are set to disable the value change, no line flashes.
➮ Refer to "Device attribute display setting" on page 1-122.
*3. The value section of the device flashes. (The zero suppression is canceled. The leftmost digit
flashes.)
*4. Confirm the new value.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 119 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Device display setting

Set the desired device to be displayed on the screen to DM1580 (first line) through
DM1599 (20th line) with the setting number according to the following table.
■ Type of device to be displayed

Visual KV
Series
Device Operand value DM1580-1599 setting value

Timer T (0 to 249) 20000 to 20249
Counter C (0 to 249) 21000 to 21249
CTC (0 to 3) 22000 to 22003
CTH (0, 1) 23000 to 23001
Temporary data memory TM (0 to 31) 24000 to 24031
Relay RLY (0 to 17915) 40000 to 57915
• When the change to the operator screen is enabled but no value is entered in
DM1580 through DM1599, "NO PROGRAM" is displayed.
• For example, enter "#30003" to specify DM0003, and "#40010" to specify input
relay 00010.
• The device specified for DM1580 is the one displayed on the first line, and the
device specified for DM1581 is the one displayed on the second line.
• When no device is specified for a certain DM, the line of the DM is displayed as
blank.
Example
When devices are specified for DM1584 and following, the first page is displayed
as blank.
• Timers and counters are displayed using two lines because preset values shown
4 with "PRESET" are also displayed (initial setting). The preset value display can
be hidden by the device attribute display setting.
• Devices can be displayed for as many as five pages (4 lines x 5 pages = 20

lines). The number of devices is reduced when some devices, such as timers
and counters, use two lines. For example, when only timers and counters are
specified, up to 10 devices can be displayed.
• If a device that uses 2 lines is specified on the fourth line of a page, the fourth
line is left blank and the current and preset values are displayed on the first line
of the next page.
If a device that uses 2 lines is specified on the 20th line, it is canceled.
First page Second page
The fourth line is left blank.
• If a timer, counter, or high-speed counter that is not described in a ladder

program is specified, "UNUSED" is displayed.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 120 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Displaying contact comments

• The contact comments for the specified devices are displayed from the left end,
provided they are set with alphanumeric characters. However, only comment 1 is
displayed.
• Up to 20 characters can be displayed for a comment. The 21st and following
Visual KV
Series
characters are not displayed.
• If a numeric value and a comment overlap, the numeric value has priority to be
displayed.
• If a device has no contact comment, the device number is displayed.
• If a contact comment is changed and transferred to the KV unit, disconnect the
communication cable of the KV-D20 once and connect it again. This updates the
display.
Note 1: To enter a space to the left of a contact comment, input "~" (swung dash) at
the left end of the comment with the LADDER BUILDER for KV. Spaces without "~"
at the left end will be ignored. When "~" is used in the middle of a contact comment,
it is displayed as "➞".
Note 2: Contact comments can be displayed only when the LADDER BUILDER for
KV Ver. 1.5 or later is used and the compression transfer of contact comments is not
selected.
Note 3: Even the contact comments for ladder programs created with LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x or KV-IncrediWare (DOS) can be displayed on the KV-
D20 after being transferred to the KV unit with the LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver.
1.5 or later.
Note 4: "Not transfer" is initially set as the contact comment transfer setting of the
LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5 or later. To display contact comments on the KV-
D20, enable the contact comment transfer setting with the LADDER BUILDER for
KV Ver. 1.5 or later. 14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 121 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Device attribute display setting [DM1680 (first line) through DM1699 (20th line)]
The KV-D20 allows the display of devices with desired attributes.
When no attributes are specified, the initial setting is used.
The following 10 attributes can be specified using hexadecimal numbers for each
Visual KV
line.
Series
$■ ■ ■ ■ No. Attributes
Set value and function
0 (OFF) * 1 (ON)
Bits Decimal point position:
▲
Decimal point position No decimal point

0 to 3 0 to 15(F)
Bits No. of spaces to the right
▲
Flush-right No. of spaces: 0 to 15(F)

4 to 7 of numeric values
Show comments and
Bit 8 Show/hide numeric values Show comments only.
numeric values.
Bit 9 Show/hide signs Hide signs. Show signs.
▲
Bit 10 No. of bits 16 bits 32 bits

Bit 11 Notation Decimal Hexadecimal
Bit 12 Show/hide preset values Show preset values. Hide preset values.
Do not use zero
Bit 13 Zero-suppression setting Use zero suppression.
suppression.
▲
Enable/disable changing
Bit 14 Enable Disable
preset values
(current) values
* 0 is initial setting.
■ Decimal point position (Bits 0 to 3) [Initial setting: 0 (No decimal point)]

• Specify the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
4
• The position of the decimal point can be set within the maximum number of digits
to be displayed. The setting of a larger value is ignored.
Example
When the number of bits is set to 16 bits, the maximum number of digits is 5, so
that the decimal point position can be set between 0 and 5. Values larger than 5
are regarded as 5.
• The decimal point is fixed at the specified position.
• Values between 0 through 15 can be used (4-bit binary).
• If a device has a preset value such as counters and timers, the decimal point is
also set to the preset value at the same position as the current value.
• If a device has no numeric values to the left of the decimal point, "0." is dis-
played.
Example
When a decimal point position is specified at the third digit from the right, value
"123" is displayed as "0.123".
Example
Bits: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting: 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
$ 10 (A) 1 4 2
* 2 digits are displayed in the right of decimal point.

* 4 digits of spaces are placed in the right of value.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 122 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

■ Number of spaces to the right of a numeric value (Bit 4 to 7)

[Initial setting: 0 (No spaces on the right end)]
• Normally, numeric values are displayed from the right end. Setting the number of
spaces to the right of a numeric value changes the position of the numeric value
as desired.
Visual KV
Series
Note: The position of the PRESET value cannot be changed.
• Values from 0 through 15 can be used (4-bit binary).

However, the maximum number of spaces is the one at which the maximum
value is left flush. The number of spaces is not increased even when a larger
number is specified.
Example
When the device display is set to 16 bits with signs, the allowable number of
spaces is obtained in the following equation:
20 - 5 - 1 = 14
↑ ↑
Number of digits Sign
of numeric value
Number of spaces is limited to 14 even when "15" is specified.
• Carefully selecting the number of spaces to the right of a numeric value and the
comment results in an easy-to-see display.
Example
"_" represents a space.
Comment: "DEFECTIVE:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _PACKS"
Number of spaces to the right of a numeric value: 5
↓
5 spaces 14
Displayed comment: "DEFECTIVE:_ _ _ _ _123PACKS"
As shown above, the comment can be added at the end of the numeric value,
improving visibility.
■ Show/hide numeric values (Bit 8)

[Initial setting: Show comment and numeric value]
Specify whether or not to display a numeric value on each line.
• To display only the comment on a line, turn on Bit 8.
• Even when Bit 8 is on, PRESET is displayed for devices using two lines (timers
and counters). To hide the PRESET display, turn on Bit 12 (Show/hide preset
value).
■ Show/hide signs (Bit 9) [Initial setting: Hide signs]

Specify whether or not to display signs for the displayed value.
• To display a minus sign, turn on Bit 9.
• The value is processed with two’s complement number and displayed with a
negative sign.
Example
"#65535" is displayed as "-1".
• A negative sign is displayed to the left of the numeric value. (The sign shifts its
position as the number of digits increases.)
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 123 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

■ Number of bits (Bit 10) [Initial setting: 16 bits]

Specify the number of bits to be used to display the numeric value.
• To display a value with 32 bits, turn on Bit 10.
• The 32-bit display is available only for devices TM and DM.
Visual KV
• When 32-bit display is set, the specified device is displayed in low-order bits, and
Series
the device that has the next device number of the specified device is displayed in
high-order bits.
• Devices CTC and CTH can be displayed with 24 bits, which is specified with the
MEMSW instruction. (In this case, the Bit 10 setting is ignored.)
■ Notation (Bit 11) [Initial setting: Decimal]

Specify the notation used for the numeric value to be displayed.
• To select hexadecimal notation, turn on Bit 11.
• In the hexadecimal notation, "$" is prefixed to the numeric value and the zero-
suppression function is disabled.
• If a device has a preset value such as timers and counters, the same notation is
used for both the preset value and the current value.
• The initial setting for relay is turning on/off one bit. When Bit 11 is ON, the status
of eight bits is displayed collectively. These eight bits cannot be turned on or off.
• When eight bits are displayed collectively, relays of eight bits starting from the
specified relay are displayed.
Example
When relay 00502 is specified, the status of relays 00502 through 00509 is
displayed from the right end.
4 Decimal display Hexadecimal display 8-bit ON/OFF indication
■ Show/hide preset values (Bit 12) [Initial setting: Show preset values]
Specify whether or not to display a preset value when the device has a preset value
such as timers and counters.
• To hide the preset value, turn on Bit 12.
■ Zero-suppression setting (Bit 13) [Initial setting: Use zero suppression]

Specify whether or not to use the zero-suppression function for the displayed preset
value.
• To disable the zero-suppression function, turn on Bit 13.
■ Enable/disable changing preset values (Bit 14) [Initial setting: Enable]

If a device has a preset value such as timers and counters, specify whether or not to
change the preset value with the KV-D20.
• To disable changes, turn on Bit 14.
■ Enable/disable changing (current) values (Bit 15) [Initial setting: Enable]

Specify whether or not to change the currently displayed value with the KV-D20.
• To disable changes, turn on Bit 15.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 124 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Priority of attribute display (except for Bits 14 and 15)

1. Show/hide numeric value
2. Notation
3. Others
Visual KV
Note 1: When "Show/hide numeric value" is set to OFF (Bit 8 is ON), the numeric
Series
value is not displayed even if other bits are turned ON. Only comments are dis-
played. However, the display of the preset value for a device using two lines (timers
and counters) depends on the Bit 12 setting.
Note 2: When "Notation" is set to "hexadecimal" (Bit 11 is ON), the decimal point,
zero-suppression, and sign settings are ignored even if they are specified.
Cautions about the numeric value change mode

• Numeric values can be changed when the KV is in both RUN and PROGRAM
modes.
• The KV-D20 automatically exits the numeric value change mode and returns to
the normal mode when no keys are pressed for approximately 25 seconds. In
such a case, the value being changed is canceled.
• Even if the zero-suppression function is specified in the normal mode, the
function is canceled in the numeric value change mode. In such a case, some
comments may be hidden by zeros.
• A line does not flash if it is set to disable the value change by the device attribute
display setting. If all lines are set to disable the value change, no line flashes.
• After values are changed, it takes "one scan + 100 ms" at maximum until the
change is reflected.
• All contents of the displayed devices are not actually changed while the KV-D20 14
is in the numeric value change mode. The contents are updated after the KV-D20
returns to the normal mode.
• Do not change the ladder program in the KV while the numeric value is changed
with the KV-D20.
• Values outside of the available setting range cannot be entered.
Error messages
The following table shows the error messages that may appear during the display
setting of DM1580 through DM1599.
Message Description
NO PROGRAM Nothing is specified.
OUT OF RANGE Specified value is out of the available range.
UNUSED Unused timer/counter/high-speed counter is specified.
* For other devices, their values are displayed even if they are not used.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 125 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Direct access screen

This screen corresponds to the digital trimmer mode of the Access Window of the
KV unit. Values in DM1677, DM1678, and DM1679 can be changed in real time.
Visual KV
Operator screen
Series
PROCESS SPEED: 11
KV-I/O monitor screen
Select the device to be changed

from the three devices.
• Press the key to select the increment/decrement quantity.

(1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10000)
4 • Press the ▲ or ▼ key to increment/decrement a value.
(0 to 65535)
• Digits are shifted automatically.

in all screens.
• You can set the DM to be used for direct access in DM1676.

➮ Refer to "Screen change permission in operator mode" on page 1-129.
• Values can be changed to between 0 and 65535.

• When a contact comment is specified, the comment is displayed.
• Pressing the key changes the screen from [Operator screen], [Direct access
screen: DM1677], [Direct access screen: DM1678], [Direct access screen:
DM1679], to [KV-I/O monitor screen].
• The specified increment/decrement quantity is stored until the KV-D20 is turned
off.
Note 1: Numeric values can be changed when the KV unit is in both RUN and
PROGRAM modes.
Note 2: After the current value of DM is changed, it takes "one scan + 100 ms" at
maximum until the change is reflected.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 126 08.3.11, 11:13 AM


Allows simultaneous monitoring of two channels (8 bits x 4) for the ON/OFF status of
the input (IN), output (OUT), and connection information (USE) of the KV Series I/O
devices.
Visual KV
"■" represents the ON status, and "_" represents the OFF status.
Series
Bits are assigned from right to left: bits 0 through 7 on "L" lines, and bits 8 through 15
on "H" lines.
• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to select the

device number (IN, OUT, or USE).
Holding down the ▲ or ▼ key lets the screen scroll faster (turbo function). However,
in the turbo mode, the screen does not show the ON/OFF status but shows only
device numbers.
in all modes.
14
➮ Refer to the table below for the information displayed on the KV-I/O monitor screen.
Model (Series) Connection information Relay/DM No.

IN RLY00000 to 00415
I/O OUT RLY00500 to 00915
USE DM1937
* The initial setting displays "RLY00000" (KV-40: "RLY00100") for "I/O-IN",

"RLY00500" for "I/O-OUT", and "DM1937" for "I/O-USE".
The relays for the expansion unit (RLY00100 to 00415, RLY00600 to 00915) are
displayed only when the corresponding expansion unit is connected.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 127 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Switch comment screen

The customized switches (F1 to F4) are assigned to the following four relays.
Each relay turns on only while the corresponding switch is pressed. When several
switches are pressed simultaneously, one of the relays for the switches turns on.
Visual KV
Customized
Relay No.
Series
switch
F1 RLY2500
F2 RLY2501
F3 RLY2502
F4 RLY2503
• When a contact comment is set to a relay, the comment is displayed (up to 17

characters). When no contact comment is set, the device number is displayed.
➮ Refer to "Displaying contact comment" on page 1-121.
• The customized switches can be used in all modes.
Note 1: The speed required to capture the ON/OFF status of the customized
switches depends on the scan time, communication time, and internal processing
time. If the switches are operated at a speed faster than the capture speed, the KV
unit does not recognize the operation properly.
Note 2: If the modular cable is disconnected while a customized switch is pressed,
the relay corresponding to the switch remains on.
Lamp comment screen

The customized lamps (1 to 4) are assigned to the following four relays.
Each lamp illuminates only while the corresponding relay is ON.
4 Customized
Relay No.
lamp
Lamp 1 RLY2504
Lamp 2 RLY2505
Lamp 3 RLY2506
Lamp 4 RLY2507
• When a contact comment is set to a relay, the comment is displayed (up to 15

characters). When no contact comment is set, the device number is displayed.
➮ Refer to "Displaying contact comment" on page 1-121.
• The customized lamps can be used in all modes.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 128 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Screen change permission in operator mode

The operator mode has five screens.
You can set the permission to change the screens in DM1676. Turn on the bit of the
desired screen to be displayed.
Visual KV
DM1676 Mode
Series
Bit 0 Operator screen
Bit 4 KV-I/O monitor screen
Bit 5 Switch comment screen
Bit 6 Lamp comment screen
* Enter "0" in Bits 7 and following.
• When no bits are specified in DM1676 (DM1676: #00000), changes are limited to
between the operator, switch comment, and lamp comment screens (Initial
setting).
• When changing the current mode (screen) is disabled during operation, the
setting becomes effective after the current mode (screen) is changed to another
mode (screen). To activate the setting immediately, turn on special utility relay
2513. The mode is switched to the next available mode.
14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 129 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2.5 Device Mode

This section includes an overview and description of operation of the device mode.
Device mode
Visual KV
This mode corresponds to the device mode of the Access Window of the KV unit.
Series
The device mode allows you to display all values of devices: data memory (DM),
temporary memory (TM), timers (T), counters (C), high-speed counters (CTH), high-
speed counter comparators (CTC), trimmers (TRM), and relays (RLY). (T, C, CTH,
and CTC values can be displayed only when they are described in the ladder
program).
Moreover, you can change the values of all devices except for TRM and the relays
set to 8-bit ON/OFF indication.
Data memory (Initial screen)
Relay
Temporary data memory
Trimmer
(value cannot
Timer
be changed)
Counter High-speed counter comparator
• Pressing the key changes between decimal and hexadecimal notation.

(This change switches relays between ON/OFF display and 8-bit ON/OFF
indication. When the 8-bit ON/OFF indication is set, these eight bits cannot be
turned ON or OFF.)
• When the 8-bit ON/OFF indication is set, the relay numbers 0 through 7 (8
through 15) are assigned from the right to left.
When the 8-bit ON/OFF indication is reset to the ON/OFF display, the device that
was displayed on the first line comes to the top of the screen.
Example
• In the hexadecimal notation, "$" is prefixed to the numeric value and the zero-
suppression function is disabled.
• In the device mode, contact comments are not displayed but only device numbers
are displayed.
• Devices of consecutive numbers are displayed on four lines.
• In the device mode, the attributes specified in DM1680 through DM1699 are not
reflected.
• CTC and CTH can be changed to a 24-bit display with the MEMSW instruction. In
this case, other devices remain at a 16-bit display.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 130 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

• To change from the operator mode to the device mode, special utility relay 2508
must be turned on. (The initial setting disables the change.)
• When changing to the current mode (screen) is disabled during operation, the
Visual KV
2513. The mode is switched to the operator mode.
Series
• When high-speed counter is specified, CTH0, CTC0, and CTC1, or CTH1, CTC2,
and CTC3 are displayed on one screen.
• If a timer, counter, or high-speed counter that is not described in a ladder
program is specified, "- - - - -" is displayed.
Precautions about numeric value change mode (when a device is flashing)

• Numeric values can be changed when the KV unit is in both RUN and PRO-
GRAM modes.
• The KV-D20 automatically exits the numeric value change mode and returns to
the normal mode when no keys are pressed for approximately 25 seconds.
• Even if the zero-suppression function is specified in the normal mode, the
function is canceled in the numeric value change mode.
• After values are changed, it takes "one scan + 100 ms" at maximum until the
change is reflected.
• All contents of the displayed devices are not actually changed while the KV-D20
is in the numeric value change mode. The contents are updated after the KV-D20
returns to the normal mode.
• Do not change the ladder program in the KV while the numeric value is changed
with the KV-D20.
14
• Values outside of the available setting range cannot be entered.
• The numeric value change mode is canceled when a user message is displayed
during the change.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 131 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Operation example for device mode

The following is an example of the operation to change the value of data memory.
Note: The method is the same for other devices.

Visual KV
Series
Canceled when is
pressed or when no key
is pressed for 25 seconds
x
1.5 sec.
*1 *2
Press the ▲ or ▼ key to move the flashing line

and select the device to be changed (within a
4 page).

• Press the ▲ or ▼ key to select the
device number to be displayed. *1
• The turbo function is available to x1.5 sec.
increment/decrement the device number.
• The numeric value display is not
displayed while the turbo function is
used.
Display change between decimal and hexadecimal

Normal mode (Relays are changed between ON/OFF status and
8-bit ON/OFF indications.)
To select devices, you can scroll the screen faster by holding down the ▲ or ▼ key
(turbo function). However, in the turbo mode the screen does not show values but
shows only device numbers.

in all modes.
seconds in the normal mode to set/reset the key-lock function.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 132 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Visual KV
Series
or when no key is pressed for
25 seconds
*3
x
1.5
sec.
*2
• Press the key to move through digits.

• Press the or key to increment/decrement a value.
• Digits are not shifted automatically.
14
*1. Change the page to select the device and enter the change mode. (A device
number flashes.)
*2. The value section of the device flashes. (Zero suppression is canceled. The
leftmost digit flashes.)
*3. Confirm the changed value.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 133 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.2.6 System Mode

This section includes an overview and description of operation of the system mode.
System mode
Visual KV
This mode corresponds to the system mode of the Access Window of the KV unit.
Series
The system mode allows you to change the KV unit between RUN and PROGRAM
modes with the KV-D20.
RUN mode PROG mode

Confirm the change
x 1.5 sec.
• To change from the operator mode to the system mode, special utility relay 2509
must be turned on. (The initial setting disables the change.)
• When changing the current mode (screen) is disabled during operation, the
2513. The mode is switched to the operator mode.
• The current status of the KV unit is displayed on the fourth line.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 134 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.3 Examples of Ladder Programs

4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs
Visual KV
This section describes basic ladder programs for actual use of the KV-D20.
Series
Before creating ladder programs
Notes on contact comment display
When entering a contact comment, note the following:
• Enter a contact comment using alphanumeric characters.

• To enter a space to the left of a contact comment, input "~" (swung dash) at the
left end of the comment with the LADDER BUILDER for KV. Spaces without "~"
at the left end will be ignored. When "~" is used in the middle of a contact com-
ment, it is displayed as "➞".
• Contact comments can be displayed only when the LADDER BUILDER for KV
Ver. 1.5 or later is used and the compression transfer of contact comments is not
selected.
• Even the contact comments for ladder programs created with LADDER BUILDER
for KV Ver. 1.0x or KV-IncrediWare (DOS) can be displayed on the KV-D20 after
being transferred to the KV unit with the LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5 or
later.
• "Not transfer" is initially set as the contact comment transfer setting of the
LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5 or later. To display contact comments on the
KV-D20, enable the contact comment transfer setting with the LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5 or later.
14
Type of device to be displayed

Set the desired device to be displayed on the screen to DM1580 (first line) through
DM1599 (20th line) with the setting number according to the following table.
Device Operand value DM1580-1599 setting value
Timer T (0 to 249) 20000 to 20249
Counter C (0 to 249) 21000 to 21249
CTC (0 to 3) 22000 to 22003
CTH (0, 1) 23000 to 23001
Temporary data memory TM (0 to 31) 24000 to 24031
Relay RLY (0 to 17915) 40000 to 57915
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 135 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Device attribute display setting [DM1680 (first line) through DM1699 (20th line)]
The following 10 attributes can be specified. ➮ Refer to page 1-122 for details.
$■ ■ ■ ■ No. Attributes
Set value and function
0 (OFF) * 1 (ON)
Visual KV
Bits Decimal point position:

Series
Decimal point position No decimal point

0 to 3 0 to 15(F)
Bits No. of spaces to the right
▲
Flush-right No. of spaces: 0 to 15(F)

4 to 7 of numeric values
Show comments and
Bit 8 Show/hide numeric values Show comments only.
numeric values.
Bit 9 Show/hide signs Hide signs. Show signs.
▲
Bit 10 No. of bits 16 bits 32 bits

Bit 11 Notation Decimal Hexadecimal
Bit 12 Show/hide preset values Show preset values. Hide preset values.
Do not use zero
Bit 13 Zero-suppression setting Use zero suppression.
suppression.
▲
preset values
(current) values
* 0 is initial setting.
Basic ladder programs

Displaying "_ _ _PACKS"
Operator screen Ladder program
4 1 2 3 4
2002 #21000 $1050
DW DW
DM1580 DM1680
PRODUCED: 100PACKS
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• Display the current value of C000 with a comment. The counter preset value is
not displayed.
• To avoid overlapping the character and numeric value, shift the position of the
numeric value by 5 digits to the left.
Comment
Device No. Comment 1
Counter C000 P R OD U C E D : PACKS
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 136 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Displaying a decimal point

2002 #30000 $0002
DW DW
1 2 3 4 DM1580 DM1680
Visual KV
Series
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
Display a decimal point in the third place from the right in DM0000 (display two
digits to the right of the decimal point).
Comment
Data memory DM0000
Displaying a two-word number

2002 #30100 $0400
DW DW
1 2 3 4
DM1580 DM1680
PRODUCT A: 123456789
F1 F2 F3 F4 14
Description
Display a two-word number consisting of the low-order 16 bits in DM0100 and the
high-order 16 bits in DM0101 (with a comment).
Comment
Data memory DM0100 P R OD U C T A :
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 137 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Displaying a value with a sign

2002 #23000 $0200
DW DW
DM1580 DM1680
1 2 3 4
Visual KV
CURRENT POS: -2367

Series
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
Display the value of CTH0 as a binary value with a sign.
Example
"#65535" is displayed as "-1".
Comment
High-speed counter CTH0 CURR ENT POS :
Displaying hexadecimal notation

2002 #24010 $0800
DW DW
1 2 3 4 DM1580 DM1680
4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
Display the value in TM10 in hexadecimal notation ($).
Comment
Temporary memory TM10
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 138 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Displaying current and preset values of counter simultaneously

2002 #21100 $0000
DW DW
DM1580 DM1680
1 2 3 4
Visual KV
Series
PRESET
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• Display the current and preset values of C100 simultaneously. The upper line is
the current value, and the lower line is the preset value.
Comment
Counter C100
Changing devices to be displayed

Operator screen
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ACCEPTABLE: DEFECTIVE:
F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
14
Ladder program
2500 2501 #21000 $1000
DW DW
DM1580 DM1680
2500 2501 #21001 $1000
DW DW
DM1580 DM1680
Description
Change the displayed device by pressing customized switches F1 and F2.
Comment
C000 A C C E P TA B L E
Counter
C001 DE F E C T I VE
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 139 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Disabling mode change

2002 $0001
DW
1 2 3 4 DM1676
Visual KV
Series
F1 F2 F3 F4
The screen is locked.

The mode cannot be changed.
Description
Displays only the operator screen on the KV-D20.
Note: This ladder program displays nothing on the operator screen.
Sounding a beep
0000 2511
1 2 3 4
Beep
F1 F2 F3 F4
4 Description
The KV-D20 produces a beep sound while input 0000 is ON.
Setting customized switches

2500 0500
1 2 3 4
2501 0501
2502 0600
2503 0603
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• Pressing customized switch F1 turns ON output 0500.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 140 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Setting customized lamps

0000 2504
1 2 3 4
0001 2505
Visual KV
Series
0002 2506
0003 2507
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• Customized lamp 1 illuminates while input 0000 is ON.
Disabling the zero-suppression function

2002 #30100 $2000
DW DW
1 2 3 4
DM1580 DM1680
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description 14
Display the value in DM0100 without the zero-suppression function.
Comment
Data memory DM0100
Changing numeric values individually

2002 #30000 $0000 #30001 $8000 #30002 $8010
DW DW DW DW DW DW
1 2 3 4 DM1580 DM1680 DM1581 DM1681 DM1582 DM1682
TARGET:
PRODUCED:
OK RATIO:
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
Among the displayed values of DM0100, DM0101, and DM0102, enable the change
in values only for DM0100.
Comment
DM0000 TARGE T :
Data memory DM0001 PRODUCED :
DM0002 OK RAT I O : %
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 141 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Displaying a flashing message

0000 T001 #41000 $0100 #0005
DW DW T000
DM1580 DM1680
1 2 3 4
T000 #41001 $0100 #0010
Visual KV
DW DW T001
NOW RUNNING DM1580 DM1680
Series
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• The comment display flashes (disappears for 1 second and appears for 0.5
seconds) while input 0000 is ON.
• The status of the device is not displayed. Only the comment is displayed.
Comment
01000 * * * N OW R U N N I N G * * *
Relay ~
01001
Entering spaces at the beginning of a comment

2002 #30700 $0020
DW DW
1 2 3 4 DM1580 DM1680
4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Description
• Display the value in DM0700 with a comment.
• The comment is displayed at the right end only.
Comment
Data memory DM0700 ~ mm
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 142 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs

This section includes examples of ladder programs for actual use of the KV-D20,
along with the operator screen display and comment to be entered.
Refer to "Before creating ladder programs" on page 1-135 for the notes about
contact comment entry and details about the comment type and attributes.
Visual KV
Series
Example of displaying user messages
Display user messages.
The user messages are displayed at the rising edge of inputs 0000 through 0002.
A beep sounds for three seconds only when input 0002 turns ON.
The user message is canceled by pressing the key of the KV-D20.
Operator screen
When input 0000 turns ON When input 0001 turns ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5 MORE PRODUCTS
OUT OF MATERIAL GO TO PRODUCT B
F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
When input 0002 turns ON
1 2 3 4
TARGET FIGURE
REACHED
Beep 14
F1 F2 F3 F4
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 143 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Ladder program
0001 To display user messages
0002 Display a user message (contact comment for input 0000).

Visual KV
0000 1000 1000 #40000 2515

0003 DIFU DW SET 1
Series
DM1950
Message User
0004 Display a user message (contact comment for timer 010). No. message
display
0001 1001 1001 #20010 2515
0005 DIFU DW SET 2
DM1950
Display a user message (contact comment for DM0100) Message User
0006 No. message
and produce a beep sound. display
0002 1002 1002 2511 #30100 2515
0007 DIFU SET DW SET 3
DM1950 User
Beep Message message
sounds. No. display
2511 #00030 T000 2511
0008 T000 RES 4
Beep Beep
sounds. sounds.
END
0009
ENDH
0010
1. At the rising edge of input 0000, specify "#40000 (input relay 0000)" in the user
message DM (DM1950). Turn on (SET) special utility relay 2515 to display the
user message.
2. At the rising edge of input 0001, specify "#20010 (timer T010)" in the user
message DM (DM1950). Turn on (SET) special utility relay 2515 to display the
user message.
3. At the rising edge of input 0002, specify "#30100 (DM0100)" in the user message
DM (DM1950). Turn on (SET) special utility relay 2515 to display the user
4 message.
At the same time, turn on (SET) special utility relay 2511 to produce a beep
sound for three seconds.
Comment
Relay 0000 ~ C AU T I ON ! ! OU T OF MAT E R I AL
Timer T010 ~5 MO R E P R O D U C T S G O TO P R OD U C T B
Data memory DM0100 ~TARGET F I GURE REACHE D
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 144 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Example of displaying messages with titles

Display messages with titles.
The current values of C000 and C001 are displayed with comments.
The comments of relays 10000 and 10001 are used as titles.
Switching between screens is disabled.
Visual KV
Series
Operator screen
1 2 3 4
*MILK CARAMEL NO 1*
PRODUCED: 470PACKS
DEFECTIVE: 12PACKS
ABCDE CO.
F1 F2 F3 F4
Ladder program
0001 To display product information
0002 Display values of counters 0 and 1 with titles.
0003 Switching to other modes is disabled. The screen cannot be changed.
0004 Initial setting
2002 $0001
0005 DW 1
Always ON DM1676
0006 Counter
14
0000 #65535
0007 C000
0001
0002 #00010
0008 C001
0003
0009 Display titles.
0010 Use the comments for internal utility relays 10000 and 10001 as titles.
2002 #50000 $0100 #50001 $0100

0011 DW DW DW DW 2
Always ON DM1580 DM1680 DM1583 DM1683
0012 Display the current values of the counters and disable changes.
2002 #21000 $D050 #21001 $D050

0013 DW DW DW DW 3
END
0014
ENDH
0015
1. Turn on Bit 0 of DM1676 ($0001) to allow the screen to be changed only to the
operator screen.
2. Assign relay 10000 to the device displayed on the first line (specify "#50000" in
DM1580) and set the attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8: ON)
(DM1680 = $0100).
Assign relay 10001 to the device displayed on the fourth line (specify "#50001" in
DM1583) and set the attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8: ON).
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 145 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

3. Assign counter C000 to the device displayed on the second line (specify
"#21000" in DM1581). Set the attributes so that the number of spaces at the right
end is "5" ($0050), the counter preset value is hidden (Bit 12: ON), changing the
preset value is disabled (Bit 14:ON), and changing the value is disabled (Bit 15:
ON) (DM1681 = $D050).
Assign counter C001 to the device displayed on the third line (specify "#21001" in
Visual KV
DM1582). Set the attributes so that the number of spaces at the right end is "5"
Series
($0050), counter preset values are hidden (Bit 12: ON), changing the preset
value is disabled (Bit 14:ON), and changing the value is disabled (Bit 15: ON)
(DM1682 = $D050).
Comment
10000 * M I L K C A R AM E L NO 1**
Relay
10001 **** ABCDE CO. *****
C000 P R ODU C E D : PACKS
Counter
C001 DEFECTI VE: P ACKS
Example of position control

Operate the KV-D20 to use the simplified positioning control function of the KV basic
unit. Each parameter is set in the numeric value change mode of the operator
screen.
➮ Refer to "Changing numeric values individually" on page 1-141.
When an error relating to the simplified positioning control function occurs, the KV-
D20 displays the message according to the error code and produces a beep sound.
The user message display is canceled by pressing the key of the KV-D20.
The customized switches are assigned to the following functions:
4 F1: Starts positioning.
F2: Slow-down stop
F3: Emergency stop
F4: Not used
The customized lamps are assigned to the following functions:
LED1: Illuminates during positioning.
LED2: Not used
LED3: Not used
LED4: Not used
➮ Refer to Chapter 5 for details about positioning control on page 3-253.
Operator screen Switch comment screen

F1:START
F2:SLOWDOWN STOP
1 2 3 4
F3:EMERGENCY STOP
F4:RLY 2503
STARTUP SPD:
RUN SPD:
ACCEL/DECEL SPD:
MOVE: Lamp comment screen
LED1:POSITIONING
F1 F2 F3 F4 LED2:RLY 2505
LED3:RLY 2506
LED4:RLY 2507
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 146 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Ladder program
0001 Parameter settings for positioning control
0002 Use the KV-D20 to set the parameters for the simplified positioning control of the KV
basic unit.
Visual KV
Series
0003 Enable changing the screen between the operator, switch comment, and lamp comment
screens.
2002 $0061
0005 DW 1
DM1676
Always ON
0006 Customized switch setting
0007 Start positioning control operation.
2500 2310
0008 2
Start
0009 Slow-down stop
2501 2308
0010 3
Slow-down
stop
0011 Emergency stop
2502 2309
0012 RES 4
Operating Operating
0013 Customized lamp setting
0014 RUNNING lamp
2309 2504
0015 5
Always ON 14
0016 Preset value display
Set the display of the contents of the data memory for the positioning
0017
control.
2002 #31480 $0030 #31481 $0030 #31482 $0030 #31484 $0430
0018 DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW 6
DM1580 DM1680 DM1581 DM1681 DM1582 DM1682 DM1583 DM1683
0019 Display a user message when positioning setting error occurs.
0020 Use the contact comment of TM to display user messages.
2002 DM1486 #00000 2010 1100 1100 #24000 DM1950 2515 #00000
0021 LDA CMP DIFU ADD STA SET DW 7
Always Error DM1486
ON code ≠ User User Error code
message message
0022 Produce a beep sound when a user message is displayed. display display
2515 2511
0023 8
User Beep
message
display
END
0024
ENDH
0025
1. Turn on Bits 0, 5, and 6 of DM1676 ($0061) to enable changing the screen

between the operator, switch comment, and lamp comment screens.
2. The operation starts when customized switch F1 is pressed.
3. The operation is slowed down and stopped when customized switch F2 is
pressed.
4. The operation is stopped in an emergency when customized switch F3 is
pressed.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 147 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

5. Customized lamp 1 illuminates during the positioning control operation.

6. Assign DM1480 to the device displayed on the first line (specify "#31480" in
DM1580), and set the attributes so that the number of spaces at the right end is
"3" ($0030) (DM1680 = $0030).
Assign DM1481 to the device displayed on the second line (specify "#31481" in
Visual KV
Series
"3" ($0030) (DM1681 = $0030).

Assign DM1482 to the device displayed on the third line (specify "#31482" in
"3" ($0030) (DM1682 = $0030).
Assign DM1484 to the device displayed on the fourth line (specify "#31484" in
"3" ($0030) and the number of bits is "32 bits" (Bit 1: ON) (DM1683 = $0430).
7. When any error codes are input to DM1486 (DM for positioning control error
code) (DM1486 is not "0"), the contact comment stored in the temporary memory
corresponding to the error code is displayed as a user message.
When the user message is displayed, DM1486 is cleared (set to "0").
8. A beep sounds while the user message is displayed.
Comment
2500 START
2501 S L OWDOWN S T O P
Relay
2502 EMERGENCY STOP
2504 P OS I T I ON I NG
DM1480 S TA R TU P SPD: Hz
DM1481 R UN S P D : Hz
Data memory
DM1482 ACC E L / D ECE L SPD: ms
DM1484
4 TM11
MOV E :
~START
F R EQ U E N C Y
PLS
SET ERROR ! !
~RUN
TM12 F R EQ U E N C Y SET E R ROR ! !
~SE T
TM13 FR EQU E NCY OUT OF R ANGE ! !
Temporary ~S TAR T >RUN
TM14 FR EQUENCY E R ROR ! !
memory ~ACC E L / D ECE L T I ME
TM15 O U T O F R AN G E ! !
~S Y S T E M E R R O R
TM16
~A C C E L / D E C E L
TM17 T I ME PULSE SET ERR OR ! !
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 148 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Example of frequency counter

Operate the KV-D20 to use the frequency counter function of the KV basic unit. In
the numeric value change mode of the operator screen, set the number of pulses of
one encoder rotation to obtain the measurement cycle and rpm.
Visual KV
Series
F1: Starts operation.
F2: Finishes operation.
F3: Frequency (Hz) measurement
F4: Rotation (rpm) measurement
LED1: Illuminates during operation.
LED2: Illuminates during frequency (Hz) measurement.
LED3: Illuminates during rotation (rpm) measurement.
LED4: Not used
➮ Refer to "4.5.3. Frequency Counter Function" on page 3-231 for details.
Operator screen Switch comment screen

F1:START
F2:END
1 2 3 4
F3:UNIT CHANGE (Hz)
F4:UNIT CHANGE (rpm)
FREQUENCY COUNTER:Hz
MEASUREMENT CYCLE: 0ms
PULSE FOR 1 ROTATION:0PLS
FREQUENCY: 0Hz Lamp comment screen
LED1:MEASURING
F1 F2 F3 F4 LED2:UNIT (Hz)
LED3:UNIT (rpm)
LED4:RLY 2507
F3 F4
14
FREQUENCY COUNTER:rpm
MEASUREMENT CYCLE: 0ms
PULSE FOR 1 ROTATION:0PLS
ROTATION: 0rpm
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 149 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Ladder program
0001 Frequency counter
0002
Use the KV-D20 to set the parameters for the frequency counter of the KV
basic unit and to display the measured frequency.
Enable changing the screen between the operator, switch comment, and lamp
Visual KV
0003
comment screens.
Series

2002 $0061
0005 DW 1
Always ON DM1676
2002 HSP
0006 0004 2
Always ON
0008 Start frequency counter operation.

2500 2305
0009 SET 3
Frequency
counter
0010 Finish frequency counter operation. operation
2501 2305
0011 RES 4
Frequency
counter
0012 Change units (Hz). operation
2502 1000
0013 RES 5
Unit change
0014 Change units (rpm).
2503 1000
0015 SET 6
Unit change
0017 MEASURING lamp

4 2305 2504
0018 7
Frequency counter
operation
0019
Display units (Hz).
1000 2505
0020 8
Unit change
0021 Display units (rpm).
1000 2506
0022 9
Unit change
0023 Preset value display
0024 Set the display of the contents of the data memory for the frequency counter.
2002 #31404 $0030 #30000 $0030
0025 DW DW DW DW 10
0026 Change the displayed values when the units are changed.
0027 Display values in Hz.

1000 #24030 $0100 #31405 $8030
0028 DW DW DW DW 11
Unit change DM1580 DM1680 DM1583 DM1683
0029 Display values in rpm.

1000 #24031 $0100 #30001 $8030
0030 DW DW DW DW 12
Unit change DM1580 DM1680 DM1583 DM1683
0031 Calculation of rpm

1000 DM1405 #00060 DM0000 DM0001
0032 LDA MUL DIV STA 13
Unit Measured No. of No. of
change frequency pulses for rotations
(Hz) 1 rotation (rpm)
END
0033
ENDH
0034
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 150 08.3.11, 11:13 AM


2. Set the input time constant of input 0004 to 10 µs for pulse input.
3. The measurement starts when customized switch F1 is pressed.
Visual KV
4. The measurement stops when customized switch F2 is pressed.
Series
5. The frequency (Hz) measurement is set when customized switch F3 is pressed.
6. The rotation (rpm) measurement is set when customized switch F4 is pressed.
7. Customized lamp 1 illuminates during frequency counter operation.
8. Customized lamp 2 illuminates during frequency (Hz) measurement.
9. Customized lamp 3 illuminates during rotation (rpm) measurement.
10. Assign DM1404 to the device displayed on the second line (specify "#31404" in
"3" ($0030) (DM1681 = $0030).
Assign DM0000 to the device displayed on the third line (specify "#30000" in
"3" ($0030) (DM1682 = $0030).
11. During frequency (Hz) measurement (relay 1000 is turned off), assign TM30 to
the device displayed on the first line (specify "#24030" in DM1580), and set the
attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8: ON) (DM1680 = $0100).
"3" ($0030) and changing the value is disabled (Bit 15: ON) (DM1683 = $8030).
12. During rotation (rpm) measurement (relay 1000 is turned on), assign TM31 to
the device displayed on the first line (specify "#24031" in DM1580), and set the
attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8: ON) (DM1680 = $0100). 14
"3" ($0030) and changing the value is disabled (Bit 15: ON) (DM1683 = $8030).
13. The number of rotations (rpm) is obtained during rotation (rpm) measurement
(when relay 1000 is turned on) using the following equation.
No. of rotations (rpm) = Measured frequency (Hz) x 60 ÷ No. of pulses for 1 rotation
Comment

2500 S T AR T
2501 E ND
2502 UN I T CHANGE ( H z )
Relay 2503 UN I T C H A N G E ( r pm)
2504 ME ASUR I N G
2505 UN I T (Hz )
2506 UN I T ( r pm )
DM0000 PUL SE F OR 1 R O T A T I ON : P L S
DM0001 ROTAT I ON r pm
Data memory
DM1404 ME ASUR E M EN T CYCLE : ms
DM1405 F R EQUENC Y : Hz
TM30 * FREQUENCY C OUNTE R : Hz*

Temporary memory
TM31 * FREQUENCY C OUNTE R : r pm*
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 151 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Example of 24-bit high-speed counter

Operate the KV-D20 to use the 24-bit high-speed counter function of the KV basic
unit. Set the high-speed counter comparator 0 (CTC0) and 1 (CTC1) in the numeric
value change mode of the operator screen.
Visual KV
Series

F1: Turns on/off the high-speed counter operation.
F2: Not used
F3: Resets the high-speed counter.
F4: Not used
LED1: Illuminates during high-speed counter operation.
LED2: Illuminates when high-speed counter comparator 0 is ON.
LED3: Illuminates when high-speed counter comparator 1 is ON.
LED4: Not used
➮ Refer to the "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counters" on page 3-221 for details.
Operator screen
When the high-speed counter is stopped When the high-speed counter is in operation
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER:ON
CURRENT: CURRENT:
PRESET0: PRESET0:
PRESET1: PRESET1:
F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
4
Ladder program
0001 High-speed counter display
0002 Display the current value of high-speed counter 0 with two words.
0003 Enable changing the screen between the operator, switch comment, and lamp comment
screens.
2002 $0061
0005 DW 1
Always ON DM1676
0006 24-bit high-speed counter 0 (phase-differential input)
MEMSW
0007 $0800 2
2008 2113 2114 CTH0
0008 SET RES RES 3
ON for 1 scan
1000 CTH0
0009 0004
#65535 #65535 2504
0010 CTC0 CTC1 4
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 152 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

0011 Alternating switch
1000 SFT
0012 D
1000
2500
0013 CLK 5
Visual KV
1000
2003
Series
0014 RES
Always OFF
0015 Reset
2501 CTC0 CTC1 CTH0

0016 RES RES RES 6
0017 High-speed counter comparator setting
CTC0 2505
0018 7
CTC1 2506
0019 8
0020 Flashing title display
0021 Use the comments of internal utility relays 15000 and 15001 as titles.
1000 T001 #55000 $0100 #00005

0022 DW DW T000 9
DM1580 DM1680
T000 #55001 $0100 #00010
0023 DW DW T001
DM1580 DM1680
Display the current and preset values of high-speed
0024
counter 0 (2-words with a sign and two decimal places)
2008 #23000 $8222 #22000 $0222 #22001 $0222
0025 DW DW DW DW DW DW 10
ON for DM1581 DM1681 DM1582 DM1682 DM1583 DM1683
1 scan END
0026
14
ENDH
0027
1. Turn on Bits 0, 5, and 6 of DM1676 ($0061) to enable changing the screen between the
operator, switch comment, and lamp comment screens.
2. With the MEMSW instruction, turn on SW3-3 of the memory switch ($0800) to set the 24-
bit high-speed counter.
3. Set the high-speed counter in double multiplication mode and reset high-speed counter
0.
4. High-speed counter 0 starts when relay 1000 is turned on. Customized lamp 1 illuminates
while the high-speed counter is operating.
5. The ON/OFF status of relay 1000 is switched every time customized switch F1 is
pressed. (Alternating circuit)
6. The current value of high-speed counter 0 and the outputs of comparators 0 and 1 are
reset when customized switch F2 is pressed.
7. Customized lamp 2 illuminates when comparator 0 turns on.
8. Customized lamp 3 illuminates when comparator 1 turns on.
9. A flicker circuit is used to flash the titles.
When relay 1000 is turned on, assign relay 15000 to the device displayed on the first line
(specify "#55000" in DM1580), and set the attributes so that only the comment is dis-
played (Bit 8: ON) (DM1680 = $0100). Continue this operation for 500 ms.
After 500 ms, assign relay 15001 to the device displayed on the first line (specify
"#55001" in DM1580), and set the attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8:
ON) (DM1680 = $0100). Continue this operation for 1 second.
Repeat the operations above to flash the title.
10. Assign CTH0 to the device displayed on the second line (specify "#23000" in DM1581).
Set the attributes so that the decimal point position is "2" ($0002), the number of spaces
at the right end is "2" ($0020), a sign is used (Bit 9: ON), and changing the value is
disabled (Bit 15: ON) (DM1681 = $8222).
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 153 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Assign CTC0 to the device displayed on the third line (specify "#22000" in DM1582). Set
the attributes so that the decimal point position is "2" ($0002), the number of spaces at
the right end is "2" ($0020), and a sign is used (Bit 9: ON) (DM1682 = $0222).
Assign CTC1 to the device displayed on the fourth line (specify "#22001" in DM1583).
Set the attributes so that the decimal point position is "2" ($0002), the number of spaces
at the right end is "2" ($0020), and a sign is used (Bit 9: ON) (DM1683 = $0222).
Visual KV
Series
Comment
2500 C TH 0 ON/ OF F
2501 C TC0 SE T
2502 C TC1 SE T
2503 C TH0 RE SET
Relay 2504 C TH0 OP E R AT I NG

2505 C TC0 ON
2506 C TC1 ON
15000 ~
15001 * * H I GH - S P E E D COUNT E R :ON* *
DM1900 CURR ENT : mm
Data memory DM1916 P R E S E T0 : mm
DM1918 P R E SE T1: mm
Example of cam switch function

Operate the KV-D20 to use the cam switch function of the KV basic unit. Set the
range of the cam switch output (output 0500 through 0508) in the numeric value
change mode of the operator screen.

4 F1: Starts the cam switch operation and updates settings.
F2: Stops the cam switch operation.
F3: Not used
F4: Not used
LED1: Indicates cam switch error.
LED2: Illuminates during cam switch operation.
LED3: Illuminates during cam switch output 0.
LED4: Illuminates during cam switch output 1.
➮ Refer to the "4.5.5 Cam Switch Function" on page 3-233 for details.
Operator screen
Page 1 Page 2
OUTPUT1 FROM: 0050.0°
TO: 0080.0°
1 2 3 4
TO:0072.0°
INDEX TABLE NO1
CURRENT ANGLE: 118.0°
TO: 0071.0° Page 3
F1 F2 F3 F4 TO: 0100.0°
TO: 0090.0°
Page 5 Page 4
OUTPUT7 FROM: 0270.0° OUTPUT5 FROM: 0120.0°
TO: 0333.0° TO: 0170.0°
OUTPUT8 FROM: 0190.0° OUTPUT6 FROM: 0250.0°
TO: 0345.0° TO: 0314.0°
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 154 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Ladder program
0001 Initial setting of cam switch function
0002 Output relays for cam switch function: 0500 through 0615
0003 Resolution of the encoder to be connected: 360 pulses/rotation
Visual KV
Series
2008 #00500 DM1400 #00720 DM1402
0004 LDA STA LDA STA 1
ON for Initial No. No. of pulses for
1 scan of output 1 encoder rotation
relays
2002 HSP
0005 0004
Always
ON HSP
0006 0006 2
HSP
0007 0008
0008 Initial setting of operator interface panel
Enable changing the screen between the operator, switch comment,

0009
and lamp comment screens.
2002 $0061
0010 DW 3
Always DM1676
ON
2500 1000 1000 2314

0012 DIFU SET 4
Starting cam switch operation
2501 1001 1001 2715
0013 DIFU RES 5
Cam switch
operation
2315 2504
0015 6
0016
2715 2505
7
14
0500 2506
0017 8
0501 2507
0018 9
0019 Title display
0020 Use the comment of TM30 as the title.
2002 #24030 $0100

0021 DW DW 10
Always ON DM1580 DM1680
0022 Display the current angle.
2002 DM1900 #03600 DM1402 DM0000 #30000 $0041

0023 LDA MUL DIV STA DW DW 11
Always Current No. of pulses Current DM1581 DM1681
ON No. of for 1 encoder angle
pulses rotation
0024 Display the setting of the output range of the cam switch function.
2002 #31406 $2041 #31407 $2041 #31408 $2041 #31409 $2041

0025 DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW
Always ON DM1582 DM1682 DM1583 DM1683 DM1584 DM1684 DM1585 DM1685
#31410 $2041 #31411 $2041 #31412 $2041 #31413 $2041
#31414 $2041 #31415 $2041 #31416 $2041 #31417 $2041
0027 DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW 12
#31418 $2041 #31419 $2041 #31420 $2041 #31421 $2041
#31422 $2041 #31423 $2041
0029 DW DW DW DW
DM1598 DM1698 DM1599 DM1699
END
0030
ENDH
0031
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 155 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

1. Set the initial number of relays for the cam switch function (0500) in DM1400,
and "No. of 1 encoder rotation x 2 (360 x 2 = 720)" in DM1402.
2. Set the input time constant of input 0004 to 10 µs.
Set the input time constant of input 0006 to 10 µs.
Set the input time constant of input 0008 to 10 µs.
Visual KV

Series

4. The cam switch function is started at the rising edge of the ON status of custom-
ized switch F1.
5. The cam switch function is stopped at the rising edge of the ON status of custom-
ized switch F2.
6. Customized lamp 1 illuminates when a cam switch error occurs.
7. Customized lamp 2 illuminates during cam switch operation.
8. Customized lamp 3 illuminates when cam switch output 0 turns on.
9. Customized lamp 4 illuminates when cam switch output 1 turns on.
10. Assign TM30 to the device displayed on the first line (specify "#24030" in
DM1580), and set the attributes so that only the comment is displayed (Bit 8:
ON) (DM1680 = $0100).
11. The current angle is obtained from the current number of pulses using the
following equation.
Current angle (Units: 0.1°) =
Current No. of pulses x 3600 ÷ No. of pulses for 1 encoder rotation
Assign DM0000 to the device displayed on the second line (specify "#30000" in
DM1581), and set the attributes so that the decimal point position is "1" ($0001)
4 and the number of spaces at the right end is "4" ($0040) (DM1681 = $0041).
12. Assign DM1406 to the device displayed on the third line (specify "#31406" in
DM1582), and set the attributes so that the decimal point position is "1" ($0001),
the number of spaces at the right end is "4" ($0040), and the zero-suppression
function is disabled (Bit 13: ON) (DM1682 = $2041).
:
Repeat the setting above through to the 20th line.
:
Assign DM1423 to the device displayed on the 20th line (specify "#31423" in
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 156 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Comment
Device No. Comment
2500 C AM SW S TAR T
2501 C AM SW S TOP
2504 C AM SW E R R O R
Relay
Visual KV
2505 C AM SW O PE RAT I NG
Series
2506 C AM SW OUT0
2507 C AM SW OUT1
DM0000 C U RR ENT ANG L E : °
DM1406 OUTPUT0 F R OM : °
~
DM1407 TO : °
~
DM1409 TO : °
~
DM1411 TO : °
~
DM1413 TO : °
Data memory DM1414 OUTPUT4 F R OM : °

~
DM1415 TO : °
~
DM1417 TO : °
~
DM1419 TO : °
~
DM1421 TO : °
~
DM1423 TO : °
Temporary memory TM30 * I NDEX TABLE NO1 *
14
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 157 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix
4.4 Appendix
The appendix includes a troubleshooting section, available character list, and
comment draft sheet.
Visual KV
Series
4.4.1 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting section describes the types, causes, and remedies of the
problems that may arise in each mode or screen.
General operation
Problem Cause Remedy

The RS-232C cable is not
Check the wiring and cable, and connect
connected properly. An
the cable properly.
improper cable is used.
Nothing appears
The KV-D20 is affected by Move the KV-D20 away from the noise
on the screen.
noise radiation. source and turn it on again. If the
The KV-D20 is affected by problem continues, contact your nearest
static electricity. KEYENCE office.
Change the ladder program so that
Special utility relay 2513
special utility relay 2513 is turned on by
The “STARTING remains ON.
the DIFU instruction.
SYSTEM” screen
Move the KV-D20 away from the noise
does not change.
source and turn it on again.
The screen is The KV-D20 is affected by
frozen. Provide ferrite cores on the modular
noise.
cable. It is more effective to wrap the
cable once around the ferrite core.
4 The screen The KV-D20 is affected by
Provide ferrite cores on the modular
flickers. noise.
The specified value is
Value cannot be Check the number of bits or sign setting
outside of the setting
changed in the and determine the value.
range.
numeric value
The key is not pressed
change mode. Press the key for 1.5 seconds or more.
for 1.5 seconds.
The speed for counting
the displayed value Slow down the speed. The update speed
up/down is too fast to be of the LCD depends on the ambient
displayed on the LCD temperature.
The numeric display.
value update is
slow.
The KV-D20 is affected by
Provide ferrite cores on the modular
noise.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 158 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix

The setting operation
Allow sufficient intervals when pressing
switches are pressed with
The response the setting operation switches.
short intervals in between.
from the switches
or lamps is slow. The response depends on Change the ladder program so that the
Visual KV
the scan time of the KV
scan time of the KV unit becomes faster.
Series
unit.
Changing to the desired Check the setting of special utility relays
The mode screen mode (screen) is disabled.
2508 and 2509, and DM1676.
cannot be
The key-lock function is
changed. Cancel the key-lock function.
activated.
A certain mode
Changing to the desired Check the setting of special utility relays
(screen) is not
mode (screen) is disabled. 2508 and 2509, and DM1676.
displayed.
Values are entered in
The screen that Do not use DM1673 to DM1675.
DM1673 to DM1675.
appears at startup
The last screen was set to The decimal/hexadecimal display setting
is different from
the hexadecimal setting in in the device mode is not retained after
the one that
the device mode. the power is off.
appeared before
the KV-D20 was Changing the display Check the setting of special utility relays
turned off. before the KV-D20 is 2508 and 2509, and DM1676 for display
turned off is disabled. change setting.
Pressing the
setting operation The key-lock function is
Cancel the key-lock function.
switches is not activated.
accepted.
The user message can be
Press the key.
reset only with the key.
The user message
Change the ladder program so that
cannot be reset. Special utility relay 2515 is
special utility relay 2515 is turned on by
set to be always on.
the DIFU instruction.
The relay assignment in
Check special utility relays 2500, 2501,
14
Customized the ladder program is
2502, and 2503.
switches F1 to F4 incorrect.
cannot be used. The KV unit is not
Check the KV unit.
operating.
Customized lights Check special utility relays 2504, 2505,
the ladder program is
do not illuminate. 2506, and 2507.
incorrect.
the ladder program is Check special utility relay 2511.
A beep does not incorrect.
sound. The ON time for special
Extend the ON time for special utility
utility relay 2511 is too
relay 2511.
short.
Changing the
current screen is The setting is not effective Change the screen. Or, turn on special
disabled, but the until the screen is utility relay 2513 after disabling the
screen is still changed. change.
displayed.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 159 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix
Operator mode
Check the contact comment. The
The comment and numeric
Part of a contact numeric value has priority when
value overlap.
comment is not overlapped.
Visual KV
displayed. The comment has more

Limit the comment to 20 characters.
Series
than 20 characters.
Unfamiliar Full-width characters are
Use only half-width characters (katakana
characters are used for the contact
or alphanumeric characters and spaces).
displayed. comment.
Set automatic setting by selecting
[Communication] and [Comment transfer
setting] with the LADDER BUILDER for
KV.
The contact comment is transferred to
The comment transfer to
the KV unit with the LADDER BUILDER
Contact comment the KV unit is not specified
for KV Ver. 1.0x or the KV IncrediWare
is not displayed. in the LADDER BUILDER
(DOS). Or, the contact comment is
for KV.
compressed with the LADDER BUILDER
for KV Ver. 1.5x.
Transfer the contact comment with the
LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.5x
without compressing it.
The KV-D20 does not recognize the
Spaces cannot be
spaces to the left of a comment unless
entered to the left “~” is not entered.
“~” is entered. Enter “~” at the left end of
of a comment.
the comment.
“~” in a comment
The KV-D20 recognizes
is displayed as Check the contact comment.
“~” in a comment as “➞”.
“➞”.
4 Operator screen
Devices are not specified
for four or more Lines are shown as blank when no
consecutive DM (between device is specified for the DM. Specify
DM1580 and DM1599) in devices for consecutive DM.
Nothing appears
the device display setting.
on the screen.
The display attributes are
set to display comments Check the display attributes (DM1680 to
only, but the devices have DM1699).
no comments.
Unspecified
Some unexpected value is Clear all data in DM1580 to 1599 once
device is
stored in DM1580 to 1599. and set devices again.
displayed.
Devices are
Some unexpected value is Clear all data in DM1680 to 1699 once
displayed in
stored in DM1680 to 1699. and set devices again.
unfamiliar form.
CTC and CTH are
not displayed with CTC and CTH are
32 bits. Or, they automatically switched
are displayed with between 16 bits and 24 Check the ladder program.
24 bits without bits by the MEMSW
any attribute instruction.
settings.
The zero-suppression
Part of the
function is canceled in the
comment is not
numeric value change
displayed in Check the ladder program.
mode. The numeric value
numeric value
has priority when
change mode.
overlapped.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 160 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix

Too m any spaces are
specified to the right of
A contact
comment is not the com m ent by the
Check the ladder program .
displayed. display attribute setting.
There is no space for the
Visual KV
Series
com m ent.
The number of
displayed spaces The num ber of spaces is
is not as specified autom atically adjusted to
in the display Check the ladder program .
display all digits without
device attribute zero suppression.
setting.
Devices do not
flash in the Changing all devices
Check the attributes of the displayed
numeric value displayed on the screen
devices.
change mode. is disabled.
Some devices do
not flash in the Changing the devices is Check the attributes of the displayed
numeric value disabled. devices.
change mode.
The relay values
shown in CH
(8-bit ON/OFF Changing the CH display Change the values after switching
indication) display is not available. them into 1-bit (ON/OFF) display.
cannot be
changed.

The KV-D20 automatically
I/O-IN and I/O- recognizes the connected 14
OUT are not expansion unit and Check the expansion unit.
displayed. displays I/O-IN and I/O-
OUT.
Device mode
The trimmer value
or the relay
values shown in Change the trim m er value with the
C h a n g i n g t h e t ri m m e r
CH (8-bit ON/OFF value and the CH display access window. Change the relay
indication) display is not available. values after switching them into 1-bit
cannot be (ON/OFF) display.
changed.
Contact The device m ode does
comments are not not show contact Change the m ode to the operator
displayed. m ode.
com m ents.
Although devices
are specified in
DM1580 and later The device m ode can Use the operator m ode to specify
data memory, display only four lines of
devices for the desired DM .
they are not consecutive devices.
displayed.
System mode
Operation cannot There is an error with the
Check the KV unit.
be started. KV unit.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 161 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix
4.4.2 Available Character List

The following list shows characters that can be used with the KV-D20.
Visual KV
Series
* Enter "~" to display "➞" on the KV-D20.
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 162 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

4.4 Appendix
4.4.3 Comment Draft Sheet

Copy the following sheet and use it to record comments.
Comment input can be done quickly when the comments are already determined.
Visual KV
Series
1 20 32
1 20 32
1 20 32
Device No. Comment 1 14
1 20 32
1 20 32
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 163 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

Visual KV
Series
KVHKA Chap 04.p65 164 08.3.11, 11:13 AM

KV-300
KV-10/80
Chapter 5
KV-300 and KV-10/80 Hardware
This chapter describes the hardware specifications and wirings for KV-300 and KV-
10/80 Series.
5.1 System Configuration .................................................................... 1-166

5.1.1 KV-300 .................................................................................................. 1-166
5.1.2 KV-10/80 ............................................................................................... 1-167
5.2 Module/Unit Specifications .......................................................... 1-168
5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module ................................................... 1-168
5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ...................................... 1-169
5.2.3 Wiring: KV-300 CPU ............................................................................. 1-170
5.2.4 Wiring: KV-C16X/C32X Connector Input Module .................................. 1-171
5.2.5 Wiring: KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Connector Output Module ..................... 1-172
5.2.6 Wiring: KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module ............................................... 1-173
5.2.7 Wiring: KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T I/O Terminal Modules .... 1-174
5.2.8 Module Names and Functions .............................................................. 1-175
5.2.9 Peripheral Equipment Names and Functions ........................................ 1-176
5.3 Module/Unit Connections ............................................................. 1-178
5.3.1 Environmental Requirements ................................................................ 1-178
5.3.2 Installation Guidelines ........................................................................... 1-178
5.3.3 Assembling the System ......................................................................... 1-179
5.3.4 Mounting to the DIN Rail ....................................................................... 1-180
5.3.5 Removing the Terminal Block ............................................................... 1-181
5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and
DC Power Distribution Module .............................................................. 1-182
5.3.7 I/O Connectors ...................................................................................... 1-183
5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and Power Distribution 1-187
5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions .......................................................... 1-189
5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators ................................................................... 1-191
5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units .................................................................... 1-192
5.3.12 Mounting Environment .......................................................................... 1-194
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 165 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.1 System Configuration ➮ Refer to "Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial

Interface Module" (p.1-239) and
"Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O
5.1.1 KV-300 Module" (p.1-311).
KV-C32T
KV-C16X
KV-R1A KV-L2
KV-U5 Power KV-U4 Power CPU I/O Serial KV-AN6
Distribution Supply Module KV-300 Distribution KV-C32X KV-B16R Interface Analog I/O
Module Module KV-B16S Module Module
KV-300
KV-10/80
Programming support KV-R8X/R8R/R8T I/O Terminal Module

software
KV-H6WE2 (Windows)
KV-H4E (DOS)
IBM PC-AT compatible computer

KV-R16X/R16R/R16T I/O Terminal Module
Note: Be sure to use specified cable only.
KV-P3E(01) Handheld Programmer

➮ Refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).
Z-1 Card reader/writer

(Note: DOS only)
M-2 MEMORY CARD 32K
(32KB)
Memory Cards
➮ Refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).
M-3 MEMORY CARD 128K
(128KB)
1-166 Chapter 5 KV-300 Hardware
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 166 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.1.2 KV-10/80
Handheld programmer
KV-80R(W)/80T(W) KV-P3E(01) Meomory card M-2
MEMORY CARD 32K
Meomory card M-3
MEMORY CARD 128K
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-40R(W)/40T(2W) Programming IBM PC/AT
Support or compatibles
Software
KV-H6WE2 (Windows)
KV-H4E (DOS)
Card reader/writer Z-1

(Note: DOS only)
KV-24R(W)/24T(2W) Expansion units
(separate power supply not required)
KV-8ER(W)/8ET(2W), 8EX(W), 8EYR(W)/8EYT(2W),
16EX(W), 16EYR(W)/16EYT(2W)
KV16R(W)/16T(2W)
Up to 3 expansion units can be connected to the

KV-40, and up to 4 units to the other models.
15
KV-10R(W)/10T(2W) Analog I/O units Power supply

KV-AD4 KV-DA4 KV-U2 KV-U3
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3 C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3
KEYENCE KEYENCE
KV - AD4
KV - DA4
POWER
POWER
ANALOG IN
ANALOG OUT
I0 I1 I2 I3
I0 I1 I2 I3
C4 C5 C6 C7
C4 C5 C6 C7
Only one KV-AD4 or DA4

can be connected.
Chapter 5 KV-300 Hardware 1-167
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 167 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2 Module/Unit Specifications

5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module
Parts and functions
2. Overcurrent indicator (red) 1. POWER indicator (green)

KV-300
3. Heat radiation fin

KV-10/80
4. Power supply input

terminals
100 to 240 VAC (M3)
(+) (–)
6. 24 VDC output (service power supply)
5. Frame Ground terminal
No. Name Function

1 POWER indicator (green) Lights when AC power is supplied to power supply
input terminal 4.
2 Overcurrent indicator (red) Flashes when the service power supply is
5 short-circuited or the main power supply overloads.
3 Heat radiation fin For heat dissipation. Caution: May be hot; do not
touch.
4 Power supply input terminal For connection to 100 – 240 VAC power supply
(M3 screws) (50/60 Hz)
5 FG terminal (M3 screw) Frame ground terminal
6 24 VDC output 24 VDC output terminal for service power supply.
(M3 screws) Total output current: 1.4 A (including main power
supply output current)
Note 1: When the red overcurrent indicator flashes, special utility relay 2812 of the
KV-300 CPU turns ON.
If the main power supply is overloaded:
POWER indicator (green): ON
Overcurrent indicator (red): Flashing
If the service power supply is short-circuited:
POWER indicator (green): OFF
Overcurrent indicator (red): Flashing
Note 2: Install the KV-U4 in the leftmost position of the system. Install the KV-300
CPU immediately to the right of the KV-U4.
Note 3: If the overcurrent indicator flashes, turn OFF the power switch once for at
least one minute and take appropriate countermeasures.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 168 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module

Parts and functions
1. POWER indicator (green)
KV-300
KV-10/80
2. Power input terminal
(M3 screws) for 24 VDC
No. Name Function

1 POWER indicator (green) Lights when DC power is supplied to the power
input terminals 2.
2 Power input terminals For 24 VDC power supply
(M3 screws)
Do not connect an AC power supply to the power input terminals; doing so

CAUTION will damage the KV-U5. 15
Note 1: Supply power of at least 1.5 times the input capacity to the power input
terminal.
Note 2: Install the KV-U5 in the leftmost position of the system. Install the KV-300
CPU immediately to the right of the KV-U5.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 169 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.3 Wiring: KV-300 CPU

Parts and functions
2. CPU operation indicator

(green, red, flasing
1. SELECT indicator (green)
green/red)
8. Input voltage selection switch
6. SELECT button
KV-300
A B
KV-10/80
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4 24V 5V
5 5
INPUT VOLT
3. 32 I/O indicators 6
7
6
7
8 8
(red) 9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
4. Analog timers 0, 1 15 15
7. I/O
5. Modular connector connector
(20-pin)
➮ To change the I/O display mode, refer to page 1-191.
No. Name Function

1 SELECT indicator (green) Lights when I/O indicators show CPU I/Os
(0000-0009, 0500-0503).
2 CPU operation indicator LED Indicates CPU operation status.
5 (green, red, flashing Green: RUN mode
green/red) Red: PROGRAM mode
Alternating green/red flashing: Error indication
3 I/O indicators (red) Shows I/O status of the module selected with the
SELECT button
4 Analog timer (0, 1) Turning the trimmer changes the timer/counter set
value and internal register value. Allows easy
adjustment without a Handheld Programmer.
5 Modular connector RJ-11 Connector for cable (OP-26487 and 26486)
used to connect CPU to Handheld Programmer or
a personal computer.
6 SELECT button For selecting module whose operation is shown on
I/O indicators
7 I/O connector Connector (20-pin) for I/O built-in CPU
8 Input voltage selection switch For selecting input voltage of 24V or 5V
Note: Install the KV-300 CPU immediately to the right of the KV-U4/U5.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 170 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.4 Wiring: KV-C16X/C32X Connector Input Module

Parts and functions
1. READY/SELECT indicator (green)
3. Input voltage selection switch

4. Input time constant
selection switch
KV-300
KV-10/80
24V 5V 0ms 1ms 10ms
2. 34-pin input
connector
KV-C32X KV-C16X
Includes OP-23139 34-pin connector.
No. Name Function

1 READY/SELECT indicator Green LED flashes when the module is selected to
(green) be displayed in CPU I/O indicators, lights when not
selected (during normal operation), and goes out
15
when an error occurs.
2 Input connector 32 input port connector (34-pin)
3 Input voltage selection For selecting input voltage of 24 V or 5 V
switch
4 Input time constant selection For selecting input time constant
switch (Choose between 25 µs ±20%,1 ms ±20%,
or 10 ms ±20%)
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 171 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.5 Wiring: KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Connector Output Module

Parts and functions
1. READY/SELECT indicator (green) 1. READY/SELECT indicator (green)

KV-300
KV-10/80
2. Output
connector
(34-pin)
KV-C32T 3. Output terminal block KV-B16R/B16S
Note 1: The terminal block cover is included as an accessory.

Note 2: The OP-23139 34-pin connector is included with the KV-C32T.
No. Name Function

1 READY/SELECT indicator Flashes when the module is selected for display on
(green) CPU I/O indicators.
Lights when not selected (during normal operation).
2 Output connector 32-output port connector (34-pin)
3 Output terminal block Removable terminal block with 18 terminals,
including 16 output terminals.
5 Note: Only models KV-B16R/KV-B16S and KV-AN6 have removable terminal

blocks. (The KV-AN6 is described later in this manual.)
➮ For instructions on removing the terminal block cover, refer to page 1-181.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 172 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.6 Wiring: KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module

Parts and functions
1. Ready indicator (green)

2. Communications status
indicator (green/orange/red)
KV-300
KV-10/80
3. Communication cable terminal block (M3)
No. Name Function

1 READY indicator (green) Lights when power is ON.
2 Communication status Green: Normal communication
indicator (green/orange/red) Orange: No I/O terminal modules are connected
(or communication is poor).
Red: Communication with KV-300 CPU has failed 15
due to bad connection. Lights momentarily when
power switch is turned ON or OFF.
3 Communication cable For connection of cables used for communication
terminal block (M3 screws) with I/O terminal modules
Use only the specified cable when connecting to terminal modules. Use of any
CAUTION other cable may cause communication errors.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 173 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.7 Wiring: KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T I/O Terminal

Modules
Parts and functions
1. Communications 3. Cover for relay replacement (R16R and R8R only)

status indicator 2. I/O indicator 1. Communica-
tions status 2. I/O indicator
indicator
KV-R16X/R16R/R16T KV-R8X/R8R/R8T
KV-300
KV-10/80
4. I/O terminal block
KV-R16X/R8X (input module) KV-R16R/R16T/R8R/R8T (output module)
ON 5 6
4 D EC
T
'T
0ms 1ms 10ms CLEAR HOLD

3
S EL
7
S EL E
2 8
'T
CT
1 0 DON 9
Left side Left side
view ADDRESS RESPONSE ADDRESS ERROR MODE view
5. ADDRESS setting switch 5. ADDRESS setting switch

6. Input time constant selection switch 7. Error hold switch
No. Name Function

1 Communications status Green: Normal communication
indicator (green/orange/red) Orange: ADDRESS setting is incorrect or commu
5 nication is poor.
Red: KV-R1A I/O distribution module has failed or
transfer path has been disrupted.
2 I/O indicators Indicate I/O status (on KV-R8X/R8T/R8R, LEDs are
arranged in a single row); light when a signal is ON.
3 Cover for relay replacement Open to replace a relay. (KV-R16R/R8R only)
4 I/O terminal block Includes terminals for communication cables and
power supply input.
➮ Refer to connection diagram on page 1-186.
5 ADDRESS setting switch For setting addresses of I/O terminal modules
0–4 ch: Input module addresses
5–9 ch: Output module addresses
6 Input time constant selection For selecting input time constant (KV-R16X/R8X
switch only). Choose between the following:
0 ms 1 ms 10 ms
25 µs ±20% 1 ms ±20% 10 ms ±20%
7 Error hold switch Holds output when an error occurs.
(KV-R16R/R16T/R8R/R8T only)
CLEAR: Turns all outputs OFF when an error
occurs.
HOLD: Holds output when an error occurs.
Note: Use ADDRESS setting switches 0 to 4 for I/O terminal input modules and
switches 5 to 9 for I/O terminal output modules.
An incorrect ADDRESS setting will cause a communication error.
Use only the specified cable when connecting to terminal modules. Use of
CAUTION
any other cable may cause communication errors.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 174 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.8 Module Names and Functions
Model Name Remarks

KV-300 CPU 10 inputs, 4 outputs
KV-U4 Power supply unit 24 VDC, 1.4 A (with service power supply
terminal)
KV-U5 Power distribution module 24 VDC, 3.5 A
KV-C32X Input module 32 inputs
KV-C16X 16 inputs
KV-B16R Output module 16 outputs (relay)
KV-300
KV-B16S 16 outputs (triac)
KV-10/80
KV-C32T 32 outputs (transistor)
KV-R1A I/O distribution module Connects I/O terminal modules to CPU.
➮ See CAUTION.
KV-R16X I/O terminal module/input 16 inputs ➮ See CAUTION.
KV-R8X 8 inputs
KV-R16T I/O terminal module/output 16 outputs (transistor) ➮ See CAUTION.
KV-R8T 8 outputs (transistor)
KV-R16R 16 outputs (relay); replaceable relays
KV-R8R 8 outputs (relay); replaceable relays
KV-AN6 Analog I/O module Analog inputs (4 ch), analog outputs (2 ch)
KV-L2 Serial Interface module One RS-232C port
One RS-232C/RS-422A port (switchable)
KV-P3E(01) Handheld Programmer Models sold after Oct. 21, 1993, are compatible
with the KV-300 CPU.
Use only the specified cable when connecting to terminal modules. Use of
CAUTION any other cable may cause communication errors.
For KV-10/80 users 15

Type Basic unit
Model KV-10R(W) KV-10T(2W) KV-16R(W) KV-16T(2W) KV-24R(W) KV-24T(2W) KV-40R(W) KV-40T(2W) KV-80R(W) KV-80T(W)
Number 6 10 16 24 48
of inputs1.
Number 4 6 8 16 32
of outputs
Type of Relay BJT Relay MOS-FET Relay MOS-FET Relay MOS-FET Relay BJT
output
Power 24 VDC
supply
1. 24 VDC is applicable to inputs of all models.
Type Expansion unit

Model KV-8ER(W) KV-8ET(2W) KV-8EX(W) KV-8EYR(W) KV-8EYT(2W) KV-16EX(W) KV-16EYR(W) KV-16EYT(2W)
Number of 4 8 — 16 —
inputs1.
Number of 4 — 8 — 16
outputs
Type of Relay BJT — Relay BJT — Relay BJT
output
Power 24 VDC
supply
1. 24 VDC is applicable to input of all models.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 175 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.2.9 Peripheral Equipment Names and Functions
Personal computer (PC) Programming Support Memory Card Reader/

Software Writer
IBM PC-AT compatible KV-H6WE2 (Windows)
computer KV-H4E (DOS) Z-1
KV-300
KV-10/80
3 1/2”
Handheld Programmer Memory Cards
KV-P3E(01)
Memory Card M-2 Memory Card M-3
(32 KB) (128 KB)
MEMORY CARD 32K MEMORY CARD 128K
5 Crimping tool Pressure pin (optional)
OP-21734 OP-22186
Connection cable
OP-26487 OP-26486 OP-90906

[Included with (Included with * Z-1 Connection cable
KV-P3E(01) Handheld Programming Support
programmer] Software)
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 176 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

For KV-10/80 users
KV-40R(W)/40T(2W) KV-8ER(W)/8ET(2W)
1 24 input terminals 4 input terminals

1
8
4 9
5 10
6 6
7
KV-300
KV-10/80
7
2 4 input terminals
3 6 24 input terminals
1. Input terminals
Rated input signals for these terminals are 24 VDC.
2. Output terminals
Direct clock pulses as well as ordinary pulses are output through relays 0500 and
0501.
3. Power supply terminals

Supply 24 VDC.
4. POWER indicator
Lights when the power is ON.
5. RUN/ERROR indicator
15
Lights when the unit is in operation.
Flashes when error occurs during operation.
6. Input indicator
Lights when the input signal is ON.
7. Output indicator
Lights when the output signal is ON.
8. Connector cable port

Connects any KV PLC to the handheld programmer or to the external computer.
To make a connection, open the cover on the PLC.
9. Analog timer (Trimmer)

Open the cover to find the trimmer.
The timer/counter setting and the data on the register can be changed without
using the handheld programmer.
➮ Refer to "2.4.2 Application Instructions" on page 3-95.
To avoid damage to the trimmer, do not use excessive force to turn it and
CAUTION do not change the setting or data too frequently.
10. Channel setting switches

Assign an I/O channel number to each expansion unit.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 177 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3 Module/Unit Connections

5.3.1 Environmental Requirements
Choose an appropriate location for installing the KV Series modules.
■ Avoid the following:

• Exposure to direct sunlight.
• Exposure to temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or exceeding 50°C (122°F).
• Exposure to humidity below 35%RH or exceeding 85%RH.
KV-300
KV-10/80
• Areas where condensation occurs due to sudden drops in temperature.

• Exposure to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Exposure to airborne dust, metal particles, oil, or corrosive substances such as
salt.
• Exposure to strong vibration or impact.
• Locations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash the product.
• Exposure to strong magnetic or electrical fields.
5.3.2 Installation Guidelines

• Install the CPU upright, as shown. Upright
• Do not install the CPU on its back or side.

Back Side
• Maintain a 30 mm gap above and below the module so that a finger can be
inserted to release the lock lever and remove the module.
• Maintain a 30 mm gap between the module

and adjacent equipment to avoid
30 mm a
interference from the power supply.
Power
b
supply
30
mm
30 mm a
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 178 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.3 Assembling the System

Connecting modules
To connect the modules, follow the procedure below.
Connection procedure
To connect two modules as shown below:
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-300 KV-C32X
1. Open the lock levers.

Open the two lock levers (upper and lower, as shown) of the right module (KV-
C32X) by pivoting them open.
2. Connect the modules. 15

Insert the lock lever of the right module (KV-C32X) into the slot of the left module
(KV-300 CPU). The bus connector of the KV-300 CPU connects to that of the
KV-C32X.
Bus connector
3. Close the lock levers.

Push down on the lock levers of the right module (KV-C32X) as shown until they
sit flush with the surface of the module. No gap should remain between the
modules.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 179 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

Connection order
When connecting modules, place the AC power supply module or DC power distri-
bution module (KV-U4/U5) at the leftmost position and connect the KV-300 CPU
immediately to the right of the KV-U4/U5. Connect the other modules to the CPU in
any order desired.*
U5 U4 CPU
KV-300
KV-10/80
End plate
Note: Connect the right-end plate only to the right-end module.
* I/O addressing may vary according to connection order.
5.3.4 Mounting to the DIN Rail

To mount the KV-300 Series to the DIN rail, follow the procedure below.
1. Engage the KV-300 with the upper edge of the DIN rail. Pivot the lower portion of
the KV-300 against the DIN rail until a click is heard.
2. Check that the unit is secured to the DIN rail with the clip as shown in A below.
Mount I/O terminal modules to the DIN rail in the same manner.
A B
3. To remove a module, pull out the clip until it appears as shown in B above and
detach the module from the DIN rail.
4. To remount a removed module, push the clip (B) in the direction of the arrow until
it appears as A above, then engage the module with the rail.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 180 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.5 Removing the Terminal Block

To remove the terminal block cover of the KV-B16R/KV-B16S and KV-AN6, follow
the procedure below.
1. First, turn the power OFF. Pull open the terminal block cover from the top.
Terminal lock bar
Open
KV-300
KV-10/80
2. The terminal block is secured with a lock bar as shown below.
Terminal lock bar
15
3. Remove the terminal block by pushing the terminal block lock bar to release the
terminal block.
Remove terminal block
Push
Note: Only the KV-B16R/KV-B16S and KV-AN6 have a removable terminal block.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 181 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and DC

Power Distribution Module
KV-U4 AC Power Supply Module
KV-U4
KV-300
KV-10/80
Using a 1:1 insulation transformer or

noise filter, line noise from the power
supply line can be reduced.
100 to
240 VAC 24 VDC service power supply
±10% (Power supply to external unit)
Twisting the cables reduces

inductive influence. Frame Ground
KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module

Use an external power supply with adequate output capacity. (1.5 times or more).
KV-U5
24 VDC external +
power supply
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 182 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.7 I/O Connectors

KV-300 CPU
I/O connectors
Pin No. I/O Signal 24 VDC (Connector terminal Nos.)

1 I Input COM I/O connector
2 I (Interrupt) 0001 1 11
3 I (Interrupt) 0003 2 12
4 I (High speed counter 1) 0005 3 13 Modular connector
KV-300
KV-10/80
5 I (High speed counter 1 phase) 0007 4 14
6 I (High speed counter 1 RES) 0009 5 15
L 6 16
7 O (with resistor) 0500
L
7 17 123456
8 O (with resistor) 0501
8 18
9 O (with resistor) 0502 L
9 19
10 O (with resistor) 0503 L
10 20
11 I (Interrupt) 0000
12 I (Interrupt) 0002
13 I (High speed counter 0) 0004
A B
14 I (High speed counter 0 phase) 0006 0 0
1 1
15 I (High speed counter 0 RES) 0008

2
3
2
3
I/O connector
4 4
L
16 O 0500 5
6
5
6
L 7 7
17 O 0501 8
9
8
9
L 10 10
18 O 0502 11 11
12 12
L 13 13
19 O 0503 14 14
15 15
20 O Output COM
Load voltage
(See Notes) Modular connector
15
➮ Refer to page 189 for crimping cables to
connectors.
Modular connector
Pin No. I/O Signal
1 — —
2 — +5 V power supply output
3 I RD
4 — SG
5 O SD
6 — —
Note 1: Connecting the output load voltage with the incorrect polarity may damage
the output terminals built into the KV CPU.
Note 2: The output connectors of pin nos. 7 to 10 have built-in 1.6 kΩ current
limiting resistors. Use these to connect drivers.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 183 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

KV-C16X/C32X
<KV-C16X> <KV-C32X>
Pin No. I/O Signal

Connector Pin Pin No. I/O Signal Connector Pin
assignment 1 I 000 assignment
1 I 000
2 I 001 1 18 2 I 001 1 18
3 I 002 2 19 3 I 002 2 19
4 I 003 3 20 4 I 003 3 20
5 I 004 4 21 5 I 004 4 21
6 I 005 5 22 6 I 005 5 22
7 I 006 7 I 006
KV-300
6 23 6 23
KV-10/80
8 I 007 8 I 007
7 24 7 24
9 I 008 9 I 008
8 25 8 25
10 I 009 10 I 009
9 26 9 26
11 I 010 11 I 010
10 27 10 27
12 I 011 12 I 011
11 28 11 28
13 I 012 13 I 012
12 29 14 I 013 12 29
14 I 013
13 30 15 I 014 13 30
15 I 014
14 31 16 I 015 14 31
16 I 015 24 VDC
17 I Input COM 15 32 17 I Input COM 15 32
18 NC 16 33 18 100 16 33
19 NC 24 VDC 17 34 19 101 17 34
20 NC 20 102
21 NC 21 103
22 NC 22 104
23 NC 23 105
24 NC 24 106
1 18 1 18
25 NC 25 107
26 NC 26 108
5 27 NC 27 109
28 NC 28 110
29 NC 34
29 111 34
17 17
30 NC 30 112
31 NC 31 113
32 NC 32 114
33 NC 33 115
34 NC 34 NC
Note 1: Pin nos. 18 to 34 are NC contacts that Note: The limit to simultaneous/continuous ON
are short-circuited internally. These can be used terminals is shown in the graph in Appendix A.2,
as relay terminals. P.1-384, comparing ambient temperature and
Note 2: The number of input terminals that can simultaneous/continuous ON terminals. The
turn ON or remain ON simultaneously must not module may be damaged if the ON rate exceeds
exceed 8 (50%); otherwise, the module may be the recommendations shown in the graph.
damaged.
➮ For instructions on crimping connectors to cables,
refer to page 1-189.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 184 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

KV-C32T/B16R/B16S
<KV-C32T> <KV-B16R> <KV-B16S>
Pin No. Signal Signal Signal

1 500 500 500
2 501 501 501
3 502 502 502
4 503 503 503
5 504 504 504
6 505 505 505
7 506 506 506
KV-300
KV-10/80
8 507 507 507
DC or AC
9 508 COM1 power COM1
supply AC
10 509 508 508
11 510 509 509
12 511 510 510
13 512 511 511
14 513 512 512
15 514 513 513
16 515 514 514
Connector Pin
17 COM 515 515
DC assignment
18 600 <KV-C32T> COM2 COM2
AC
19 601
20 602 1 18 ➮ For directions on removing
2 19 the terminal block, refer to
21 603 DC or AC
page 1-181.
3 20 power supply
22 604
23 605 4 21 Terminal block Nos.
24 606 5 22 <KV-B16R/B16S>
25 607 6 23
26 608 7 24 500
27 609 8 25
501
503 15
503
28 610 9 26 504
505
29 611 10 27 506
507
30 612 11 28 COM1
31 613 508
12 29 509
32 614 510
13 30 511
33 615 512
14 31 513
34 COM 514
DC 15 32 151
COM2
16 33
17 34
<KV-C32T> <KV-B16R/B16S>
1 18
➮ For instructions on crimping

connectors to cables, refer
to p.1-189.
17 34
Note: Pins 17 and 34 of the

KV-C32T are connected
internally.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 185 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T
KV-R8X/R16X
S+ S- A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+ – • B A0 B1 A2 B3 A4 B5 A6 B7 A8 B9 A10 B11 A12 B13 A14 B15
KV-300
KV-10/80
+
+
• The terminals of the KV-R8X are 0 to 7 and A0 to B7.

• The A and B terminals are internally connected to all A* and B* terminals,
respectively, within the module.
KV-R8R/R16R
S+ S- • 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+ – RUN C0 A1 A2 A3 C4 A5 A6 A7 C8 A9 A10 A11 C12 A13 A14 A15 •
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
5
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
~ ~ ~ ~
• The terminals of the KV-R8R are 0 to 7 and C0 to C8.

• Terminals C0, C4, C8, and C12 are independent.
KV-R8T/R16T
S+ S- – 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+ – RUN + +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15
+ L L L L L L L L
L L L L L L L L
• The terminals of the KV-R8T are 0 to 7 and +0 to +7.

• + and +* are common within the module.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 186 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and

Power Distribution
CAUTION
other cable may cause communication errors.
Transmission distance by cable type

AWG18 twisted pair or VCTF 0.75 mm2 120 m (Total length)
AWG16 twisted pair or VCTF 1.25 mm2 120 m (Total length)
RG-58 coaxial or 3D-2V 200 m (Total length)
KV-300
KV-10/80
Connection patterns
Connections and branching between remote I/O terminal modules can be arranged
as desired; however, the total length of the wiring must not exceed that specified
above.
➮ Refer to page 1-188 for power distribution lines.
KV-R1A
R16/R8: I/O terminal module

KV-R1A: I/O Distribution module
1 2 3 5
R16/R8 R16/R8 R16/R8 R16/R8

4
R16/R8
[Total length of wiring = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)]

15
KV-R1A
1
R16/R8 R16/R8 R16/R8
2 3
4 R16/R8 6 R16/R8 8 R16/R8
R16/R8 7 R16/R8 9 R16/R8

5
[Total length of wiring = (1) + (2)+ (3) + (4) + (5) + (6) + (7) + (8) + (9)]
Note: When connecting communication cables, connect S+ to S+ and S- to S-.
* You can use either wire of the twisted pair

Correct Incorrect for S+ or S-. Also, you can use either the
core cable or the braided cable.
However, do not change the combination in
S+ S+ S+ the system.
S– S– S–
• Use only the specified cable when connecting to terminal modules. Use of
CAUTION any other cable may cause communication errors.
• The cable can be selected from the three types shown above.
However, use only one type in a system. Mixing more than one type may
cause a malfunction.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 187 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

Incorrect wiring patterns

a) Do not mix different types of cabling when connecting modules.
Do not leave any terminals unconnected as shown below.
KV-R1A
R16/R8 R16/R8
KV-300
KV-10/80
Unconnected terminals
b) Do not create loops.
KV-R1A
R16/R8 R16/R8
R16/R8
Power distribution
a) Distributing power to each module from individual power supplies (A common
power supply is not required.)
KV-R1A
Communication cable
+ – Communication cable
+S – S +S – S + S– S
5 + –
R16/R8
+ –
R16/R8
+ –
R16/R8
DC power supply DC power supply DC power supply
b) Distributing power to all modules from one power supply

KV-R1A
Communication cable Communication cable

+ –
+S – S +S –S +S – S
R16/R8 R16/R8 R16/R8
+ – + – + –
DC power
supply
Note: The long communication cable used in the above power distribution pattern is
subject to voltage drop. In such a case, use a cable of sufficient thickness.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 188 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions

Connector assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
KV-300
KV-10/80
(The above figure represents the pin assignment of the
connector viewed from the left.)
OP-21734 crimping tool

■ Part names
Handle
Pressure punch
Contact removal pin
Crimping unit
Guide
Contact holder Cover
■ Applicable cables
Specifications
Cable size Sheath outer diameter
15
AWG 22 to 24 (stranded) Cross-section: 0.2–0.3 mm2 1.1 –1.5 mm dia.
Contact removal
To remove a contact from the connector, align the contact with the arrow mark on
the crimping tool. Pull the cable while pushing the contact against the tool. The
contact will remain in the contact holder.
Pull the cable while pushing the contact against the crimping tool.
Cable
Contact removal pin
Crimping contact to cable

1. Separate a contact from the contact carrier.
Cut in this direction.
Cut here.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 189 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

2. Insert the contact directly until it touches the contact holder.

Crimping
punch
Crimping grooves
Cover
Guide
3. Insert the cable directly to the end along the crimping slot.
Crimping punch
KV-300
KV-10/80
Cover
Guide
Cable Cable
4. Grip the handle until the contact clamp fully encircles the cable.
The clamp should fully encircle the cable.
5. Gently pull the cable and remove the crimped contact from the contact holder.
Insert it into a housing containing no contact.
Housing with no contact
Crimping tool cautions

5 • Choose an appropriate cable.
• Cut the cable tip sharply so that no burrs remain. It is not necessary to peel back
the sheath.
• After crimping, check the following:
The clamp must fully The cable must be inserted
encircle the cable. completely into the contact.
• The crimping tool is plastic and is designed to be lightweight. It may break if

excessive force is applied to the handle after crimping.
• The precision mechanism of the crimping tool may malfunction if it is dropped or
jarred. Do not disassemble the tool.
• The plastic material will melt upon contact with strong solvents such as acetone,
trichlene, or benzine. Do not allow solvents to contact the tool.
• Even if no crimping tool is available, you may be able to solder the contact and
cable.
Special crimping tool Part no. OP-21734
34-pin connector Part no. OP-23139
20-pin connector Part no. OP-22185
Contacts (200) Part no. OP-22186
• A flat cable can be used, as the connector conforms to the MIL Standard.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 190 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators

The KV-300 CPU has the I/O indicators (for 32 I/O ports) described below.
(CPU)
KV-U4 KV-300 KV-R1 KV-C16X KV-C32X KV-B16R
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-300 [Selecting module numbers to be indicated.]
Press and hold the SELECT button.
→
SELECT
indicator(green)
The indicator assigned to the selected module Note1
number lights while pressing
→
SELECT
SELECT
RUN/ button Release the SELECT button.
ERROR
SELECT
→
A B
0 0 The ON/OFF information on I/Os of the selected Note2 15
1 1
2 2 module number is displayed. The SELECT indicator
3 3 of the selected module number flashes.
4 4 (The SELECT indicator of the KV-300 CPU lights.)
5 5
6 6
7 7 Every time the SELECT button is pressed, the selected module number is
8 8 shifted to the right module After the rightmost module is selected, the next
9 9 module to be selected comes to the KV-300.
10 10
11 11
12 12 CPU Module No.7 Module No.8 Last module
13 13 no. connected
14 14
15 15
Note 1: When module number 16 is selected, indicator “0” in line B lights;

when module number 17 is selected, indicator “1” in line B lights.
Note 2: I/O indicator line A corresponds to input ch 0000; line B corresponds
to input ch 0100 when input modules are selected. I/O indicator line A also
corresponds to output ch 0500; line B also corresponds to output ch 0600.
When the KV-300 CPU is selected, 0000 to 0009 are assigned to line A
indicators, and 0500 to 0503 are assigned to line B indicators.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 191 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

For KV-10/80 users
5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units

KV-80/40 Expansion units KV-16EX(W), 16EYR(W)/16EYT(2W), KV-8EX(W),
8EYR(W)/8EYT(2W)
Base units
KV-80R(W)
KV-80T(W)
KV-40R(W)
KV-40T(2W)
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-24/16/10
Expansion units KV-16EX(W), 16EYR(W)/16EYT(2W), KV-8EX(W),
8EYR(W)/8EYT(2W)
Base units
KV-24R(W)
KV-24T(2W)
KV-16R(W)
KV-16T(2W)
KV-10R(W)
KV-10T(2W)
• As illustrated above, up to 3 expansion units can be connected to the KV-80 or

KV-40 basic unit and up to 4 expansion units to the other models. (A maximum of
2 input only expansion units can be connected to the KV-80.)
• Expansion units are compatible with all base units. Different types of expansion
units can also be connected simultaneously. For example, an 8 I/O terminal unit
and a 16 I/O terminal unit can be connected to the same base unit at the same
time. Also, relay-contact output units and BJT output units can be connected
simultaneously.
5
Connections
1. Slide and open the lid on the right side of a basic or expansion unit.
Use a finger
2. Insert the connector.
• Securely insert connectors of expansion units into corresponding sockets to

ensure reliable operation.
• Connect or remove expansion units only when the power for the basic unit is
OFF.
• Basic units and expansion units can be mounted side by side.
• Do not extend the cable of an expansion unit.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 192 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

Assignment of I/O relay numbers to expansion units

• To assign I/O relay numbers to expansion units, use the channel setting switches
on each unit.
• When changing the channel settings, be sure to turn the power OFF.
• The channel setting switches for each expansion unit must have different set-
tings. (This also applies to input or output only expansion units.)
• After setting the channel setting switches, write the numbers on the attached
channel number label, and apply it on each expansion unit.
Channel setting switch
ON
OFF
KV-300
KV-10/80
1 2
■ Connection to KV-40, KV-24, KV-16 or KV-10

Switch Expansion unit I/O relay No.
KV-8ER(W)/T(2W) KV-8EX(W) KV-8EYR(W)/T(2W) KV-16EX(W) KV-16EYR(W)/T(2W)
1 2
Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Output
100 600 100 600 100 600
OFF OFF to 103 to 603 to 107 to 607 to 115 to 615
200 700 200 700 200 700
ON OFF to 203 to 703 to 207 to 707 to 215 to 715
300 800 300 800 300 800
OFF ON to 303 to 803 to 307 to 807 to 315 to 815
400 900 400 900 400 900
ON ON to 403 to 903 to 407 to 907 to 415 to 915
• Do not set switches 1 and 2 to OFF on the KV-40. (Input relays 100 to 115 and
output relay 600 to 615 cannot be assigned to the KV-40.)
■ Connection to KV-80
Switch Expansion unit I/O relay No.
KV-8ER(W)/T(2W) KV-8EX(W) KV-8EYR(W)/T(2W) KV-16EX(W) KV-16EYR(W)/T(2W) 15
1 2
Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Output
OFF OFF – – – – – –
300 700 300 700 300 700
ON OFF to 303 to 703 to 307 to 707 to 315 to 715
400 800 400 800 400 800
OFF ON to 403 to 803 to 407 to 807 to 415 to 815
– 900 – 900 – 900
ON ON to 903 to 907 to 915
• Do not set switches 1 and 2 to OFF on the KV-80. (A maximum of 2 input only
expansion units can be connected. When three input units are connected, input
relays of the unit with switches 1 and 2 ON cannot be used.)
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 193 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

5.3.12 Mounting Environment

KV PLCs are highly reliable. Consider, however, the following before installation to
get the best result from your PLC.
Locations
Do not install your PLC in the following places:
CAUTION • Places directly exposed to sunlight
• Places where the temperature drops below 0°C (32°F) or exceeds 50°C (122°F)
• Places where the humidity drops below 35%RH or exceeds 85%RH
• Places where condensation occurs due to sudden temperature drop
KV-300
• Places where there is corrosive or flammable gas

KV-10/80
• Places exposed to airborne dust, corrosive substances such as salt, metal

particles, or oil
• Places where the PLC may be subjected to strong vibration or impact
• Places where water, oil, or chemicals may splash the PLC
• Places exposed to strong magnetic or electric field.
Installation site inside the panel

Ambient temperature
CAUTION
• The operating temperature range of the PLC basic unit is 0 to 50°C (32 to122°F)
(No freezing).
• The operating temperature range becomes 0 to 45°C (32 to103°F) when the PLC
is operated with the handheld programmer connected (No freezing).
• Provide enough space for proper ventilation.
• Do not install the PLC directly above equipment which emits large amount of
heat (heater, transducer, large capacitor, etc.).
• Provide a fan or air conditioner, if the temperature exceeds 50°C (122°F).
Improving noise resistance

• Do not install the PLC and high voltage equipment in the same control panel.
5 • Isolate the PLC as far as possible from the power cables.
• Do not route ducts or wires between the basic unit and the expansion units in
case that units are mounted side by side.
Accessibility
Isolate the PLC as far as possible from high voltage equipment and drive equipment
in order to ensure safe and easy access for adjustment and maintenance.
Wiring
M3.0 screws are employed from the terminals.
Use crimp terminals of the following types. (units: mm)
6.0 max. 6.0 max.
KVHKA Chap 05.p65 194 08.3.11, 11:14 AM

Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer
This chapter describes how to use the handheld programmer and memory card.
6.1 Using the Handheld Programmer ............................................ 1-196

6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer .................................................... 1-196
6.1.2 Precautions ............................................................................................ 1-198
6.2 Basic Operations ..................................................................... 1-200
6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation ............................................................... 1-200
6.3 Functions .................................................................................. 1-216
6.4 Memory Card ............................................................................ 1-230
6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] ......................................................... 1-230
6.4.2 Storage Capacity .................................................................................... 1-230
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 195 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

6.1 Using the Handheld Programmer

The KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is used not only for creating user programs,
but also for loading them into the KV PLC or switching the KV PLC between RUN
and PROGRAM (stop) mode. It also can be used to monitor PLC operation and
transmit data with a memory card.
6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer

Model Instruction PLC Memory card
KV-P3E(01) All KV-Series PLC instruc- All KV-Series PLCs M-2, M-3
tions (basic, application,
and arithmetic instructions)
Parts and functions 7
2
3
LD AND OR OUT
7 8 9 A FUN
LDB ANB ORB OUB 4
4 5 6 B
SET ANL ORL MPS
1 2 3 C
RES W-ON W-UE MRD 5
0 F E D
DW W-OFF W-DE MPP
Li Lo ch
TMR END ENDH ITVL
6
(T) DM TM #TM
CTR
CTC CTH @
(C) #,$ ON
❋
OFF
6 8
1. LCD
Is back-lit and displays program contents and information such as error mes-
sages.
Example
RUN mode
RUN.....
PROGRAM mode
00002 INSERT Type of operation

LD 00000 Operand
Instruction Line No.
See the following chapters for more information on the contents of these dis-
plays.
2. Memory card indicator

Lights when this programmer is communicating (using such instructions as
READ, WRITE, DELETE, and VERIFY) with the memory card. Do not pull out the
card while this indicator is lit to be sure that the desired operation is fully
completed. This indicator also lights when a memory card must be inserted in the
slot. Press [CLEAR] to turn it off.
1-196 Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 196 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

3. Mode switch
Switches the operation mode of the KV PLC and the handheld programmer.
• RUN mode
This mode is used to load the program stored in the handheld programmer to
the KV PLC to allow operation. In this mode, statuses and data can be moni-
tored, data changed, and OFFLINE EDITOR used during operation of the
PLC.
• PROGRAM mode
This mode is used for creating or changing user programs on the handheld
programmer.
4. Operation keys
Key Name Basic function
FNC Function Selects one of the function Nos.
BS Backspace Cancels last numeric entry.
INS Insert Switches between INSERT and SAVE modes.
DEL Delete Enables DELETE mode.
↓ Scrolls to next program line or function No.

OFF
OFF Turns relay OFF.
→ Moves cursor on LCD.
↑ Scrolls to previous program line or function No.

ON
ON Turns relay ON.
CARD Card Enables access to memory card (ACCS mode) in PROG mode.
MON monitor Enables Scan time, Multi, and ON/OFF monitors in RUN mode.
ENT Enter & Loads program, function No. and any other entry on LCD.
R-SRCH R-Search Searches program backward in VERIFY mode.
Searches program forward for specific lines from desired location in
SEARCH Search
VERIFY mode.
Is used to enter any arbitrary data in VERIFY mode.
16
*
FIX Fix
Sets and clears FIX function when Multi-monitor is used.
CLEAR Clear Clears error and cancels incorrect entry.
• The KV-P3E(01) offers two types of beep. One short beep indicates correct
operation has been made whereas several beeps are the warning sign that the
operation just performed is incorrect.
• Each operation key is designed for use with other keys for efficient operation and
programming. Refer to the later description for details of key functions and
operations.
5. INSTRUCTION/NUMERIC keys
Enter instruction or number.
The KV-P3E(01) determines whether to enter an instruction or number depend-

ing on the cursor position. Therefore, no additional operation is required by the
operator.
Example Instruction:
Enters LOAD (LD) instruction.
LD
7 Numeric:
Keys A through F enter numbers in hex.
Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer 1-197
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 197 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

6. INSTRUCTION/OPERAND keys
Enter instruction or operand.
The KV-P3E(01) determines whether to enter an instruction or operand depend-

ing on the cursor position. Therefore, no additional operation is required by the
operator.
Example
Instruction:
Enters END instruction.
END
DM Numeric:
Keys # and $ indicate decimal and
hex numbers respectively.
Note 1: Programs entered with the KV-P3E(01) are written into the KV-P3E(01)s
RAM and are not directly written into the KV PLC. Hence, when the power switch is
turned OFF, the programs in the KV-P3E(01) RAM are lost. To save the program
currently created, write it to a memory card or complete the program and transfer it
to the KV PLC. (If an error message appears, programs cannot be transferred.
Correct the communication circuit and retry the transfer.)
Note 2: The KV-P3E(01), which can be used with the Visual KV Series, is the model
released on or after October 21st, 1993.
7. Connector cable port

Accommodates a cable connector that connects this programmer to any KV-
series PLC.
8. Memory card slot

Accommodates memory card (M-2 or M-3). To avoid malfunction of the program-
mer, do not insert anything other than these cards.
6 6.1.2 Precautions
Connector cable (2.5 m)
OP-26487
Open the connector

cover and plug in
the connector.
• This handheld programmer can be connected to or disconnected from the PLC

regardless of whether the KV is ON or OFF.
• The handheld programmer can be connected to either communication port A or
B. However, two handheld programmers cannot be connected at the same time.
• To disconnect the handheld programmer after the operation has started, be sure
to leave the mode switch set to RUN. This allows the operation to continue.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 198 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

■ Connection between the KV and Handheld Programmer

Connection to KV Operation mode at power ON
Not connected RUN mode
Connected KV is set to mode switch setting.
Connected after power ON KV is switched to mode switch setting.
■ Connector cable for handheld programmer

• Do not leave the connector cable connected to the PLC for a long period of time
such as during normal operation. It can be left connected during programming,
trial operation, monitoring, or adjustments which only take a relatively short
amount of time.,
• Avoid binding the KV-P3E(01) connection cable together with, or placing the KV-
P3E(01) connection cable near, high power lines or output load lines. Failure to
do so may cause an operation failure.
• Do not apply excessive force to the KV-P3E(01) connection cable.
• Use only the connector cable provided by KEYENCE to prevent malfunction of
the PLC.
• The KV-P3E(01) connection cable cannot be extended.
16
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 199 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

6.2 Basic Operations

Through examples this section describes basic operations of the handheld program-
mer and its operation keys.
6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation

The handheld programmer is frequently used for programming. It is recommended
that you master the following operations to perform quick and efficient programming.
Reference
Operation Function Mode Key operation
page
CLEAR Cancels input data PRE 1-201
CLEAR
or deletes error
message.
MOVE CURSOR Moves cursor PE 1-202
sequentially to Instruction Operand Line No.
instruction position,
operand position,
and line (step) No.
position.
SCROLL Scrolls to previous PE Displays previous line.... 1-202
ON
line, next line, or to
arbitrary line. Displays next line.... OFF
Scrolls to arbitrary line....
ENT
Press Numeric key (Enter line No.)
R-SRCH
1. ALL CLEAR Deletes previous P 1-203

ORB RES ENT ENT
program. (Program FNC
6 0 R-SRCH R-SRCH
CLEAR
is replaced by
"NOP".)
2. ENTER Enters instruction. PE When key for desired instruction is available: 1-203
INSTRUCTION (If cursor is not Press Instr. key Numeric key
located in instruction (Enter timer or counter No.)
position, move When key for desired instruction is not available:
6
For creating program
cursor to position.) (1st step) (2nd step) (3rd step)
or Numeric key
Press FNC or ENT

ON then R-SRCH
or
OFF
3. ENTER Enters operand. (If PE ENT 1-206

Press Operand key Numeric key
R-SRCH
OPERAND cursor is not located
(Enter operand type.)
in operand position,
move cursor to
position.)
(When two or more operands need to be entered.)
4. END Ends program by PE 3-94

END ENT
ENDH entering ENDor END.......... DM R-SRCH
ENDH. ENDH....... ENDH ENT
TM R-SRCH
Mode: P: PROGRAM mode

R: RUN mode (OFFLINE EDITOR not used)
E: OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67]
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 200 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Reference
Operation Function Mode Key operation
page
1. DISPLAY LINE Displays line to be PE See "SCROLL" on previous page. 1-202
changed.
For creating program
2. CHANGE Changes instruction. PE Follow same procedure as described in "ENTER 1-203

INSTRUCTION (Move cursor to INSTRUCTION" on the previous page. New
instruction position first.) instruction is overwritten on previous instruction.
when instruction does not
need to be changed, go
to next step (3) to change
operand.
3. CHANGE Changes operand. PE Follow same procedure as described in "ENTER 1-203
OPERAND (Move cursor to operand OPERAND" on previous page. New operand is
position first.) overwritten on previous instruction.
INSERT LINE Inserts new line. PE 1. Follow procedure described in "SCROLL" to 1-206
scroll to desired line.(To insert new line
between lines 2 and 3, scroll to line 3.)
2. Press INS to enter INSERT mode. ("INSERT"
is displayed.)
3. Enter desired instruction and operand.
*Press CLEAR to cancel INSERT mode.
DELETE LINE Deletes line. PE 1. Follow procedure described in "SCROLL" to 1-206
scroll to desired line.
2. Press DEL to enter DELETE mode and press
R-SRCH ("DELETE" is displayed.)
ENT
Press CLEAR to cancel DELETE mode.

MONITOR Monitors scan time, R RUN
CARD SCAN 1-212
MON TIME
current values, and ON/
OFF statuses. CARD CARD
MON MON
ON/OFF CARD MULTI

MONITOR MON MONITOR
Mode: P: PROGRAM mode

E: OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67]
To find function No. assigned to desired function: Press [FNC], and the cursor then 16
appears at the position where the function No. is to be entered. Pressing ON or
OFF scrolls the functions and assigned Nos., making it easy to find the desired
function No.
BS key
When the line No., relay No., timer No., or counter No. is entered using the numeric
key, pressing BS key each time deletes lowest digit.
01234 00123 00012

BS BS
CLEAR
Pressing [CLEAR] allows the input data to be canceled or error message to be
deleted.
Press CLEAR:
• To cancel an instruction or operand erroneously entered during the programming
and to return to the previous display. Pressing [CLEAR] deletes displayed data,
but does not delete instructions/operands that have already been stored.
• To delete error message. If cause of error is removed, operation can be re-
sumed.
• To cancel the entry of [FNC], [INS], [DEL], [SEARCH], or [CARD/MON].
Operation
CLEAR
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 201 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

MOVE CURSOR
Pressing [➞] allows the blinking cursor to move to the desired position. (The cursor
moves sequentially to the instruction position, operand position, and line No.
position.)
• Functions when the PROGRAM mode, the ON/OFF MONITOR mode, or

OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in use.
Operation
Operation
Instruction Operand
00000 00000
LD 00000 LD 00000
Cursor Cursor
(blinking) (blinking)
Cursor
(blinking)
Line No. 00000

LD 00000
SCROLL
Scrolls to the previous line, the next line, or to an arbitrary line.
■ Scrolling to the previous or following line

• Functions when the PROGRAM mode, the MULTI-MONITOR mode, the ON/OFF
MONITOR mode, or OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in use.
• Holding the key down allows the line to be successively moved.
Operation
ON
. . . Displays the previous line.
OFF . . . Displays the next line.
6
■ Scrolling to an arbitrary line
• Functions when the PROGRAM mode, the ON/OFF MONITOR mode, or
OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in use.
• When the line No. is set to 99999, the final line is displayed.
• Move the cursor to the line No. position first.
Operation
Example: To scroll from line 0 to line 10:
00000 SET RES ENT 00010

LD 00000 1 0 R-SRCH OUT 00500
Cursor (blinking) Cursor (blinking)
• Numeric keys serve also as instruction keys. When line No. is set, however,
numeric keys automatically serve as numeric keys.
• High order zero(s) does not need to be entered.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 202 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

ALL CLEAR [FNC60]

Deletes the entire program currently written in the KV. (The program is replaced by
"NOP"). Before creating a new program, be sure to execute ALL CLEAR.
• Functions only when the PROGRAM mode is in use.

• Even if ALL CLEAR is executed, the data in the data memory is not deleted but
remains stored.
Operation
FNC ORB RES ENT ALL CLEAR ENT

6 0 R-SRCH EXEC.OK? R-SRCH
ENT 00000
COMPLETED R-SRCH NOP
Cursor (blinking)
Writing program
A new program is written on the line being displayed.
Functions when the PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in use.
Description
• The previous or following line can be successively displayed by scrolling up or
down using ON or OFF .
• When [ENT/R-SRCH] is pressed after the entry of the instruction/operand, the
next line is automatically displayed.
• [➞] is used to move the cursor between the instruction, operand and line No.
positions. The cursor must first be moved to the desired position to enter the
instruction/operand.
• Pressing [DEL] or [INS] allows you to enter the DELETE or the INSERT mode.
Example 1: Entering the basic contact instruction

Entering "LD 0003"
16
00000
NOP
Cursor LD
(blinking) 7 Enter LOAD instruction
00000 Cursor automatically moves to operand

LD 00000 position.
Cursor
(blinking)
ORL
3 Enter "0003".
00000 "LD 0003" has been set.

LD 00003
Cursor
(blinking)
ENT
R-SRCH
"LD 0003" has been entered.
00001
NOP
Cursor
(blinking)
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 203 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Example 2: Entering timer/counter instruction

Entering "TMR006#00055"
00001
NOP
Cursor TMR
(blinking) (T) Enter TMR instruction.
00001
Cursor automatically moves to timer
TMR000 #00000
No. position.
ORB
Cursor 6
(blinking)
Enter "6" as timer No.
00001 Move cursor to operand position.

TMR006 #00000
Cursor
(blinking)
ANB
5
ANB
5
Enter "55" as timer preset value.
00001
"TMR006#00055" has been set.
TMR006 #00055
Cursor
(blinking)
ENT
R-SRCH "TMR006#00055" has been entered.
00002
NOP
Cursor
(blinking)
Example 3: Entering application instruction

Entering "DIFD 1000"
00002
6 NOP
Cursor FNC RES OR Enter DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instruction

(blinking) 0 9
[FNC09].
FUN[09]
DIFD
Cursor ENT
(blinking) R-SRCH
00002 Cursor automatically moves to operand position.

DIFD 00000
Cursor
(blinking)
SET RES RES RES
1 0 0 0 Enter "1000".
00002 "DIFD 1000" has been set.

DIFD 01000
Cursor
(blinking)
ENT
R-SRCH "DIFD 1000" has been entered.
00003
NOP "DIFD 1000" has been entered.
Cursor
(blinking)
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 204 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Example 4: Entering arithmetic instruction

Entering "LDA#01860"
00003
NOP
Cursor FNC ANL ORL

(blinking) 2 3 Enter LOAD A instruction [FNC23].
FUN[23]
LDA
Cursor ENT
(blinking) R-SRCH
00003
Cursor automatically moves to operand position.
LDA 00000
Cursor
(blinking)
@ SET AND ORB RES
#, $ 1 8 6 0 Enter "#1860"*.
00003 "LDA#01860" has been set.

LDA #01860
Cursor
(blinking)
ENT
R-SRCH "LDA#01860" has been entered.
00004 Line No. on display automatically changes to

NOP next line No.
Cursor
(blinking) * To enter a hexadecimal number ($xxxx), press
@
#, $ once more. Then "$" is displayed.
■ Changing contacts
To change contacts for timer/counters to input relays, output relays, or internal
utility relays, move the cursor to the contact to be changed using the [INS] key,
then press [DW/RELAY]. 16
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 205 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Inserting New Instruction/Operand into Program

Inserts a new instruction/operand into the line being displayed. All succeeding
instructions/operands are sequentially moved to the next lines.
Operation
To insert "DIFU1100" into line 2 (between lines 1 and 2.):
Scroll to line 2.
INS Set INSERT mode.
00002 INSERT
DIFD 01000 INSERT mode.
Cursor SET RES ENT

(blinking)
FNC
1 0 R-SRCH Enter "DIFU" [FNC10].
00002 INSERT
DIFU 00000
Cursor
(blinking)
SET SET RES RES
1 1 0 0 Enter "1100".
00002 INSERT
DIFU 01100
Cursor
(blinking)
ENT
R-SRCH "DIFU1100" has been inserted into line 2.
00003 INSERT Instruction/operand on line 2 is moved to line 3.

DIFD 01000
Cursor (blinking)
• The instructions/operands entered on the previous or following lines can be

displayed sequentially by using ON or OFF .
• When the insertion is completed, press [CLEAR] to exit the INSERT mode.
6 • INSERT functions when the PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is
in use.
Deleting Instruction/Operand from Program

Deletes the instruction/operand on the line being displayed. All line Nos. following
the deleted line No. are decremented by the number of lines deleted.
Operation
To delete the instruction/operand entered on line 3:
Scroll to line 3.
DEL
Set DELETE mode.
00003 DELETE
DELETE mode
DIFD 01000
Cursor ENT
(blinking)
R-SRCH Execute DELETE.
00003 DELETE Instruction/operand originally entered on line

LDA #01860 4 is moved to line 3.
Cursor (blinking)
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 206 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

• The instructions/operands entered on the previous or following lines can be

displayed by using ON or OFF .
• All succeeding instructions/operands sequentially move up, and "NOP" appears
on the lines deleted.
• When the deletion is completed, press [CLEAR] to exit the DELETE mode.
• DELETE functions when the PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is
in use.
The deleted instructions/operands are cleared and will not be stored in
CAUTION
memory.
Searching program
Searches the source program for an instruction/operand entered on and after the
specified line.
The following 3 methods are available for searching:

1. Searching for instruction
2. Searching for instruction and relay No. (operand)
3. Searching for relay No. (operand)
Only the instruction/operand entered on and after the specified line can be sequen-
tially searched by any of the above methods. (You can search forward or backward
through the program.)
SEARCH functions when the PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in

use.
Procedure
1. Starting SEARCH
• Enter the search data in the same way as you do for writing a program.
• When [SEARCH] is pressed, searching starts according to the data shown on
the line being displayed.
When writing program: 16

Enter instruction + operand, then press [ENT/R-SRCH]
When searching program:

Enter instruction + operand, then press [SEARCH]
2. Continuous SEARCH and backward SEARCH

• When [SEARCH] is pressed in the SEARCH mode, searching is repeated
according to the previous search data.
• When there are no more instructions/operands matching the search data
(when the search is completed), "..OVER" appears on the display.
• When [ENT/R-SRCH] is pressed in the SEARCH mode, backward searching
starts according to the previous search data.
Referemce: SEARCH mode

When search data is entered and [SEARCH] is pressed, "SEARCH" or "..OVER"
appears on the display of the handheld programmer. This status is referred to as
SEARCH mode.
3. Ending SEARCH mode

• Pressing [CLEAR] ends the SEARCH mode.
• When the SEARCH mode is accessed, the instruction, operand or line No.
cannot be entered. If the instruction, operand or line No. is entered in the
SEARCH mode, the SEARCH mode is automatically canceled.
See examples on the following pages.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 207 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

■ Searching for instruction
Example 1: Searching for the CON instruction
Scroll to line 0
FNC RES ORB ENT

0 6 R-SRCH Enter CON instruction [FNC06].
00000
Search data has been entered.
CON
SEARCH Searching starts.
00004 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "CON" is displayed.

CON
SEARCH Press SEARCH repeatedly.
00077 OVER Searching is completed.

CON
Example 2: Searching for the AND instruction
Scroll to line 0
AND *
8 FIX Enter AND instruction.
00000
AND *****
6 SEARCH Searching starts.
00007 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "AND" is displayed.

AND 01000

AND 00501
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 208 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

■ Searching for instruction and operand
Example 3: Searching for "LD C012"
Scroll to line 0
LD CTR SET ANL

7 (C) 1 2
00000
LD C012
00010 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "LD C012" is dis-

LD C012 played.
Press SEARCH repeatedly.
SEARCH
Lines with occurrence of "LD C012" are sequen-
tially displayed.
LD C012
Example 4: Searching for AND instruction that has TIMER as operand
Scroll to line 0
AND TMR *
8 (T) FIX
00000
AND T***
SEARCH Searching starts. 16

00017 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "AND T" is displayed.
AND T006

Lines with occurrence of "AND T" are sequentially
displayed.

AND T018
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 209 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Example 5: Searching for the TMR instruction whose set value is "10".
Scroll to line 0
TMR * SET RES

(T) FIX 1 0
00000
TMR*** #00010
00009 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "TMR #00010" is

TMR005 #00010 displayed.
SEARCH
Lines with occurrence of "TMR #00010" are
sequentially displayed.
TMR014 #00010
Example 6: Searching for the line where "TMR010" is defined.
Scroll to line 0
TMR SET RES *

(T) 1 0 FIX
00000
TMR010 #*****
6 00052 OVER Lines with occurrence of "TMR010" are sequen-

TMR010 #00020 tially displayed.
Searching is completed.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 210 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

■ Searching for operand
Example 7: Searching for line where relay No. 1800 is used as operand.
Scroll to line 0
* SET AND RES RES

FIX 1 8 0 0
00000 Search data has been entered.

* 01800
00060 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "01800" is dis-

LD 01800 played.

Lines with occurrence of "01800" are sequen-
tially displayed.

OUT 01800
Example 8: Searching for the line where the data memory is used.
Scroll to line 0
* END *
FIX DM FIX
00000 Search data has been entered.

* DM**** 16
00010 SEARCH Line with first occurrence of "DM" is displayed.

LDA DM0000
SEARCH
Lines with occurrence of "DM" are sequentially
displayed.
STA DM0020
Note: Searching cannot be performed according to search data shown below.
00000
* *****
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 211 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

MONITOR
Monitors the operation status of the KV while the KV is in operation.
• Functions only when the "RUN" mode is in use. (Does not function when
OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67] is in use.)
• The scan time, current values, and ON/OFF statuses can be monitored.
1. SCAN TIME MONITOR

The current scan time is displayed for monitoring.
2. MULTI-MONITOR
A total of 16 elements (ON/OFF status of the relay contacts, current value or ON/
OFF status of the timers, counters or data memories, and ON/OFF statuses of a
group of contacts) can be registered and displayed for monitoring. Up to 2 registered
elements can be displayed at the same time.
3. ON/OFF MONITOR
The ON/OFF status of the relay contact corresponding to the operand on each line
of the program, or the current value of the timers, counters or data memories is
displayed for monitoring.
Basic operation
Basic display in RUN mode SCAN TIME MONITOR display
RUN SCAN TIME (TM31)

CARD 0.3ms
MON
CARD CARD
ON/OFF MONITOR MON MULTI-MONITOR MON
display display
CARD
00000 MON
MULTI MONITOR
LD 00000 00000
Line 0 of the program is displayed.
Press [CLEAR] to return to initial display "RUN".

6
SCAN TIME MONITOR
The current scan time is displayed.
Operation example
Key operation Display Description
RUN Initial display
CARD SCAN TIME (TM31) Access SCAN TIME MONITOR mode.
MON 0.3 ms Current scan time is displayed.
CLEAR RUN Return to initial display "RUN".
Scan time value is stored in temporary memory No. 31 (TM31). If required, it can be
read out using LDA instruction.
➮ Refer to "1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory" on page 3-21, and "LDA Instruction" on page 3-140.
MULTI-MONITOR
A total of 16 elements (relay contacts, timers, counters, data memories) can be
registered for monitoring their ON/OFF status or current value. However, only two
elements can be monitored at the same time. Also, when a contact is specified using
the channel function, 15 succeeding contacts as well as the specified contact can be
monitored at the same time.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 212 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Description
• The ON/OFF status/current value for one element (relay contact, timer, counter,
data memory, or channel) is displayed on one line on the display.
• Up to 16 elements can be registered for monitoring. While scrolling up or down
using ON or OFF , the information for these elements can be successively
monitored.
• Information for up to 2 elements can be displayed at the same time on the upper
and lower lines of the display.
• To enter the monitoring element, the lower line is used.
• The upper line can also be used for fixed display. In this case, the lower line
alone is scrolled.
• Once the monitoring element is registered, it is stored even if the monitoring is
completed. The registered elements, however, are cleared when the power
supply is turned off, when ALL CLEAR or HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR
is executed, or when the program is transferred or received.
• The registered element can be changed, by overwriting, inserting, or deleting.
Operation example
RUN Initial display
MULTI MONITOR Access MULTI-MONITOR mode.

CARD CARD
MON MON Monitor-ing element can be
00000
entered on lower line.
ANB RES RES ENT MULTI MONITOR ON/OFF status of output relay No.
5 0 0 R-SRCH 500 is monitored. (OFF)
00500
00500 Display next input line by scrolling

OFF down.
00000
SET SET ENT 00500 ON/OFF status of input relay No.

1 1 R-SRCH 0011 is monitored. (ON)
00011
00011 Display next input line by scrolling

OFF 00000 down.
TMR ANB ENT 00011 Current value and ON/OFF status

of timer 5 are monitored. (10 and
16
(T) 5 R-SRCH
T005 00010
OFF)
T005 00010 Display next input line by scrolling
OFF down.
00000
END SET ENT T005 00010 Current value of data memory No.
DM 1 R-SRCH DM0001 00125 1 is monitored. (125)
DM0001 00125 Display next input line by scrolling

OFF down.
00000
DM0001 00125 ON/OFF statuses of output relay

ANB RES RES MPP ENT
00500 Nos. 500 through 515 are moni-
5 0 0 ch R-SRCH
tored. (relay Nos. 501 503 and 504
are ON.)
CLEAR RUN Return to initial display.
Monitoring element entered is automatically registered. (Up to 16 elements)
Displaying monitoring result

The ON and OFF statues of the contact are expressed by the following symbols:
... ON, ... OFF
To display the current value of the timer, counter, or data memory and ON/OFF
statuses of the channel, the following 4 types of display are selectable: decimal,
hexadecimal, ASCII, or binary display.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 213 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

Example
When the current value of data memory 1 is monitored (current value = 45678):
Decimal display Hexadecimal display
MULTI MONITOR MULTI MONITOR

DM0001 45678 @ DM0001 $B26E
#, $
@ @
#, $ #, $
Binary display ASCII display
@
MULTI MONITOR #, $
MULTI MONITOR
DM0001 DM0001
2 15 20
Binary display: ..... ON(1) ..... OFF(0)
Here, "channel" means 16 contacts starting with an arbitrary contact.
Example
"1005ch" means 16 contacts of 1005 through 1015, and 1100 through 1104.
Binary display
MULTI MONITOR
0 1 0 0 5 CH
1104 1005
Changing registered element

Overwriting or inserting
Move cursor Enter element to be moni- Press [INS] Press [ENT/
to desired tored (relay contact, timer, to select R-SRCH].
line to using → counter, data memory, or → "REPLACE" →
ON or OFF . channel.) or "INSERT".
6
Deleting
Move cursor Press [ENT/
to desired R-SRCH].
line to using → Press [DEL]. →
ON or OFF .
Fixed display
When monitoring by scrolling up or down using [↑/ON] or [↓/OFF], you can fix the
desired data on the upper line of display while scrolling only the lower line.
Fixed display Same data remains
Move cursor displayed on upper
to desired FTM01 00021 section of display.
line to using → Press *
FIX . 00001 Program scrolls only on
ON or OFF . Fixed display lower section of display.
To cancel the fixed display, press *

FIX again.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 214 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

ON/OFF MONITOR
The ON/OFF status of the relay contact corresponding to the operand on each line
of the program is displayed for monitoring.
• In the ON/OFF MONITOR mode, "SEARCH" and "SCROLL" can be executed,
while "OVERWRITE", "INSERT" and "DELETE" cannot be executed.
• The ON/OFF statuses of the operand displayed in the ON/OFF MONITOR mode
are as follows:
Operand code ON/OFF status
LD, LDB, AND, ANB, OR, ORB, ON/OFF status of operand(ON/OFF status of
OUT, OUB, SET, RES, KEEP, DIFU, operand "CTH" is not displayed.)(For "LDB", "ANB"
DIFD, STP, HSP, STG, JMP, INT and "ORB", output is inverted.)
SFT ON/OFF status of first operand
HKEY ON when key entry is detected.
W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE ON/OFF status of latch relay (second operand)
TMR, TMH, TMS ON/OFF status of specified timer
C, UDC ON/OFF status of specified counter
CTC ON/OFF status of specified high speed counter
comparator
Others ON/OFF status is not monitored. (" " is displayed.)
... ON, ... OFF
Operation example
RUN Initial display
CARD CARD CARD 00000 Access ON/OFF MONITOR

MON MON MON LD 00000 mode.Line 0 is displayed.
00001 Scroll to next line.
OFF OUT 00500
00002 - Scroll to next line.
OFF END
ON
0001
OUT 00500
Scroll to previous line. 16
CLEAR
RUN Return to initial display.
The ON/OFF monitor is disabled when the KV PLC is read-disabled.
KVHKA Chap 06_1&2.p65 215 08.3.11, 11:16 AM

6.3 Functions
6.3 Functions
Function Nos. list
The KV has 16 functions for quick and easy programming or trial run.
A function No. [FNCxx] is assigned to each function. The functions are set using
[FNC] in the same way as entering the basic instructions, application instructions,
arithmetic instructions, or interrupt instructions.
Function Nos. list

Function Function No. Mode Reference
page
[ALL CLEAR] 60 P 1-217
[P3E CLEAR] 61 P E 1-217
Handheld programmer Clear
[CTR CLEAR] 62 P 1-218
Counter Clear
[HIGH-SPEED CTR CLR] 63 P 1-218
High-Speed Counter Clear
[DM ALL CLEAR] 64 P 1-219
All Data Memory Clear
[L-RELAY ALL RST] 65 P 1-219
All Latching Relays Reset
[COMMUNICATION —] 66 P E 1-220
Program Sent or Received
[OFFLINE EDITOR] 67 R 1-221
Offline Editor Start
[QUIT OFF-L EDIT] 68 E 1-221
Offline Editor Stop
[CHG: T/C CURT-V] 69 P R 1-222
Timer/counter Current Value Change
[CHG: T/C SET-V] 70 PR 1-224
Timer/counter Setting Change
6 [FORCED SET/RESET] 71 PR 1-226
Relay On/Off
[DM WRITE] 72 PR 1-227
Write Into Data Memory
[TRIMMER MONITOR] 73 PRE 1-228
Read Trimmer Setting
[PROGRAM CHECK] 74 PE 1-228
Syntax Check
[PROGRAM SIZE] 75 PE 1-229
Program Capacity Check
MODE:
P: PROGRAM mode
E: OFFLINE EDITOR in use
■ To find function No. assigned to desired function:

Press [FNC], and the cursor appears at the position where the function No. is to be
entered. Pressing ON or OFF scrolls the functions and assigned Nos., making it
easy to find the desired function No.
Example
OFF
FNC[60] FNC[61]
ALL CLEAR P3E CLEAR
ON
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 216 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
ALL CLEAR [FNC60] PROGRAM mode
Function
Deletes entire program currently written into KV PLC and handheld programmer
[KV-P3E(01)].
• When ALL CLEAR is executed, "NOP" appears on every line of the program.
• Even if ALL CLEAR is executed, the data in the data memory is not cleared, but
remains stored. The counters, high speed counters, or internal utility relays
(latches) are cleared.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB RES ENT ENT

6 0 R-SRCH R-SRCH
Example of operation
00000
Display arbitrary line.
LD 00000
ORB RES ENT ALL CLEAR
FNC 6 0 R-SRCH Access ALL CLEAR function.
EXEC. OK?
ENT
R-SRCH Execute ALL CLEAR.
COMPLETED
00000
CLEAR
NOP
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR PROGRAM mode OFFLINE EDITOR

(P3E CLEAR) [FNC61]
Function
Deletes entire program currently written onto handheld programmer [KV-P3E(01)].
16
• The program written into the KV PLC is not deleted.
• Even when the KV PLC is read-disabled, you can edit a new program on the
programmer using this function.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB SET ENT ENT
6 1 R-SRCH R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
ORB SET ENT P3E CLEAR Access HANDHELD PROGRAMMER
FNC 6 1 R-SRCH EXEC. OK? CLEAR [P3E CLEAR] function.
ENT Execute HANDHELD PROGRAMMER
R-SRCH COMPLETED CLEAR.
00000
CLEAR
NOP
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 217 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
COUNTER CLEAR (CTR CLEAR) [FNC62] PROGRAM mode
Function
Performs following operation:
• Counter (C*** #*****):
The current value is reset to "0". The contact turns OFF.
• Up-down counter (UDC*** #*****):
The current value is reset to "0". The contact turns OFF.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB ANL ENT ENT
6 2 R-SRCH R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
ORB ANL ENT CTR CLEAR Access COUNTER CLEAR [CTR CLEAR]
FNC 6 R-SRCH
2 EXEC. OK? function.
ENT
R-SRCH Execute COUNTER CLEAR.
COMPLETED
00000
CLEAR Return to initial display.
LD 00000
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR PROGRAM mode

(HIGH-SPEED CTR CLR) [FNC63]
Function
6 Performs following operation:

• High-speed counter (CTH* *****):
The current value is reset to "0".
• High-speed counter comparator (CTC* #*****):
The contact turns OFF.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB ORL ENT ENT
6 3 R-SRCH R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
ORB ORL ENT HI-SPEED CTR CL Access HIGH SPEED COUNTER
FNC
6 3 R-SRCH EXEC. OK? CLEAR [HIGH SPEED CTR CLR] function.
ENT
R-SRCH Execute HIGH SPEED COUNTER.
COMPLETED
00000
LD 00000
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 218 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR PROGRAM mode

(DM ALL CLEAR) [FNC64]
Function
Deletes all data stored in data memory.
When ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR is executed, all data values in the data memory
is reset to "00000".
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB LDB ENT ENT

6 4 R-SRCH R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
ORB ORL ENT DM ALL CLEAR Access ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR
FNC 6 3 R-SRCH EXEC. OK? [DM ALL CLEAR] function.
ENT
R-SRCH Execute ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR.
COMPLETED
00000
LD 00000
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET PROGRAM mode

(L-RELAY ALL RST) [FNC65]
Function
Resets all holds on internal utility relays, except for special utility relays 2700
through 2715. 16
➮ "Refentive function of internal utility relays" (p.3-11)
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB ANB ENT ENT
6 5 R-SRCH R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
ORB ANB ENT L-RELAY ALL RST Access ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET
FNC 6 5 R-SRCH EXEC. OK? [L-RELAY ALL RST] function.
ENT
R-SRCH Execute ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET
COMPLETED
00000
LD 00000
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 219 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED PROGRAM mode OFFLINE EDITOR

(COMMUNICATION —) [FNC66]
Function
Writes program on handheld programmer [KV-P3E(01)] into KV, reads program in
KV onto handheld programmer, or verifies program (compares programs on pro-
grammer and on PLC).
When the KV is read-disabled, READ and VERIFY cannot be executed.
WRITE: KV-P3E(01) – Program → KV

READ: KV-P3E(01) ← Program – KV
Key operation
Basic operation
Read
FNC ORB ORB ENT BASE WRITE ENT ENT

6 6 R-SRCH ->READ VERIFY R-SRCH R-SRCH
OFF ON
Write
BASE ->WRITE
READ VERIFY ON OFF
OFF ON
Verify
BASE WRITE
READ ->VERIFY
Example of operation (for executing VERIFY)

00000
LD 00000
6 BASE U. WRITE Access PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED
ORB ORB ENT
FNC 6 6 R-SRCH ->READ VERIFY [COMMUNICATION...] function.
BASE U. WRITE
ON Select VERIFY.
READ ->VERIFY
ENT VERIFY W/BASE U.
R-SRCH Execute VERIFY of program.
EXEC. OK?
ENT VERIFY OK
R-SRCH PUSH CLR TO CON
00000
LD 00000
• The program is also automatically read both when the handheld programmer
[KV-P3E(01)] is connected to the Visual KV and when OFFLINE EDITOR is
quitted.
• The program is also automatically written and verified when the handheld pro-
grammer is switched from the PROGRAM mode to the RUN mode.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 220 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
OFFLINE EDITOR START RUN mode

(OFFLINE EDITOR) [FNC67]
Function
• Edits program using handheld programmer while KV is in operation.
• The program can be edited by following the same procedure as in the PRO-
GRAM mode. (The accessible functions, however, are restricted.)
• This function is used to edit the program for the memory card while the KV is in
use. Accordingly, when OFFLINE EDITOR is quitted [FNC68], the program is not
written into the KV, but the program in the KV is read onto the programmer.
• When stopping the operation of the KV while OFFLINE EDITOR is in use, change
the mode switch to PROGRAM. You can enter the PROGRAM mode without
clearing the program on the handheld programmer.
Note: To write the edited program into the KV, use the PROGRAM SENT OR
RECEIVED function [FNC66] and then quit the OFFLINE EDITOR function. In this
case, the KV stops the operation to write the new program, and then starts the
operation from the top of the program. Note that the timer values will be reset.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB LD ENT
6 7 R-SRCH
RUN
Initial display (RUN mode)
FNC[67] Access OFFLINE EDITOR START

FNC
OFFLINE EDITOR [OFFLINE EDITOR] function.
ENT 00000
R-SRCH Line 0 is displayed.
LD 00000
16
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP OFFLINE EDITOR
(QUIT OFF-L EDIT) [FNC68]
Function
Quits OFFLINE EDITOR.
When quitting the OFFLINE EDITOR function, the program is automatically verified
with that in the KV PLC. If two programs do not match, the program in the PLC is
read onto the programmer. If changes have already been made on the program in
the PLC, this program is automatically read onto the programmer.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC ORB AND ENT
6 8 R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
READ/LOAD OK When program differs from that in
FNC ORB
6
AND ENT
R-SRCH
8 PUSH CLR TO CONT KV PLC the latter is read.
RUN Return to initial display of RUN
CLEAR
mode.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 221 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE PROGRAM mode

CHANGE(CHG: T/C CURT-V) [FNC69] RUN mode
Function
Changes current value of timer/counter, or displays current value for monitoring.
Results obtained when TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE is ex-
ecuted.
Mode of handheld RUN mode

programmer
PROGRAM mode Timer input: ON Timer input: OFF
Type of timer/ Counter input: ON*1 Counter input:
counter OFF*2
Current values are not changed. Specified value ≥ preset value: Current values are
The current value will be changed to not changed.
a value equal to the preset value.
0.1-s timers (TMR) Specified value < preset value:
0.01-s timers (TMH) The current value will be changed to
1-ms timers (TMS) the specified value.
When the current value is 0,
however, the contact output goes
ON.
Specified value ≥ preset value: Specified value ≥ preset value: Current values are
The current value will be The current value will be changed to not changed.
changed to a value equal to the a value equal to the preset value.
preset value. Specified value < preset value:
Specified value < preset value: The current value will be changed to
Counters (CTR) The current value will be the specified value.
changed to the specified value. When the current value is equal to
When the current value is equal the preset value, however, the
to the preset value, however, the contact output goes ON.
contact output goes ON.
Specified value ≥ preset value: Specified value ≥ preset value: Current values are
The current value will be The current value will be changed to not changed.
changed to a value equal to the a value equal to the preset value.
Up-down preset value. Specified value < preset value:
6 counters (UDC) Specified value < preset value: The current value will be changed to
The current value will be the specified value.
changed to the specified value. The contact output goes OFF.
The contact output goes OFF.
The result varies according to the preset value of the CTC0 or CTC2 and the ON/OFF status
of the special utility relay (2103 or 2203).
When changing the current value of CTH0:

(When special utility relay 2103 is ON:)
Specified value for CTH0 ≥ preset value of CTC0:
The current value of CTH0 will be changed to "the preset value of CTC0 - 1".
Specified value for CTH0 < preset value of CTC0:
High-speed The current value of CTH0 will be changed to the specified value for CTH0.
counters (CTH) (When special utility relay 2103 is OFF:)
The current value of CTH0 will be changed to the specified value for CTH0.
When changing the current value of CTH1:

Specified value for CTH1 ≥ preset value of CTC2:
The current value of CTH1 will be changed to "the preset value of CTC2 - 1".
Specified value for CTH1 < preset value of CTC2:
(When special utility relay 2203 is OFF:)
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 222 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
• Any current value of the timer/counter which is not set on the program cannot be
changed.
• Any current value of the timers cannot be changed in the PROGRAM mode.
• TMH or TMS is specified using TMR. UDC is specified using CTR.
*1. In the case where the counter (C) input is ON and the up-down counter (UDC)
reset input is OFF:
*2. In the case contrary to the above *1:
Key operation
Basic operation
TMR
(T)
ORB OR ENT CTR ENT ENT

FNC
6 9 R-SRCH (C) Timer (or counter) No. R-SRCH Current value R-SRCH
CTH
Example of operation (In the RUN mode)

RUN
LD 00000
AND ENT T/C CURT-V #00010 Access TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE
FNC ORB
6 8 R-SRCH TMR000 CHANGE [CHG: T/C CURT-V] function.
CTR SET ENT T/C CURT-V #00010 Specify CTR001. Then current value (10) is
(C) 1 R-SRCH CTR001 #00000 displayed.
SET AND RES T/C CURT-V #00010 Enter desired value as new current value.
1 8 0 CTR001 #00180
ENT T/C CURT-V #00180
R-SRCH Current value has been changed.
CTR001
RUN Return to initial display of RUN
CLEAR
mode.
When the TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE function is accessed,

pressing #,@$ alternates between the decimal display and hexadecimal display.
16
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 223 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE PROGRAM mode

(CHG: T/C SET-V) [FNC70] RUN mode
Function
Changes preset value of timer/counter, or displays preset value for monitoring.
Result obtained when TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE is executed.
Mode of handheld RUN mode

programmer
PROGRAM mode Timer input: ON Timer input: OFF
Type of timer/ Counter input: ON*1 Counter input:
counter OFF*2
The preset value will be changed Specified value ≥ current value: The preset value
to the specified value. The preset value will be changed to will be changed to
The contact output goes OFF. the specified value. the specified value.
Specified value < current value: The current value
0.1-s timers (TMR) The preset value will be changed to will also be
0.01-s timers (TMH) the specified value. changed to the
1-ms timers (TMS) The current value will also be specified value.
changed to the specified value. The contact output
When the current value is 0, goes OFF.
however, the contact output goes
ON.
Specified value ≥ current value: Specified value ≥ current value: The preset value
The preset value will be changed The preset value will be changed to will be changed to
to the specified value. the specified value. the specified value.
Specified value < current value: Specified value < current value: The current value
The preset value will be changed The preset value will be changed to will also be
Counters (CTR) to the specified value. the specified value. changed to the
The current value will also be The current value will also be specified value.
changed to the specified value. changed to the specified value. The contact output
When the current value is equal When the current value is equal to goes OFF.
to the preset value, however, the the preset value, however, the
contact output goes ON. contact output goes ON.
Specified value ≥ current value: Specified value ≥ current value: The preset value
The preset value will be changed The preset value will be changed to will be changed to
6 to the specified value. the specified value. the specified value.
Specified value < current value. Specified value < current value. The current value
Up-down
The preset value will be changed The preset value will be changed to will also be
counters (UDC)
to the specified value. the specified value. changed to the
The current value will also be The current value will also be specified value.
changed to the specified value. changed to the specified value. The contact output
The contact output goes OFF. The contact output goes OFF. goes OFF.
The preset value will be changed to the specified value.
When the preset value of CTC0 or CTC2 is changed, the current value of CTH0 or CTH1 also
varies according to the specified value for CTC0 or CTC2.
When changing the preset value of CTC0:
Specified value for CTC0 ≤ current value of CTH0:
The current value of CTH0 will be changed to "the specified value for CTC0 - 1".
Specified value for CTC0 > current value of CTH0:
High-speed The current value of CTH0 will not be changed.
counter (When special utility relay 2103 is OFF:)
comparators The current value of CTH0 will not be changed. The contact of CTC0, CTC1, CTC2, or CTC3
(CTH) does not change.
When changing the preset value of CTC2:
Specified value for CTC2 ≤ current value of CTH1:
The current value of CTH1 will be changed to "the specified value for CTC2 - 1".
Specified value for CTC2 > current value of CTH1:
The current value of CTH1 will not be changed.
(When special utility relay 2203 is OFF:)
The current value of CTH1 will not be changed.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 224 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
• When the KV is write-disabled, the preset value cannot be changed.

• Any preset value of the timer/counter which is not set on the program cannot be
changed.
• TMH or TMS is specified using TMR.UDC is specified using CTR.
• The preset value in the source program is also changed.
*1. In the case where the counter (C) input is ON and the up-down counter (UDC)
reset input is OFF:
*2. In the case contrary to the above *1:
Key operation
Basic operation
TMR
(T)
LD RES ENT CTR ENT ENT

FNC
7 0 R-SRCH (C) Timer (or counter) No. R-SRCH Preset value R-SRCH
CTC
Example of operation (In the PROGRAM mode)

RUN
LD 00000
FNC LD RES ENT T/C SET-V #00020 Access TIMER/COUNTER SETTING
7 0 R-SRCH
TMR000 CHANGE [CHG: T/C SET-V] function.
CTR SET ENT T/C SET-V #00100 Specify CTR001. Then preset value of
(C) 1 R-SRCH CTR001 #00000 CTR001 is displayed.
ANL AND RES T/C SET-V #00100 Enter desired value as new current
2 8 0 CTR001 #00200 value. (200)
ENT T/C SET-V #00200
R-SRCH Preset value has been changed.
CTR001
00000
LD 00000
When the TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE function is accessed, pressing
#, $ alternates between the decimal display and hexadecimal display.
@
16
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 225 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
RELAY ON/OFF PROGRAM mode

(FORCED SET/RESET) [FNC71] RUN mode
Function
Forces relays to turn ON/OFF, or displays ON/OFF status of relay for monitoring.
Relays that can be forced ON/OFF (When Visual KV is used)
Type of relays PROGRAM mode RUN mode
Input relays 0000 to 0415 X 1. X 2.
Output relays 0500 to 0915 O 2. O 2.
Internal utility relays 1000 to 1915 O 3. O 3.
3000 to17915
Special utility relays 2000 to 2915 O 4. O 4.
Timers T000 to T249 O O 5.
Counters CTR000 to CTR249 O 6. O 7.
High speed counter CTC0 to CTC3
O 8. O 8.
comparators
Relays that can be forced ON/OFF ➞ Marked by O in the above tables
Relays that cannot be forced ON/OFF ➞ Marked by X in the above tables

Timers/counters which are not set on the program
Relay Nos. vary with the model. Before using this function, check the relay Nos. on
the relay No. list.
Note:
1. Relays can be forced ON/OFF when special utility relay 2301 (Input refresh disable) is
turned ON. (Visual KV Only)
2. The output terminals turn ON/OFF at the same time.
3. Relays which are not used in the program can be forced ON/OFF. Relays which are used
in the program can be forced ON/OFF from when the scan time begins until the program
changes the status of the relays.
6
4. Relays 2000 through 2008 and 2010 through 2015 cannot be forced ON/OFF.
5. When the input is ON:

When the timer is forced ON, output turns ON and the current value is reset to "0000".
When the timer is forced OFF, output turns OFF and the current value is changed to a
value equal to the preset value.
When the input is OFF:

The timer can be forced ON/OFF from when the scan time begins until this timer instruc-
tion is executed in the program.
6. When the counter is forced ON, output turns ON and the current value is changed to a
value equal to the preset value.
When the counter is forced OFF, output turns OFF and the current value is reset to
"0000". (For UDC, the current value is reset to "0000".)
7. When the reset input is OFF:

When the counter is forced ON, output turns ON and the current value is retained as is.
When the counter is forced OFF, output turns OFF and the current value is reset to
"0000". (For UDC, the current value is reset to "0000".)
When the reset input is ON:

The counter can be forced ON/OFF from when the scan time begins until this counter
instruction is executed in the program.
8. The high speed counter comparators can be forced OFF only. (They cannot be forced
ON.)
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 226 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
Key operation
Basic operation
LD SET ENT ON
FNC Relay No.
7 1 R-SRCH
OFF

RUN
FNC
LD SET ENT FORCED SET/RESET Access the RELAY ON/OFF [FORCED SET/RESET]
7 1 R-SRCH 00000 function. ON/OFF status of input relay 0000 is displayed.
ANB RES RES FORCED SET/RESET Specify output relay 500. (OFF)
5 0 0 00500
FORCED SET/RESET
ON Force output relay 500 ON.
00500
CTR SET FORCED SET/RESET
(C) 1 Specify CTR001. (ON)
CTR001
FORCED SET/RESET
OFF Force CTR001 OFF.
CTR001
RUN
CLEAR Return to initial display of RUN mode.
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY PROGRAM mode

(DM WRITE) [FNC72] RUN mode
Function
Displays current data stored in data memory for monitoring, or changes it.
• Pressing #,@$ alternates between decimal input and hexadecimal input.
• The data stored in the temporary memory can also be displayed and changed.
(Note that data cannot be written into TM30 and TM31.)
Key operation
Basic operation
16
LD ANL ENT
FNC
7 2 R-SRCH
Data memory No. ENT
R-SRCH
@
#, $
Data value to be written ENT
R-SRCH

RUN
FNC LD ANL ENT DM VALUEM #00000 Access WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY [DM WRITE] function.
7 2 R-SRCH
DM0000 Current data stored in DM000 is displayed on upper column.
ORL ENT DM VALUEM #00010
3 R-SRCH Specify DM003 to display data stored in it.
DM0003 #00000
@ DM VALUEM $000A
#, $ Change decimal display to hexadecimal display.
DM0003 $0000
W-ON W-ON DM VALUEM $000A
F F Enter desired data.
DM0003 $00FF
ENT DM VALUEM $00FF
R-SRCH Data has been written.
DM0003
@ DM VALUEM #00255
#, $ Change hexadecimal display to decimal display.
DM0003
RUN
Pressing [ENDH/TM] displays the data in the temporary memory, while pressing
[ENDH/TM] displays the data in the data memory.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 227 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
READ TRIMMER SETTING PROGRAM mode

RUN mode
(TRIMMER MONITOR) [FNC73] OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Displays trimmer setting value of analog timer(s) in real time.
• The displayed value ranges from 0 to 9999.
• The Visual KV Series is provided with two digital trimmers.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC LD ORL ENT
7 3 R-SRCH

RUN
FNC LD SET ENT 0:0249 1:0000 Access READ TRIMMER SETTING [TRIMMER MONI-
7 1 R-SRCH
2:0000 3:0000 TOR] function. Trimmer setting value is displayed.*
RUN
* The KV PLC allows setting of the digital trimmer value within the range of 0 to
65535. However, the handheld programmer supports the low-order 4 digits only.
Example: When the value of a digital trimmer is set to "25000", the handheld
programmer displays "5000".
SYNTAX CHECK PROGRAM mode

(PROGRAM CHECK) [FNC74] OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Checks program throughout lines for syntax.
• If the program has any syntax error, the error message is displayed. At this time,
press [CLEAR] to display the line with the error and change the program.
6 • If the program has two or more errors, these errors will be displayed one at a
time.
• The syntax of the program is checked, also when the operation mode is switched
from PROGRAM to RUN.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC LD LDB ENT

7 4 R-SRCH

00000
LD 00000
FNC LD LDB ENT PROGRAM CHECK Access SYNTAX CHECK [PROGRAM CHECK] func-
7 4 R-SRCH
EXEC. OK? tion.
ENT PROG. CHECK OK Execute SYNTAX CHECK.(When the program has no
R-SRCH PUSH CLR TO CONT error)
CLEAR
00000 Return to initial display.
LD 00000
ENT ENTER ENDH If program has any error, press [CLEAR] to display line
R-SRCH PUSH CLR TO CONT with error.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 228 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.3 Functions
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK PROGRAM mode

(PROGRAM SIZE) [FNC75] OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Displays program capacity of program on handheld programmer [KV-P3E(01)] in
units of block.
• Up to 48 blocks of program can be written into KV. (Program capacity: 4000
steps)
• The number of blocks used for entering instructions from the first to the last
(excluding "NOP"s) and timer/counter preset values are displayed as the program
capacity.
• 256 bytes are considered one block. If each instruction is assumed to require 3
bytes, one block comprises approx. 85 lines.
Note: Timer and counter preset values require almost one block of storage capacity.
Key operation
Basic operation
FNC LD ANB ENT
7 5 R-SRCH
00000
LD 00000
FNC LD ANB ENT PROGRAM SIZE The number of blocks used for program
7 5 R-SRCH
02 BLOCK is displayed.
000000
LD 00000
• The program area of KV is 12,000 bytes. Since one block is 256 bytes, the
program area is 46 blocks as shown in the following.
.
12,000 ÷ 256 =. 46 (blocks) 16
In addition to the above 46 blocks, approximately one block is required for timer
and counter preset values, resulting in a total of 48 blocks.
• Program storage capacity of memory cards

M-2: 125 blocks (24 programs max.)
M-3: 506 blocks (48 programs max.)
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 229 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
6.4 Memory Card

Memory card M-2/M-3 can store programs created on the handheld programmer
KV-P3E(01) or on a personal computer (using the programming support software KV
IncrediWare (DOS) and card reader/writer Z-1). These programs can be transferred
to the PLC.
6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)]

Function Description
CLEAR Initializes memory card. (required when using new memory
card.)
Deletes all programs in memory card.
NEW Writes new program into memory card.
Manages programs based on their names (3 of any characters
in hex: 0 to 9 and A to F) and dates.
ACCS SAVE Overwrites program on programmer onto desired program in
memory card.
LOAD Retrieves desired program from memory card.
VERIFY Compares desired programs on programmer and in memory
card.
DELETE Deletes desired program in memory card.
• The memory card stores all programs including those written after ENDH instruc-
tion. (NOP instruction is not included.)
• One memory card can store programs used on different KV PLCs.
• The memory card can only be used in the handheld programmer when the mode
switch on this programmer is set to PROGRAM or when the OFFLINE EDITOR is
used.
• Each program must have a name distinct from other programs stored in the
memory card.
6 6.4.2 Storage Capacity

The M-2 and M-3 have the following storage capacity:
Model Capacity Number of programs
M-2 32 Kbytes 24 programs max. (total number of blocks: 125 max.)
M-3 128 Kbytes 48 programs max. (total number of blocks: 506 max.)
1 block is made of 256 bytes.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 230 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
Inserting the memory card
Memory card indicator
Memory card slot
Memory card
M-2 or M-3
Handheld programmer
KV-P3E(01)
KE
YN
KV CE
P-O KV
PP P-5
OK 1
VP
KV
P
1. Set the mode switch to PROGRAM or use OFFLINE EDITOR [FNC67].

2. Insert the card into the slot with the KEYENCE logo facing up and arrow pointing
to the slot as shown on the left.
Note 1: Do not insert the memory card backwards.

Note 2: Do not insert or remove the card when the memory card indicator is lit.
Press [CLEAR] first to turn OFF the indicator before inserting or removing the card.
16
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 231 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
CLEAR PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Initializes the memory card.
• Be sure to initialize every new card before using it.
• Use this function to clear all programs in the card.
Example 1: Initializing the new memory card M-2 (32 kbytes)

00000
Display arbitrary line in program.
LD 00000
CARD NEWCARD
MON A prompt appears for confirmation.
INITIALIZE OK?
ENT 32 KBYTES CARD
R-SRCH Select memory capacity.
INITIALIZE?
ENT FREE: 24PROGRAM
R-SRCH Available storage capacity is displayed.
125 BLOCK
00000
CLEAR (*) LD 00000
Return to initial display.
(*) Press [ENT/R-SRCH] instead of [CLEAR] to continue initializing.
Example 2: Initializing the memory card M-3 (128 kbytes) with programs
stored
00000
LD 00000
CARD FREE: 44 PROGRAM
MON Available storage capacity is displayed.
486 BLOCK
ENT CARD NEW
R-SRCH Available functions are displayed.
->ACCS CLEAR
CARD NEW
ON OFF OFF Select "CLEAR".
ACCS ->CLEAR
6 ENT 32 KBYTES CARD
R-SRCH INITIALIZE?
128 KBYTES CARD
ON OFF Select storage capacity.
INITIALIZE?
ENT FREE: 48 PROGRAM
R-SRCH Memory card is initialized.
506 BLOCK
00000
CLEAR (*) Return to initial display.
LD 00000
(*) Press [ENT/R-SRCH] instead of [CLEAR] to continue initializing.
Be sure to select the correct storage capacity for the M-2 and M-3 as follows:
CAUTION
M-2: 32 kbytes
M-3: 128 kbytes
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 232 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
NEW PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Saves a new program in the memory card.
• Use this function to save the new program currently on the programmer into the
memory card.
• Up to 3 alphanumeric characters (0 to 9 and A to F) and up to 6 numeric char-
acters can be used respectively to specify the program name and date.
Example: Program name: ABC, date: 10-11-99
00000
LD 00000
486 BLOCK
ENT CARD -> NEW
R-SRCH OFF Select "NEW".
ACCS CLEAR
ENT NAME: 000 New display appears for entry of
R-SRCH
DATE: 00-00-00 of program name and date.
OUT OUB MPS NAME: ABC
A B C Enter program name.
DATE: 00-00-00
NAME: ABC
OFF Cursor moves down for date entry.
DATE: 00-00-00
OR LDB SET RES SET SET NAME: ABC
9 4 1 0 1 1 Enter date.
DATE: 10-11-99
ENT ABC: SAVE A prompt appears for confirmation.
R-SRCH
EXEC. OK?
ENT FREE: 48 PROGRAM Saving is completed and available
R-SRCH 504 BLOCK storage capacity is displayed.
CLEAR
00000
LD 00000
• If necessary, press ON or OFF to move the cursor up or down to change the

program name and date.
• Be sure to check beforehand that the memory card has enough storage capac- 16
ity available for saving the new program.
• Assign each program a name distinct from other programs.
Desired Nos. (0 to 9) can be entered as a date for use as a version No.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 233 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
ACCS PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Function
Overwrites onto, retrieves, deletes, or compares the desired program in the memory
card.
This function cannot be accessed when no programs are stored in the memory card
such as after CLEAR has been executed.
SAVE
Overwrites the program currently on the programmer onto the desired program in
the memory card.
LOAD
Retrieves the desired program from the memory card onto the programmer. At this
time, the program in the memory card will be lost.
DELETE
Deletes the desired program in the memory card.
VERIFY
Compares the program currently on the programmer with the desired program in the
memory card to determine whether they are identical.
Basic operation CARD

MON
FREE: 46 PROGRAM Available storage capacity is displayed.

502 BLOCK
ENT
R-SRCH
CARD NEW
Select ACCS.
->ACCS CLEAR
ENT
R-SRCH
ABC 10-11-94
6 02 BLOCK Press ON or OFF to sequentially display each program line.
ON OFF
777 10-19-94
02 BLOCK Select desired program.
ENT
R-SRCH
<LOAD>
->LOAD VERIFY
DELETE SAVE
ON OFF
<DELETE>
LOAD VERIFY
->DELETE SAVE
ON OFF ON OFF
<VERIFY>
LOAD ->VERIFY
DELETE SAVE
ON OFF
<SAVE>
LOAD VERIFY
DELETE->SAVE
Select the desired function and press [ENT/R-SRCH] . Then, a prompt appears for
confirmation. Press [ENT/R-SRCH] again to execute or [CLEAR] to escape.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 234 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
ACCS: SAVE PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Example: Overwriting the program currently on the programmer onto program

"777" in the memory card
00000
LD 00000
502 BLOCK
ENT CARD NEW
R-SRCH OFF Select "ACCS".
->ACCS CLEAR
ENT ABC 10-11-94 Arbitrary program in memory card
R-SRCH
02 BLOCK is displayed.
777 10-19-94
OFF Select desired program.
02 BLOCK
ENT ->LOAD VERIFY
R-SRCH DELETE SAVE
LOAD VERIFY
OFF OFF OFF ON Select "SAVE".
DELETE ->SAVE
ENT NAME: 777
R-SRCH DATE: 00-00-00
OR OR SET SET RES SET NAME: 777
9 9 1 1 0 1 Enter date.
DATE: 11-01-99
ENT 777: SAVE
R-SRCH A prompt appears for confirmation.
EXEC. OK?
ENT FREE: 46 PROGRAM Saving is completed and available
R-SRCH 501 BLOCK storage capacity is displayed.
ENT 00000
R-SRCH CLEAR Return to initial display.
LD 00000
• Program is automatically saved onto another program under the same name. Use
NEW to save the desired program separately under the different name.
• Be sure to check beforehand that the memory card has enough storage capacity
available for saving the new program.
• Use [BS] to delete incorrect date. 16
Desired Nos. (0 to 9) can be entered as a date for use as a version No.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 235 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
ACCS: LOAD PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Example: Retrieving program "ABC" from the memory card onto the
programmer
00000
LD 00000
501 BLOCK
ENT CARD NEW
R-SRCH Select "ACCS".
->ACCS CLEAR
ENT ABC 10-11-94
R-SRCH Select desired program.
02 BLOCK
ENT ->LOAD VERIFY
R-SRCH Select "LOAD".
DELETE SAVE
ENT ABC: LOAD A prompt appears for confirmation.
R-SRCH EXEC.OK? Press + again to execute.
ENT READ/ LOAD OK Loading is completed and available
R-SRCH storage capacity is displayed.
00000
ENT
R-SRCH ( CLEAR ) LD 00000
ACCS: VERIFY PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Example: Comparing program "ABC" in the memory card with the program on
the programmer
00000
LD 00000
501 BLOCK
ENT CARD NEW
Select "ACCS".
6 R-SRCH ->ACCS CLEAR
ENT ABC 10-11-94
R-SRCH Select desired program.
02 BLOCK
ENT ->LOAD VERIFY
R-SRCH DELETE SAVE
->LOAD VERIFY
OFF OFF Select "VERIFY".
DELETE SAVE
ENT ABC: LOAD
EXEC.OK?
ENT VERIFY OK Verifying is completed and available
R-SRCH storage capacity is displayed.
00000
ENT
If two programs are not identical, "VERIFY ERROR" is displayed.

Press [ENT/R-SRCH] or [CLEAR] to clear this message.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 236 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
ACCS: DELETE PROGRAM mode or OFFLINE EDITOR
Example: Deleting program "777" in the memory card

00000
LD 00000
501 BLOCK
ENT CARD NEW
R-SRCH Select "ACCS".
->ACCS CLEAR
ENT ABC 10-11-94 .
R-SRCH Arbitrary program is displayed
02 BLOCK
777 10-11-94
OFF Select desired program.
03 BLOCK
ENT LOAD VERIFY
R-SRCH ->DELETE SAVE
LOAD VERIFY
OFF Select "DELETE".
->DELETE SAVE
ENT 777: LOAD
EXEC.OK?
ENT FREE: 46 PROGRAM Deleting is completed and available
R-SRCH
501 BLOCK storage capacity is displayed.
00000
ENT
Program transfer between KVs

Programs can be transferred between different models in the KV Series using the
memory card. However, contact comments cannot be transferred. Use the "KV
incrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software
to transfer contact comments.
Note: Visual KV and KV-300 only

16
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 237 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

6.4 Memory Card
Precautions for handling memory cards

■ Memory card specifications
Model M-2 M-3
Memory capacity 32 Kbytes 128 Kbytes
Battery service life 5 years within 0 to +40°C (32 to 104°F), No freezing
Ambient temperature 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) during operation,
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F) during non-operation, No freezing
• The battery service life is 5 years at normal operating temperatures (0 to 40°C)

(32 to 104°F)(no freezing). The service life is shortened at temperatures higher
than 40°C (104°F).
• Do not use the memory card at high temperatures or expose it to direct sunlight
for long periods of time.
• Avoid splashes of water coming in contact with the memory card and do not
store the memory card in a humid location.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject the memory card to strong shocks.
• Store the memory card in the card case provided to protect it from static elec-
tricity and dust.
• Avoid allowing dust and dirt from entering the connector. (Do not insert foreign
matter, such as a pin, into the connector.)
■ To replace battery
1. Loosen the two screws with a jeweler’s screwdriver and remove the cover.
2. Replace the battery (model No. CR2016). Make sure that the "+" sign on the
battery faces up.
3. Put the cover back on the card.
6
CAUTION The data in the card will be automatically lost when the battery is removed.
Be sure to prepare a backup copy of the stored data beforehand.
KVHKA Chap 06_3&4&5.p65 238 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

KV-300
KV-10/80
Chapter 7
KV-L2 Serial Interface Module KV-300 Series Only
This chapter describes the serial interface modules for KV-300 Series.
7.1 Outline ........................................................................................ 1-240

7.1.1 Features ................................................................................................... 1-240
7.2 Configuration ............................................................................. 1-241
7.2.1 Parts and Functions ................................................................................. 1-241
7.2.2 System Configuration ............................................................................... 1-242
7.2.3 Outline of Operation Modes ..................................................................... 1-244
7.3 Installation .................................................................................. 1-245
7.3.1 Setting the Operation Mode ..................................................................... 1-245
7.3.2 Communications Protocols ...................................................................... 1-247
7.3.3 Connector Wiring ..................................................................................... 1-248
7.3.4 Connecting to External Units .................................................................... 1-249
7.4 Software Setup ........................................................................... 1-252
7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)] ............................................ 1-252
7.5 KV Mode Programming ............................................................. 1-253
7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode .............................................................................. 1-253
7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure ........................................................... 1-255
7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data ............................................... 1-262
7.6 Display Interface Mode Programming ..................................... 1-270
7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode ........................................................ 1-270
7.6.2 Command and Response Format ............................................................ 1-273
7.6.3 Commands and Responses ..................................................................... 1-275
7.7 Non-procedure Mode Programming ........................................ 1-292
7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode ........................................................... 1-292
7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos. .................... 1-294
7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data ............................................................................. 1-297
7.7.4 Receiving Text Data ................................................................................. 1-298
7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function .................................................. 1-300
7.8 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................. 1-304
7.8.1 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 1-304
7.8.2 Precautions .............................................................................................. 1-305
7.9 Specifications ............................................................................ 1-306
7.9.1 Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-306
7.9.2 Dimensions .............................................................................................. 1-307
7.10 Command List ............................................................................ 1-308
7.10.1 List of Commands and Responses .......................................................... 1-308
7.10.2 List of Commands and Responses in Display Interface mode ................. 1-309
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 239 08.3.11, 11:17 AM

7.2 Configuration KV-300 Series Only
7.1 Outline
7.1.1 Features
The KV-L2 Serial Interface Module is an interface module that controls communica-
tions between the KV-300 CPU and external units such as personal computers. It
has the following features.
Includes RS-232C and RS-422A communications ports.

The RS-232C port has a D-SUB 25-pin type. The other port, located on the terminal
block, is switchable between RS-422A and RS-232C.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Monitors operation status of the KV-300 CPU.

The KV-L2 monitors the operation status of the KV-300 CPU by reading the values
of data memory, relay contacts, counters, and timers from the KV-300 CPU.
Uploads and downloads Ladder programs.

Ladder programs can be transferred with the KV Ladder programming software (Ver.
2).
Allows 1:n connections.

Up to ten KV-300 CPUs can be connected to a single personal computer through
the KV-L2, allowing multi-drop connections. Multi-drop connections between KV-300
CPUs are also supported (in non-procedure mode).
Data can be fetched from external units.

Text data can be read into the KV-300 CPU data memory.
Allows direct connection of a display using a Host-Link protocol.
1-240 Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 240 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.2 Configuration
7.2.1 Parts and Functions
7 Port 2 interface selection switch

8 Terminator selection switch
1 POWER indicator
2 Port 1 operation
indicator
KV-300
A Station no.
KV-10/80
3 Port 2 operation setting dial
indicator
B Connector to
4 Port 1 (RS-232C)
other modules
5 Connector to other
modules
6 Port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A
switchable)
9 Communications mode setting switch 0 Communications protocol setting switch
1 POWER indicator 6 Port 2 (RS-232C/RS-422A)

Lights when the power supply turns Switchable between RS-232C and
ON. RS-422A.
2 Port 1 operation indicator 7 Port 2 selection switch
Indicates communication status. For switching between RS-232C
During communication: or RS-422 communications
Green: Transmission modes.
Red: Reception
8 Terminator selection switch
Yellow: Transmission and reception
For terminating the modules at the
OFF: Communication disabled
rightmost and leftmost ends of an
3 Port 2 operation indicator RS-422A connection. 17
Indicates communication status.
9 Communications mode setting
During communication:
switch
Green: Transmission
For setting the operation mode of
Red: Reception
the KV-L2.
Yellow: Transmission and reception
OFF: Communication disabled 0 Communications protocol setting
switch
4 Port 1 (RS-232C)
For setting the transmission rate,
Port for RS-232C communications.
data bit, parity, and stop bit.
5 Connector to other modules
A Station no. setting dial
For connection to a KV-300 CPU or
For setting the station no. in the
external unit.
1:n connection sequence.
Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module 1-241
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 241 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


The following examples show KV-L2 system configurations in 1:1 and 1:n connec-
tion patterns. These examples also highlight the functional differences between
these connection patterns.
Connection to the KV-300 CPU

A maximum of two KV-L2s can be connected to the KV-300 CPU. The KV-L2s
should be installed at the right end of a system.
KV-U4 KV-300 KV-L2 KV-L2

KV-300
KV-10/80
1:1 connection
Connect the KV-L2 to an external unit (such as a personal computer) through the
RS-232C or RS-422A ports.
7 Note: Use RS-232C communications for connections of up to 15 meters; use RS-

422A communications for connections of up to 500 meters.
1:n connection
Up to 10 KV-L2 modules can be connected to an external unit (such as a personal
computer) through the RS-422A port.
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 242 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

2:1 connection
The KV-L2 can be connected simultaneously to a personal computer and a display
through ports 1 and 2.
KV-300
KV-10/80
2:n connection
Multiple KV-L2 modules can be connected to an external unit (such as a personal
computer) using a multi-drop connection pattern through the RS-422A port. Mul-
tiple KV-L2 modules can themselves be interconnected to another external unit
(such as a display) through the RS-232C port.
17
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 243 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.2.3 Outline of Operation Modes

The KV-L2 has three operation modes. The desired mode can be set with the DIP
switch.
KV mode
In KV mode, the KV-L2 permits serial communications and transmission/reception of
text data through the KV-300 CPU modular jack.
Through a connected PC, the statuses of the KV-300 can be monitored, stored data
can be read or updated, and data can be fetched from an external unit.
The data to be fetched from the external unit must have STX and ETX as separa-
tors.
KV-300
KV-10/80
➮ Refer to "7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode" on page 1-253.
Display Interface mode

In display interface mode, the KV-L2 can control the KV-300 when used with
displays. Also, a connected personal computer can be used to monitor the KV-300
statuses and read or update stored data.
➮ Refer to "7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode" on page 1-270.
Non-procedure mode
In non-procedure mode, the KV-L2 allows transmission/reception of text data. The
data does not require STX and ETX separators, but does require CR or CRLF
separators.
➮ Refer to "7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode" on page 1-292.
KV mode/Display interface mode
7 Display interface mode PC
KV mode/non-
procedure mode
MT-400
External display devices
RD, RV3
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 244 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.3 Installation KV-300 Series Only
7.3 Installation
7.3.1 Setting the Operation Mode
Setting the operation mode
Turn off the power switch before setting the operation mode. Use the operation
mode setting switches A1 to A4 (SET A). A1 and A2 control the mode for port 1, and
A3 and A4 control the mode for port 2. (Ports 1 and 2 can be set independently.)
Communication mode setting switch
KV-300
KV-10/80
ON
OFF
A1 A2 A3 A4
(A1 to A4 are factory-set to OFF.)
Port 1 Port 2
A1 A2 A3 A4
KV mode OFF OFF OFF OFF
Display Interface mode OFF ON OFF ON
Non-procedure mode ON ON ON ON
Setting port 2
Set port 2 to either RS-232C or RS-422A modes.
17
Port 2 interface selection switch
422A 232C
INTERFACE
• RS-422A: Set the switch to the left (422A)*1.

• RS-232C: Set the switch to the right (232C).
• *1 When setting port 2 to RS-422A, set the TERMINA-
TOR (terminal resistor) to ON. (Refer to Setting the
TERMINATOR on the next page.)
• If port 2 is set to RS-232C mode and is connected to an external unit set to

CAUTION
RS-422A mode, the connected unit may be damaged.
• When setting port 2 to RS-232C mode, set the TERMINATOR (terminal
resistor) to OFF.
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 245 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Setting the TERMINATOR (terminal resistor)

Turn off the power switch before setting the TERMINATOR switch.
When using the RS-422A communications mode, set the TERMINATOR selection
switches of the KV-L2s at both ends of the connection cable to ON.
Set the TERMINATOR selection switches of any KV-L2s connected between the
leftmost and rightmost KV-L2s to OFF. If set to ON, normal communications will not
take place.
TERMINATOR selection switch
Termination required: Set the switch to

the left (ON) position.
KV-300
No termination required: Set the switch

KV-10/80
ON OFF to the right (OFF) position.

TERMINATOR
* *
In the figure above, only those KV-L2s marked with an

asterisk require their TERMINATOR switches set to ON.
Note: When setting port 2 to RS-232C mode, set the TERMINATOR selection
switch to OFF.
Setting the station no.

When the RS-422A communications mode has been selected, a station no. must be
assigned to each KV-L2 to establish which KV-L2 is to communicate with the
external unit (personal computer). Turn off the power switch before setting the
station no.
Station no. setting dial
7 1 0 F
2
E
5 4 3
D C B
A
9 8 7
Set the station no. to a number within the range 0 to 9.

Do not assign the same station no. to more than one
KV-L2 module. The module is factory-set to 0.
Note 1: When the KV-L2 is set to RS-422A communications mode, set the TERMI-
NATOR (terminal resistor) to ON.
Note 2: Set the terminators of the modules connected in intermediate positions
(between the leftmost and rightmost KV-L2s) to OFF.
Note 3: Do not assign the same station no. to more than one module; otherwise,
data communication will be disrupted.
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 246 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.3.2 Communications Protocols

This section describes the use of the communications protocol setting switch (SET
B).
Setting communications protocols

Set the baud rate, data bit, parity, and stop bit with the SET B DIP switch.
Before setting the switch, set the power switch to OFF.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Communications protocol setting switch
ON
OFF
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
B1 to B7 are factory-set to OFF.
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
Baud rate 1200 bits/s OFF OFF OFF OFF
2400 bits/s ON OFF OFF OFF
4800 bits/s OFF ON OFF OFF
9600 bits/s ON ON OFF OFF
19200 bits/s OFF OFF ON OFF
31250 bits/s ON OFF ON OFF
38400 bits/s OFF ON ON OFF
Setting disabled ON ON ON OFF
17
Parameters Data bits 7 bits OFF OFF
8 bits ON OFF
Parity None OFF OFF OFF
Odd ON OFF OFF
Even ON ON OFF
Stop bit 1 bit OFF OFF
2 bits ON OFF
Note 1: Communications protocols for the modules to be connected must be

identical; otherwise, communication will fail.
Note 2: The communications protocols settings apply to both ports 1 and 2.
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 247 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.3.3 Connector Wiring

Wiring RS-232C cables
D-Sub 25-pin connector
Unit designated Unit designated
KV-L2 as DTE KV-L2 as DCE
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SD 2 2 SD SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD RD 3 3 RD
RS 4 4 RS RS 4 4 RS
8
CS 5 5 CS CS 5 5 CS
7
6
6 DR 6 DR
5
4
20 ER 20 ER
3
SG 7 7 SG SG 7 7 SG
2
KV-300
1
KV-10/80
D-Sub 25-pin
connector
Terminal block
Unit designated Unit designated

KV-L2 as DTE KV-L2 as DCE
1 3 5
SG SDA RDA SD 3 2 SD SD 3 2 SD
(SG) (SD) (RD) RD 5 3 RD RD 5 3 RD
2 4 4 RS 4 RS
SDB RDB 5 CS 5 CS
6 DR 6 DR
KV-L2 terminal nos. 20 ER 20 ER
SG 1 7 SG SG 1 7 SG
Wiring RS-422A cables
1 3 5 KV-L2 External unit

SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD)
SDA 3 SDA
SDB 2 SDB
2 4 RDA 5 RDA
SDB RDB RDB 4 RDB
SG 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
Note: Do not short-circuit the SG terminal with any other signal terminal. Doing so
may cause failure of the unit.
7
Recommended communications cable (for use with RS-422A)
Item Specification
Cable type Shielded cable
Logarithm 3P
Maximum conductor resistance at 20°C (68°F) 88.0 Ω/km
Maximum insulation resistance 10.000 MΩ·km
Withstand voltage 500 VDC for 1 min
Maximum electrostatic capacity (1 kHz) 60 nF/km on average
Characteristic impedance (100 kHz) 110 ±10Ω
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 248 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.3.4 Connecting to External Units

Connecting to An External Display
Connect the KV-L2 to the external displays through the RS-232C port. Set the KV-
L2 to Display Interface mode.
Use the serial interface equivalent to the Host Link protocol.
When using port 1

Use optional connection cable OP-90906.
KV-L2 Display
1 1
KV-300
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
KV-10/80
9
SD 2 2 SD
4
RD 3 3 RD
8
3
RS 4 4 RS
8
7
7
CS 5 5 CS
2
6
6
5
6 6
1
4
SG 7 7 SG
3
2
8 8
1
9 9 D-Sub 9-pin connector

D-Sub 25-pin
connector
When using port 2 (set to RS-232C mode)

Use optional connection cable OP-20302.
Display
5
1 3 5
Black
1
9
SG SDA RDA SD 3 2 SD
4
(SG) (SD) (RD) Brown
8
RD 5 3 RD
3
2 4 4 RS
7
SDB RDB
2
5 CS
6
6 DR
1
KV-L2 terminal nos. Blue
SG 1 7 SG
8 D-Sub 9-pin connector
9
Connecting to an IBM PC-AT Computer

When connecting the KV-L2 to an IBM PC-AT computer, use either RS-232C or RS-
422A mode. To connect through RS-422A mode, the PC must have an RS-422A
interface.
Set the KV-L2 to either KV, Display interface , or non-procedure modes.
17
When using port 1
An RS-232C cable is required. The following figure shows the wiring connections.
KV-L2 PC
SD 2 2 SD
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
RD 3 3 RD
RS 4 4 RS
8
CS 5 5 CS
7
6 DR
6
5
20 ER
3 4
SG 7 7 SG
2 1
D-Sub 25-pin
connector

The following figure shows the wiring connections.
KV-L2 PC
SD 3 2 SD
1 3 5
RD 5 3 RD
SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) 4 RS
2 4
5 CS
SDB RDB 6 DR
20 ER
KV-L2 terminal nos. SG 1 7 SG
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 249 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

When using port 2 (set to RS-422A mode)

KV-L2 PC
1 3 5 SDA 3 SDA
SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) SDB 2 SDB
RDA 5 RDA
2 4
SDB RDB
RDB 4 RDB
SG 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
When connecting multiple KV-L2s through port 2 (set to RS-422A mode)
The following figure shows the wiring connections. The PC serves as the master
unit.
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-L2 KV-L2 PC
1 3 5 SDA 3 SDA(3) SDA
SG SDA RDA SDB 2 SDB(2) SDB
(SG) (SD) (RD)
RDA 5 RDA(5) RDA
2 4 RDB 4 RDB(4) RDB
SDB RDB
SG 1 SG(1) SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
Connecting to the KV-10/16/24/40/80

Connect the KV-L2 to the KV-10/16/24/40/80 through the RS-232C port.
Set the KV-L2 to non-procedure mode.
When using port 1

Use the optional connection cable (OP-96368) and a D-Sub 25-pin connector (OP-
96369) to connect the KV-L2 to the RS-232C connector.
KV-L2 KV CPU
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SD 2 3 SD
RD 3 5 RD
RS 4
8
7
CS 5
6
SG 7 4 SG
5
4
23 45
3
D-Sub 25-pin connector Connection cable

2
KV CPU pin nos.

1
(OP-96369) (OP-96368)
D-Sub 25-pin
connector

7 The following figure shows the wiring connections.
KV-L2 KV CPU
1 3 5 SD 3 3 SD
SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) RD 5 5 RD
2 4
SDB RDB
SG 1 4 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos. 23 45
KV CPU pin nos.
Connecting KV-L2s
KV-L2s can be connected either through RS-232C or RS-422A connections. Set the
KV-L2s to either KV or non-procedure modes.
When using port 1 (1:1 connection)

Use an RS-232C cable. The following figure shows the wiring connections.
KV-L2 KV-L2
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD
RS 4 4 RS
8
CS 5 5 CS
7
6
SG 7 7 SG
5
4
3
2
1
D-Sub 25-pin
connector
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 250 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


KV-L2 KV-L2
1 3 5
SG SDA RDA SD 3 3 SD
(SG) (SD) (RD) RD 5 5 RD
2 4
SDB RDB
SG 1 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
KV-300
When using port 2 (set to RS-422A mode)
KV-10/80
KV-L2 KV-L2
1 3 5
SG SDA RDA
SDA 3 3 SDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) SDB 2 2 SDB
2 4 RDA 5 5 RDA
SDB RDB RDB 4 4 RDB
SG 1 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
When using port 2 to connect multiple KV-L2s (set to RS-422A mode)

The KV-L2 at the left end is the master module.
KV-L2 KV-L2 KV-L2

1 3 5
SG SDA RDA
SDA 3 SDA(3) 3 SDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) SDB 2 SDB(2) 2 SDB
2 4
RDA 5 RDA(5) 5 RDA
SDB RDB RDB 4 RDB(4) 4 RDB
SG 1 SG(1) 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
17
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 251 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.4 Software Setup KV-300 Series Only
7.4 Software Setup

7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)]
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) from the KV-L2
A personal computer, when connected to the KV-L2 of the designated station no.,
can transfer programs to multiple KV-300 CPUs and monitor their operations. To
use this function, change the environmental string as follows before starting the KV
IncrediWare (DOS).
SET KV-LNK=Y
KV-300
KV-10/80
By substituting Y with 0 or 1 to F, your personal computer can communicate with

KV-300 CPUs through the designated KV-L2 without requiring selection of the KV-
L2 station no.
Example
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS)
C>SET KV-LNK=Y ENTER
C>MNU ENTER
Example
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) by using KV-L2 designated as station no.1
C>SET KV-LNK=1
C>MNU
Note: When KV-LNK is set to "Y", the KV IncrediWare (DOS) confirms the station
no. to be accessed whenever communication* is attempted. This permits frequent
changing of the station no. However, if KV-LNK is set to "1", for example, you can
change the station no. only after quitting KV IncrediWare (DOS) and resetting KV-
LNK to the desired number.
* "PC-Port" in the menu refers to the serial port on the KV-300 CPU, which is used
only for communication between the CPU and a computer. Ignore the L2 function
when using this port.
Setting the KV-L2 (in KV mode)

7 Set the KV-L2 station no. as follows.
First KV-300 system Second KV-300 system Third KV-300 system
RS-232C RS-422A RS-422A
KV-L2 KV-L2 KV-L2

PC Station no. F Station nos. 0 to 9 Station nos. 0 to 9
Connect the personal computer to the KV-L2 using an RS-232C cable. Set the KV-
L2 connected to the personal computer station no. F. Connect the KV-L2 of station
no. F to other KV-L2s using the multi-drop method with RS-422A cables. Specify
station nos. 0 to 9 of the other KV-L2s.
Note: Use the station no. designated by the station no. selection switch on the KV-
L2.
KVHKA Chap 07_1to4.p65 252 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.5 KV Mode Programming KV-300 Series Only
7.5 KV Mode Programming

7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode
Communications protocol
In KV mode, the KV-L2 operates in the same manner as a KV-300 CPU performing
communications. Set the communications protocol to KV mode and connect the KV-
L2 to external units as described below.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Set the operation mode using the operation mode setting switch SET A (A1 to A4).
Use A1 and A2 to set the mode for port 1, and A3 and A4 to set the mode for port 2.
Turn off the power switch before setting the operation mode.
ON
OFF
A1 A2 A3 A4
Operation mode Port 1 Port 2

A1 A2 A3 A4
This table shows the communications protocol for KV mode. Refer to this table when
setting the communications parameters of the external unit to be connected.
Duplex Full
Synchronization Start/stop
Data format ASCII
Baud rate 9600 bits/s
Data length 8 bits
Parity check Even 17
Stop bit length 1 bit
When setting the external unit to be connected, refer to the instruction manual
supplied with the unit.
When the module is set to KV mode, the communications protocol specified by the
communications protocol setting switch SET B is invalid.
Connecting to the KV-L2

■ When using port 1
When connecting the KV-L2 to an external unit with an RS-232C port, connect the
RS-232C cable as shown in the following figures. Alternatively, use either a stan-
dard or null modem RS-232C connection cable (optional) to port 1 (RS-232C).
External unit External unit
KV-L2 designated as DTE KV-L2 designated as DCE
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SD 2 2 SD SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD RD 3 3 RD
8
RS 4 4 RS RS 4 4 RS
7
CS 5 5 CS CS 5 5 CS
6
5
6 DR 6 DR
4
3
20 ER 20 ER
2
1
SG 7 7 SG SG 7 7 SG
D-Sub 25-pin
connector
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 253 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ When using port 2 (set to RS-232C mode)

When using an RS-232C port on the KV-L2, connect the cables as shown.

1 3 5 KV-L2 designated as DTE KV-L2 designated as DCE
SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD)
SD 3 2 SD SD 3 2 SD
RD 5 3 RD RD 5 3 RD
2 4 4 RS 4 RS
SDB RDB 5 CS 5 CS
6 DR 6 DR
KV-L2 terminal nos. 20 ER 20 ER
SG 1 7 SG SG 1 7 SG
■ When using port 2 (set to RS-422A mode)

KV-300
KV-10/80
When using the RS-422A port on the KV-L2, connect the cables as shown.
KV-L2 External unit

1 3 5 SDA 3 SDA
SG SDA RDA
RDA 5 RDA
2 4
SDB RDB
RDB 4 RDB
SG 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 254 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure

The KV-L2 can be connected to a personal computer to read the current values and
set values of the counters and timers or the data memory values into the PC from
the KV-300 CPU for checking or updating.
Command
KV-300
KV-10/80
Response
KV-300 KV-L2 PC
CPU
Command transmission procedure

Commands are transmitted from a personal computer to the KV-L2 as follows:
1 Transmits a break signal (100 ms or longer)

Initializes communications
program in the KV-300 CPU.
Transmits communication start command (CR)

Starts communications with the
2
KV-300 CPU.
Transmits a command that

3 Transmits a command instructs the KV-300 CPU to
perform a required operation.
Checks a response to the

4 Receives a response
required operation.
5 Transmits communication end command (CQ)

Terminates communication
with the KV-300 CPU.
17
Break signal
Upon receiving a break signal, the KV-L2 initializes its own communications buffer
and baud rate. The break signal should be transmitted only once before communica-
tion is initiated. The break signal need not be transmitted once communication is
successful.
The break signal must have the waveform shown below.
+V 100 ms min.
SD
-V
Note: Transmit the break signal for the first communication with a personal com-
puter after the KV IncrediWare (DOS) has been activated through a KV-L2 or KV-
P3E.
If transmission of the break signal fails, turn OFF the KV-300 CPU power switch to
initialize the communications program. Then begin communicating with the personal
computer.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 255 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Command and response

"Command" and "response" in communications between the KV-L2 and a personal
computer are defined as follows:
Command:
Message transmitted from a personal computer to the KV-L2
Response:
Response to the command transmitted from the KV-L2 to the personal computer
When a command is transmitted from the personal computer to the KV-L2, the KV-
L2 sends a response to the personal computer. When writing a program to be
KV-300
controlled by the personal computer, be sure that the response from the KV-L2 is
KV-10/80
confirmed before the next command is transmitted.
Command/response format
Command/response formats are as follows:
Command format Response format

C C L
Command R Response R F
or
C L
Command R F
The personal computer transmits a command to the KV-L2 according to the com-
mand format. The KV-L2 recognizes CR as delimiter, and thus ignores the LF in the
CR LF command and identifies the subsequent characters as the command.
The KV-L2 returns a response to the command according to the response format.
When writing a program with a personal computer, verify that the response can be
handled according to the response format.
When the 1:n connection pattern is used, the personal computer communicates only
with the KV-L2 set to the specified station no. To communicate with a KV-L2 set to
another station no., terminate communications with the KV-L2 set to the specified
station no. and send a communication start command (CR_nn) in which the new
station no. is specified in "nn."
7 Communications commands and responses

Communications command/response list
Function Command Response Remarks
Starts communi- CR_nn CC_nn nn = Station no. (00 to 09, 15)
cations Specify in decimal value
(not required for 1:1 connection)
Ends communi- CQ CF
cations
Changes mode Mn OK n=0: PROGRAM mode
of KV-300 CPU n=1: RUN mode
Error clear mode ER OK
Checks CPU error ?E dd dd: Error code (No error: 00)
Inquires model ?K K300
Checks current ?M 0 O: PROGRAM mode
mode 1 1: RUN mode
Reads counter RD_Cnnn f,ddddd,ddddd f=0, 1 0: contact OFF 1: contact
RD_CTHn (current value) ON ddddd=00000 to 65535
RD_CTCn (preset value) (in decimal) n/nnn=counter no.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 256 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


Reads timer RD_Tnnn f,ddddd,ddddd f=0, 1 0: contact OFF
(current value) ddddd=00000 to 65535)
(preset value) (in decimal nnnn=timer no.
Reads analog RD_AT ddddd_ddddd_ ddddd=00000 to 00249
timer 00000_00000 (in decimal)
(Trimmer 0) Reads values of trimmers 0 and
(Trimmer 1) 1.
Changes current WR_Cnnn_ OK n/nnn: counter/timer no.
value of timer/ ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535
counter WR_CTHn_ (in decimal)
ddddd
KV-300
WR_Tnnn_
KV-10/80
ddddd
Changes preset WS_Cnnn_ OK n/nnn: counter/timer no.
value of timer/ ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535
counter WS_CTCn_ (in decimal)
ddddd
WS_Tnnn_
ddddd
Reads relay RD_nnnnn 0 0: contact OFF
contact 1 1: contact ON
Forces contact ON ST_nnnnn OK nnnnn=relay no.
ST_Cnnn nnn=counter /timer no.
ST_Tnnn
Forced contact OFF RS_nnnnn OK nnnnn=relay no.
RS_Cnnn nnn=counter /timer no.
RS_CTCn n=high-speed counter comparator
RS_Tnnn no.
Reads DM RD_DMnnnn ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535
(in decimal)
nnnn=DM no.
Writes into DM WR_DMnnnn_ OK ddddd=00000 to 65535
ddddd (in decimal)
nnnn=DM no.
Reads TM RD_TMnn ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535
(in decimal)
nn=TM no.
Writes into TM WR_TMnn_
ddddd
OK ddddd=00000 to 65535
(in decimal)
17
nn=TM no.
An underscore (_) in the command represents a space.

TM30 and TM31 are read-only memories; values cannot be written to them.
Note: The "WS" command changes the content of the program stored in the PLC's
EEPROM. Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.
Communications commands
This section describes the commands used for communications between the KV-L2
and a personal computer, and the responses from the KV-L2 in normal operation.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 257 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Communications start command

Initiates communications between the KV-L2 and a personal computer.
Command: CR_nn [nn = Station no. (not required for 1:1 connection)]
Response: CC_nn
■ Communications end command

Terminates communications between the KV-L2 and a personal computer.
Command: CQ
Response: CF
■ Mode change command

Switches the KV-300 CPU mode between PROGRAM and RUN.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Command: Mn [n=0: PROGRAM mode, n=1: RUN mode]

Response: OK
■ Clears error messages on the KV-300 CPU.

Command: ER
Response: OK
■ Checking CPU error

The KV-300 CPU responds with error codes indicating errors or faults in the KV-300
CPU.
Command: ?E
Response: dd [dd: error code]
(Refer to P. 115 for error code list.)
■ Inquiring model
The KV-300 CPU responds with the model no. of the KV-300 module currently in
use.
Command: ?K
Response: K300 (When KV-300 CPU is in use.)
■ Checking current mode

The KV-300 CPU responds with 0 or 1, indicating the current mode.
Command: ?M
Response: 0, 1 [0: PROGRAM mode, 1: RUN mode]
7
■ Reading counter
Reads contact ON/OFF status and current and preset values of the specified
counter.
Command: RD_Cnnn [nnn = counter no.] Reads the content of a counter or
an up/down counter.
RD_CTHn [n = high-speed counter no.] Reads the content of a
high-speed counter CTH.
RD_CTCn [n = high-speed counter comparator no.] Reads the
content of a high-speed counter comparator.
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd [f = 0, 1: ON/OFF status of counter contact
(current value) 0: OFF, 1: ON]
(preset value) [ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
■ Reading timer
Reads contact ON/OFF status and current and preset values of the specified timer.
Command: RD_Tnnn [nnn = timer no.]
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd [f=0, 1: ON/OFF status of a timer contact
(current value) 0: OFF, 1: ON]
(preset value) [ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)]
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 258 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Reading analog timer

Reads trimmer setting of analog timer.
Command: RD_AT
Response: ddddd_ddddd_ [ddddd = 00000 to 00249 (in decimal)]
00000_00000
Setting of trimmer 1 (00000 to 00249)
Setting of trimmer 0 (00000 to 00249)
■ Changing current value of timer/counter

Changes current value of the specified timer/counter.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Command: WR_Cnnn_ddddd Changes current value of a counter or an
up-down counter.
Command: WR_Tnnn_ddddd Changes current value of a timer.
WR_CTHn_ddddd Changes current value of a high-speed counter
CTH.
[nnn = counter/timer no. n = high-speed
counter no.]
[ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)]
Response: OK
■ Changing preset value of timer/counter

Changes preset value of the specified timer/counter.
Command: WS_Cnnn_ddddd Changes preset value of a counter or an
up-down counter.
WS_Tnnn_ddddd Changes preset value of a timer
WS_CTCn_ddddd Changes preset value of a high-speed counter
comparator CTC.
[nnn = counter/timer no.]
[n = high-speed counter comparator no.]
Response: OK
Note: The "WS" command changes the content of the program stored in the PLC's
EEPROM. Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.
17
■ Reading relay contact
Reads contact ON/OFF status of the specified relay.
Command: RD_nnnnn [nnnnn: relay no.]
Response: 0, 1 [0 = OFF, 1 = ON]
■ Forcing contact ON
Forces ON the contact of a specified relay, counter, or timer.
Command: ST_nnnnn [nnnnn = relay no.]: Forces ON a contact of a relay.
ST_Cnnn [nnn = counter no.]: Forces ON a contact of a counter.
ST_Tnnn [nnn = timer no.]: Forces ON a contact of a timer.
Response: OK
■ Forcing contact OFF

Forces OFF the contact of a specified relay, counter, or timer.
Command: RS_nnnnn [nnnnn = relay no.]: Forces OFF a contact of a relay
[nnn = counter no.]: Forces OFF a contact of a
counter.
RS_Tnnn [nnn = timer no.]: Forces OFF a contact of a timer.
RS_CTCn [n = high-speed counter comparator no.]: Forces OFF
a contact of a high-speed counter comparator.
Response: OK
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 259 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Reading DM
Reads content of the specified data memory address.
Command: RD_DMnnnn [nnnn = data memory no.]
Response: ddddd [ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)]
■ Writing into DM
Writes values into the specified data memory address.
Command: WR_DMnnnn_ [nnnn = data memory no.]
ddddd [ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)]
Response: OK
■ Reading TM
KV-300
KV-10/80
Reads content of the specified temporary memory address.

Command: RD_TMnn [nn = 00 to 31 (temporary memory no.)]
Response: ddddd [ddddd = 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)]
■ Writing into TM
Writes values into the specified temporary memory address.
Command: WR_TMnn_ddddd [nn=00 to 29 (temporary memory no.)]
Response: OK
Other response codes

The KV-L2 returns a response corresponding to the command transmitted by the
computer. If the command from the computer is an unspecified one, or if an error
occurs in the KV-300 CPU, the KV-L2 issues an appropriate response code for the
status.
The following table summarizes the description, cause, and remedy for a response
code.
■ Response
Code Description Cause Remedy
E0 Relay no. • Undefined relay, counter, • Specify a number that is
error timer, DM, CTH, or CTC defined in the KV-300 CPU
7 number was specified. being used.
• Counter, timer, CTH or CTC • Check the program, and
number not used in a pro- specify a number used in
gram was specified. the program.
• Undefined or inconnect • Transmit the connect
command was transmitted. command.
E1 Command • Undefined or incorrect • Transmit the correct com-
error command was transmitted. mand.
• Command other than "CR" • Transmit "CR" to initiate
was transmitted before the communications, then
communications path was transmit the command.
established.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 260 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

E2 Program • "M1" was transmitted with no • Register a program into the

unregis- program stored in the KV-300 KV-300 CPU.
tered CPU. • Check the program for the
• Reading of timer/counter was timer/counter number being
attempted. used and specify it.
E3 CPU fault • Hardware error was detected • Turn the power to the KV-300
in a KV-300 CPU. OFF and then ON again. If
the cause of the error is not
corrected, the CPU may be
faulty. Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
E4 Write- • Attempt was made to change • Write-enable the program,
KV-300
protected the preset value of a counter, and change the preset value.
KV-10/80
timer, or CTC in a write-
protected program.
E5 CPU error • "M1" was transmitted before • Clear the error message from
an error message was the KV-300 CPU, and remove
cleared from the KV-300. the cause of the error.
Error code list

Error codes included in responses to the KV-300 CPU error check command (?E)
as well as error descriptions, causes of error, and remedies are listed below.
Error
Code Description Cause Remedy
00 No error — —
10 CALL nest • Subroutines are nested to four • These errors may occur when
error levels or more. a program is executed. Check
11 FOR nest • FOR-NEXT instructions are the program while paying
erro nested to eight levels or more. particular attention to usage of
subroutines and the INT
12 INT nest • Five levels or more of inter-
instruction, and restore the
error rupts occurred simultaneously.
program accordingly.
13 MPS nest • MPS/MPP instructions are
error nested to eight levels or more.
20 Memory • Contents of RAM are erased. • Check data in data memory
erased All data in data memory and and current values of counters, 17
current values of counters in and re-enter correct data. The
the KV-300 CPU are cleared. KV-300 CPU returns to normal
operation after the error is
cleared.
30 Scan time • Scan time exceeds 300 ms. • Check the program again.
error
• Be sure that there is no
excessive repetition using the
FOR-NEXT loop.
• Be sure that an interrupt is not
executed at a higher rate.
40 NO PRO- • An attempt was made to • Write a program into the
GRAM operate the KV-300 CPU with KV-300 CPU.
no program stored.
50 SND/RTN • Hardware error was detected • Turn the power to the KV-300
failure in a KV-300 CPU. OFF and then ON again. If
51 Division by the cause of the error is not
zero removed, the KV-300 CPU
may be faulty. Contact
52 Address nearest KEYENCE office.
error
53 Invalid
instruction
54 Watchdog
timer error
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 261 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data

The KV-L2 can be connected to a device with an RS-232C or RS-422A port to load
consecutive text data (100 bytes maximum) as a batch into its data memory and to
send text data from data memory.
Text data
KV-300
KV-10/80
External unit
KV-300 KV-L2
CPU
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos.

Specify the first relay no. of the internal relays and, from the assigned data memory
addresses (DM9700 to DM9707), specify the first DM no. of the data memory
addresses for transmission/reception of text data.
Port nos. and assigned DM nos.

Ports 1 and 2 access the assigned DM addresses shown in the following table.
KV-L2 Port DM No. Designation
KV-L2 No. 1 Port 1 DM9700 First relay no.
DM9701 First DM no.
Port 2 DM9702 First relay no.
DM9703 First DM no.
DM9705 First DM no.
DM9707 First DM no.
7 ■ Designating the first relay no.

• Five relay nos., including the first relay no., are assigned.
• Specify the starting relay no. of the channel (the relay no. with "00" as the two
least significant digits) as the first relay no. Even if a relay in the middle of the
channel is designated as the first relay, the starting relay of the channel becomes
the first relay
Example: When specifying 1710 as the first relay no., relay nos. 1700 to 1704 are
assigned.
• When 0000 is specified as the first relay no., the following relay nos. are as-
signed.
Port Relay nos. assigned
1 2400 to 2404
2 2500 to 2504
Designating the first DM no.

200 DM nos., including the first DM no., are assigned.
Duplicating DM nos. already used in the program will disable normal data transmis-
sion/reception.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 262 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Note 1: Two KV-L2s can be connected to the KV-300 CPU. The KV-L2s are defined
as No.1 and No. 2, counting from the module closest to the KV-300 CPU.
Note 2: The designated relays and DM addresses are set at startup of special utility
relay 2307.
Assigning relays
Five relay nos., including the first relay no., are assigned. The assigned relays have
the following functions.
Relay No. Function

First relay no. +0 ON when data has been loaded
KV-300
KV-10/80
+1 On when data has been loaded but not transferred to data memory
+2 On when a data reception error has occurred
+3 Data transmission start/stop ON: start, OFF: stop
+4 Transmits an approximately 160 msec break signal at startup.
1. First relay no. +0

Turns ON after data is loaded and transferred to data memory. It remains ON,
preventing data loading. Write a program to turn this relay OFF after the process is
completed. (Data is loaded while the relay is OFF.)
To fetch the ON signal only for one scan, add the following line to the end of the
program.
∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗
(RES) (∗∗∗∗ First relay no. +0)

Turns ON and remains ON when the loaded data cannot be transferred to data
memory because the first relay no. +0 is ON when the data is received, or a parity
error has occurred (that is, first relay no. +2 was ON) during data reception.
When the data is loaded at startup, the first relay no. +1 turns OFF.
To fetch the ON signal only for one scan, change the program as shown in 1. First
relay no. +0, above.
3. First relay no. +2 17

Turns ON and remains ON when the data cannot be received because a parity error
has occurred during data reception. (The first relay +0 turned ON simultaneously.)
When the data is loaded at startup, the first relay no. +2 turns OFF when the first
relay no. +0 turns ON.

Turns ON when text data transmission starts. Automatically turns OFF after trans-
mission is completed. If it is forced OFF in the middle of a transmission, data
transmission is stopped immediately. Use the SET/RES instruction to turn the relay
ON/OFF.
The transmission/reception of text data is enabled while the special utility relay 2307
is ON.

Transmits a break signal of approximately 160 msec duration at startup. Automati-
cally turns OFF after transmission is completed. Transmission is enabled while the
first relay no. +3 is OFF.
Use the SET/RES instruction or KEEP instruction to turn the relay ON/OFF.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 263 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Assigning data memory addresses

200 DM addresses, including the first DM no., are assigned.
The assigned DM addresses have the following functions.
DM No. Assigned data
First DM No. +0 Number of bytes of text data loaded
+1 to +99 Text data to be received
+100 Number of bytes of text data to be received
+101 to +199 Text data to be transmitted
■ Number of data bytes

The number of bytes in the first DM no. +0 and the first DM no. +100 becomes a
KV-300
KV-10/80
binary value. Write the binary data using the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction.
■ Text data
Enter the text data in ASCII, by byte per DM. ("00" is entered in the 8 high-order bits
and ASCII code is entered in the 8 low-order bits.)
Write the text data using the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction.
Transmitting Text Data

This section describes transmission of text data in non-procedure mode.
The KV-L2 can transmit to an external unit the text data written to the assigned data
memory addresses, one byte per data memory address, in ASCII.
Data transmission and internal data memory addresses

Before starting communications, write the data to be transmitted into data memory
addresses in the following format.
Data memory
addresses 1st DM no.+100 1st DM no.+101 1st DM no.+102 1st DM no.+103 to 1st DM no. +198 1st DM no.+199
Number Number of data bytes data 1 data 2 data 3 to data 98 data 99
"00" is loaded to 8 high-order bits and text data is loaded to 8 low-order bits, in
ASCII, as follows.
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09 D08 D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Data memory
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
7 High-order 8 bits
[00]
Low-order 8 bits
[ASCII code]
Use the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction to write data into data memory.
ON/OFF status of special utility relays

The assigned special utility relays turn ON/OFF to transmit text data and a break
signal.
Relay No. Function
First relay no. +3 Starts/ends text data transmission.
ON: Start transmission OFF: End transmission
+4 Transmits a break signal of approximately 160 msec duration at
startup.
First relay no. +3

ON/OFF.
The transmission/reception of text data is enabled while special utility relay 2307 is
ON.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 264 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

First relay no. +4

Transmits a break signal of approximately 160 msec duration at startup. Automati-
Use the SET/RES or KEEP instructions to turn the relay ON/OFF.
Note: Do not change the value of the text data (after the first DM +101) during
transmission, or an error will occur in the data being transmitted.
Receiving text data

The KV-300 CPU can write up to 100 bytes of text data contained between STX and
KV-300
KV-10/80
ETX into internal data memory addresses (DM9200 to DM9299), one byte per data
memory address in ASCII.
Receiving data format

Note that each piece of text data must include STX (02H) in the first byte followed by
the text (100 bytes max.) and ending with ETX (03H) in the last byte.
Last byte
C C L
Text data (100 bytes max.) R or R F
If transmitted text data includes ETX, the KV-L2 transfers the data up to immediately
before ETX to the data memory addresses. Text data after ETX is loaded as
separate data.
■ Data memory addresses

The KV-300 can write received text data into the assigned data memory addresses,
one byte per data memory address, in ASCII.
Number of data bytes
Received data STX data 1 data 2 data 3 ---------- data 99 ETX

Data memory 1st DM no.+00 1st DM no.+01 1st DM no.+02 1st DM no.+03 to 1st DM no.+98 1st DM no.+99
addresses
00 is loaded to 8 high-order bits and text data is loaded to 8 low-order bits in ASCII
as follows.
17
Data memory
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
[00] [ASCII code]

The assigned utility relays turn ON only for the first scan when text data is loaded or
an error occurs.
Relay No. Description
First relay +0 Turns ON when text data has been loaded.
+1 Turns ON when text data has been loaded but not transferred to DM.
+2 Turns ON when an error occurs during text data reception.
■ First relay no. +0
Turns ON after loading data and transferring it to the data memory addresses. It
remains ON, in which state data cannot be loaded. Write a program so that this relay
turns OFF after the process is completed. (Data is loaded while the relay is OFF.)
program.
∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 265 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


When the data is loaded at startup, the first relay no. +1 turns OFF.

When the data is loaded at startup, the first relay no. +2 turns OFF when the first
KV-300
KV-10/80
relay no. +0 turns ON.

ASCII code/binary conversion function

Besides ASC and RASC instructions, the KV-300 CPU has a function to convert a
character string in ASCII code to a binary value, and vice versa. This function helps
simplify programs that convert text data to binary values or binary values to text
data.
ASCII to Binary conversion

1. All text data fetched at reception can be converted to binary data at one time. To
convert ASCII code to a binary value, use data memory addresses DM9600 and
DM9601 and special utility relay 2314 as follows.
2314 Turn ON to execute conversion (for first scan time).
DM9600 Write the first address of the data memory into which ASCII strings are to be
stored.
DM9601 Write the first address of the data memory addresses into which converted
binary values are to be written.
■ Special utility relay 2314

Special utility relay 2314 converts an ASCII string for the scan at startup and
transfers the converted data to data memory for the next scan.
7 For reception of a converted value, simplify the program by describing a loading
program prior to a conversion program through N.O. contact for 2314.
➮ Refer to page 1-267.
■ Data memory address DM9600
The DM address into which the ASCII string is to be written is specified in DM9600.
For example, when specifying the data loaded upon reception of text data, the first
DM address +1 selected during assignment of data memory addresses (➮ refer to
page 1-264) is written here.

The first DM address in which converted binary data is written is specified in
DM9601. The converted binary data uses three DM addresses, including the first
DM address described above.
Avoid using DM addresses already used by the program.
2. Set DM addresses to which ASCII code is to be written as follows.

DM****+0 ASCII code length (text data bytes)
DM****+1 First value of ASCII string (data 1 of text data)
: :
DM****+99 Last value of ASCII string (data 99 of text data)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 266 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ ASCII code length

The number of text data bytes loaded during reception of text data is set here. For
example, when a 4-byte ASCII code [30H 31H 32H 40H] is received, [4] is set.
■ ASCII string
Text data is input byte by byte in ASCII for each data memory address. Within data
memory addresses, "00" is loaded to the high-order 8 bits and ASCII code is loaded
to the low-order 8 bits. ➮ Refer to page 1-265.
3. The binary-converted value is loaded to data memory as follows.
DM****+0 Binary high-order 16 bits
KV-300
KV-10/80
DM****+1 Binary low-order 16 bits
DM****+2 Decimal point (0: None,1 to 99: DM position)
■ Binary
A binary value is input to 16 high-order bits and 16 low-order bits in data memory
addresses separately. Binary data that can be converted ranges from -2147483647
to 2147483647 in decimal.
A space (20H) in ASCII is converted to 0 in binary.
Negative numeric values are represented as a complement of two.
■ Decimal position
The value of the decimal point represents the position of the data memory address in
which decimal point 2EH is stored, counting from the top of the ASCII string. For
example, if "38.5" is written to data memory as "33H 38H 2EH 35H" in ASCII, the
decimal point is in the third data memory position and "3" is set.
4. ASCII to binary conversion program

The following example shows a program that converts text data loaded at reception
of text data to binary form. The converted value is written to data memory addresses
starting from DM0000.
2008 #00000 #01500 #03000 #01000

0001 < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9600 DM9601 DM9700 DM9701
2314 DM1500 DM2000 DM1501 DM2001 DM1502 DM2002

0002 < LDA > < STA > < LDA > < STA> < LDA > < STA >
1100
17
3000 3000 1100 2314
0003 ( RES) DIFU
Binary to ASCII conversion

1. To convert a binary value to an ASCII string, use data memory addresses
DM9602 and DM9603 and special utility relay 2315 as follows.
2315 Turn ON to execute conversion (for first scan time).

DM9602 Write the first address of the data memory to which the converted
ASCII strings are to be stored.
DM9603 Write the first address of the data memory into which a binary value
to be converted is loaded.

Special utility relay 2315 converts binary data during the scan at startup and
For reception of a converted value, simplify the program by describing a loading
program prior to a conversion program through N.O. contact for 2315.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 267 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


The DM address into which the converted ASCII data is written is specified in
DM9602. For example, when the text data to be transferred is specified, the first DM
address +101 designated when data memory addresses are assigned (➮ Refer to

Write the first address of the data memory to which the binary data to be converted
is to be loaded. Binary data to be converted uses five DM addresses, including the
first DM address described above. Avoid using DM addresses already used by the
program.
KV-300
KV-10/80
2. Set the DM address into which ASCII code is to be written as follows.

DM****+0 Binary code high-order 16 bits
DM****+1 Binary code low-order 16 bits
DM****+2 Decimal position (0: None, 1 to 99: DM position)
DM****+3 No. of bytes in ASCII string
DM****+4 Sign (0: Unsigned, 1: Add - 2: Add ±)
■ Binary
A binary value be converted is input to 16 high-order bits and 16 low-order bits in
data memory addresses separately.
Specifies the decimal position written in the ASCII string. If 0, no decimal point is
specified.
After conversion, the ASCII code for decimal point (2EH) is stored in the specified
position counting from the top of the ASCII string. For example, when the binary
value is 1234 and decimal position is 2, the specified value becomes 1.234, which is
31H 2EH 32H 33H 34H in ASCII.
■ Number of bytes in ASCII string

Specify the total number of bytes, including binary digits, +/- sign, and decimal point.
For example, when a value is -12.34, "6" is written here.
■ Signs
7
Specify the +/- sign to be appended to the converted value (from binary to ASCII).
The +/- sign is stored in the first DM address of the ASCII string.
• 0: No sign
No +/- sign is appended to the ASCII-converted value. "0" can be specified when the
binary value is positive. If "0" is specified when a binary value is a complement of
two, the binary is treated as a positive value.
• 1: - sign
Converts a binary value by giving -(2DH) when the binary value is a complement of
two. Adds no sign to a positive binary.
• 2: ± sign
Converts a positive binary by giving +(2BH) and a negative binary (complement on
two) by giving -(2DH).
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 268 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

3. The ASCII-converted value is loaded to data memory addresses as follows.

DM****+0 First DM address of ASCII string (data 1 of text data)
: :
DM****+98 Last DM address of ASCII string (data 99 of text data)
The number of DM addresses used is the value specified as the number of bytes
in the ASCII string.
4. Program for converting binary data to ASCII

The following example shows a program that converts binary data to an ASCII
string during transmission of text data. The converted values are written to data
KV-300
memory addresses starting from DM9301. The total number of digits, including
KV-10/80
the decimal point, is written to DM9300.
0000 1000
DIFU
2315 2807
( SET )
1000 #00000 #09301 2315

< DW > < DW >
DM9603 DM9602
Example program
2008 #00000 #01500 #03000 #01000

< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9600 DM9601 DM9700 DM9701
2314 DM1500 DM1200 DM1501 DM2001 DM1502 DM2002

< LDA> < STA > < LDA > < STA > < LDA > < STA >
3000 3000 1100 1100 2314

( RES ) DIFU
Sample program
Text data received from an external device is converted to binary data and is 17
written in the DM0000 after conversion.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 269 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.6 Display Interface Mode Programming KV-300 Series Only
7.6 Display Interface Mode Programming

7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode
Communications protocols
In Display Interface mode, the KV-L2 can be connected to a host computer (PC) or a
display device to monitor DM values, present values, set values of counters, and
timers, as well as relay ON/OFF information on the KV-300 CPU. It can also be used
to call up screens for insertion of numeric values on the display device with a wire-
saving system and simplified programs.
KV-300
To begin, set the communications protocol to link mode and connect the KV-L2 to
KV-10/80
the display device as described below.

Turn OFF the power switch before setting the operation mode. Use the operation
mode setting switches A1 to A4 (SET A). A1 and A2 control the mode for port 1, and
A3 and A4 control the mode for port 2. (Ports 1 and 2 can be set independently.)
ON Operation mode Port 1 Port 2
A1 A2 A3 A4
OFF Display Interface mode OFF ON OFF ON
A1 A2 A3 A4 Non-procedure mode ON ON ON ON
Set the operation mode setting switches A1 to A4 as shown above.
Setting the communications protocol

Set the baud rate, data bit length, parity, and stop bit using the SET B communica-
tions protocol setting switch accordance to the specifications of the display device.
Turn OFF the power switch before changing settings.
ON
OFF
7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8*
8 bits ON OFF
Odd ON OFF OFF
Even ON ON OFF
2 bits ON OFF
* Always leave B8 set to the OFF position.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 270 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Note 1: Turn off the power switches before setting switches.

Note 2: Communications protocols for the modules to be connected must be identi-
cal; otherwise, communication will fail. For settings of external units to be connected,
refer to the operation manuals supplied with the respective units.
Note 3: For settings of the display device, refer to the User’s Manual of your display
device.
Note 4: The communications protocols settings apply to both ports 1 and 2. The two
ports cannot be set to different protocols.
Communications control procedure
KV-300
In Display Interface mode, the KV-L2 provides a special interactive communications
KV-10/80
procedure, detailed below.
Communications procedure
In Display Interface mode, the host computer sends a command to the KV-L2 and
the KV-L2 automatically returns a response.
(Host computer)
Station no.
Header code
Text Command
FCS
Terminator
KV-L2
Station no.
Header code
Text Response
FCS
Terminator
FCS (frame check sequence) 17

The FCS is a method of detecting communications errors. An 8-bit exclusive OR
from the top of the command or response up to the last character of the text is
converted into a 2-character ASCII code.
Calculation example
@0 1 W D 0 3 E 8 1 9 6 4 2 6 * CR
station no. header code---------------------------text---------------------------FCS terminator
@ 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Exclusive OR
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
Exclusive OR
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Exclusive OR
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
: :
: :
6 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
Exclusive OR
4 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Exclusive OR
---------------------------------------------------------
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
ASCII 2 6 <----------FCS Value
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 271 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

This example command indicates station number 1, header code WD (update data
memory), data memory start number as 1000 or 03E8 in Hex, data to write as 6500
or 1964 in Hex.
Example program
5 I = 0:FCS=0
10 INPUT "ENTER TEXT TO TRANSMIT";A$
15 I = I +1
20 FCS = FCS XOR (ASC(MID$(A$,I,1)))
30 IF I < LEN(A$) THEN 15
40 PRINT "FCS=";HEX$(FCS);"H"
KV-300
KV-10/80
This program automatically calculates the FCS value when you enter the text to the
PC with the keyboard and shows the result in display.
Note 1: Commands and responses begin with the station no. and header code and
end with the FCS and terminator.
Note 2: Up to 131 characters can be sent during a single transmission. To send a
command which has more than 131 characters, divide it into several segments and
send each of them sequentially.
➮ Refer to "7.6.2 Command and Response Format" on the next page.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 272 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.6.2 Command and Response Format

The format for commands and responses is as follows.
C
@ x x x x x x ❋ R
Station no. (00 to 15) Header code Text (122 characters max.) FCS Terminator
FCS calculation range
Format used when sending a command of 132 characters or more
KV-300
KV-10/80
1. First transmission data (131 characters max.)
@ X X X X X X C
R
Station no. (00 to 15) Header code Text no. 1 (123 characters max.) FCS Delimiter
2. Intermediate data transmission (128 characters max.)
X X C
R
Text no. 2 (125 characters max.) FCS Delimiter
3. Last transmission data (128 characters max.)
C
X X ❋ R
Text no. 3 (124 characters max.) FCS Terminator 17

Note 1: When a command is divided into several segments for transmission, the first
and intermediate segments end with the delimiter (CR) instead of the terminator.
Note 2: When dividing a write command such as WR, WL, WH, WC, and WD, into
segments, do not divide a 4-character data for a same channel. Divide data by a 4-
character data for a channel.
Communication procedure when dividing a command into segments and sending
them sequentially
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 273 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Note 1: When several commands are being sent in succession, send the delimiter
(CR) of the current command before sending the succeeding command. Set the
delimiter timeout to at least 2 seconds.
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Terminator
Host computer
Text
FCS
Station no.
Header code
Text
FCS
Delimiter
First command Intermediate command Last command
KV-L2
KV-300
Terminator
Station no.
Header code
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Delimiter
KV-10/80
Next transmission Next transmission Response

OK OK
Host computer
Terminator
Station no.
Header code
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Delimiter
Command Next transmission Next transmission
OK OK
KV-L2
Station no.
Header code
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Text
FCS
Delimiter
Terminator
Text
FCS
First command Intermediate command Last command
Note 2: When several divided responses are being received, send a delimiter (CR)
to the KV-L2 after receiving the first delimiter from the KV-L2. This enables the KV-
7 L2 to send the next response; otherwise, your personal computer will not receive the
next response from the KV-L2.
Note 3: The FCS (frame check sequence) is a method of detecting communication
errors. An 8-bit exclusive OR from the top of the command/response to the last
character of the text is converted to 2-character ASCII code.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 274 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.6.3 Commands and Responses

This section describes the command and response format used in Display Interface
mode and the command setting method.
List of commands and responses

Range of available station nos.: 00 to 15
■ Format of commands and responses
Header Command/response ❋ C
@ Station no. FCS
KV-300
data R
code
KV-10/80
Command Response
Header Function Header Command Header Response
code code data code data
RR Read I/O relay/internal RR Read start ch. Number of RR End code
utility relay channel to read Data read
RH Read temporary memory RH Read start no. RH End code
address/analog timer Number of timer to read Data read
RC Read current value of counter/ RC Read start no. RC End code
timer/high-speed counter Number of counter/timer to read Data read
RG Read status of counter/timer RG Read start no. RG End code
/high-speed counter comparator Number of counter/timer/ ON/OFF information
comparator to read
RD Read DM RD Read start DM no. RD End code
Number of DM to read Data read
RJ Read I/O relay /internal RJ Read start ch. RJ End code
utility relay Number of channel to read Data read
WR Force update of I/O relay/ WR Write start ch. WR End code
internal utility relay Data to write
WH Update temporary memory WH Write start ch. WH End code
address Data to write
WC Update current value of WC Write start no. WC End code
counter/timer/high-speed Data to write
counter 17
WG Force-update status of WG Write start no. WG End code
counter/timer/high-speed Data to write
counter comparator
WD Update DM value WD Write start no. WD End code
Data to write
WJ Force update of I/O relay/ WJ Write start ch. WJ End code
internal utility relay Data to write
R# Read set value of counter/ R# Instruction word R# End code
timer/high-speed counter Operand Set value
comparator
W# Update set value of W# Instruction word W# End code
counter/timer/high-speed Operand
counter comparator New set value
MS Read KV-300 CPU MS MS End code Operation
operation mode mode
SC Change KV-300 CPU SC Operation mode SC End code
operation mode
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 275 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

KS Set KS Device KS End code

No. to change
Bit to change
KR Reset KR Device KR End code
No. to change
Bit to change
FK Set/reset multiple channels FK Device FK End code
Nos. to change
Data to force-set/reset
CR Read values of CR CR End code
DM0008 to DM0015 Data of DM0008 to
DM0015
KV-300
MM Read model code MM MM End code 13

KV-10/80
TS Test TS Any characters TS Any characters

(122 characters max.) (122 characters
max.)
QQMR Register combined commands QQMR Ch. no. of device QQMR End command
and monitor I/Os Operand
QQIR Read combined commands QQIR QQIR End code
and monitor I/Os Data read from
registered table
XZ Abort XZ No response
** Initial ** (No station no. or FCS) No response
IC Command undefined error No command IC
Command execution Header End code
disabled code
■ Setting command data

Set the command data with ASCII characters.
Header Command/response ❋ C
@ Station no. FCS R
code data
"ODH" in ASCII code value .
"40H" in ASCII code . "2AH" in ASCII code value .
1. Station no.
7 Use two ASCII code characters to set the station no. For reference, station no.
"01" is converted to "30 31" in ASCII code values as follows.
0 1
30H 31H
Station no. (ASCII characters)

ASCII code conversion for FCS calculation
2. Header code
Use two ASCII characters (four characters for QQMR and QQIR) to set the
header code. For reference, the read relay command "RR" is converted to "52
52" in ASCII code values as follows.
R R
52H 52H
Header code (ASCII characters)

ASCII code conversion for FCS calculation
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 276 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

3. Command data
Set the relay no., data memory address, and instruction word using ASCII char-
acters. For reference, the relay no. "0015" is converted to "30 30 31 35" in ASCII
code values, and the instruction word "CNT_" to read the set value of counter/
timer (R#) is converted to "43 4E 54 20" in ASCII codes .
0 0 1 5 C N T
30H 35H 43H 20H
30H 31H 4EH 54H
Command code(ASCII characters)
KV-300
KV-10/80
ASCII code conversion for FCS calculations
4. FCS (frame check sequence)

The FCS (frame check sequence) is a method for detecting a communication
error. It calculates the exclusive OR within the following range. The calculated 8-
bit data is converted to a 2-ASCII character.
Header Command/response C
@ Station no. FCS ❋ R
code data
Description of commands and responses

This section describes the format of commands and responses. In the following
figure, "n" represents one ASCII character (1 byte). The characters stand for two
types of values: One is a decimal value representing a numeric value between 0 and
9 for station no., channel no., address no., and timer/ counter values: the other is a
hexadecimal value representing a numeric value between $0 and $F for binary data
bit information of I/O or Data Memory.
Read I/O relay/internal utility relay (RR)

This command reads the I/O relays/internal utility relays starting from the specified
channel no. within the specified range.
17
■ Command format
Read start Number of

Station no. C
@
nn RR ch. channels to FCS ❋ R
nnnn read: nnnn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to 0179 0001 to 0180 Terminator

(in decimal) code (in decimal) (in decimal)
■ Response format (When the command is executed normally, the response

includes the end code "00".)
Station no. End code Data Data C

@
nn
RR
nn nnnn nnnn FCS ❋ R
Header code Data of read start ch. Data of read start ch. Terminator
(in hexadecimal) +1(in hexadecimal)
Read temporary data memory address/analog timer (RH)

This command reads the current value of the temporary data memory address/
analog timer starting from the specified no. within the specified range.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 277 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Command format
Number of
Station no. Read start no. memories/ C
@
nn RH nnnn timers to read FCS ❋ R
nnnn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to 0031/ 0001 to 0032/ Terminator

(in decimal) code 0032 to 0033 0001 to 0002
(in decimal) (in decimal)
Read start No. Data to read

0000 to 0031 TM00 to TM31
0032 Trimmer value 0
0033 Trimmer value 1
KV-300
KV-10/80


@
nn
RH
nn nnnn nnnn FCS ❋ R
Header Data of read start no. (in Data of read start no. +1 Terminator
code hexadecimal) (in hexadecimal)
Note 1: The values of the temporary memory address (TM) and analog trimmer
cannot be read with a same single command at once. Read each value separately.
Note 2: The station no. is indicated in decimal; the end code, in hexadecimal.
Read current value of counter/timer/high-speed counter (RC)

This command reads the current value of the counter/timer/high-speed counter
starting from the specified no. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Station no. counters/timers C
@
nn
RC no. to read FCS ❋ R
nnnn nnnn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to 0001 to Terminator

(in decimal) code 0249/0254 to 0250/0001 to
7 0255 (in
decimal)
0002 (in
decimal)

0000 to 0249 Counter/timer
0254 High-speed counter CTH0


@ RC FCS ❋ R
nn nn nnnn nnnn
Header code Data of read start no. Data of read start no. +1 Terminator
Note 1: The values of the counter/timer and high-speed counter cannot be read with
a same single command at once. Read the counter/timer and high-speed counter
values individually.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 278 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Read status of counter/timer/high-speed counter comparator (RG)

This command reads the ON/OFF status of the counter/timer/high-speed counter
comparator starting from the specified no. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Station no. counters/timers/ C
@ RG no. comparators to FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn read nnnn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to 0249/ 0001 to 0250/ Terminator

(in decimal) code 0250 to 0253 0001 to 0004
KV-300
KV-10/80
0001 to 0249 Timer/counter
0250 High-speed counter comparator CTC0

Station no. End code ON/ ON/ C

@ RG
OFF OFF FCS ❋ R
nn nn
Header code Data of read start no. Data of read start no. +1 Terminator
(ON: 1 OFF: 0) (ON: 1 OFF: 0)
Note 1: The values of the counter/timer and high-speed counter comparator CTC
cannot be read with a same single command at once. Read the counter/timer and
CTC values individually.
Read DM value (RD)

This command reads values of the data memory addresses starting from the
specified DM address within the specified range.
17
■ Command format
Read start Number of DMs
Station no. addresses to C
@ nn
RD DM no. read FCS ❋ R
nnnn nnnn



@
nn
RD
nnnn nnnn FCS ❋ R
nn
Header code Data of read start DM Data of read start DM Terminator

no. (in hexadecimal) no.+1 (in hexadecimal)
Read I/O relay/internal utility relay (RJ)

Reads values of the I/O relays/internal utility relays starting from the specified relay
ch. within the specified range.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 279 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Command format
Number of
Station no. Read start ch. channels to C
@ RJ read FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
nnnn


Station no. End Code Data Data C

@ RJ nnnn nnnn FCS ❋
KV-300
nn nn R
KV-10/80
Header Data written to write start Data written to write start Terminator
code ch. (in hexadecimal) ch. +1 (in hexadecimal)
Forced update of I/O relay/internal utility relay (WR)

This command forces updating (overwriting) of values of the I/O relays/internal utility
relays starting from the specified ch. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
Station no. Data to write Data to write C
@ WR ch.
nnnn FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
nn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to Data written to Data written to Terminator

(in decimal) code 0069 (in write start ch. write start ch. +1
decimal) (in hexadeci- (in hexadecimal)
mal)

Station no. End code C

@ WR
nn
FCS ❋ R
nn
Header code Terminator

7
Note 1: The KV-300 CPU has 10 input addresses, 0000 to 0009. Therefore, when
data is written to 0000 ch, the KV-300 CPU ignores data written to input relays 0010
to 0015. Data cannot be written to addresses 0002 to 0004, or to addresses 0070 or
higher.
Note 2: Data cannot be written across special utility relays.
Update temporary data memory address (WH)

This command updates the temporary data memory addresses starting from the
specified TM no. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
@ WH TM no.
nnnn nnnn
FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
00 to 15 Header 0000 to 0029 Data written Data written to Terminator

(in decimal) code (in decimal) to write start write start TM
TM no. (in no. +1 (in
hexadecimal) hexadecimal)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 280 08.3.11, 11:18 AM



@ WH
nn
FCS ❋ R
nn
Note 1: Data cannot be written to TM30 and TM31, which are read-only memory
addresses. Attempting to do so, causes a replacement data error and the end code
"15" is returned.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Update current value of counter/timer/high-speed counter (WC)
This command updates the current values of the counters/timers/high-speed
counters starting from the specified counter/time no. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
@
nn
WC counter/timer
nnnn nnnn
FCS ❋ R
no. nnnn

(in decimal) code 0249/0254 write start write start counter/
and 0255 counter/timer timer no. +1 (in
(in decimal) no. (in hexadecimal)
hexadecimal)


@ WC nn FCS ❋ R
nn
Write start No. Data to write

0001 to 0249 Counter/timer 17
Note 1: The values of the counter/timer and high-speed counter CTH cannot be
updated with a same single command at once. Write the counter/timer and CTH
values individually.
Forced update of status of counter/timer/high-speed counter comparator (WG)

This command forces updating of the ON/OFF status of the counters/timers/high-
speed counter comparators, starting with the specified counter/timer no. within the
specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
@ WG counter/timer
nnnn
FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
no. nnnn

(in decimal) code 0249/0250 write start write start counter/
and 0253 counter/timer no. timer no. +1 (in
(in decimal) (in hexadecimal) hexadecimal)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 281 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


@ WG FCS ❋ R
nn nn
Write start No. Data to write

0001 to 0249 Counter/timer
KV-300

KV-10/80
Note 1: The values of the counter/timer and high-speed counter comparator CTC
cannot be updated with a same single command at once. Write the counter/timer
and CTC values individually.
Note 2: High-speed counter comparator CTC can be turned OFF but cannot be
turned ON.
Update DM value (WD)

This command updates the DM values starting from the specified DM address within
the specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
Station No. Data to write Data to write C
@ WD DM address
nnnn nnnn
FCS ❋ R
nn
nnnn
0000 to 9999 Header Data written Data written Data written to Terminator
(in decimal) code to wite start to write start write start DM
DM address DM address address +1 (in
(in hexadeci- (in hexadeci- hexadecimal)
mal) mal)

7 includes the end code "00".)
@ Station No. WD End code FCS ❋ C

nn nn R
Forced update of I/O relay/internal utility relay (WJ)

This command forces updating of the I/O relays/internal utility relays starting from
the specified ch. no. within the specified range.
■ Command format
Write start
Station No. Data to write Data to write C
@ WJ ch.
nnnn nnnn
FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
0000 to 9999 Header 0000 to Data written Data written to Terminator

(in decimal) code 0069 (in to writestart write start ch. +1
decimal) ch. (in (in hexadecimal)
hexadeci-
mal)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 282 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


Station No. End code C

@ nn
WJ
nn
FCS ❋ R
Note 1: The KV-300 CPU has its own 10 input ports (0000 to 0009); therefore, when
data is written to 0000 ch, the KV-300 CPU ignores data to be written to input relays
0010 to 0015.
Note 2: Data cannot be written to addresses 0002 to 0004, or to addresses 0070 or
KV-300
KV-10/80
higher.
Note 3: Data cannot be written across special utility relays.
Read set value of counter/timer/high-speed counter comparator (R#)

This command reads set values of the specified counter/timer/high-speed counter
comparator in the form of 4-digit BCD.
■ Command format
Instruction
Station No. Operand C
@ R# word FCS ❋ R
nn xxxx nnnn
00 to 15 Header code Terminator

(in decimal)
Instruction word Operand Data

CNT_ 0000 to 00249 Counter/timer
TIM_
CNT_ 0250 to 0253 High-speed counter comparator
* An instruction word is specified with uppercase alphabetical characters.

An underscore (_) represents a space.
■ Response format (When the command is executed normally, the response 17

Station No. End code Set value C

@ R# FCS ❋ R
nn nn nnnn
Header code 0000 to 9999 Terminator

(in decimal)
Note 1: An underscore (_) in the instruction word represents a space. Be sure to

include the underscore in the instruction word when transmitting the command.
Note 2: If a set value exceeds 10000, 9999 is returned as the set value.
The station no. is indicated in decimal; the end code, in hexadecimal.
Update set value of counter/timer/high-speed counter comparator (W#)

This command updates the set value of the specified counter/timer/high-speed
counter comparator.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 283 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Command format
Instruction New set C
@ Station No. W# word
Operand
value FCS ❋ R
nn nnnn
xxxx nnnn
00 to 15 Header code 0000 to 9999 Terminator

Instruction word Operand Data

CNT_ 0000 to 00249 Counter/timer
TIM_
CNT_ 0250 to 0253 High-speed counter comparator
KV-300
KV-10/80



@ W#
nn
FCS ❋ R
nn

Note 2: A set value exceeding 10000 cannot be specified.
The station no. is indicated in decimal; the end code, in hexadecimal.
Read KV-300 CPU operation mode (MS)

This command reads the KV-300 CPU operation status.
■ Command format
Station No. C
@ MS FCS ❋ R
nn
7 00 to 15 Header Terminator
(in decimal) code

Operation
@ MS mode FCS ❋ R
nn nn nnnn
Header code RUN mode: 0061, Terminator

PROGRAM mode: 0261
Change KV-300 CPU operation mode (SC)

This command changes the KV-300 CPU operation mode.
■ Command format
Operation
C
@ Station No. SC mode FCS ❋ R
nn nn
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 284 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Operation mode Description

00 PROGRAM mode
01, 02, 03 RUN mode

@ Station No. SC End code FCS ❋ C

R
nn nn
KV-300
KV-10/80
Set (KS)
This command sets the ON/OFF status of the specified channel of the I/O relay,
internal utility relay, temporary memory address, timer, counter, or high-speed
counter comparator.
■ Command format
Device Ch. no. to Bit to
Station No. C
@ KS
xxxx change change FCS ❋ R
nn nn
nnnn

(in decimal)
Device Ch. No. to change Bit to change Data

CIO_ 0000 to 0179 00 to 15 I/O relay, internal utility relay
HR_ _ 0000 to 0031 00 to 15 Temporary memory address
AR_ _ 0000 to 0179 00 to 15 I/O relay, internal utility relay
TIM_ 0000 to 0249 00 Timer
CNT_ 0000 to 0249 00 Counter


includes the end code "00".) 17
End code C
@ Station No. KS FCS ❋ R
nn nn
Note 1: High-speed counter comparator CTC cannot be force-reset.

Note 2: The temporary memory address can be changed by bit.
Note 4: The station no., ch. no. to change, and bit to change are indicated in
decimal; the end code, in hexadecimal.
Reset (KR)
This command resets the ON/OFF status of the specified channel of the I/O relay,
internal utility relay, temporary memory address, timer, counter, or high-speed
counter comparator.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 285 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Command format
Station No. Device Ch. no. to Bit to change C
@ KR
nn
FCS ❋ R
nn xxxx change nnnn

(in decimal)

TIM_ 0000 to 0249 00 Timer
KV-300
KV-10/80

CNT_ 0250 to 0253 00 High-speed counter comparator CTC
An instruction word is specified with uppercase alphabetical characters.


C
@ Station No. KR End code FCS ❋ R
nn nn
Note 1: Temporary memory addresses can be changed by bit.

Note 2: An underscore (_) in the instruction word represents a space. Include the
underscore in the instruction word when transmitting the command.
Note 3: The station no., ch. to change, and bit to change are indicated in decimal;
the end code, in hexadecimal.
Set/reset multiple channels (FK)

This command sets or resets the ON/OFF status of the specified I/O relay, internal
utility relay, temporary data memory address, timer, counter, or high-speed counter
comparator by channel.
7
■ Command format
Channel to
Device Data to force-set/-reset C
@ Station No. FK change FCS ❋ R
nn xxxx mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
nnnn
00 to 15 Header "m" represents a bit of data Terminator

(in decimal) code (total: 16 bits)

TIM_ 0000 to 0249 00 Timer
CNT_ 0250 to 0253 00 High-speed counter comparator CTC
* An instruction word is specified with uppercase alphabetical characters. An

underscore (_) represents a space.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 286 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Code list of data to force-set/-reset

m Description
0, 8 No operation
2, 4 Reset
3, 5 Set

@ Station No. FK End code FCS ❋ C

nn nn R
KV-300
KV-10/80
Note 1: High-speed counter comparator CTC cannot be force-reset.

Note 2: The temporary memory addresses can be changed by bit.
Note 4: The counter/timer values and high-speed counter comparator values cannot
be set or reset with a same single command at once. Set or reset these values
individually.
Read values from DM0008 to DM0015 (CR)

This command reads the values from DM0008 to DM0015 with a short command.
■ Command format
C
@ Station No. CR FCS ❋ R
nn
00 to 15 Header Terminator
(in decimal) code

17
Data Data C
@ Station No. CR End code Data FCS ❋ R
nn nn nnnn nnnn nnnn
Header code Value of DM0015 Terminator

Value of DM0008 Value of DM0009
(in hexadecimal) (in hexadecimal) (in hexadecimal)
Read model code (MM)

This command reads the KV-300 model code (13).
■ Command format
C
@ Station No. MM FCS ❋ R
nn

(in decimal)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 287 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


Station No. End code Model code FCS C

@ MM ❋ R
nn nn nn
Header code (KV-300): 13 (in hexadecimal) Terminator
Test (TS)
This command returns the exact command sent from the host computer as a
response.
KV-300
KV-10/80
■ Command format
Station No. Any char140 acters C

@ TS FCS ❋ R
nn (122 characters max., except "CR")

(in decimal) (or delimiter)

@ Station No. TS Any characters FCS ❋ C

(122 characters max., except "CR") R
nn

(or delimiter)
Note: The command returns a terminator or delimiter (whichever was given) as the
data delimiter.
Combined commands for registering monitor I/Os (QQMR)

This command registers the devices such as I/O relays, counters, timers, data
memory addresses, temporary data memory addresses, high-speed counters, or
high-speed counter comparators that are to be read into the table. Once registered,
these values are retained until the restart or initial command is received, data is re-
registered, or power is cut off. The table registered by this command is to be read by
7 the monitor I/O read command.
■ Command format
@ Station no. QQ MR Device Ch. no. Operand

nn xxxx nnnn nn ,
00 to 15 Header Sub header code

(in decimal) code
Device Ch. no. Operand FCS ❋ C
, xxxx nnnn nn R
Data delimiter
Device Ch. No. Operand Response Data

CIO_ 0000 to 0179 00 to 15 or CH ON/OFF or channel data I/O relay, internal utility relay
HR_ _ 0000 to 0031 00 to 15 or CH ON/OFF or channel data Temporary data memory address
AR_ _ 0000 to 0179 00 to 15 or CH ON/OFF or channel data I/O relay, internal utility relay
TIM_ 0000 to 0249 Any characters or CH ON/OFF or ON/OFF + current value Timer
CNT_ 0250 to 0249 Any character or CH ON/OFF or ON/OFF + current value Counter
CNT_ 0250 to 0253 Any character or CH ON/OFF or ON/OFF + current value High-speed counter comparator CTC
DM_ _ 0000 to 9999 Any character Channel data DM
* A device is specified with uppercase alphabetical characters. An underscore (_)

represents a space. Set any character except the control code as the operand.
ON/OFF shows the contact status.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 288 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

When specifying ch. nos. 0250 to 0253 for CNT_, CTC and CTH can be monitored.
The specified ch. no. of the device has the following ON/OFF data and current
values.
Channel No. 0250 0251 0252 0253

ON/OFF data CTC0 CTC1 CTC2 CTC3
Current value CTH0 CTH0 CTH1 CTH1

KV-300
C
KV-10/80
@ Station No. QQ MR Station No. FCS ❋ R
nn nn
Header code Sub header code Terminator
Note 1: Up to 128 channels can be registered. Attempting to registering more than

128 channels will result in an error (end code: 5A).
Note 2: A device is specified with uppercase alphabetical characters. An underscore
(_) represents a space.
Combined commands for reading monitor I/Os (QQIR)

This command reads the ch. information or DM data according to the table registered
by the monitor I/O register command.
■ Command format
C
@ Station No. QQ IR FCS ❋ R
nn
00 to 15 Header Sub Terminator

(in decimal) code header
code
■ Response format (When the command is executed normally, the response 17

Station no. End code ON/ Ch. data ON/

@ QQ IR
nn nn OFF nnnn , , OFF ,
Header code Sub header code ON/OFF information + current Data Bit ON/OFF
value when ch. of counter/timer delimiter information
is specified
Ch. data C
FCS ❋ R
, nnnn
Data to be read (in hexadecimal) when Terminator

ch. of I/O relay, internal utility relay,
temporary data memory address, or
data memory address is specified.
Note 1: The data is read in the order it was registered by the monitor I/O register
command.
Note 3: For the counter/timer, only the ON/OFF data is read if no ch. is specified at
registration.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 289 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Abort (XZ)
The abort command allows the KV-L2 to stop the current operation and accept a
new command. This command generates no response.
■ Abort command
C
@ Station No. XZ FCS ❋ R
nn
(in decimal) code
Initialize
KV-300
KV-10/80
The command initializes all station nos. This command requires no station no., FCS,
and generates no response.
■ Initial command
C
@ ❋ ❋ R
Undefined command error response (IC)

This is a response returned when a command header code cannot be read or
undefined code was sent. Check the header code and send the correct code.
■ Response format
C
@ Station No. IC FCS ❋ R
nn
(in decimal) code
Error response when a command cannot be executed

This is an error response returned when a received command cannot be executed.
The error description is indicated in the end code.
7
■ Response format
@ Station No. End code FCS ❋ C
nn R
nn

(sub-header code) of
received command
Note 1: Header codes are specific to received commands.

Note 2: Some commands (combined commands) may have sub header code in
addition to the header code.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 290 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

End codes
The following table summarizes end codes and remedies
End Description Cause Remedy

code
00 Normal end – –
10 Parity error KV-L2 detects parity Transmission may be
error during command affected by noise.
reception. Retransmit the command.
11 Framing error KV-L2 fails to detect stop
bit during command
KV-300
reception.
KV-10/80
12 Overrun error KV-L2 receives the next KV-L2 operation is
command during recep- delayed. Reduce baud
tion of current command. rate and retry transmis-
sion.
13 FCS error FCS is incorrect. This Check the FCS calcula-
error may be generated tion procedure. If the
by FCS calculation error error is caused by noise,
or noise. retransmit the command.
14 Format error Command format is Check and correct the
incorrect. command format and
retransmit the command.
15 Replacement data error Wrong area is specified Specify the correct area
for read/write. and retry transmission.
18 Frame length MAX error Command exceeds the Divide the frame into two
max. length for one and retry transmission.
transmission.
19 Execution disabled error Monitor I/O is not regis- Register the monitor I/O
tered. and execute the com-
mand.
A0 Aborted due to parity error Various errors can occur Retry transmission from
in transmitted data during during a write command the beginning.
execution of command. is executed across
A1 Aborted due to framing several frames. Data
error in transmitted data transmitted before the
during execution of occurrence of the error is
written to the specified
command.
areas on the KV-300 17
A2 Aborted due to overrun
CPU.
error in transmitted data
during execution of
command.
A3 Aborted due to FCS error
in transmitted data during
execution of command.
A4 Aborted due to format
error in transmitted data
during execution of
command.
A5 Aborted due to replace-
ment error in transmitted
data during execution of
command.
A8 Aborted due to frame
length MAX error in
transmitted data during
execution of command.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 291 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.7 Non-procedure Mode Programming KV-300 Series Only
7.7 Non-procedure Mode Programming

7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode
In non-procedure mode, the KV-L2 can be connected to an external device having
an RS-232C or RS-422A terminal to write a series of text data (100 bytes maximum)
into data memory as a batch and to send text data from data memory to a connected
device.
Setting of the communications protocol and connection of the KV-L2 to an external
KV-300
device are described below.

KV-10/80

Set the operation mode using the operation mode setting switch SET A (A1 to A4).
Use A1 and A2 to set the mode for port 1, and A3 and A4 to set the mode for port 2.
Turn OFF the power switch before setting the operation mode.
ON
OFF
A1 A2 A3 A4
Operation mode Port 1 Port 2

A1 A2 A3 A4
Set the operation mode setting switch A1 to A4 as above.
Setting the communications protocols

Set the baud rate, data bit length, parity, and stop bit with communications protocol
setting switch SET B (B1 to B8) according to the specifications of the external device
to be connected. Turn OFF the power switch before setting the switches.
7 ON
OFF
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
8 bits ON OFF
Odd ON OFF OFF
Even ON ON OFF
2 bits ON OFF
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 292 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Note 1: Communications protocols for devices to be connected must be identical;

otherwise, communication will fail. For the settings of the device to be connected,
refer to the operation manual supplied with the device.
Note 2: The communications protocol settings apply to both ports 1 and 2. The two
ports cannot be set to different protocols
Connecting to the KV-L2

When using port 1
When connecting the KV-L2 to a device with an RS-232C terminal, wire the RS-
232C cables as shown below.
KV-300
Connect a commercially available RS-232C standard connection cable or null
KV-10/80
modem cable to the RS-232C connector at port 1.
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SD 2 2 SD SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD RD 3 3 RD
8
RS 4 4 RS RS 4 4 RS
7
CS 5 5 CS CS 5 5 CS
6
5
6 DR 6 DR
34
20 ER 20 ER
21
SG 7 7 SG SG 7 7 SG
D-Sub 25-pin
connector
When using port 2

1. When using the KV-L2 port 2 set to RS-232C mode, wire the cable as shown
below.
1 3 5 SD 3 2 SD SD 3 2 SD
SG SDA RDA RD 5 3 RD RD 5 3 RD
(SG) (SD) (RD)
4 RS 4 RS
2 4 5 CS 5 CS
SDB RDB
6 DR 6 DR
20 ER 20 ER
KV-L2 terminal nos. SG 1 7 SG SG 1 7 SG
2. When using the KV-L2 port 2 set to RS-422A mode, wire the cable as shown
below. 17
KV-L2 External unit
1 3 5
SG SDA RDA
SDA 3 SDA
2 4
RDA 5 RDA
SDB RDB RDB 4 RDB
SG 1 SG
KV-L2 terminal nos.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 293 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos.

The KV-L2 can be connected to a device with an RS-232C or RS-422A port to load
consecutive text data (100 bytes maximum) as a batch into its data memory and to
send text data from data memory.
Text data
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-300 KV-L2 External unit
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos.

Specify the first relay no. of the internal relays and, from the assigned data memory
addresses (DM9700 to DM9707), specify the first DM no. of the data memory
addresses for transmission/reception of text data.
Port nos. and assigned DM nos.

Ports 1 and 2 access the assigned DM addresses shown in the following table.
KV-L2 Port DM No. Designation
DM9701 First DM no.
DM9703 First DM no.
DM9705 First DM no.
DM9707 First DM no.
7 ■ Designating the first relay no.

• Five relay nos., including the first relay no., are assigned.
• Specify the starting relay no. of the channel (the relay no. with "00" as the two
least significant digits) as the first relay no. Even if a relay in the middle of the
channel is designated as the first relay, the starting relay of the channel becomes
the first relay
Example: When specifying 1710 as the first relay no., relay nos. 1700 to 1704 are
assigned.
• When 0000 is specified as the first relay no., the following relay nos. are as-
signed.
Port Relay nos. assigned

1 2400 to 2404
2 2500 to 2504
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 294 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Designating the first DM no.

• 200 DM nos., including the first DM no., are assigned.
Duplicating DM nos. already used in the program will disable normal data trans-
mission/reception.
Note 1: Two KV-L2s can be connected to the KV-300 CPU. The KV-L2s are defined
as No.1 and No. 2, counting from the module closest to the KV-300 CPU.
Note 2: The designated relays and DM addresses are set at startup of special utility
relay 2307.
Assigning relays
KV-300
KV-10/80
Five relay nos., including the first relay no., are assigned. The assigned relays have
the following functions.
Relay No. Function
First relay no. +0 ON when data has been loaded
+1 On when data has been loaded but not transferred to data memory
+2 On when a data reception error has occurred
+3 Data transmission start/stop ON: start, OFF: stop
+4 Transmits an approximately 160 msec break signal when turning ON.

Turns ON after data is loaded and transferred to data memory. It remains ON,
preventing data loading. Write a program to turn this relay OFF after the process is
completed. (Data is loaded while the relay is OFF.)
program.
∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗

When the data is loaded while the first relay no. +1 is ON, the first relay no. +1 turns
OFF when the first relay no. +0 turns ON.
17


ON/OFF.
The transmission/reception of text data is enabled while the special utility relay 2307
is ON.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 295 08.3.11, 11:18 AM


Turns ON when a break signal of approximately 160 msec is transmitted. Automati-
Use the SET instruction or KEEP instruction to turn the relay ON/OFF.
Assigning data memory addresses

200 DM addresses, including the first DM no., are assigned.
The assigned DM addresses have the following functions.
DM No. Assigned data
First DM No. +0 Number of bytes of text data loaded
KV-300
KV-10/80
+1 to +99 Text data to be received

+100 Number of bytes of text data to be received
+101 to +199 Text data to be transmitted
■ Number of data bytes

The number of bytes in the first DM no. +0 and the first DM no. +100 becomes a
binary value. Write the binary data using the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction.
■ Text data
Enter the text data in ASCII, by byte per DM. ("00" is entered in the 8 high-order bits
and ASCII code is entered in the 8 low-order bits.)
Write the text data using the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 296 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data

This section describes transmission of text data in non-procedure mode.
The KV-L2 can transmit to an external unit the text data written to the assigned data
memory addresses, one byte per data memory address, in ASCII.
Data transmission and internal data memory addresses

Before starting communications, write the data to be transmitted into data memory
addresses in the following format.
Data memory
addresses 1st DM no.+100 1st DM no.+101 1st DM no.+102 1st DM no.+103 to 1st DM no. +198 1st DM no.+199
KV-300
KV-10/80
"00" is loaded to 8 high-order bits and text data is loaded to 8 low-order bits, in
ASCII, as follows.
Data memory
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
[00] [ASCII code]
Use the LDA/STA instruction or DW instruction to write data into data memory.

The assigned special utility relays turn ON/OFF to transmit text data and a break
signal.
Relay No. Function

First relay no. Starts/ends text data transmission.
+3 ON: Start transmission OFF: End transmission
+4 Transmits a break signal of approximately 160 msec when turning ON.

ON/OFF.
The transmission/reception of text data is enabled while special utility relay 2307 is
17
ON.

Transmits a break signal of approximately 160 msec duration when turning ON.
Automatically turns OFF after transmission is completed. Transmission is enabled
while the first relay no. +3 is OFF.
Use the SET or KEEP instructions to turn the relay ON/OFF.
Note: Do not change the value of the text data (after the first DM +101) during
transmission, or an error will occur in the data being transmitted.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 297 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.7.4 Receiving Text Data

This section describes reception of text data in non-procedure mode. The KV-L2
fetches text data from an external unit into the KV-300 CPU’s data memory.
Format of received data and data memory addresses

Text data of up to 100 bytes separated by the delimiter CR or CR LF can be written
into the assigned data memory addresses, one byte per data memory address, in
ASCII.
Reception data format

KV-300
KV-10/80
The KV-L2 can receive a maximum of 100 bytes of text data containing the delimiter
CR or CR LF in the last byte. Last byte
C C L
Text data (100 bytes max.) R or R F
If transmitted text data includes CR, the KV-L2 transfers the data up to immediately
before CR to the data memory addresses. Text data after CR is loaded as separate
data.
Data memory addresses

The KV-300 can write received text data into the assigned data memory addresses,
one byte per data memory address, in ASCII.
Number of data bytes
Received data C C L
data 1 data 2 data 3 ----------- data 99 R or R F
Data memory
1st DM no.+00 1st DM no.+01 1st DM no.+02 1st DM no.+03 to 1st DM no.+98 1st DM no.+99
addresses
00 is loaded to 8 high-order bits and text data is loaded to 8 low-order bits in ASCII
as follows.
Data memory
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
[00] [ASCII code]
7
The assigned utility relays turn ON only for the first scan when text data is loaded or
an error occurs.
Relay No. Description
First relay +0 Turns ON when text data has been loaded.
+1 Turns ON when text data has been loaded but not transferred to DM.
+2 Turns ON when an error occurs during text data reception.

Turns ON after loading data and transferring it to the data memory addresses. When
it remains ON, data cannot be loaded. Write a program so that this relay turns OFF
after the process is completed. (Data is loaded while the relay is OFF.)
program.
∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 298 08.3.11, 11:18 AM



KV-300
KV-10/80
17
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 299 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function

Besides ASC and RASC instructions, the KV-300 CPU has a function to convert a
character string in ASCII code to a binary value, and vice versa. This function helps
simplify programs that convert text data to binary values or binary values to text
data.
ASCII to Binary conversion

All text data fetched at reception can be converted to binary data at one time. To
convert ASCII code to a binary value, use data memory addresses DM9600 and
DM9601 and special utility relay 2314 as follows.
KV-300
KV-10/80
2314 Turn ON to execute conversion (for one scan time).

DM9600 Write the first address of the data memory into which ASCII strings are
to be stored.
DM9601 Write the first address of the data memory addresses into which converted
binary values are to be written.

Special utility relay 2314 converts an ASCII string for the scan when it turns ON and
program prior to a conversion program through N.O. contact of 2314. (➮ Refer to
page 1-301.)

The DM address into which the ASCII string is to be written is specified in DM9600.
For example, when specifying the data loaded upon reception of text data, the first
DM address +1 selected during assignment of data memory addresses (➮ Refer to

The first DM address in which a conveted binary data is written is specified in
DM9601. The converted binary uses three DM addresses, including the first DM
address described above.
Avoid using DM addresses already used by the program.
7
Set DM addresses to which ASCII code is to be written as follows.
DM****+0 ASCII code length (text data bytes)
DM****+1 First value of ASCII string (data 1 of text data)
: :
DM****+99 Last value of ASCII string (data 99 of text data)
■ ASCII code length

The number of text data bytes loaded during reception of text data is set here. For
example, when a 4-byte ASCII code [30H 31H 32H 40H] is received, [4] is set.
■ ASCII string
Text data is input byte by byte in ASCII for each data memory address. Within data
memory addresses, "00" is loaded to the high-order 8 bits and ASCII code is loaded
to the low-order 8 bits (➮ Refer to page 1-298).
The binary-converted value is loaded to data memory as follows.
DM****+0 Binary high-order 16 bits

DM****+1 Binary low-order 16 bits
DM****+2 Decimal point (0: None, 1 to 99: DM position)
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 300 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Binary
A binary value is input to 16 high-order bits and 16 low-order bits in data memory
addresses separately. Binary data that can be converted ranges from -2147483647
to 2147483647 in decimal.
A space (20H) in ASCII is converted to 0 in binary.
Negative numeric values are represented as a 2’s complement.
The value of the decimal point represents the position of the data memory address
in which decimal point 2EH is stored, counting from the top of the ASCII string. For
example, if "38.5" is written to data memory as "33H 38H 2EH 35H" in ASCII, the
decimal point is in the third data memory position and "3" is set.
KV-300
KV-10/80
■ ASCII to binary conversion program
The following example shows a program that converts text data loaded at reception
of text data to binary form. The converted value is written to data memory addresses
starting from DM0000.
2804 2805 #09200 #00000 2314

DW DW
DM9600 DM9601
Binary to ASCII conversion

To convert a binary value to an ASCII string, use data memory addresses DM9602
and DM9603 and special utility relay 2315 as follows.
2315 Turn ON to execute conversion (for one scan time).
DM9602 Write the first address of the data memory to which the converted ASCII
strings are to be stored.
DM9603 Write the first address of the data memory into which a binary value to be
converted is loaded.
Special utility relay 2315 converts binary data during the scan when turning ON and
program prior to a conversion program through N.O. contact of 2315.
➮ Refer to page 1-303. 17
The DM address into which the converted ASCII data is written is specified in
DM9602. For example, when the text data to be transferred is specified, the first DM
address +101 designated when data memory addresses are assigned (➮ Refer to

Write the first address of the data memory to which the binary data to be converted
is to be loaded. Binary data to be converted uses five DM addresses, including the
first DM address described above. Avoid using DM addresses already used by the
program.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 301 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Set the DM address into which ASCII code is to be written as follows.

DM****+0 Binary code high-order 16 bits
DM****+1 Binary code low-order 16 bits
DM****+2 Decimal position (0: None, 1 to 99: DM position)
DM****+3 No. of bytes in ASCII string
DM****+4 Sign (0: Unsigned, 1: Add - 2: Add ±)
■ Binary
A binary value be converted is input to 16 high-order bits and 16 low-order bits in
data memory addresses separately.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Specifies the decimal position written in the ASCII string. If 0, no decimal point is
specified.
After conversion, the ASCII code for decimal point (2EH) is stored in the specified
position counting from the top of the ASCII string. For example, when the binary
value is 1234 and decimal position is 2, the specified value becomes 1.234, which is
31H 2EH 32H 33H 34H in ASCII.
■ Number of bytes in ASCII string

Specify the total number of bytes, including binary digits, +/- sign, and decimal point.
For example, when a value is -12.34, "6" is written here.
■ Signs
Specify the +/- sign to be appended to the converted value (from binary to ASCII).
The +/- sign is stored in the first DM address of the ASCII string.
• 0: No sign
No +/- sign is appended to the ASCII-converted value. "0" can be specified when the
binary value is positive. If "0" is specified when a binary value is a 2’s complement,
the binary is treated as a positive value.
• 1: - sign
Converts a binary value by giving -(2DH) when the binary value is a 2’s complement.
Adds no sign to a positive binary.
7 • 2: ± sign
Converts a positive binary by giving +(2BH) and a negative binary (2’s complement)
by giving -(2DH).
The ASCII-converted value is loaded to data memory addresses as follows.

DM****+0 First DM address of ASCII string (data 1 of text data)
: :
DM****+98 Last DM address of ASCII string (data 99 of text data)
The number of DM addresses used is the value specified as the number of bytes in
the ASCII string.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 302 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

■ Binary to ASCII conversion program

The following example shows a program that converts binary data to an ASCII string
during transmission of text data. The converted values are written to data memory
addresses starting from DM9301. The total number of digits, including the decimal
point, is written to DM9300.
0000 1000
DIFU
2315 2807
( SET )
1000 #00000 #09301 2315
KV-300
< DW > < DW >
KV-10/80
DM9603 DM9602
17
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 303 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.8 Troubleshooting Guide KV-300 Series Only
7.8 Troubleshooting Guide

KV-L2
Error Cause Remedy
POWER indicator The KV-300 CPU power switch Supply 24 VDC power to the KV-
does not light. is not ON. 300 CPU.
Power supply capacity is Check power supply capacity. If
insufficient. capacity is insufficient, replace
power supply with one that
KV-300
KV-10/80
accommodates the current

capacity.
KV-L2 is not securely connected Remove KV-L2 from KV-300
to KV-300 CPU. CPU and reconnect it securely.
Communication is Communication protocol is Parity, data length, stop bit, and
disabled. (Port incorrect. baud rate of KV-L2 must corre-
operation indica- spond to settings of external
tors do not light.) device. Verify setting of communi-
cations protocol setting switch.
Transmission cable is not Connect transmission cable.
connected.
Reception cable is not connected. Connect reception cable.
Mode setting is incorrect. Change mode setting to appro-
priate mode.
KV-L2 is not securely connected Remove KV-L2 from KV-300
to the KV-300 CPU. CPU and reconnect it securely.
Communication is Cables are not connected Check cable wiring.
occasionally securely.
disrupted. Cable is faulty. Replace cable.
In multi-drop mode, terminators Set terminators of stations at
of stations at both ends are not both ends to ON.
ON.
A strong noise source is located Isolate KV-300 CPU and cables
near the system. from noise source.
Power and connection cables Isolate power cable from connec-
7 are in close proximity. tion cable.
Unreadable data is Communications protocol of KV- Parity, data length, stop bit, and
transmitted. L2 does not match that of baud rate of KV-L2 must corre-
external device. spond to settings of external
device. Verify setting of commu-
nications protocol switch.
A strong noise source is near Isolate the KV-300 CPU and
the system. cables from the noise source.
Power and connection cables Isolate the power cable wiring
are in close proximity. from connection cable wiring.
Station no. designation is Transmit the correct station no.
incorrect.
Designated protocol includes an Add data to correct protocol as
error. designated.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 304 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.8 Troubleshooting Guide KV-300 Series Only
7.8.2 Precautions
Environmental requirements
When installing the KV-L2, note the following:
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid exposure to temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or exceeding 50°C (122°F).
• Avoid exposure to humidity below 35%RH or exceeding 85%RH.
• Avoid areas where condensation occurs due to sudden drops in temperature.
• Avoid exposure to corrosive or flammable gases.
KV-300
KV-10/80
• Avoid exposure to airborne dust, metal particles, oil, or corrosive substances
such as salt.
• Avoid exposure to strong vibration or impact.
• Avoid locations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash the KV-L2.
• Avoid exposure to strong magnetic or electrical fields.
Panel installation
Consider accessibility and environmental resistance when installing the KV-L2 inside
a panel.
Ambient temperature
The operating temperature range of the KV-L2 is 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) (No freez-
ing).
Provide enough space for proper ventilation. If the temperature exceeds 50°C
(122°F), provide a fan or air conditioner.

Do not install the KV-L2 and high voltage equipment in the same control panel.
Isolate the KV-L2 as far as possible from power cables.
Access
Isolate the KV-L2 as far as possible from high voltage equipment and drive equip-
ment in order to ensure safe and easy access for adjustment and maintenance. 17
Wiring
The KV-L2 terminal block includes M3.0 screws.
Use the following types of crimp terminals.
6.0 max. 6.0 max.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 305 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.9 Specifications KV-300 Series Only
7.9 Specifications
7.9.1 Specifications
Model KV-L2
Power supply 24 VDC (supplied from KV-300 CPU)
Maximum current consumption 150 mA
Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F), No freezing
KV-300
KV-10/80
Noise immunity 1500 Vp-p min., pulse width: 1 µs and 50 ns

(Noise generated by noise simulator)
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude of 1.5 mm max.,
applied in each of X, Y, and Z directions (2 hrs)
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ between power terminal and I/O terminal,
and external terminals and housing
(measured with 500 VDC megohmmeter)
Environmental restrictions No excessive dust or corrosive gas
Weight Approx. 190 g
Interface RS-232C/RS-422A
Duplex Full
Synchronization Start/stop
Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 31250, 38400 bits/s
(switch selectable)
Data length 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits
Parity check Even, odd/None
Maximum transmission distance RS-232C: 15 m RS-422A: 500 m (total length)
7
RS-232C connector specifications
Pin No. Description Signal abbreviation

9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2 Transmit data SD
3 Receive data RD
8
7
4 Transmit request RS
6
5
4
5 Transmission enabled CS
3
2
1
7 Signal ground SG
D-Sub 25-pin
connector
RS-422A terminal block specifications
Terminal No. Description Signal abbreviation

1 3 5
SG SDA RDA
(SG) (SD) (RD) 1 Signal ground SG
2 4 2 Transmit data SDB
SDB RDB
3 Transmit data SDA
4 Receive data RDB
5 Receive data RDA
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 306 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.9 Specifications KV-300 Series Only
7.9.2 Dimensions
Unit: mm
27.3
90
KV-300
94 35.4
KV-10/80
35 85
39.4
17
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 307 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.10 Command List KV-300 Series Only
7.10 Command List

7.10.1 List of Commands and Responses
Starts communications CR_nn CC_nn nn = Station no. (00 to 09, 15)
Specify in decimal value
(not required for 1:1 connection)
Ends communications CQ CF
Changes mode of Mn OK n=0: PROGRAM mode
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-300 CPU n=1: RUN mode

Error clear mode ER OK
Checks CPU error ?E dd dd: Error code (No error: 00)
Inquires model ?K K300
Checks current mode ?M 0 O: PROGRAM mode
1 1: RUN mode
Reads counter RD_Cnnn f,ddddd,ddddd f=0, 1
RD_CTHn (current value) (preset value) 0: contact OFF
RD_CTCn 1: contact ON
ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
n/nnn=counter no.
Reads timer RD_Tnnn f,ddddd,ddddd f=0, 1
(current value) (preset value) 0: contact OFF
1: contact ON
ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
nnnn=timer no.
Reads analog timer RD_AT ddddd_ddddd_00000_00000 ddddd=00000 to 00249 (in decimal)
(Trimmer 0) (Trimmer 1) Reads values of trimmers 0 and 1.
Changes current value* WR_Cnnn_ddddd OK n/nnn: counter/timer no.
of timer/counter WR_CTHn_ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
WR_Tnnn_ddddd
Changes preset value WS_Cnnn_ddddd OK n/nnn: counter/timer no.
of timer/counter WS_CTCn_ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
WS_Tnnn_ddddd
Reads relay contact RD_nnnnn 0 0: contact OFF
1 1: contact ON
7 Forces contact ON ST_nnnnn OK nnnnn=relay no.
ST_Cnnn nnn=counter/timer no.
ST_Tnnn
Forced contact OFF RS_nnnnn OK nnnnn=relay no.
RS_Cnnn nnn=counter/timer no.
RS_CTCn n=high speed counter comparator no.
RS_Tnnn
Reads DM RD_DMnnnn ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
Writes into DM WR_DMnnnn_ddddd OK ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)

nnnn=DM no.
Reads TM RD_TMnn ddddd ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
nn=TM no.
Writes into TM WR_TMnn_ddddd OK ddddd=00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
nn=TM no.
List of commands and responses used for serial communications in KV mode

Note 1: An underscore (_) in the command represents a space.
Note 2: M30 and TM31 are read-only memories; values cannot be written to them.
* The "WS" command changes the content of the program stored in the PLC's EEPROM. Contact if you
need to change it frequently.
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 308 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

7.10.2 List of Commands and Responses in Display

Interface mode
Format of command and response
Header C
@ Station no. Command/response FCS ❋ R
code
Range of station no.: 00 to 15
Command Response
KV-300
KV-10/80
Header Function Header Command data Header Response
code code code data
RR Read I/O relay/internal utility relay RR Read start ch. RR End code
Number of channels Data read
to read
RH Read temporary memory/analog timer RH Read start no. RH End code
Number of timers Data read
to read
RC Read current value of counter/timer/high-speed RC Read start no. RC End code
counter Number of counters/ Data read
timers to read
RG Read status of counter/timer/high-speed counter RG Read start no. RG End code
comparator Number of counter/ ON/OFF
timer/comparator to information
read
RD Read DM RD Read start DM no. RD End code
Number of DM Data read
addresses to read
RJ Read I/O relay/internal utility relay RJ Read start ch. RJ End code
Number of channels Data read
to read
WR Forced update of I/O relay/internal utility relay WR Write start ch. WR End code
Data to write
WH Update temporary memory WH Write start ch. WH End code
Data to write 17
WC Update current value of counter/timer/high-speed WC Write start no. WC End code
counter Data to write
WG Forced update of status of counter/timer/high- WG Write start no. WG End code
speed counter comparator Data to write
WD Update DM value WD Write start no. WD End code
Data to write
WJ Forced update of I/O relay/internal utility relay WJ Write start ch. WJ End code
Data to write
R# Read set value of counter/timer/high-speed R# Instruction word R# End code
counter comparator Operand Set value
W# Update set value of counter/timer/high-speed W# Instruction word
counter comparator Operand
New set value W# End code
MS Read KV-300 CPU operation mode MS MS End code
Operation
mode
SC Change KV-300 CPU operation mode SC Operation mode SC End code
KS Set KS Device Changed no. KS End code
Changed bit
KR Reset KR Device KR End code
No. to change
Bit to change
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 309 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

Command Response
Header Function Header Command data Header Response data
code code code
FK Set/reset multiple channels FK Device FK End code
No. to change
Data to forceset/
reset
CR Read values of DM0008 to DM0015 CR CR End code
Data of DM0008 to
DM0015
MM Read model code MM MM End code 13
KV-300
TS Test TS Any characters TS Any characters

KV-10/80
(122 characters (122 characters

max.) max.)
QQMR Register combined commands and QQMR Device ch. no. QQMR End command
monitor I/Os Operand
QQIR Read combined commands and QQIR QQIR End code
monitor I/Os Data read from
registered table
XZ Abort XZ No response
** Initial ** (No station no. No response

or FCS)
IC Command undefined error No command IC
Command execution disabled Header End code
code
KVHKA Chap 07_5to10.p65 310 08.3.11, 11:18 AM

KV-300
KV-10/80
Chapter 8
KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module KV-300 Series Only
This chapter describes the optional Analog I/O module for KV-300 Series.
8.1 Outline ...................................................................................... 1-312

8.2 Configuration ........................................................................... 1-313
8.2.1 Parts and Functions .............................................................................. 1-313
8.2.2 System Configuration ............................................................................ 1-314
8.3 Installation ................................................................................ 1-315
8.3.1 Terminal Nos. ........................................................................................ 1-315
8.3.2 Removing the Terminal Block ............................................................... 1-316
8.3.3 Example of Voltage I/O Wiring .............................................................. 1-317
8.3.4 Example of Current I/O Wiring .............................................................. 1-318
8.3.5 Setting I/O Ranges ................................................................................ 1-319
8.4 Programming ........................................................................... 1-320
8.4.1 Input Characteristics (A/D) .................................................................... 1-320
8.4.2 Calculating Input Data (A/D) ................................................................. 1-321
8.4.3 Output Characteristics (D/A) ................................................................. 1-322
8.4.4 Calculating Output Data (D/A) ............................................................... 1-323
8.4.5 Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses ............................................. 1-324
8.4.6 Reading Analog Input ............................................................................ 1-325
8.4.7 Measuring Analog Input Average .......................................................... 1-326
8.4.8 Writing Analog Output ........................................................................... 1-327
8.4.9 Converting Analog Input to Analog Output ............................................ 1-328
8.5 KV-AN6 Appendices ................................................................ 1-329
8.5.1 Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 1-329
8.5.2 Precautions ........................................................................................... 1-330
8.5.3 Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-331
8.5.4 Dimensions ........................................................................................... 1-332
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 311 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.1 Outline KV-300 Series Only
8.1 Outline
Features
The KV-AN6 has both A/D and D/A conversion functions. The A/D conversion
function converts analog input to digital data and stores the converted data in the
KV-300 CPU; the D/A conversion function converts digital data stored in the KV-300
CPU to analog output data for output devices.
Inverter M
KV-300
Voltage
Transducer
KV-10/80
Current A/D KV-300 D/A

Speed control motor
Power convertor CPU convertor
Servo
Power factor controller M
12 bits 12 bits
Position control motor
Temperature
recorder
(4ch) (2ch)
Temperature
Preampifier
± 10V ± 10V
Pressure Analog
± 5V ± 5V
regulator
Flow rate 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA
Speed Temperature control
KV-AN6
A/D converter
Converts analog input to 16-bit binary data (digital data). (The effective bits are the
12 bits starting from the most significant digit.)
Three input ranges can be selected with a slide switch: -10 to +10 V (voltage), -5 to
+5 V (voltage), and 0 to 20 mA (current).
Each KV-AN6 module has 4 input channels.
D/A converter
Converts 16-bit binary data (digital data) to analog output. (The effective bits are the
12 bits starting from the most significant digit.)
Three output ranges can be selected with a slide switch: -10 to +10 V (voltage), -5 to
+5 V (voltage), and 4 to 20 mA (current).
Each KV-AN6 module has two output channels.
8
Note: As shown below, 12 bits of the 16-bit binary data, starting from the most
significant digit, are effective.
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 X X X X
These 12 bits are effective. Undefined
1-312 Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 312 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.2 Configuration
8.2.1 Parts and Functions
1
4 5
KV-300
KV-10/80
CH0 CH4
D
/
A
CH1 CH5
D
2
/
A
CH2 ±5V ±10V
CH3
±5V ±10V 0~20mA
No. Part name Function

1 READY indicator Lights when power (24 VDC) is supplied to the
KV-AN6.
2 Analog I/O terminal block Removable terminal block for analog input
signals (4 ch.) and analog output signals (2 ch.)
3 Terminal block lock bar Lock mechanism used to lock/release the
analog I/O terminal block
4 Input range selection switch Selects the analog input range for A/D conver
sion. Provided for each channel.
(White represents the switch position.)
±5V ±10V 0 to 20mA
18
5 Output range selection switch Selects the analog output range for D/A conver
sion. Provided for each channel.
(White represents the switch position.)
±5V ±10V
Note 1: To remove the terminal block, refer to page 1-316.

Note 2: To use analog current output (4 to 20 ms), a terminal separated from the
analog voltage output terminals is required.
Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module 1-313
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 313 08.3.11, 11:19 AM


The following example shows the configuration of a system incorporating the KV-
AN6. Up to five KV-AN6 modules can be connected simultaneously to the KV-300
CPU. Place the KV-AN6 at the right end of the system.
The following figure shows a sample connection of KV-AN6 modules.
KV-AN6
KV-U4 KV-300 CPU (5 modules max.)
KV-300
KV-10/80
I/O modules
(11 modules max.)
➮ Refer to page 1-324 or assignment of data memory addresses.
Note: If five KV-AN6 modules are connected to the KV-300 CPU, two KV-L2
modules and six I/O modules can be connected.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 314 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.3 Installation
8.3.1 Terminal Nos.
The following signals are assigned to the terminal nos. of the KV-AN6.
KV-AN6
KV-300
0
KV-10/80
C0
1
A
C1 /
D
2
C2
C3
V4
C4
I4
D
/
C5 A
V5
C6
I5
C7
F.G.
Signals
Terminal No. Description Assigned signal

0 A/D Analog input ch. 0 (±10 V, ±5 V, 0 to 20 mA)
1 Analog input ch. 1 Input range is slide-switch
2 Analog input ch. 2 selectable.
3 Analog input ch. 3
V4 D/A Analog voltage (±10 V, ±5 V) Input range is
output ch. 4 slide-switch selectable.
I4 Analog current 4 to 20 mA output range
output ch. 4 18
V5 Analog voltage (±10 V, ±5 V) Input range is
output ch. 5 slide-switch selectable.
I5 Analog current 4 to 20 mA output range
output ch. 5
. Not used NC
C0 Analog GND (common)
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
F.G. Frame ground
Note: Voltage output and current output can be used simultaneously.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 315 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.3.2 Removing the Terminal Block

To remove the terminal block from the KV-AN6 module, do the following.
1. Turn OFF the power switch. Open the terminal block cover from the top as
shown below.
Terminal block lock bar
Open
KV-300
KV-10/80
2. The terminal block is secured with a lock bar as shown below.
Terminal block lock bar
3. Remove the terminal block by pushing the terminal block lock bar to release the
8 terminal block.
Remove the terminal block
Push the lock bar
CAUTION Turn OFF the power switch before removing the terminal block.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 316 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.3.3 Example of Voltage I/O Wiring

■ Voltage output unit
Analog signal cable
Voltage signal
ch. 0 0
Shield
C0
Voltage signal
ch. 1 1
KV-300
KV-10/80
Shield
C1
Voltage signal D/A converter
ch. 2 2
Shield
C2
Voltage signal (Load)
ch. 3 3
Analog signal
Shield cable
(Input) C3
+ Voltage signal
V4 ch. 4
_
C4 Shield
A/D converter
I4
C5
+ Voltage signal
V5 ch. 5
–
C6 Shield
I5
C7
F.G.
18
Note 1: Use a two-core twisted pair shielded cable as the analog signal cable.
Note 2: Isolate the analog signal cable wiring from the AC cable wiring including
power cables.
Note 3: Connect a shielding wire or shielded cable to the input side for analog input,
and to the load side for analog output. It may be better to connect a shielding wire or
shielded cable to C0 to C7, depending on the case.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 317 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.3.4 Example of Current I/O Wiring

■ Current output unit
Current signal Analog signal cable

ch. 0 0
Shield C0
Current signal
ch. 1 1
KV-300
KV-10/80
C1
Current signal Shield
ch. 2
2 D/A converter
C2
Current signal Shield
Ch.3 3
C3
(Input) Shield
(Load)
V4
Analog signal
C4 cable
A/D converter
+ Current signal
I4
– ch. 4
C5
Shield
V5
C6
+
I5 Current signal
– ch. 5
C7
Shield
F.G.
Note 1: Use a two-core twisted pair shielded cable as the analog signal cable.
Note 2: Isolate the analog signal cable wiring from the AC cable wiring including
power cables.
Note 3: Connect a shielding wire or shielded cable to the input side for analog input,
and to the load side for analog output. It may be better to connect a shielding wire or
shielded cable to C0 to C7, depending on the case.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 318 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.3.5 Setting I/O Ranges

This section describes how to set the KV-AN6 I/O ranges.
As shown in the following figure, the analog input (A/D) range and analog output (D/
A) range can be selected with the slide switches on the right side of the KV-AN6
module.
• The I/O ranges are factory-set to ±5 V.
KV-AN6 Analog input range (A/D) Analog output range (D/A)
module selection switch selection switch
KV-300
KV-10/80
CH0 CH4
D
/
A
A CH1 CH5
/
D
CH2
±5V ±10V
CH3
±5V ±10V 0 to 20 mA
Analog input (A/D) range Analog output (D/A) range

Selection Setting Selection Setting
switch switch
Voltage input: -5 to +5 V Voltage output: -5 to +5 V
Voltage input: -10 to +10 V Voltage output: -10 to +10 V
Current input: 0 to 20 mA Connecting Current output: 4 to 20 mA
terminal for
current output
Turn OFF the power switch before changing selection switch settings. 18
CAUTION Analog input signals must fall within the range set by the selection switch.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 319 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4 Programming KV-300 Series Only
8.4 Programming
8.4.1 Input Characteristics (A/D)
On the KV-AN6, the analog input function converts analog signals from an external
unit to digital signals. The converted data is written into the assigned data memory
addresses at every scan time.
An external analog input signal can be set according to the input range, as shown in
the following table.
Selection Description Range

KV-300
KV-10/80
switch
Voltage input -5 to +5 V
-10 to +10 V
Current input 0 to 20 mA
The selection switches in the above table are located on the right side of the KV-
AN6 (➮ Refer to page 1-319).
Voltage input (Digital-converted value)

(±5 V range)
(7D00H) +32000
(±10 V range)
+25600
+19200
+12800
+6400 (Analog input value)

-5 +5
-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +10 (V)

-6400
-12800
-19200
-25600
-32000 (8300H)
Current input
(Digital-converted value)
8 (7D00H) +32000
(0 to 20 mA range)
+25600
+19200
+12800
+6400
(Analog input value)
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 (mA)
-6400
-12800
-19200
-25600
(8300H) -32000
Through the A/D converter, analog input signals are written as binary data (16 bits)
into the assigned data memory addresses by channel (➮ Refer to page 1-324). The
effective bits are the 12 bits starting from the most significant digit.
When a signal beyond the setting range is input, it is converted to 7FFFH at positive
voltage and 8000H at negative voltage. For example, if +10 V is input when input
range is set to ±5 V, it is digitally converted to 7FFFH.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 320 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

Full scale and resolution of each range

(12-bit BIN data)
Negative input data is treated as a 2’s complement.
Sign bit Data memory
0: Positive 0 0 0 0 addresses
1: Negative
Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Undefined
• Maximum value (+10 V, +5 V, 20 mA)

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 X X X X
KV-300
KV-10/80
7 D 0 Undefined
• Minimum value (-10 V, -5 V, 0 mA)

(4 mA)
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 X X X X
8 3 0 Undefined
8.4.2 Calculating Input Data (A/D)

The KV-AN6 converts analog input signals to 16-bit digital values and writes them
into data memory. (The effective bits are the 12 bits starting from the most signifi-
cant digit.)
This section describes how to convert the data stored in data memory into digital
data (in decimal) according to the input range.
• Full scale and resolution of each range

The following table shows the full scale and resolution of each range.
Range Full scale Resolution

±10 V 20 V 5 mV
±5 V 10 V 2.5 mV
0 to 20 mA 20 mA 5 µA
• Since the effective bits that are written into data memory are the 12 bits starting
from the most significant digit, resolution is 1/4000 of the full-scale value.
To calculate the input voltage value or input current value from the data written
into data memory, use the following expressions:
Input voltage = DM value/16 x Resolution of the input range
18
Input current = (32000 + DM value)/16 x Resolution of the input range
To convert a 16-bit DM value to an effective 12-bit value, divide the 16-bit value
by 16.
Example 1
When 19200 (in decimal) is written into DM addresses in the ±10 V range
19200/16 x 5 mV = 6000 mV = 6 V
The KV-AN6 receives input of +6 V.
Example 2
When 12800 (in decimal) is written into DM addresses in the ±5 V range
12800/16 x 2.5 mV = 2000 mV = 2 V
The KV-AN6 receives input of 2 V.
Example 3
When 16000 (in decimal) is stored in DM addresses in the 0-to-20 mA range
(32000 + 16000)/16 x 5 µA = 15000 µA = 15 mA
The KV-AN6 receives input of +15 mA.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 321 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.3 Output Characteristics (D/A)

On the KV-AN6, the analog output function converts digital (binary) data to analog
external output signals. The digital data stored in data memory is converted to
analog data and sent to an output unit at every scan time.
The analog output signal can be set according to the input range as shown in the
following table.
Selection switch Description Range
Voltage output -5 to +5 V
-10 to +10 V
Connected to terminal for current output Current output 4 to 20 mA
KV-300
KV-10/80
The selection switches in the table are located on the right side of the KV-AN6.
Voltage output
(Analog output value)

(V) (±10 V range)
10
8
(±5 V range)
-32000(8300H)
4
-25600
-19200
-12800
-6400
0
6400
12800
19200
25600
(7D00H)32000
-2
(Digital data)
-4
-6
-8
-10
Current output
(Analog output value)
(mA)
(4-to-20 mA range)
20
8 18
16
14
12
10
2
0
-32000
-25600
-19200
-12800
-6400
6400
12800
19200
25600
32000
(Digital data)
Through the D/A converter, digital data stored in the assigned data memory ad-
dresses by channel (Refer to page 1-324) is output as analog signals. The effective
bits are the 12 bits starting from the most significant digit.
Note: A change in the value of the DM address from 7FFFH (32767) to 8000H
(32768) or vice versa means that the polarity is reversed when the voltage output is
selected, or that output drastically changes from the maximum value to the minimum
value or vice versa when the current output is selected. Use the program to maintain
output data within the specified range.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 322 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.4 Calculating Output Data (D/A)

To output analog data, write the data into the analog output data memory ad-
dresses.
Calculate the numerical value to be written into data memory.
Voltage output
DM value = Output voltage/Output range resolution x 16
Current output
DM value = (Output current -12 [mA])/0.004 [mA] x 16
To convert a 16-bit DM value to an effective 12-bit value, multiply the 16-bit value
KV-300
KV-10/80
by 16.
Example 1
When +7.5 V is output in the ±10 V range
7.5 V/5 mV x 16 = 24000
The DM value is 24000.
Example 2
When -5 V is output in the ±5 V range
5 V/2.5 mV x 16 = 32000
Since the output voltage in this example is negative, set the result by subtracting
32000 from 0 as the DM value.
Example 3
When 18 mA is output in the 4-to-20 mA range
(18 mA - 12 mA)/0.004 x 16 = 24000
The DM value is 24000.
18
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 323 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.5 Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses

• The data memory address assignment is predefined by each A/D and D/A
channel.
• Analog input is converted to 16-bit digital data (in binary) and stored in the data
memory addresses assigned for the A/D conversion.
• To convert analog data for output, write 16-bit digital data (binary) into the data
memory addresses assigned for the D/A conversion.
• DM address assignment list
Module No. Description DM Channel R: read

KV-300
KV-10/80
W: write
1 A/D DM9000 Analog input ch. 0 R
DM9001 Analog input ch. 1
D/A DM9004 Analog output ch. 4 W
DM9005 Analog output ch. 5
8 5 A/D DM9024 Analog input ch. 0 R
The KV-AN6 modules are numbered sequentially starting with the one closest to the
KV-300 CPU.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 324 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.6 Reading Analog Input

The following example describes how to read analog input.
Example
This program reads data from analog input ch. 0 of the KV-AN6 module no. 1, and
writes positive data into DM0000 and negative data into DM0001. (The data value
up to the second decimal position is written.)
Input range of ±10 V is used.
Input of +10 V is stored as 1000 into DM0000, and input of -10V is stored as 1000
into DM0001 (data value x 100).
KV-300
KV-10/80
Ladder diagram
2002 DM9000 $8000 2009 #00016 #00005 DM0000

LDA CMP DIV MUL STA
When analog input is positive
DM9000/#16 x 5 mV —> DM0000
DM9000 > Result of
< $8000
Analog input: 2009 #00001 #00016 #00005 DM0001
KV-AN6 COM ADD DIV MUL STA
module no. 1,
When analog input is negative
input ch. 0
(Reversed bit of DM9000 + #1)/#16 x 5 mV —> DM0001
→
Analog input
➮ For assignment of data memory addresses, refer to page 1-324.
Example
Analog input +10 V (±10 V range)
DM9000 data D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09 D08 D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 D 0 0
32000 Convert to decimal:
→
32000/16 x 5 = 10000 —> Written into DM0000.

→
10.000 V (Up to the third decimal position)

18
Analog input -10 V (±10 V range)
32000/16 x 5 = 10000 —> Written into DM0001.
→
10.000 V (Up to the third decimal position)
■ Conversion tip
Conversion from hexadecimal data to decimal data
Example: Convert 7D00H (in hexadecimal) to a decimal value
7 x 16 3 + D x 16 2 + 0 x 16 1 + 0 x 16 0 = 28672 + 3328 + 0 + 0 = 32000

(in decimal)
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 325 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.7 Measuring Analog Input Average

Measuring Average and Setting Maximum/minimum Value of Analog Input
Example
This program measures the data of analog input ch. 1 of the KV-AN6 module no. 1
under the following conditions.
• When the data is positive, the average of 100 measurements is written into
DM100 (data value x 100).
• When the data is negative, the average of 100 measurements is written into
DM101 (data value x 100).
KV-300
KV-10/80
• Maximum value +6 V
• Minimum value -6 V
• Input range ±10 V
• When analog input exceeds the maximum value, 500 turns ON.
• When analog input is below the minimum value, 501 turns ON.
Ladder diagram
2008 #09000
DW Sets DM9000.
DM0000
Special utility relay
#19200
Sets 19200 (+6 V) as the 2008 initializes
DW
DM0001 maximum value. these settings at
startup. (See the
#46336 4th parameter
DW
Sets 46336 (-6 V) as
the minimum value. setting of the ITVL
DM0002
instruction.)
#00100 Sets 100 as the measure- For the ITVL
DW ment count at which to
DM0003 obtain an average.
2003 ITVL
PLS instruction, refer to page 3-117.
DM0000
0001
PAUSE Input to 001 stops average measurement.
01000
0002
RES Input to 002 resets average measurement.
1003 DM0007 $8000 2009 #00016 #00005 DM0100 When the average of 100 measurements is
LDA CMP DIV MUL STA
positive, the data value x 1000 is written into
8 DM0100 (+5 V → 5000).
2009 #00001 #00016 #00005 DM0101 When the average of 100 measurements is
COM ADD DIV MUL STA
negative, the data value x 1000 is written into
DM0101 (-5 V → 5000).
1000 #00020 When analog input exceeds the maximum value,
T000 relay 1000 turns ON for the first scan. Turns ON
0500 for 2 seconds.
0500 T000 0500
When analog input is below the minimum value,

relay 1001 turns ON for the first scan. Turns ON
1001 #00020 0501 for 2 seconds.
T001
0501 T001 0501
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 326 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.8 Writing Analog Output

The following example describes how to write analog output.
Example 1
Output the data written into DM0000 to analog output ch. 1 of the KV-AN6 module
No. 1 (±10 V output range)
• When input 0000 is ON, +10 V is output.
• When input 0000 is OFF, -10 V is output.
Ladder diagram
KV-300
KV-10/80
2002 #00010
Inputs 10 V to
DW
DM0000
DM0000.
0000 DM0000 #01000 #00005 #00016 DM9004 When input 0000 is
LDA MUL DIV MUL STA ON, outputs +10 V
from ch. 1.
0000 DM0000 #01000 #00005 #00016 #00001 DM9004
LDA MUL DIV MUL COM ADD STA When input 0000 is
OFF, outputs -10 V
from ch. 1.
Example 2
Input trimmer variable data by using analog timer ch. 0 of the KV-300 CPU and
output voltage to analog output ch. 1 of the KV-AN6 module no. 1.
• When input 0000 is ON ( 0 to 10 V), voltage increases when trimmer of analog
timer is turned clockwise.
• When input 0000 is OFF (0 to -10 V), voltage decreases when trimmer is turned
clockwise.
• Output range of ±10 V is used.
Ladder diagram
Trimmer input
2002 0 #00100 #00320 #00249 DM0000 Variable from 0 to
TMIN MUL MUL DIV STA 32000
Trimmer variable (0
to 32000)
0 to 10 V
0000 DM0000 DM9004
When input 0000 is
LDA STA ON, outputs 0 to 10 V
to analog output ch.
0000 DM0000 #00001 DM9004

1. 18
When input 0000 is
LDA COM ADD STA OFF, outputs 0 to -
10 V to analog
output ch. 1.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 327 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.4.9 Converting Analog Input to Analog Output

The following example describes how to fetch analog input and output it as analog
data.
Example
Fetch signals from analog input ch. 0 of the KV-AN6 module no. 1 and output the
signals as analog data to analog output ch. 4.
Select either voltage-to-current conversion or current-to-voltage conversion, using
the range selection switches. For the range setting, refer to page 1-319.
Ladder diagram
KV-300
KV-10/80
2002 DM9000 DM9004 Fetches analog input

LDA STA and outputs it as
analog data.
2002 DM9000 $8000 2009 #00016 #00005 DM0000 When analog input is
LDA CMP DIV MUL STA positive, writes the
data value x 1000 into
2009
DM0000.
#00001 #00016 #00005 DM0001
COM ADD DIV MUL STA (In the diagram) Let
the complement of
two be true.
When analog input is
negative, writes the
data value x 1000 into
DM0001.
➮ For assignment of data memory addresses, refer to page 1-324.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 328 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.5 KV-AN6 Appendices KV-300 Series Only
8.5 KV-AN6 Appendices

When an analog input/output error occurs, determine the error and remedy with the
following flowchart.
Analog input/output
is disabled.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Is READY OFF
indicator ON?
ON Is KV-U4/U5 Check KV-U4 power

OFF supply unit or KV-U5
POWER
Check contact with power distribution module.
indicator ON?
analog I/O terminal
block.
ON
Check for secure
connections between
YES Is analog input/ modules.
output enabled?
NO
Check analog input/
output and I/O channel
setting.
YES Is analog input/

output enabled?
NO
YES
Is analog input
enabled?
Write data into data
memory addresses
NO with the KV-P3E(01)
(Hand-held Programmer) 18
to verify that analog
Check data in data output is enabled.
memory address on
status monitor with the
KV-P3E(01) (Handheld
Programmer).
Is analog output YES

enabled?
Check the YES Can you
KV-300 CPU monitor
program. the data? NO
NO
End Contact nearest

KEYENCE office.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 329 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.5.2 Precautions
Environmental requirements
When installing the KV-AN6, note the following:
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid exposure to temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or exceeding 50°C (122°F).
• Avoid exposure to humidity below 35%RH or exceeding 85%RH.
• Avoid areas where condensation occurs due to sudden drops in temperature.
• Avoid exposure to corrosive or flammable gases.
KV-300
KV-10/80
• Avoid exposure to airborne dust, metal particles, oil, or corrosive substances

such as salt.
• Avoid exposure to strong vibration or impact.
• Avoid locations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash the KV-AN6.
• Avoid exposure to strong magnetic or electrical fields.
Panel installation
Consider accessibility and environmental resistance when installing the KV-AN6
inside a panel.
Ambient temperature
The operating temperature range of the KV-AN6 is 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) (No
freezing).
Provide enough space for proper ventilation.
if the temperature exceeds 50°C (122°F), provide a fan or air conditioner.

Do not install the KV-AN6 and high-voltage equipment in the same control panel.
Isolate the KV-AN6 as far as possible from power cables.
Access
Isolate the KV-AN6 as far as possible from high voltage equipment and drive
equipment to ensure safe and easy access for adjustment and maintenance.
8 Wiring
The KV-AN6 terminal block includes M3.0 screws.
Use the following types of crimp terminals.
6.0 max. 6.0 max.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 330 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

Environmental specifications
Model KV-AN6
Maximum current consumption 240 mA
Ambient temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122°F), No freezing
Noise immunity 1500 Vp-p min., pulse width: 1 µs and 50 ns
(Noise generated by noise simulator)
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude of 1.5 mm max., applied
in each of X, Y, and Z directions (2 hrs)
KV-300
KV-10/80
(1 G when attached to a DIN rail)
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ between power terminal and I/O terminal, and
external terminals and housing (measured with 500
VDC megohmmeter)
Environmental restrictions No excessive dust or corrosive gas
System specifications
A/D specifications D/A specifications
Analog input Voltage ±10 V Analog output Voltage: ± 10 V
(switch selectable) ±5 V (voltage output: switch ±5V
Current: 0 to 20 mA selectable; current output: Current: 4 to 20 mA
use separated terminal)
Input impedance Voltage: 1 MΩ Output impedance Voltage: 100 Ω
Current: 350 Ω Max. load resistance Current: 400 Ω
Analog input channels 4 channels Analog output channels 2 channels
Resolution ±10 V 5 mV (1/4000) Resolution ±10 V 5 mV (1/4000)
±5 V 2.5 mV (1/4000) ±5 V 2.5 mV (1/4000)
0 to 20 mA 5 mA (1/4000) 4 to 20 µA 4 µA (1/4000)
Digital data format 16-bit binary, 2’s complement
Effective bits are the 12 bits starting from the most significant bit.
Total accuracy ±1% of full scale
Conversion rate 720 µs/4 ch Conversion rate 360 µs/2 ch
Isolation method Photocoupler: Not isolated between channels or between A/D and D/A converters
Absolute input Voltage: ±12 V max. 18
Current: 30 mA max.
Note: The A/D and D/A converters can be used simultaneously.
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 331 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

8.5.4 Dimensions
Unit: mm
27.3
KV-300
KV-10/80
90 35.4
94
35 84.5
39.4
KVHKA Chap 08.p65 332 08.3.11, 11:19 AM

KV-300
KV-10/80
Chapter 9
KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit KV-10/80 Series Only
This chapter describes the optional Analog I/O unit for KV-10/80 Series.
Note: KV-AD4/DA4 is available for KV-10/80 Series only.
9.1 Outline ...................................................................................... 1-334

9.2 Configuration ........................................................................... 1-335
9.2.1 Part Names and Functions .................................................................... 1-335
9.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-337
9.2.3 System Configuration ............................................................................ 1-341
9.3 Installation ................................................................................ 1-342
9.3.1 Installation Procedure ........................................................................... 1-342
9.3.2 Checking the Installation Environment .................................................. 1-343
9.3.3 Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode ............................................................ 1-344
9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments .......................................................... 1-345
9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80 .............................................................. 1-348
9.3.6 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 1-349
9.4 Programming ........................................................................... 1-350
9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4 ..................................................................... 1-350
9.4.2 Programming the KV-DA4 ..................................................................... 1-353
9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables ........................................................... 1-357
9.5 Programming Examples .......................................................... 1-359
9.6 Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 1-370
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 333 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.1 Outline KV-10/80 Series Only
9.1 Outline
Features
The KV-AD4 is provided with an A/D conversion function, while the KV-DA4 is
provided with a D/A conversion function.
A/D Conversion — KV-AD4

Analog data that is input from external instruments is converted to digital data, and
written to CPU data memory. Conversion of analog data to digital data allows the
KV-300
analog data to be processed on the CPU.

KV-10/80
➮ For details, see "Part Names and Functions" on the next page.
Voltage
CPU KV-AD4 Current
Analog Transducer Power
signals Power factor
Power input
Data A/D
supply
Memory converter
unit
Temperature
Pre-amp Pressure
Flow rate
Writing digital data Speed
• Analog signals can be input from up to four (4 channels) external instruments.

• The input ranges of each channel can be selected by DIP switches as shown in
the following table.
Status DIPSW1 DIPSW2
ON CH0, CH1 -10 to +10 V CH0, CH1 4 to 20 mA
OFF CH2, CH3 -10 to +10 V CH2, CH3 4 to 20 mA
D/A Conversion — KV-DA4

The digital data that is written to CPU data memory is converted to analog signals,
and output to external instruments. Conversion of digital data after it has been
processed by the CPU to analog data allows information to be sent to instruments
such as temperature recorders or analog controllers that handle analog data.
➮ For details, see "Part Names and Functions" on the next page.
9
Inverter
CPU KV-DA4
Analog
signals Servo motor controller
Power output
supply Data D/A
Memory converter
unit
Temperature recorder
Analog controller
Writing digital data
• Analog signals can be output to up to four (4 channels) external instruments.

• Two output ranges are provided for each channel, and can be selected on the
terminal block.
◆ Voltage: -10 to +10 V ◆ Current: 4 to 20 mA
1-334 Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 334 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.2 Configuration KV-10/80 Series Only
9.2 Configuration
This section describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-AD4/DA4.
KV-AD4
The following describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-AD4.
KV-300
KV-10/80
2 Voltage input terminal block
* Protective cover is attached
at purchase.
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3 1 POWER indicator
KEYENCE
KV - AD4
POWER
4 Input mode selector switch

ANALOG IN
3 Current input terminal block

I0 I1 I2 I3
at purchase.
C4 C5 C6 C7
No. Name Function

1 POWER indicator Lights red when power is being supplied.
Voltage input Terminal for connecting to external instruments
2
terminal block that are used as the voltage input source.
Current input Terminal for connecting to external instruments
3
terminal block that are used as the current input source.
Input mode selector DIP switch for selecting the input mode
4
switch (voltage or current)
Note: A terminal for connecting external instruments is called a "channel." This is

sometimes abbreviated to "ch." Only one external instrument terminal is connected 19
to a single channel.
Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit 1-335
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 335 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

KV-DA4
The following describes the names and functions of parts on the KV-DA4.
2 Voltage output terminal block

at purchase.
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3 1 POWER indicator
KEYENCE
KV - DA4
POWER
KV-300
KV-10/80
3 Current output terminal block

ANALOG OUT * Protective cover is attached
I0 I1 I2 I3 at purchase.
C4 C5 C6 C7
No. Name Function

1 POWER indicator Lights red when power is being supplied.
Voltage output Terminal for connecting to external instruments that are
2
terminal block used as the voltage output destination.
Current output Terminal for connecting to external instruments that are
3
terminal block used as the current output destination.
Note: A terminal for connecting external instruments is called a "channel." This are
sometimes abbreviated to "ch." Only one external instrument is terminal connected
to a single channel.
Do not simultaneously connect the current and voltage of the same channel
CAUTION (V0 and I0,V1 and I1,V2 and I2,V3 and I3) to external instruments. Doing so
might cause the KV-DA4 to malfunction.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 336 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

The tables below show general specifications, performance specifications, terminal
block specifications and the external dimensions of the KV-AD4/DA4.
KV-AD4
Item Specifications
Model KV-AD4
KV-300
Power supply voltage Supplied from CPU (24 VDC +10%, -20%)
KV-10/80
Current consumption 120 mA max.
Withstand voltage 1500 VAC for 1 minute (across all external terminals and housing,
and across all power terminal and I/O terminals)
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz double-amplitude 1.5 mm max. for 2 hours each in X,
Y and Z-axes
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ min. (across all external terminals and housing,
and across all power terminal and I/O terminals [measured by
500 VDC megohmmeter] )
Environment No excessive dust and corrosive gases allowed
Input/Output specifications
Item Voltage Current

Analog input range -10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA
Input impedance 1 MΩ 300 Ω
No. of analog inputs 4 (4 channels)
Resolution 5 mV (1/4000) 4 µA (1/4000)
Input range ±10 V Input range 4 to 20 mA
Conversion speed Conversion at each CPU scan
Total accuracy ±0.7% Less than ±1% (FS)
Isolation method Photocoupler (channels not isolated)
Max. absolute input Within ±12 V 30 mA max.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 337 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Analog input terminal assignment
Terminal Signal Description

V0 Analog voltage input ch0 • Input range: -10 to +10 V
V1 Analog voltage input ch1 • The channel to input from is set by
V2 the selector switch.
Analog voltage input ch2
V3 Analog voltage input ch3
I0 Analog current input ch0 • Input range: 4 to 20 mA
I1 Analog current input ch1 • The channel to input from is set by
Analog current input ch2 the selector switch.
I2
I3 Analog current input ch3
KV-300
KV-10/80
• NC (No connection)
C0 Ground for analog signal (connected internally)
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Note: Do not connect the input voltage and input current to terminals of the same
No., for example, by connecting external instruments to both V0 and I0. Doing so
might cause the KV-AD4 to malfunction.
Do not simultaneously connect the current and voltage (V0 and I0,V1 and I1,V2
CAUTION and I2,V3 and I3) of the same channel to external instruments. Doing so might
cause the KV-DA4 to malfunction.
Dimensions
2-ø5 (mounting hole)
9
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3
KEYENCE
KV - AD4
POWER
99 35.4 90 111
ANALOG IN
I0 I1 I2 I3
C4 C5 C6 C7
31 39
65 43
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 338 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

KV-DA4
Item Specifications
Model KV-DA4
Power supply voltage Supplied from CPU (24 VDC, +10%, -20%)
Current consumption 200 mA max.
Withstand voltage 1500 VAC for 1 minute (across all external terminals and housing,
KV-300
KV-10/80
and across all power terminal and I/O terminals)
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz double-amplitude 1.5 mm max. for 2 hours each in X,
Y and Z-axes
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ min. (across all external terminals and housing,
and across all power terminal and I/O terminals [measured by
500 VDC megohmmeter] )
Environment No excessive dust and corrosive gases allowed
Input/Output specifications
Item Voltage Current

Analog output range -10 to +10 V 4 to 20 mA
Output impedance 0.5 Ω min. —
Min. load resistance 1 kΩ —
Max. load resistance — 400 Ω
No. of analog outputs 4 (4 channels)
Resolution 5 mV (1/4000) 4 µA (1/4000)
Output range ±10 V Output range 4 to 20 mA
Conversion speed Once per two scans min. (changes at startup of conversion
instruction relay)
Total accuracy ±1% (FS)
Isolation method Photocoupler (channels not isolated)
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 339 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Analog output terminal assignment
Terminal Signal Description

V0 Analog voltage output ch0 • Output range: -10 to +10 V
V1 Analog voltage output ch1
I0 Analog current output ch0 • Output range: 4 to +20 mA
I1 Analog current output ch1
KV-300
KV-10/80
• NC (No connection)
C0 Ground for analog signal (connected internally)
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Note 1: Separate terminals are used for analog voltage input and analog current
output. Take care not to miswire these terminals.
Note 2: Do not connect the output voltage and output current to terminals of the
same No., for example, by connecting external instruments to both V0 and I0.
Doing so might cause the KV-DA4 to malfunction.
Dimensions
2-ø5 (mounting hole)
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3
KEYENCE
KV - DA4
POWER
99 35.4 90 111
9
ANALOG OUT
I0 I1 I2 I3
C4 C5 C6 C7
31 39
65 43
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 340 08.3.11, 11:20 AM


This section describes the system configuration when the KV-AD4/DA4 is connected
to the KV-10 to 80.
The KV-AD4/DA4 can be connected to the KV-10 to 80 as shown in the following

diagram.
One KV-AD4 and KV-DA4 module each can be connected to a single KV-10 to 80.
Other I/O expansion units can be connected to the CPU as specified in the manual.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Power supply unit CPU KV-AD4/DA4
(KV-10 to 80)
C0 C1 C2 C3
V0 V1 V2 V3
KEYENCE KEYENCE
KV - 10R
KV - AD4
POWER
ANALOG IN
I0 I1 I2 I3
C4 C5 C6 C7
➮ For details on how to connect the KV-AD4/DA4 and the KV-10 to 80, see "Connecting to the KV-10
to 80 on page 1-348. For details on how to connect other I/O expansion units, refer to page 1-192.
Pay attention to the following when expanding the system.

Note 1: Only one KV-AD4 and one KV-DA4 can be connected to a single KV-10 to
80. If two or more KV-AD4/DA4s are connected, they will not operate normally.
Note 2: Always connect the KV-AD4/DA4 to the right end of the connection path.
Note 3: When both the KV-AD4 and KV-DA4 are used, make sure that one of
these units is connected to the right end of the connection path and that the other
unit is connected in between. The KV-AD4 and KV-DA4 may be connected in any
order.
KV-10 to 80 I/O expansion unit KV-AD4 KV-DA4
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 341 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3 Installation KV-10/80 Series Only
9.3 Installation
9.3.1 Installation Procedure
The KV-AD4/DA4 is connected to the CPU of the KV-10 to 80 and connected to
external instruments according to the following procedure.
Checking the Installation Environment

Make sure that the environment where you are going to install the KV-AD4/DA4
KV-300
1
KV-10/80
is appropriate.
➮ For details, see "9.3.2 Checking the Installation Environment" on the next page.
Preparation
Prepare items needed for installing the KV-AD4/DA4 such as signal leads and
2 crimp terminals.
➮ For details, see "Wiring" (p.1-345).
Connecting External Instruments

Connect external instruments for analog input to the KV-AD4 and KV-DA4,
respectively. Before connecting the KV-AD4, the input mode (voltage and current
3 input terminal settings) must be set.
➮ For details, see "9.3.3 Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode" (p.1-344).
Connecting the KV-AD4/DA4

4 Connect the KV-AD4/DA4 to the CPU of the KV-10 to 80.
➮ For details, see "9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80" (p.1-348).
5 Trial Operation
9
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 342 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3.2 Checking the Installation Environment

Do not install this system in any of the following locations.
CAUTION
• Direct sunlight
• Outside of ambient temperature 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
• Outside of relative humidity 35 to 85%
• Locations likely to freeze by sudden temperature changes
• Near corrosive or inflammable gases
KV-300
KV-10/80
• Near excessive dust, salt spray, iron powder or smoke
• Locations directly subject to vibration and shock
• Locations likely to be splashed with water, oil or chemicals
• Locations subject to strong magnetic or electric fields
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 343 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3.3 Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode

Before the KV-AD4 is connected to other units, its input mode must first be set. At
purchase, current input channels ch0 to ch3 have been set as active channels.
This operation is not necessary on the KV-DA4.
Setting the input mode

Follow the procedure below to set the input mode.
1. If the KV-AD4 is already connected to a KV series CPU, turn it OFF.

KV-300
KV-10/80
2. Set the input mode selector switches to ON if the input is voltage when the data
to be sent from connected instruments is input to a channel. If the input is cur-
rent, set the input mode selector switches to OFF.
V0/V1 V2/V3 ON
I0/I1 I2/I3 OFF

DIPSW1
DIPSW2
Switch DIPSW1 DIPSW2

ON CH0, CH1 -10 to +10 V CH0, CH1 4 to 20 mA
OFF CH2, CH3 -10 to +10 V CH2, CH3 4 to 20 mA
Channel Input Type Switch Setting

0ch, 1ch
Voltage input
2ch, 3ch
0ch, 1ch Voltage input
2ch, 3ch Current input
0ch, 1ch Current input
2ch, 3ch Voltage input
9 0ch, 1ch
Current input
2ch, 3ch
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 344 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments

Using the analog I/O terminal block, connect external instruments for analog input
and output. For details on how to wire terminals, refer to the "Analog I/O Terminal
Wiring Diagrams."
Wiring
Follow the procedure below to wire analog I/O.
The following describes how to wire the KV-AD4.
• Use 2-core twisted pair cable for the analog signal cable.
CAUTION
KV-300
KV-10/80
• When wiring the terminals, use rounded or forked crimp terminals of width
6 mm. Wiring terminals without crimp terminals is likely to result in faulty
contact, and prevent data from being transmitted correctly. Use M3.0
screws on the terminal blocks on the KV-AD4/DA4.
• Wire the AC power cable and analog signal cable separately. Do not bundle
these cables together.
• With the KV-AD4, connect the shielded cable to the input side, and with the
KV-DA4, connect to the load side.
Note: When mounting the KV-AD4/DA4 at a location that is likely to be influenced

by electrical noise, ground using a grounding resistance of 100 Ω max.
1. If the KV-AD4 is already connected

to a KV-10 to 80 CPU, turn it OFF
and then disconnect it from the
CPU.
2. Remove the protective cover of the
analog input terminal block. Hold
the left and right sides of the cover
as shown in the figure, and lift up to
remove.
3. Attach the crimp terminals of the signal cable to the terminals.
Wire the cables correctly. Wiring the cables to the incorrect terminals may
CAUTION
result in malfunction.
• Loosen the terminal screw with a

screwdriver, and then insert the 19
crimp terminal. POWER
Then, firmly tighten the terminal V3 V2 V1

KV - AD4
KEYENCE
V0
screw.
C3 C2 C1 C0
➮ For details on wiring, refer to

"KV-AD4 Analog Input Terminal"
on page 1-346 and "KV-DA4
Analog Output Terminal" on
page 1-347.
4. Attach the cover to the analog input

terminal block.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 345 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Wiring diagrams
KV-AD4 Analog Input Terminal
Refer to the following wiring diagrams when wiring the analog input terminals.
Note: Make sure that the terminals (channels) to be wired have been set by the
input mode selection switches.
→ For details, see "Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode" on page 1-344.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Voltage input wiring
Voltage output
instrument Terminal
Analog signal wire
Voltage signal V3
ch3
ANALOG IN
Shielded cable C3
Voltage signal V2
ch2
V3
I3
Shielded cable C2 C3
C7
V2
I2
C2
C6
Voltage signal V1
V1
I1
ch1
C1
C5
Shielded cable C1 POWER
KEYENCE
V0
I0
KV - AD4
C0
C4
Voltage signal V0
ch0
Shielded cable C0
(Input source side)
Current input wiring

Terminal Current output
Analog signal instrument
wire
I3 Current
signal
ANALOG IN
ch3
C7
Shielded cable Current
I2
signal
V3
I3
C3
C7
ch2
C6
V2
I2
Shielded cable
C2
C6
I1 Current
V1
I1
signal
C1
C5
POWER
ch1
KEYENCE
V0
I0
C5
KV - AD4
C0
C4
Shielded cable
I0 Current
9 signal
ch0
C4
Shielded cable (Input source side)
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 346 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

KV-DA4 Analog Output Terminal

Refer to the following wiring diagrams when wiring the analog output terminals.
Voltage output wiring
Terminal
Voltage
input instrument
Analog signal wire
Voltage signal V3
ch3 +
ANALOG OUT
—
Shielded cable
C3
Voltage signal V2
KV-300
V3
+
I3
KV-10/80
ch2
C3
C7
—
V2
I2
C2
C2
C6
Shielded cable
Voltage signal V1
V1
I1
ch1 +
C1
C5
POWER
KEYENCE
—
V0
I0
KV - DA4
C1
C0
C4
Shielded cable
Voltage signal V0
ch0 +
—
Shielded cable C0
(Load side)
Current output wiring

Terminal
Current input
instrument
Analog signal wire
I3
+ Current
ANALOG OUT
— signal
C7 ch3
Shielded cable
I2
Current
V3
+
I3
C3
C7
— signal
V2
ch2
I2
C6
C2
C6
Shielded cable
I1 Current
V1
I1
+
C1
C5
signal
POWER
—
KEYENCE
V0
I0
ch1
KV - DA4
C5
C0
C4
Shielded cable
I0 Current
+
— signal
ch0
C4
(Load side)
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 347 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80

Connect the KV-AD4/DA4 to the KV-10 to 80 CPU.
The following example describes how to connect a KV-AD4 to the right side of a KV-
10.
KV-AD4
KV-300
KV-10/80
KV-10
Note: Make sure that the power is turned OFF before connecting the KV-AD4/DA4
to the KV-10 to 80.
1. Slide up the protective cover on the Protective cover

right of KV-10 to 80.
2. Connect the connector cable from

the KV-AD4/DA4 to the connector
on the KV-10 to 80.
Connector cable
9
Note: Connector cables cannot be extended.

➮ For details on how to connect the I/O expansion unit and the KV-AD4/DA4, see "9.2.3 System
Configuration" page 1-341.
• When connecting the connector cable do not hold it by its cable. Hold it by
CAUTION
the connector. Applying unnecessary force on the cable may cause the unit
to malfunction.
• Always connect the connector cable by hand. Using a tool to connect the
connector cable may apply excessive force on the unit, causing it to mal-
function.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 348 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.3.6 Maintenance
This section describes how to inspect and clean the unit.
Inspection and Cleaning

■ Inspection
Connectors become loose when a KV Series unit is used for a long time. If you
continue to use a KV Series unit with loose connectors, this may cause the unit
to malfunction.
For this reason, you must periodically inspect the unit and connectors.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Generally, inspect the following points:
• Are connection parts disconnected or loose?
• Are connectors disconnected or loose?
• Are the terminal screws on the terminal block loose?
• Are relays fused or their contacts faulty?
• Are connector cables between units and instruments damaged?
■ Cleaning
Dirt adheres to the CPU and other units when they are used continuously for a
long time. Clean off any dirt on these units with a clean cloth.
Before removing any dust or dirt from fine parts such as connectors, remove the
connector and then remove with a cotton swab.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 349 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.4 Programming KV-10/80 Series Only
9.4 Programming
9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4
This section describes the A/D conversion mechanism, and the digital data that is
written to the CPU by the KV-AD4 after A/D conversion. It also describes how to
calculate actual voltage and current values based upon the digital data written to
CPU.
CPU KV-AD4
KV-300
KV-10/80
4 Sequence 1 Analog
Power program 2A/D input Transducer External
supply converter or instrument
unit Data memory for pre-amp (e.g. sensor)
A/D conversion
3 Writing digital data
A/D Conversion Mechanism

This item describes the A/D conversion mechanism on the KV-AD4. Check this item
before writing sequence programs for the KV-AD4.
1. The analog signal (voltage or current) is input to the KV-AD4 from the external
instrument.
• This operation is called "analog input."
2. The KV-AD4 converts the analog signal to digital data.

• This operation is called "A/D conversion."
3. The KV-AD4 then writes the digital data to the data memory for A/D conversion
on the CPU.
• Digital data is automatically written at each scan.
➮ For details, see "About Digital Data after A/D Conversion" on the next page.
4. If necessary, the digital data is processed by the sequence program on the CPU.
• The value of the actual input voltage or current can be calculated from the
digital data.
9 ➮ For details, see "Calculating Voltage and Current Values from Digital Data"on page 1-352.
The calculated values can be used for further processing besides the sequence program.
• The digital data can also be output as analog data as it is.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 350 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

About Digital Data after A/D Conversion

Data Memory to which digital data is written
The KV-AD4 converts analog signals that have been input from external instruments
to digital data, and writes this digital data to data memory for A/D conversion on the
CPU.
Data memory for A/D conversion on the CPU is used only when the KV-AD4 is
connected to the CPU. This memory can be used as regular data memory when the
KV-AD4 is not connected to the CPU. When the KV-AD4 is connected to the CPU,
this memory can be used only for A/D conversion and not for other applications.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Note: When the KV-AD4 is connected to the CPU, the conversion data is written at
each scan even if the channels on the KV-AD4 are not in use.
The address of the data memory to which digital data is written varies according to
the channel (terminal) to which the instrument for analog input is connected. The
following table shows the correspondence between channel and data memory.
Channel Data Memory

CH0 DM0992
CH1 DM0993
CH2 DM0994
CH3 DM0995
Digital data content

The numerical values of the digital data that is written to data memory for A/D
conversion are not obtained by simply converting actual voltage or current to binary
format. During conversion they are influenced by the input characteristics preset by
the user. The KV-AD4 voltage and input characteristics are as follows.
Voltage input characteristics Current input characteristics

Digital data Range: ±10 V Digital data Range: 4 to 20 mA
+4000 +4000
+3000 +3000
+2000
+2000
+1000
-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +10
Voltage
(V)
+1000
Current 19
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 (mA)
For example, when analog input is +5 V, 3000 will be written to the data memory
for A/D conversion. If the analog input is outside of the input range, 0 and 4095 are
written as the minimum and maximum values.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 351 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Calculating Voltage and Current Values from Digital Data

This item describes how to calculate the actual input voltage or current values
(decimal) from the digital data written to data memory for A/D conversion as a result
of A/D conversion. Executing this calculation in the sequence program allows the
calculated voltage or current values to be used in other processes in the program.
➮ The voltage and digital data conversion tables are shown in "9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables"
on page 1-357. Sample programs are provided under "9.5 Programming Examples" on page 1-359.
How to calculate analog input voltage

KV-300
Analog input voltage (mV) =

KV-10/80
(digital data x resolution (5 mV)) - offset value (10000)
Example
When digital data value 3800 (decimal) is written to data memory
(3800 x 5 (mV)) - 10000 = 9000 (mV) = 9 (V)
This indicates that an analog value of 9 V was input to the KV-AD4.
How to calculate analog input current
Analog input current (mA) =

(digital data x resolution (4 µA)) + offset value (4000)
Example
When digital data value 3800 (decimal) is written to data memory
(3800 x 4 (µA)) + 4000 = 19200 (µA) = 19.2 (mA)
This indicates that an analog value of 19.2 mA was input to the KV-AD4.
Resolution
"Resolution" refers to the minimum analog input value by which digital data can be
changed. For example, 5 mV is the resolution of input range -10 to +10 V. This
indicates that the digital data in memory changes when the analog input value
changes by at least 5 mV. The digital data in memory will not change if the analog
input value changes by only 4 mV.
Why is the resolution 5 mV, 4 µA?

Only the upper 12 bits of digital data are written to data memory. The maximum
value that can be expressed in 12 bits is expressed as 4095 in decimal (approxi-
9 mated to 4000). Accordingly, 1/4000 of the input range full scale (FS) is taken as the
resolution on the KV-AD4/DA4. For example, the resolution of input range -10 to +10
V can be calculated as follows:
20000 (mV) ÷ 4000 = 5 (mV)

↑
Full scale of input range -10 to +10 V is 20 V (20000 mV).
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 352 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.4.2 Programming the KV-DA4

This section describes the D/A conversion mechanism, how to convert the voltage
and current values to digital data for analog output, and how to output this digital
data as analog data from the KV-DA4.
D/A Conversion Mechanism

This item describes the D/A conversion mechanism on the KV-DA4. Check this
item before writing sequence programs for the KV-DA4.
KV-300
KV-10/80
CPU KV-DA4
1 Sequence 5 Analog
Power program 4D/A output External
supply conversion instrument
unit 2 Data memory for
D/A conversion
3 Writing digital data
1. The voltage or current value to be output to external instruments is converted to

digital data by the sequence program on the CPU.
➮ For details, see "Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output" on page 1-
354.
2. The digital data on the channel to be converted is written to the data memory for
D/A conversion by the sequence program.
➮ For details, see "Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output" on page 1-
354.
3. The special utility relay for D/A conversion of the channel to be converted to
analog data is set to ON.
• The special utility relay for D/A conversion acknowledges the request at the
rising edge of the relay.
➮ For details, see "Writing Digital Data to Data Memory for D/A Conversion" on page 1-356.
The D/A conversion instruction is transferred to the KV-DA4.
4. KV-DA4 converts the digital data to analog voltage or current signals.

• This operation is called "D/A conversion." 19
5. The analog signals are output to the external instrument from the KV-DA4.
• This operation is called "analog output."
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 353 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output

To output digital data as analog data, the voltage and current values that are to be
output from the KV-DA4 are first converted to the corresponding digital data by the
sequence program, and written to the data memory for D/A conversion. Voltage and
current values cannot be written to the data memory for D/A conversion as they are.
➮ For details on the voltage/digital data conversion tables, see "9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables"
on page 1-357. For details on sample programs, see "9.5 Programming Examples" on page 1-359.
➮ For details on data memory for D/A conversion, see "9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables" on page
1-357.
Note: When making a sequence program, take care not to exceed the output range
KV-300
KV-10/80
(0 to 4095). If a value exceeding this range is written to the data memory for D/A
conversion, unsteady values will be output from the KV-DA4.
How to calculate digital data when outputting analog voltage
Digital data = (output voltage (mV) ÷ resolution (5 mV)) + offset value (2000)
Example
When outputting +7.5 V
(7500 (mV) ÷ 5 (mV)) + 2000 = 3500
Write "3500" to D/A conversion memory.
Next, turn ON the special utility relay for D/A conversion.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 354 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

How to calculate digital data when outputting analog current
Digital data = (output current (µA) ÷ resolution (4 µA)) - offset value (1000)
Example
When outputting 18 mA
(18000 (µA) ÷ 4 (µA)) - 1000 = 3500
Write "3500" to data memory for D/A conversion.
Next, turn ON the special utility relay for D/A conversion.
Resolution
KV-300
KV-10/80
"Resolution" refers to the minimum analog output value by which digital data can be
changed. For example, 5 mV is the resolution of output range -10 to +10 V. This
indicates that the analog output changes by 5 mV when the value of the digital data
changes by 1.
Digital data content

The KV-DA4 voltage and current output characteristics are as follows.
Voltage output characteristics Current output characteristics

Voltage Current
(V) Range: ±10 V (mA) Range: 4 to 20 mA
+10 20
18
+8
16
+6
14
+4 12
+2 10
Digital 8
0 data 6
+1000
+2000
+3000
+4000
-2
4
-4 2
0 Digital
-6 data
+1000
+2000
+3000
+4000
-8
-10
For example, the digital data for outputting +5 V is 3000.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 355 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Writing Digital Data to Data Memory for D/A Conversion

This section describes how to write digital data after it has been converted from the
voltage or current to be output to data memory for D/A conversion on the CPU.
Data memory for D/A conversion on the CPU and special utility relays for D/A
conversion are used only when the KV-DA4 is connected to the CPU. This data
memory and special utility relays can be used as regular data memory and relays,
respectively, when the KV-DA4 is not connected to the CPU. When the KV-DA4 is
connected to the CPU, this data memory and special utility relays can be used only
for D/A conversion and not for other applications. If data memory for D/A conversion
KV-300
and special utility relays for D/A conversion are used for other applications, this may
KV-10/80
cause the KV-DA4 to malfunction .

The following table shows the correspondence between channels, data memory and
special utility relays for D/A conversion.
Data Memory for Special Utility Relay for

Channel
D/A Conversion D/A Conversion
CH0 DM0996 2800
CH1 DM0997 2801
CH2 DM0998 2802
CH3 DM0999 2803
To output digital data as analog data, the digital data to be analog-output is first
written to data memory for D/A conversion, and then the special utility relays for D/A
conversion is turned ON matching the channel from which digital data is to be
output.
Note 1: The CPU transfers the data on the rising edge of the special utility relays for
D/A conversion. So, analog output will not change while the special utility relays for
D/A conversion stays ON.
Note 2: KV-DA4 outputs voltage 0V and current 4 mA when the power is turned ON.
Note 3: In the case of voltage output, set 0 V (digital data value 2000) and set the
special utility relays for D/A conversion to ON for each channel in use before the
data in data memory for D/A conversion is changed.
-10 to 0 V (less than digital data value 2000) will be output only when 0V (2000) is
set. Otherwise, -10 to 0 V will not be output.
Note 4: Leave unused terminals open at all times. KV-DA4 has voltage and current
9 output modes, and outputs preset data from both terminals at all times.
Note 5: The voltage and current of the same channel No. cannot be used simulta-
neously.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 356 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables

Refer to the following tables when creating programs that involve A/D or D/A
conversion.
Voltage Conversion Table

Voltage range: +10 to -10 V
.00 .10 .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90
+10 4000 4020 4040 4060 4080
3980
KV-300
+9 3800 3820 3840 3860 3880 3900 3920 3940 3960
KV-10/80
+8 3600 3620 3640 3660 3680 3700 3720 3740 3760 3780
+7 3400 3420 3440 3460 3480 3500 3520 3540 3560 3580
+6 3200 3220 3240 3260 3280 3300 3320 3340 3360 3380
+5 3000 3020 3040 3060 3080 3100 3120 3140 3160 3180
+4 2800 2820 2840 2860 2880 2900 2920 2940 2960 2980
+3 2600 2620 2640 2660 2680 2700 2720 2740 2760 2780
+2 2400 2420 2440 2460 2480 2500 2520 2540 2560 2580
+1 2200 2220 2240 2260 2280 2300 2320 2340 2360 2380
+0 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 2120 2140 2160 2180
-0 2000 1980 1960 1940 1920 1900 1880 1860 1840 1820
-1 1800 1780 1760 1740 1720 1700 1680 1660 1640 1620
-2 1600 1580 1560 1540 1520 1500 1480 1460 1440 1420
-3 1400 1380 1360 1340 1320 1300 1280 1260 1240 1220
-4 1200 1180 1160 1140 1120 1100 1080 1060 1040 1020
-5 1000 980 960 940 920 900 880 860 840 820
-6 800 780 760 740 720 700 680 660 640 620
-7 600 580 560 540 520 500 480 460 440 420
-8 400 380 360 340 320 300 280 260 240 220
-9 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20
-10 0
Example
The digital data is 3820 (shaded section in the following table) when the voltage
is 9.1 V.
Voltage integer
Numerical value of voltage down to two digits past the decimal point
Digital data corresponding to voltage
.00 .10 .20
+10 4000 4020 4040 19
+9 3800 3820 3840
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 357 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Current Conversion Table

Current range: 4 to 20 mA
.00 .10 .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90
20 4000 4020 4040 4060 4080
19 3750 3775 3800 3825 3850 3875 3900 3925 3950 3975
18 3500 3525 3550 3575 3600 3625 3650 3675 3700 3725
17 3250 3275 3300 3325 3350 3375 3400 3425 3450 3475
16 3000 3025 3050 3075 3100 3125 3150 3175 3200 3225
15 2750 2775 2800 2825 2850 2875 2900 2925 2950 2975
14 2500 2525 2550 2575 2600 2625 2650 2675 2700 2725
13 2250 2275 2300 2325 2350 2375 2400 2425 2450 2475
KV-300
KV-10/80
12 2000 2025 2050 2075 2100 2125 2150 2175 2200 2225
11 1750 1775 1800 1825 1850 1875 1900 1925 1950 1975
10 1500 1525 1550 1575 1600 1625 1650 1675 1700 1725
9 1250 1275 1300 1325 1350 1375 1400 1425 1450 1475
8 1000 1025 1050 1075 1100 1125 1150 1175 1200 1225
7 750 775 800 825 850 875 900 925 950 975
6 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725
5 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475
4 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225
Example
The digital data is 3775 (shaded section in the following table) when the current
is 19.10 mA.
Current integer
Numerical value of current down to two digits past the decimal point
Digital data corresponding to current
.00 .10 .20
20 4000 4020 4040
19 3750 3775 3800
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 358 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.5 Programming Examples KV-10/80 Series Only
9.5 Programming Examples

This section describes sample programs for the KV-AD4/DA4. Refer to this section
when making programs for the KV-AD4/DA4.
Calculating Analog Data Values from Digital Data

This sample program reads A/D-converted digital data from memory, and calculates
the value of the actual analog-input voltage.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Conditions
• The analog input data from analog input V0 on the KV-AD4 is calculated.
(The digital data of data memory DM0992 is used for this operation.)
• When the calculated value is a positive value, an absolute value is written to
memory DM0100, and when the calculated value is a negative value, an absolute
value is written to memory DM0101. Data is written in mV units.
For example:
When the input is +10 V, "10000" (data x 1000) will be written to DM0100.
When the input is - 10 V, "10000" (data x 1000) will be written to DM0101.
Ladder diagram
1. The data of DM0992 is calculated, and the calculation result (data x 5 mV -
10000) is written to DM0000.
2007 DM0992 #00005 #10000 DM0000

LDA MUL SUB STA
3
DM0000 $8000 2009 DM0000 DM0100

LDA CMP LDA STA
2
2009 DM0000 #00001 DM0101
LDA COM ADD STA
2. The KV-AD4 judges that the DM0000 data is positive or negative by comparing
DM0000 with $8000. (When the MSB of DM0000 is OFF, the data is judged to
be positive, and when it is ON, the data is judged to be negative.)
3. If the data is a positive value, the calculation result is written to DM0100.
4. If the data is a negative value, the 2’s complement of the data is calculated to 19
change its sign to a positive sign, and the result is written to DM0101.
Note: "2007" (first scan OFF at power ON) must be set as the input condition. In
the case of analog input, an unsteady value will be input for the first scan when the
power is turned ON.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 359 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Example 1: Inputting Analog Voltage (-10 to +10 V)

• The analog input data from analog input V0 on the KV-AD4 is calculated.
(The digital data of data memory DM0992 is used for this operation)
• The calculated data is written to DM0000. (If the calculated value is a negative
value, 2’s complement is written.) Data is written in mV units.
For example:
When the input is +10V, "10000" (data x 1000) will be written to DM0000.
When the input is -10V, "-10000 (#55536)" (data x 1000) will be written to
DM0000.
KV-300
KV-10/80
2007 DM0992 #00005 #10000 DM0000

1 LDA MUL SUB STA
1. The data of DM0992 will be calculated, and the calculation result (data x 5 mV -
10000) will be written to DM0000.
Note: "2007" (first scan OFF at power ON) must be set as the input condition. In the
case of analog input, an unsteady value will be input for the first scan when the
power is turned ON.
Example 2: Inputting Analog Current (4 to 20 mA)

• The analog input data from analog input I0 on the KV-AD4 is calculated.
• The calculated data is written to DM0000. Data is written in µA units.
For example:
When the input is 4 mA, "4000" (data x 1000) will be written to DM0000.
When the input is 20 mA, "20000" (data x 1000) will be written to DM0000.
2007 DM0992 #00004 #04000 DM0000

1 LDA MUL ADD STA
1. The data of DM0992 will be calculated, and the calculation result (data x 4 µA +
9 4000) will be written to DM0000.
power is turned ON.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 360 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Writing Data to be Analog-output

This sample program calculates the value of the voltage to be output, and writes the
digital data to the data memory for D/A conversion. Data that has been written to the
data memory for D/A conversion is output as analog data.
Conditions
• Data that has been written to DM0000 is converted to digital data for analog
output.
• The digital data is sent to analog output V0 on the KV-DA4.
(Digital data is written to data memory DM0996.)
KV-300
• +7.5 V is output when input 0000 is ON.
KV-10/80
• -7.5 V is output when input 0001 is ON.
Ladder diagram
2008 #02000 DM0996 1000

LDA STA ( )
2
2007 #07500
DW
3
DM0000
0000 #00000 TM00 DM0000 #00005 #02000 DM0001 1200
LDA STA LDA DIV ADD STA DIFU
4
0001 #00000 TM00 DM0000 #00005 DM0100 #02000 DM0100 DM0001 1201
LDA STA LDA DIV STA LDA SUB STA DIFU
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996

LDA CMP LDA STA
5
1000 2800
( )
1200
6
1201
1. DM0996 is initialized when the power is turned ON.

(That is, #2000 is written to DM0996.)
2. #7500 (7.5 V) is written to DM0000.
3. (DM0000 ÷ 5 mV + 2000) is calculated when input 0000 is ON, and the calcula-
tion result is written to DM0001.
4. (2000 - (DM000 ÷ 5 mV)) is calculated when input 0001 is ON, and the calcula-
tion result is written to DM0001. 19
5. Before the digital data is written to data memory for D/A conversion, check that
the data is #4095 or less.
Note: An unsteady value will be output if a value outside the range 0 to 4095 is
written to data memory for D/A conversion.
6. The output data will be updated at the rising edge of special utility relay 2800.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 361 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Example 1: Outputting Analog Voltage (-10 to +10 V)

output.
• The digital data is sent to analog output V0 on the KV-DA4.
• +7.5 V is output when input 0000 is ON.
• -7.5 V is output when input 0000 is OFF.
2008 #02000 DM0996 1500

LDA STA ( )
2
2007 #07500
DW
KV-300
KV-10/80
3
DM0000
0000 #00000 TM00 DM0000 #00005 #02000 DM0001
LDA STA LDA DIV ADD STA
4
0000 #00000 TM00 DM0000 #00005 DM0001 #02000 DM0001 DM0001

LDA STA LDA DIV STA LDA SUB STA
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996

LDA CMP LDA STA
5
1000 1000
( )
1000 2800
6 ( )
1500

2. #7500 (7.5 V) is written to DM0000.
3. ((DM0000 ÷ 5 mV) + 2000) is calculated when input 0000 is ON, and the calcula-
4. (2000 - (DM0000 ÷ 5 mV)) is calculated when input 0000 is OFF, and the calcula-
6. The output data will be updated at the rising edge of special utility relay 2800. (As
9 internal relay 1000 switches ON/OFF at each scan, the output data will be
updated every two scans.)
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 362 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Example 2: Outputting Analog Current (4 to 20 mA)

output.
• The digital data is sent to analog output I0 on the KV-DA4.
• 4 mA is output when input 0000 is ON.
• 20 mA is output when input 0000 is OFF.
0000 #04000
DW
2 DM0000
0000 #20000
KV-300
KV-10/80
DW
3
DM0000
2002 DM0000 #00004 #01000 DM0001
LDA DIV SUB STA
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996

LDA CMP LDA STA
4
1000 1000
( )
5
1000 2800
( )
1. #4000 is written to DM0000 when input 0000 is ON.

2. #20000 is written to DM0000 when input 0000 is OFF.
3. ((DM0000 ÷ 4 µA) - 1000) is calculated, and the calculation result is written to
DM0001.
internal relay 1000 switches ON/OFF at each scan, the output data will be
Note: In the case of current output, DM0996 need not be initialized (#2000 written to
DM0996) when the power is turned ON.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 363 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Outputting Analog Trimmer Values

This sample program outputs the value of analog trimmer 0 on the CPU.
Conditions
• The value of trimmer 0 is converted to data for analog output.
• The data is sent to analog output V0 on the KV-DA4.
• When input 0000 is ON, 0 to +10 V is output. To increase the voltage, turn the
trimmer clockwise.
• When input 0000 is OFF, -10 to 0 V is output. To decrease the voltage, turn the
trimmer counterclockwise.
KV-300
KV-10/80
Ladder diagram
2008 #02000 DM0996 1500

LDA STA ( )
2 3
2007 0 #02000 #00249 DM0000 0000 DM0000 #02000 DM0001

TMIN MUL DIV STA LDA ADD STA
0000 #02000 DM0000 DM0001

LDA SUB STA
4
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996
LDA CMP STA DIV
5
1000 1000
( )
1500 2800
6 ( )
1000

2. ((trimmer 0 x 2000) ÷ 249) is calculated, and 0 to 2000 is written to DM0000.
3. (DM0000 + 2000) is calculated when input 0000 is ON, and the calculation result
is written to DM0001.
4. (2000 - DM0000) is calculated when input 0000 is OFF, and the calculation result
is written to DM0001.
9
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 364 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Outputting Analog Input Data

This sample program outputs data received from the analog inputs.
Note: Voltage can be converted to current, and vice versa by switching the I/O
wiring.
Conditions
• Analog data is input from analog input V0 on the KV-AD4.
• The data that was input from analog input V0 is output as it is to analog output
KV-300
KV-10/80
V0 on the KV-DA4. (The digital data is written to data memory DM0996.)
Ladder diagram
2008 #02000 DM0996 1500

LDA STA ( )
2
2007 DM0992 DM0001

LDA STA
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996

LDA CMP LDA STA
3
1000 1000
( )
1500 2800
4 ( )
1000

2. Digital data in data memory for A/D conversion is written to DM0001.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 365 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Outputting Analog Input from a Pressure Sensor to an Air Valve

This sample program outputs analog inputs (1 to 5 V) from a pressure sensor to an
air valve (4 to 20 mA).
Conditions
• Analog input data is input from analog input V0 on the KV-AD4.
• The data that was input from analog input V0 is converted, and output to analog
output I0 on the KV-DA4. (The digital data is written to data memory DM0996.)
• When the input data in DM0992 is a low value, the output current is decreased.
KV-300
When input data in DM0992 is a high value, the output current is increased.
KV-10/80
• Input data 1 V (#2200) in DM0992 is converted to output data 20 mA (#4000) in

DM0996.
• Input data 5 V (#3000) in DM0992 is converted to output data 4 mA (#0000) in
DM0996.
Ladder diagram
1. The data of DM0992 is calculated, and the calculation result ((DM0992 - 2200) x
5 mV) is written to DM0000.
2007 DM0992 #02200 #00005 DM0000

LDA SUB MUL STA
2
2002 #04000 DM0000 DM0001

LDA SUB STA
3
2002 DM0001 #04095 2011 DM0001 DM0996

LDA CMP LDA STA
1000 1000
( )
4
1000 2800
( )
2. (4095 - DM0000) is calculated, and the calculation result is written to DM0001.

9 written to data memory for D/A conversion.
Note 1: "2007" (first scan OFF at power ON) must be set as the input condition. In
the case of analog input, an unsteady value will be input for the first scan when the
power is turned ON.
Note 2: In the case of current output, DM0996 need not be initialized (#2000 written
to DM0996) when the power is turned ON.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 366 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Reference Example When the Input Voltage Exceeds the Expected Range
• When the input voltage is 5V or more (DM0992 #3000), #3000 is forcibly written to
the original data (DM0100).
• When the input voltage is 1V or less (DM0992 #2200), #2200 is forcibly written to
the original data (DM0100).
2007 DM0992 #03000 2011 #03000 DM0100 1100

LDA CMP LDA STA ( )
2
DM0992 #02200 2009 1100 DM0992 DM0100

LDA CMP LDA STA
2009 #02200 DM0100
KV-300
LDA STA
KV-10/80
3
2002 DM0100 #02200 #00005 DM0000
LDA SUB MUL STA
1. When the data of DM0992 is greater than #3000, #3000 is written to the original
data (DM0100).
2. When the original data of DM0992 is greater than #2200 but smaller than #3000,
the input data is written to the original data (DM0100) as it is.
3. When the data of DM0992 is smaller than #2200, #2200 is written to the original
data .
4. The data of DM0100 is calculated, and the calculation result ((DM0100 - 2200)) x
5 mV) is written to DM0000.
power is turned ON.
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Voltage Limits and Measuring the
Average Voltage
This sample program sets the minimum and maximum voltage limits to be analog-
input, and measures the average voltage at the 1000th analog input. Averaging
1000 inputs cancels any erroneous input due to electrical noise, etc.
Conditions
• Analog input data is input from analog input V0 on the KV-AD4.
(The digital data of data memory DM0992 is used for this operation.) 19
• The accumulated and average values are calculated.
• The maximum voltage limit is set to +5 V (#3000). When the maximum voltage
limit is exceeded, output 500 is turned ON for two seconds.
• The minimum voltage limit is set to -5 V (#1000). When the minimum voltage limit
is exceeded, output 501 is turned ON for two seconds.
• The minimum and maximum measurement values are calculated.
Note: In the following example, A/D-converted digital data is processed. For details
on how to convert the digital data to a voltage value, refer to "Inputting Analog
Voltage (-10 to +10 V) on page 918."
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 367 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Data Memory Assignment

DM0001 Maximum limit setting
DM0002 Minimum limit setting
DM0003 Average count
DM0004 Measurement value
DM0005 Maximum average value
DM0006 Minimum average value
DM0007 Average value
DM0008 Measurement count
DM0009 Upper bit of accumulated value
KV-300
Lower bit of accumulated value

KV-10/80
DM0010
Relay Assignment
500 Maximum limit error
501 Minimum limit error
502 Average value measurement completed
Ladder diagram
2008 #03000 #01000 #01000 #00000 #00000 #00000 #00000 #00000 #00000
DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW DW
DM0001 DM0002 DM0003 DM0004 DM0005 DM0006 DM0007 DM0008 DM0009
1
#00000
DW
DM0010
2007 DM0992 DM0004 DM0008
2 LDA STA INC
2002 DM0010 DM0004 2009 DM0010
LDA ADD STA
3
2009 DM0010 DM0009
STA INC
2002 DM0008 DM0003 2010 DM0009 TM00 DM0010 DM0003 DM0007 0502
LDA CMP LDA STA LDA DIV STA ( )
4
#00000 #00000 #00000
DW DW DW
DM0008 DM0009 DM0010
2002 DM0007 DM0001 2011 1000
LDA CMP ( )
DM0002 2009 1001

CMP ( )
9 1000 #00020
T000
5
0500 T000 0500
( )
1001 #00020
T001
0501 T001 0501

( )
1100 DM0007 #00000 2010 DM0007 DM0005 DM0006 1100

6 LDA CMP LDA STA STA (SET)
1100 DM0007 DM0005 2011 DM0007 DM0005

7 LDA CMP LDA STA
1100 DM0007 DM0006 2009 DM0007 DM0006

8 LDA CMP LDA STA
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 368 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

1. The initial settings are made.

2. The value of input data (DM0992) is written to measurement value (DM0004),
and measurement count (DM0008) is incremented by one.
3. Measurement values are accumulated (DM0004), and written to accumulated
values (DM0009 and DM0010). When the lower bit of the accumulated value
(DM0010) overflows (2009 turns ON), "1" is added to the upper bit of accumu-
lated value (DM0009).
4. When measurement count (DM0008), and accumulated values (DM0009 and
DM0010) are divided by average count (DM0003) to calculate average value
(DM0007). By this operation, relay 502 is turned ON to indicate completion of the
average value measurement, and measurement count (DM0008), and accumu-
KV-300
lated values (DM0009 and DM0010) are reset.
KV-10/80
5. When average value (DM0007) exceeds maximum limit setting (DM0001),
internal relay 1000 switches ON, and relay 500 switches on for two seconds to
indicate the maximum limit error.
When average value (DM0007) falls below minimum limit setting (DM0002),
internal relay 1001 switches ON, and relay 501 switches on for two seconds to
indicate the minimum limit error.
6. If average value (DM0007) becomes a value other than the initial setting (#0000),
maximum average value (DM0005) and minimum average value (DM0006) are
overwritten with the average value.
7. Average value (DM0007) is compared with maximum average value (DM0005),
and the maximum average value is overwritten if the average value is greater.
8. Average value (DM0007) is compared with minimum average value (DM0006),
and the minimum average value is overwritten if the average value is smaller.
power is turned ON.
19
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 369 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

9.6 Troubleshooting KV-10/80 Series Only
9.6 Troubleshooting
This appendix describes how to remedy problems that may occur on the KV-AD4/
DA4.
Analog I/O impossible
POWER
indicator lit?
NO
KV-300
YES
KV-10/80
Make sure that

Check connection on CPU POWER 24 V is supplied
analog I/O terminal block. indicator lit? NO to CPU.
YES
Analog I/O
possible? Check connection
YES between units.
NO
Only one KV-AD4 or
KV-DA4 each can be
connected to CPU.
Check number of units.
Check KV
program
Analog I/O
referring
YES possible?
to sample
program.
NO
Analog input Check analog

possible? output sequence
YES program.
NO
Check DIP switch setting.

Data memory
DM0996 to DM0999
used for other YES
purpose?
Analog input
possible? NO
YES
NO Data memory
initialized (#2000 written to
Check sequence program. DM0996 to DM0999) NO
YES
Data memory
9 DM0992 to DM0995
used for other
Data updated
at rising edge of special
YES utility relay (2800 to NO
purpose? 2803)?
NO YES
Contact your nearest

END KEYENCE office.
* Analog values may fluctuate slightly after the power is turned ON.
KVHKA Chap 09.p65 370 08.3.11, 11:20 AM

Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the error code list, countermeasures against problems, and
error indications for each unit. Read this chapter when problems occur during
operation.
10.1 Error List ................................................................................... 1-372

10.1.1 List of Error Codes in Basic Units .......................................................... 1-372
10.1.2 Error indication in Expansion Units ........................................................ 1-374
10.1.3 Program Errors ....................................................................................... 1-375
10.1.4 Memory Card Errors and Other Errors ................................................... 1-376
10.2 Replacing Relays ..................................................................... 1-377
10.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 1-378
10.3.1 Troubleshooting List ............................................................................... 1-378
10.4 Error Messages ........................................................................ 1-380
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 371 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.1 Error List
10.1 Error List

This section describes error messages, error codes, the causes of errors, and
countermeasures against errors.
10.1.1 List of Error Codes in Basic Units

When an error occurs, error information is displayed as an error number in the
access window on a Visual KV Series basic unit. Error information is also displayed
on the screen when a PLC error check command is executed while a peripheral unit
is connected, such as the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV"
programming support software.
Code Description Cause Countermeasures

00 No error – –
Number of nested subroutines
10 CALL nest error
is greater than 4.
Number of nested FOR -
These errors occur when the
11 FOR nest error NEXT instructions is greater
program is executed. Review
than 8.
the program, paying attention
Five or more interrupts have to the use of subroutines, INT
12 INT nest error
occurred simultaneously.
instructions, etc.
Number of nested MPS -
13 MPS nest error MPP instructions is greater
than 8.
Contents of RAM are cleared.
Data stored in data memories, Turn on power to the basic
20 Memory error current values of counters, unit again, and register the
etc. are also cleared in the data again.
basic unit.
Review the program. Check
whether FOR - NEXT
instructions are not repeated
30 Cycle time error Scan time exceeds 300 ms.
too many times. Check
whether interrupt program is
not executed at high-speed.
Basic unit clear First register the program,
40 Program is not registered.
error then operate the basic unit.
Basic unit
50 communication
error Turn off the power to the
Zero subtraction Visual KV Series. If the error
51 Something is wrong with
error status does not disappear, the
some hardware on the basic
52 Address error hardware may be damaged.
unit.
Illegal instruction Contact our nearest sales
10 53
error office.
Watchdog timer
54
error
EEPROM/device Data was trying to be read Change to PROGRAM mode,
210 access error in from/written to EEPROM in then read from/write to
RUN mode RUN mode. EEPROM.
EEPROM device The service life of EEPROM Contact our nearest sales
211
write failure has expired. office.
Write data to EEPROM. If
• Data is not stored in
EEPROM still does not
EEPROM device EEPROM.
212 operate normally, its service
read failure • Data stored in EEPROM is
life has expired. Contact our
damaged.
nearest sales office.
1-372 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 372 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.1 Error List

Ladder object size exceeds
213 Object size error Decrease the ladder size.
the allowable size.
Illegal instruction
214 The ladder is wrong. Correct the ladder.
code error
Ladder code size exceeds the
215 Code size error Decrease the ladder size.
allowable size.
EEPROM system System stored in EEPROM Contact our nearest sales
220
destruct error has been destroyed. office.
FEEPROM =>
SRAM error or Service life of EEPROM has Contact our nearest sales
221
EEPROM <= expired. office.
SRAM error
EEPROM threshold System stored in EEPROM Contact our nearest sales
222
setting error has been destroyed. office.
• Data stored in RAM may be
destroyed. If an abnormality
is detected, clear the RAM
using the handheld
programmer and
programming support
• The voltage of the backup
software.
Backup battery battery has dropped.
223 • If data is backed up in
voltage drop error • The service life of the
EEPROM, load it to RAM.
backup battery has expired.
• The battery is charged by
turning the power ON for
approximately 15 minutes.
• If this error occurs often,
contact our nearest sales
office.
Contact our nearest sales
225 RAM check error The hardware is damaged.
office.
Contact our nearest sales
226 NIM only error The hardware is damaged.
office.
If this error occurs often,
An error has occurred to
227 Reset only error contact our nearest sales
protect the system.
office.
LCD receive If this error occurs often,
Data from the LCD may not
228 timeout error at contact our nearest sales
be received due to noise.
startup office.
An error has occurred to Turn off the power, then turn it
229 Stack over error
protect the system. on again.
Clear the errors, turn the
power off, then turn it on
The number of errors that
again.
250 Error buffer error have occurred in the system
If this error occurs often,
exceeds 16.
contact our nearest sales
office. 1
10
Turn the power off, then turn it
System error not on again.
An error has occurred to
251 present in f_Error If this error occurs often,
protect the system.
table contact our nearest sales
office.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 1-373
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 373 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.1 Error List

Turn off the power, then turn it
A3 command on again.
Data was trying to be written
252 unregistered If this error occurs often,
to an unregistered T/C/CTC.
T/C/CTC write error contact our nearest sales
office.
An error has occurred during on again.
253 Matrix null error communication with the If this error occurs often,
Access Window. contact our nearest sales
office.
Error has occurred in on again.
D1 Main flag
254 communication with Access If this error occurs often,
processing error
Window. contact our nearest sales
office.
10.1.2 Error indication in Expansion Units

Errors in an expansion unit are indicated by the READY/ERROR LED provided on
the expansion unit.
READY/ERROR
Cause Countermeasures
LED status
Power is not
Extinguished Confirm connection.
supplied.
If left and right connectors are reversed, this
error will occur. Confirm the connection.
Check whether the number of connected units
does not exceed the specified value.
A communication Check whether the OP-35361 expansion cable
Flashing
error has occurred. (300 mm) is being correctly used.
When a part of the communication circuitry in
the basic unit has failed by connecting/
disconnecting hot lines, this error will occur.
Contact our nearest sales office.
10
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 374 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.1 Error List
10.1.3 Program Errors

Errors in a program can be displayed on the LCD on the KV-P3E(01) handheld
programmer.
• Error messages "Erased overline" and "Capacity over" may be displayed when
instructions are written. By pressing the [CLEAR] key, editing can be continued.
• Other messages may be displayed when the operation mode is changed from
PROGRAM to RUN, or when a syntax check (FUN74) is executed. When the
operation mode is returned to PROGRAM (or when the [CLEAR] key is pressed
during the syntax check), the line where the error occurred will be displayed.
Correct the line.
• If there are two or more errors in the program, the line with the lower line No.
among lines with errors is displayed when the operation mode is returned to
PROGRAM. Correct the line, and change the operation mode to RUN. Then, the
next line containing an error will be displayed. Correct this line in the same way.
Error message Cause Countermeasures

When the operation mode is changed to
PROGRAM, the line where the error
There is a syntax error in
Circuit error occurred is displayed. Confirm usage of the
the program.
displayed instruction while referring to "2.4
Instruction Details", and correct it.
Operands are used many times or there is
no instruction corresponding to operand.
Operand error Invalid operand is used.
Refer to "2.4 Instruction Details" (p. 3-56),
and correct it.
END instruction does not
Write an END instruction at the end of the
Enter END exist at the end of the
routine program.
routine program.
ENDH instruction does not
Write an ENDH instruction at the end of the
Enter ENDH exist at the end of the
entire program
entire program.
MC-MCR instruction pair Use MC and MCR instructions as a pair. Do
MC-MCR error
is incorrectly used. not nest them.
• STP-STE instruction pair • Use STP and STE instructions as a pair.
is incorrectly used. Do not nest them.
STP-STE error
• Number of nested STP- • Reduce the number of nested pairs to 8 or
STE pairs is 9 or more. less.
FOR-NEXT Number of nested FOR- Reduce the number of nested FOR-NEXT
error NEXT pairs is 9 or more. commands to 8 or less.
Subroutine called by a Between END and ENDH, write the SBN-
SBN does not
CALL instruction is not RET subroutine instructions called by the
exist
defined. CALL instruction.
SBN: In one subroutine, another
Write another subroutine to be called before
Reference subroutine is called that is
the current subroutine.
error
SBN: Nesting
defined later.
Number of nested SBN-
1
10
Reduce number of nesting to 4 or less.
error RET pairs is 5 or more.
Number of stacks is 9 or Reduce the number of MPS stacks to 8 or
Stack error
more. less.
Because a new line was
Erased inserted, a final line
Reduce the program size.
overline cannot be included in the
program area.
There is not enough free
Capacity over space in the program area Reduce the program size.
to write any new lines.
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 375 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.1 Error List
10.1.4 Memory Card Errors and Other Errors

Memory card errors
Error messages for memory cards are displayed on the LCD on the KV-P3E(01)
handheld programmer.
Error messages can be deleted by pressing the [CLEAR] key in PROGRAM mode.
After deleting error messages, take appropriate countermeasures in accordance
with the table below.

New card. Inserted card has not Initialize card.
➮ For more about initialization, refer to "Memory
Initialize OK? been initialized yet. card all clear mode P-E" (p.1-232).
Name already Program name specified Each name can be used only once. Enter
exists. for addition is already another name.
Enter another. stored on the card.
A program created using a Check whether timer/counter Nos. do not
Visual KV Series basic exceed the allowable range of the KV-
T/C value unit with larger memory P3E(01). If they exceed the allowable range,
changed. capacity is read using the change them. In this case, set values are
KV-P3E(01) with a smaller reset to zero. Enter set values again.
memory capacity.
Card loading Data cannot be written Check whether the card is inserted
error from the card. correctly. Check the card’s battery.
Card operation is
Bad card error
abnormal.
Other error messages

Error messages shown in the table below can be deleted by pressing the CLEAR
key in PROGRAM mode on the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Errors in an expansion unit are indicated by the READY/ERROR indicator lamp
provided on the expansion unit.
Because program is read-
Monitor
protected, conduction –
protected
monitor is disabled.
Check the cable connecting the handheld
SND/RTN fail Data transfer has failed. programmer to the Visual KV Series basic
unit.
An attempt was made to Cancel the write attempt by pressing the
Write-
write a program to a write- CLEAR key. Execute the write by pressing
protected.
protected Visual KV Series the OK key.
Execute OK?
basic unit.
10
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 376 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.2 Replaycing Relay
10.2 Replacing Relays

The following KV-300 CPU models have replaceable relays: KV-R8R, KV-R16R (I/O
terminal modules)
Replaceable relay OP-35400
Screw driver
Relay cover Puller
6 7
4 5
3
2
1
0
For KV-10/80 users

The following KV-10/80 CPU models have replaceable relays: Base unit: KV-80R.
Expansion unit: KV-16EYR
Replacement relay OP-35400
Screw Puller Panel Connector
Relay
Replacement procedure
1. Open the relay cover on the top of the module with a screwdriver.
2. Determine the location of the defective relay from the relay numbers inside the
unit.
3. Remove the failed relay with the extractor.
Place the legs of the extractor into the gaps between the relay and the relay
socket (as shown) until a click is heard. Pull out the relay.
4. Check that the new relay is correctly oriented. Then, push the new relay into the
socket.
Note: If the relay is inserted the wrong way around, pushing down on the relay can 1
10
break its pins.
5. After replacing the relay, close the relay cover.

Output relay number
Relay
5 6 7
2 4
0 1
Socket
Note: Relays are interchangeable with the KV-80R and KV-16EYR.
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 377 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.3 Troubleshooting
This section describes countermeasures against problems. Read this section when
a problem has occurred during operation.
10.3.1 Troubleshooting List

Basic unit
Problem type Cause Countermeasures

Voltage is extremely low. Check voltage (logic) of input terminals.
Inputs do not turn
Input voltage switch
ON. Check input voltage switch.
setting is wrong.
Outputs do not
Wiring is wrong. Check the wiring for outputs.
turn ON.
Check input voltage switch.
setting is wrong.
High-speed counter input
High-speed Check setting in ladder.
type is different.
counters do not
count or count External forced reset input
Set external forced reset input to OFF.
abnormally. is given.
High-speed counter B
phase inputs (000 and
Check the ladder setting.
001) are set to interrupt
inputs (in KV-10xx only).
Wiring is wrong. Check the wiring for outputs.
Input voltage level and
Pulse output is
response frequency of the
not given. Check the ladder settings.
motor driver are incorrectly
set.
Check input voltage switch.
setting is wrong.
Interrupt inputs
are not accepted. High-speed counter B
phase inputs (000 and
Check the ladder setting.
001) are set to interrupt
inputs (in KV-10xx only).
Ladder has not been
Write ladder.
written.
Program does not Program stopped by
Reset backup error.
run. backup error.
Another error has Check error code and contents, and take
occurred. appropriate countermeasures.
10 Communication
with "KV RS-232C is not correctly
Check wiring and cable type, and
IncrediWare wired, or the cable type
perform the wiring correctly.
(DOS)" or used is not appropriate.
"LADDER
BUILDER for KV" Serial ports in personal
programming computer are incorrectly Set them correctly.
support software set.
is disabled.
Communication
RS-232C is not correctly
with KV-D20 Check wiring and cable type, and
wired, or the cable type
operator panel is perform the wiring correctly.
used is not appropriate.
disabled.
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 378 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Expansion unit
Cable is not correctly
connected to the
Connect cable correctly.
READY/ERROR expansion cable
indicator lamp on connector.
expansion unit is Cable is connected from
not lit. the basic unit to the Connect cable to the connector on left
connector on right side of side of expansion module.
expansion unit.
READY/ERROR Cable is not correctly
indicator lamp on connected to the
Connect cable correctly.
expansion unit is expansion cable
flashing. connector.
Access Window and output indicator lamps

Key operation is
Key lock is set. Reset key lock.
not accepted.
Nothing is
Check whether the power is turned on.
displayed when
Power is not turned on. If power is turned on, contact our
power is turned
nearest sales office.
on.
• Disconnect any communication
equipment connected to the
When power is Communication interrupt is communication port, then turn the
turned on, only given from the outside power on again.
"_______" is while the basic unit is • If nothing is connected to the
displayed. being reset. communication port, something is
wrong with the basic unit. Contact
our nearest sales office.
Special utility relay 2515 is Change the program so that special
User error cannot
always set to ON. utility relay 2515 is set to ON by the
be cleared.
DIFU instruction.
Contents Special utility relay 2514
displayed in the remains ON, or updating
Review the program.
Access Window is delayed because the
are not updated. scan time is too long.
Flashing lamps at high speeds or
Because the lamps are lit
I/O indicator lighting/extinguishing the lamps in each
by serial communication,
lamps are not lit scan synchronizing with the
lighting depends on the
as expected. communication cycle may be different
communication cycle.
from what is expected.
1
10
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 379 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

10.4 Error Messages
10.4 Error Messages

Set the mode switch on the Handheld Programmer to PROGRAM mode, and press
CLEAR to clear the error message shown on the display. After clearing the error
message, take the following procedures to remove the cause of the error.
Error message Cause Remedy

CPU ERROR Hardware error on KV-300 CPU Turn power to KV-300 CPU OFF
and then ON again.If error
message remains, unit may be
defective. Contact nearest
KEYENCE office.
NO PROGRAM Attempt was made to operate Write a program into the KV-300
KV-300 CPU with no program CPU.
stored.
SCAN TIME Scan time exceeds 300 ms. Check the program for the
ERROR following:
• Check that there are no
excessive repetitions of FOR-
NEXT.
• Check that interrupt is not
executed at high speed.
MEMORY Content of RAM was erased. All Check DM values and current
ERASED data in data memory and current counter values.
values of counters in KV-300
CPU were cleared.
CALL NEST Subroutines are nested to four These errors occur when
ERROR levels or more. program is executed.
➮ Refer to page 3-122. Check program while paying
particular attention to subrou-
tines and INT instruction.
FOR NEST FOR-NEXT instruction set is
ERROR nested to eight levels or more.
INT NEST ERROR Interrupts of five levels or more

occurred.
MPS NEST MPS/MPP instruction set is

ERROR nested to eight levels or more.
10
KVHKA Chap 10.p65 380 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Appendices
The appendix includes a list of ladder program applications and the index.
Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions [Visual KV Series] . 1-382

A.1 System Specifications [Visual KV Series] ....................................... 1-382
A.2 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ...................................... 1-384
A.3 Expansion Unit Specifications ......................................................... 1-385
A.4 Dimensions ...................................................................................... 1-389
Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions [KV-300 Series] ..... 1-392
B.1 System Specifications [KV-300 Series] ........................................... 1-392
B.2 Module Specifications ..................................................................... 1-398
B.3 Dimensions ...................................................................................... 1-404
Appendix C. Ladder Program List .................................................. 1-406
Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6] ............... 1-408
KVHKA Appendix.p65 381 08.3.11, 11:05 AM

Appendix A Specifications and Dimensions Visual KV Series
Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions

[Visual KV Series]
A.1 System Specifications [Visual KV Series]
Hardware
Item Specifications
AC power type DC power type
Power supply KV-10AR/AT(P) KV-16AR/AT(P) KV-10DR/DT(P) KV-16DR/DT(P)
KV-24AR/AT(P) KV-40AR/AT(P) KV-24DR/DT(P) KV-40DR/DT(P)
Input supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (±10%) 24 VDC (+10%, -20%)
Allowable
Less than 40 ms Less than 2 ms
instantaneous time
Basic units KV-10AR/DR: 100 mA or less KV-24AT/DT: 100 mA or less
KV-16AR/DR: 120 mA or less KV-40AT/DT: 120 mA or less
Internal current KV-10AT/DT: 80 mA or less KV-24ATP/DTP: 105 mA or less
consumption KV-16AT/DT: 90 mA or less KV-40ATP/DTP: 130 mA or less
(converted into KV-E4X: 15 mA or less KV-E8X: 25 mA or less KV-E16X: 35 mA or less
24 VDC value) Expansion KV-E4T: 20 mA or less KV-E8T(P): 40 mA or less KV-E16T: 60 mA or less
units KV-E4R: 40 mA or less KV-E8R: 70 mA or less KV-E16R: 110 mA or less
KV-E4XT(P): 30 mA or less KV-E4XR: 45 mA or less KV-E16TP: 70 mA or less
KV-D20 Operator interface panel: 60 mA or less
Others
KV-P3E(01) Handheld programmer: 65 mA or less
KV-10DR: 745 mA*1 KV-24DR: 785 mA*1 KV-10AR/AT(P): 0.4 A
KV-10DT: 725 mA*1 KV-24DT: 745 mA*1 KV-16AR/AT(P): 0.5 A
*1 *1
KV-10DTP: 730 mA KV-24DTP: 750 mA KV-24AR/AT(P): 0.6 A
Maximum load current consumption *1 *2
KV-16DR: 765 mA KV-40DR: 790 mA KV-40AR/AT(P): 0.7 A
*1 *2
KV-16DT: 735 mA KV-40DT: 730 mA
*1 *2
KV-16DTP: 745 mA KV-40DTP: 740 mA
Ambient temperature (No freezing) 0 to +50°C (32 to 122° F), 0 to +45°C (32 to 113° F)[KV-P3E(01)]
Ambient storage temperature -20 to +70°C (-4 to 158° F), No freezing
Withstand voltage (Between power terminal and I/O terminals as well as between entire
external terminals and case)
1,500 Vp-p or more, pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns (by noise simulator)
Noise immunity
In conformance with EN standard (EN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-6)
Shock 150 m/s2 (150 G), working time: 11 ms, twice in each of X, Y and Z axis directions
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 1.5 mm or less, 2 hours in each of X, Y and
Vibration
Z axis directions (1 G or less when attached to DIN rail)
50 MΩ or more
Insulation resistance (Between power terminal and I/O terminals as well as between
Operating atmosphere No excessive dust or corrosive gases allowed.
Appendicies
KV-10AR: Approx. 250 g KV-10DR: Approx. 150 g KV-16AR: Approx. 300 g

KV-16DR: Approx. 190 g KV-24AR: Approx. 350 g KV-24DR: Approx. 240 g
KV-40AR: Approx. 450 g KV-40DR: Approx. 330 g KV-10AT(P): Approx. 240 g
Basic units
KV-10DT(P): Approx. 140 g KV-16AT(P): Approx. 280 g KV-16DT(P): Approx. 180 g
KV-24AT(P): Approx. 330 g KV-24DT(P): Approx. 210 g KV-40AT(P): Approx. 410 g
Weight KV-40DT(P): Approx. 280 g
KV-E4X: Approx. 80 g KV-E8X: Approx. 100 g KV-E16X: Approx. 130 g
Expansion KV-E4T: Approx. 80 g KV-E8T(P): Approx. 100 g KV-E16T(P): Approx. 130 g
units KV-E4R: Approx. 100 g KV-E8R: Approx. 130 g KV-E16R: Approx. 130 g
KV-E4XT(P): Approx. 100 g KV-E4XR: Approx. 120 g
Others KV-P3E(01): Approx. 230 g KV-D20: Approx. 160 g
1-382 Appendices

Software and Programming

Item Specifications
Arithmetic operation control method Stored program method
I/O control method Refresh method
Program language Ladder chart method + Expanded ladder method
Basic instruction: 28 types Application instruction: 22 types
Instruction types
Arithmetic instruction: 26 types Interrupt instruction: 4 types
Minimum scan time 140 µs
Basic instruction: 0.7 µs
Instruction processing speed
Application instruction: 6.4 µs
Program capacity
Maximum number of connected expansion units 8 (7 for KV-40xx)
Number of I/O points 10 to 152
(including 10 to 40 I/O points of basic unit) (when maximum number of expansion units are connected)
Internal utility relay 2,304: 1000 to 1915 and 3000 to 17915
Special utility relay 160: 2000 to 2915
Data memory (16 bits) 2,000 words: DM 0000 to DM1999
Temporary data memory (16 bits) 32 words: TM00 to TM31
250 in all:
0.1-sec timer: TMR (0 to 6553.5 secs)
0.01-sec timer: TMH (0 to 655.35 secs)
Timer/counter
0.001-sec timer: TMS (0 to 65.535 secs)
UP counter: C
Up/down counter: UDC
Digital trimmer 2 (set in Access Window)
High-speed counter 2 of 30 kHz, 2-phase high-speed counter (0 to 65535 count)1.
4 (2 for each high-speed counter)
High-speed counter comparator
Direct output is enabled.
Positioning control function Independent 1 axis, 50 kHz maximum
Memory switches 16
Data Backup Program memory EEPROM which can be overwritten 100,000 times or more
function against Data memory, counter, internal Can be backed up with electrical double-layer capacitor
instantaneous utility relay, and contact for 20 days or more at 25° C: KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P)
power comment (Held devices are set for 2 months or more at 25° C (77° F): Any other model
interruption by the MEMSW instruction.) Can be backed up with EEPROM in all models.
Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) 2.
Memory card M-2/M-3
Peripherals Card reader/writer Z-1 3.
Programming support software LADDER BUILDER for KV
(Windows version) 4. (KV-H6WE2)
KV IncrediWare (DOS) (KV-H4E)
Number of contact comments stroable 1,000 max.
1. When high-speed counters are set using the MEMSW instruction, 24-bit data can be
Appendicies
counted.
2. Comments cannot be handled in the handheld programmer KV-P3E(01).
3. The card reader/writer Z-1 can be used with the programming support software "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)".
4. When the programming support software "LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is used,
the Change All function on the monitor is not available. Using the Change All function may
damage the basic unit. Never use the Change All function.
Appendices 1-383

AC power supply unit
Item Specifications
Method Switching method
Ripple noise 240 mVp-p or less
AC power current KV-10Ax: 0.4 A KV-16Ax: 0.5 A
consumption KV-24Ax: 0.6 A KV-40Ax: 0.7 A
AC power input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (± 10%)
AC power factor 60%
1.
Output voltage 24 VDC± 10%
KV-10Ax: 0.4 A KV-16Ax: 0.6 A
Output capacity
KV-24Ax: 0.6 A KV-40Ax: 0.7 A
KV-10Ax: 14 W KV-16Ax: 21 W
Power consumption
KV-24Ax: 21W KV-40Ax: 24 W
Rated voltage: 240 VAC, rated current: 3.15 A,
Used fuse
Characteristics: Fast-melting type
1. Includes the internal current consumption and current consumption of expansion units.
A.2 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units

Input specifications
5 V mode
Item 24 V mode (Inputs 000 to 007 can be
changed to 5 V input.)
Input voltage 24 VDC, 5.3 mA 5 VDC, 1.0 mA
Minimum ON voltage 19V 4.5V
Minimum OFF current
2mA 2.5V
(voltage)
Common method COM is shared inside.
10 ms typical
10 µs when HSP instruction is used
Input time constant Variable in 7 steps from 10 µs to
10 ms while special utility relay 2813 is ON
(Set by DM1940)
Interrupt input response 10 µs (representative)
High-speed counter
30 kHz (24V± 10%) (duty: 50%)
input response
* For 5V±10%, refer to the 5 V mode response frequency characteristic chart (representa-
tive example).
5 V mode response frequency characteristic chart

(representative example)
Appendicies
Response 40
frequency 35
30
(kHz)
25
20
15
10
5
0
4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
Input voltage (V)
1-384 Appendices

Output specifications (relay output):

KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AR/DR, KV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR
Item Specifications
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load 2 A (inductive load)
4 A (resistive load)
Peak load current 5A
Rising operating time
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
Falling operating time
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Common method Each common terminal is independent.
Electrical service life: 100,000 times or more (20 times/min)
Relay service life
Mechanical service life: 20,000,000 times or more
Output specifications (transistor output):

KV-10AT(P)/DT(P), KV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and
KV-40AT(P)/DT(P)
Item Specifications
30 VDC
Rated load 0.1 A (500 to 502)
0.3 A (others)
0.2 A (500 to 502)
Peak load current
1 A (others)
Leak current in OFF
100 µA or less
status
0.8 V or less
status
Rising operation time 10 µs or less (500 to 502) (at 5 to 100 mA)
(OFF ➞ ON) 20 µs or less (others) (at 10 to 300 mA)
Falling operation time 10 µs or less (500 to 502) (at 5 to 100 mA)
(ON ➞ OFF) 100 µs or less (others) (at 10 to 300 mA)
Common method 1 common
Output frequency 50 kHz (500 to 502)
Built-in serial resistance 1.6 KΩ 1/2W (R500 to R502)
A.3 Expansion Unit Specifications

KV-E4X/E8X/E16X Input unit
Model KV-E4X KV-E8X KV-E16X
Appendicies
Unit type 4-I/O input 8-I/O input 16-I/O input

Number of inputs 4 8 16
External connection
Terminal block
method
Input time constant
10 ms: 10 ms ± 20%
10 µs: 10 µs ± 20%
2609 to 2612)
Appendices 1-385

KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) Output unit

■ KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type)
Model KV-E4R KV-E8R KV-E16R
4-I/O relay 8-I/O relay 16-I/O relay
Unit type
Output type Relay
External connection
Terminal block
method
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load voltage
2 A (inductive load) 4 A (resistive load)
2A/point (inductive load)
4 A/point (resistive load) 4A/common
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Relay service life
■ KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP)]
Model KV-E4T KV-E8T(P) KV-E16T(P)

4-I/O transistor 8-I/O transistor 16-I/O transistor
Unit type
External connection
Terminal block
method
Leak current in OFF
100 µA or less
status
0.8 V or less
status
Common method Shared inside
50 µs or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
250 µs or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Appendicies
1-386 Appendices

KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) I/O unit

Item Specifications
External connection
Terminal block
method
Input time constant
10 ms: 10 ms ± 20%
10 µs: 10 µs ± 20%
2609 to 2612)
■ Output specifications
Item Specifications
Output type Relay
External connection
Terminal block
method
250 VAC/30 VDC
Rated load voltage
2 A (inductive load) 4 A(resistive load)
2A/point (inductive load) 4A/point (resistive load)
4A/common
10 ms or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
10 ms or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Relay service life

Item Specifications
External connection
Terminal block
method
Appendicies
Leak current in OFF

100 µA or less
status
0.8 V or less
status
50 µs or less
(OFF ➞ ON)
250 µs or less
(ON ➞ OFF)
Appendices 1-387

KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel)

■ General specifications
Item Specifications
Supply voltage Supplied from the communication port of the KV (5 VDC)
Current consumption 5 VDC, 180 mA max. (60 mA max. when converted for 24 V)
Ambient temperature 0 to +50°C (32 to122°F), No freezing
Ambient storage
-20 to +70°C (-4 to 158°F), No freezing
temperature
Withstand voltage (Between power terminal and I/O terminal as well as between
entire external terminals and case)
1,500 Vp-p or more, pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns
Noise immunity (by noise simulator)
Conforms to EN standard (EN61000-4-2/-3/-4/-6)
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 1.5 mm, 2 hours in each of X,
Vibration
Y and Z axis directions
50 MΩ or more
Insulation resistance (Between power terminal and I/O terminal as well as between
Operating atmosphere No excessive dust or corrosive gases.
Main unit: Approx. 160 g
Weight Communication cable: Approx. 60 g
Mounting fixture: 30 g (2 pieces)
Enclosure rating Built-in panel, IP-65F only for the front operation panel
■ Functional specifications
Item Specifications
Number of connectable
1 per basic unit
units
Display screen Blue-negative type backlighted LCD, 20 digits x 4 lines
Character size 2.95 x 4.75 mm (5 x 7 dots)
4 switches assigned to special utility relays
Customized switches
F1: 2500 F2: 2501 F3: 2502 F4: 2503
Setting operation switch
Customized indicator Four red LEDs assigned to special utility relays
lamps Lamp 1: 2504 Lamp 2: 2505 Lamp 3: 2506 Lamp 4: 2507
Appendicies
1-388 Appendices

A.4 Dimensions
KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P)(10-I/O basic unit)

24.5
9.9
35.4 90 35.4 90
17
4.1
3.8 4 3.8 4
55 22 70 22 43
17.5
20.5

24.5
13.3
35.4 90 35.4 90
17
4.1
3.8 4 3.8 4
65 22 70 22 43
Bottom view of AC type
17.5
20.5

31
5.2
Appendicies
35.4 90 35.4 90
20.5
3.8 4 3.8 4
80 22 70 22 43
17.5
20.5
Appendices 1-389


31
20.2
35.4 90 35.4 90
20.5
3.8 4 3.8 4
110 22 70 22 43
17.5
20.5
Metal fixture for screw tightening

KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) KV-16AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P)
(10-I/O basic unit) (16-I/O basic unit)
OP-35345 OP-35346
4-ø5.0 6-ø5.0
(Mounting hole) (Mounting hole)
Main unit Main unit

mounting hole mounting hole
(2 positions) (2 positions)
99 111 99 111
40 31
54 50
64 t=2
KV-24AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) KV-40AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P)
(24-I/O basic unit) (40-I/O basic unit)
OP-35347 OP-35348
6-ø0.5
(Mounting hole)
4-ø5.0
Appendicies
(Mounting hole)
Main unit
mounting hole
(2 positions) Main unit
99 111 mounting hole
(2 positions)
99 111
48
78
66
109
79 t=2
1-390 Appendices

KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion input unit)

(KV-E4X) (KV-E8X) (KV-E16X)
35.4 90
38 45 65 4 4
43.5
KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion output unit)
(KV-E4 x) (KV-E8x) (KV-E16x)
35.4 90
38 45 65 4 4
KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O unit) 43.5

Front view Side view
35.4 90
45 4 4
43.5
Expansion unit spacer

OP-35342 OP-35343 OP-35344 Side view
Spacer for 4-point Spacer for 8-point Spacer for 16-point
expansion unit expansion unit expansion unit
ø4.0 ø4.0 ø4.0
42.8 42.8 42.8

Appendicies
28 35 55
38 45 65
25.3 4
66
Metal fixture for screw tightening
OP-35349 4-ø5.0
99 111
25
38
Appendices 1-391

Appendix B Specifications and Dimensions KV-300 Series
Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions

[KV-300 Series]
B.1 System Specifications [KV-300 Series]
Hardware
Item/Model Specifications
Power supply 24 VDC (±10%)
Maximum current CPU KV-300: 160 mA
consumption Input module KV-C16X: 15 mA KV-C32X: 15 mA
(Excluding
Output module KV-C32T: 55 mA KV-B16R: 150 mA
current for
KV-B16S: 85 mA
Handheld Pro-
grammer and I/O distribution KV-R1A: 75 mA KV-R8X: 25 mA
input circuit) module KV-R8R: 85 mA KV-R8T: 35 mA
KV-R16X: 30 mA KV-R16R: 150 mA
KV-R16T: 50 mA ➮ See [Caution]
Handheld KV-P3E(01): 65 mA (Models sold after Oct. 21,
programmer 1993, are compatible with the KV-300.)
Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
(No freezing) 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F) (KV-P3E(01))
Withstand voltage 1500 VAC applied between power terminal and
I/O terminals, and between terminals and
housing (1 min.), but not between power supply
unit and KV-AN6
Noise immunity Noise generated by noise simulator: 1500 V p-p
min. 1 µs and 50 ns
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz. Double amplitude of 1.5 mm max.
applied in X, Y, and Z directions (2 hrs)
1G when mounted to DIN rail
Minimum insulation resistance 50 MΩ between power terminal and I/O
terminals, and between external terminals and
housing (measured with 500 VDC
megohmmeter)
Environmental restrictions No excesive dust or corrosive gas
Weight CPU KV-300: 110 g
(Approx.) Input module KV-C16X: 80 g KV-C32X: 95 g
Output module KV-C32T: 70 g KV-B16R: 200 g
KV-B16S: 200 g
I/O distribution module KV-R1A: 100 g
KV-R8X: 130 g KV-R8R: 160 g
KV-R8T: 130 g
KV-R16X: 180 g KV-R16R: 240 g
Appendicies
KV-R16T: 180 g
AC Power supply KV-U4: 340 g KV-U5: 90 g
module/ DC power
distribution module
Note: Specifications for the KV-AN6 and KV-L2 appear in their respective sections in
this manual.
CAUTION
1-392 Appendices

Software and Programming

Item Specifications
Arithmetic and control system Stored program
I/O control system Refresh system
Programming language Ladder diagram and extended ladder diagram
Number of instructions Basic: 16, Application: 34, Arithmetic: 26.
Interrupt: 4
Execution time Basic instruction 0.15 µs min., 0.6 µs average
Application instruction 0.30 µs min., 10.0 µs average
Max. number of steps 8000
Maximum number of expansion modules 11 (13 if KV-AN6 and KV-L2 are included.)
Input/output (including 14 I/Os of CPU) 14 to 1774 (when max. number of I/O terminal
modules are connected)
14 to 366 (when max. number of connector I/O
modules are connected)
Internal utility relays 800 (with latching function) (1000 to 1915, 3000
to 6915)
Special utility relays 160 (2000 to 2915)
Data memory (16-bit) 10,000 words (DM0000 to DM9999)
Temporary memory (16-bit) 32 words (TM00 to TM31)
Timers/counters 0.1-s timer TMR (0 to 6553.5 s)
0.01-s timer TMH (0 to 655.35 s)
0.001-s timer TMS (0 to 65.535 s)
Up-counter C
Up/down counter UDC
Total: 250
Analog timer 2
High-speed counter 2-phase high-speed counter: 0 to 65535 counts
(max. input response frequency: 30 kHz)
High-speed counter comparator 4 (2 each for high-speed counters)
Direct output allowed
Maximum direct clock pulse 50 kHz
2 independent axes (with X-Y positioning)
Memory switches 16
Memory backup Program memory EEPROM: Rewritable 50,000 times minimum
Data memory, counter Data retained for 5 years minimum at 25°C
Self-diagnostics CPU and RAM errors
Peripherals Handheld Programmer KV-P3E(01)
Memory Card M-2/3
Memory Card Reader/Writer Z-1
Ladder Software (DOS/Windows)
Number of contact comments storable 1000
The KV-P3E(01) Handheld Programmer cannot control contact comments.

Appendicies
Specifications of the KV-AN6 and KV-L2 appear in their respective sections in this
manual.
Appendices 1-393

AC Power supply module/DC power distribution module

Item Specifications
Model KV-U4 KV-U5
Input supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC ±10% (50/60 Hz) 24 VDC ±10%
Output voltage 24 VDC ±10% –
Maximum output 1.4 A (Total of power supplied to connected 3.5 A
current modules and service power supply)
Note 1: Do not install both the KV-U4 and KV-U5 within one system.
Note 2: The KV-U5 power supply interface module distributes 24 VDC to the
modules in the system. It requires a 24 VDC output power supply of sufficient output
current capacity.
Note 3: Install the KV-300 CPU to the right of the KV-U4/U5.
For KV-10/80 users

System specifications
Model KV-10R(W)/10T(2W) KV-16R(W)/16T(2W) KV-24R(W)/24T(2W) KV-40R(W)/40T(2W) KV-80R(W)/80T(W)
Arithmetic and Stored program
control system
Programming Ladder diagram and extended ladder diagram
language
Number of Basic: 16, application :34, arithmetic: 26, interrupt: 4 (8 programs)
instructions
Execution time 1.0 µs min., 1.92 µs average 1.4 µs min., 3.12 µs average
(basic I/O
instructions)
Avg. number of 500 steps/program 3000 steps/program
steps
Input 6 inputs (70 max.) 10 inputs (74 max.) 16 inputs (80 max.) 24 inputs (72 max.) 48 inputs (80 max.)
Output 4 outputs (68 max.) 6 outputs (70 max.) 8 outputs (72 max.) 16 outputs (64 max.) 32 outputs (80 max.)
Internal utility 160 800
relays (with
latching function)
Special utility 160
relays
Data memory 1000 words 2000 words
(16 bits)
Temporary memory 32 words
(16 bits)
Timer/counter A total of 64 timers, up-counters, A total of 120 timers, up-counters, and up-down counters are
and up-down counters are provided provided as follows:
as follows:
0.1-s timer (0 to 6553.5 s) 0.1-s timer (0 to 6553.5 s)
0.01-s timer (0 to 655.35 s) 0.01-s timer (0 to 655.35 s)
1-ms timer (0 to 65.535 s) 1-ms timer (0 to 65.535 s)
1 analog timer 2 analog timer
Appendicies
(0 to 24.9 s, 0 to 2.49 s, or 0 to 0.249 s) (two of 0 to 24.9 s, 0 to 2.49 s, or 0 to 0.249 s)

High-speed counter 2 auto-reset up-counters (max. input response frequency: 10 kHz)
High-speed counter 4
comparator
Direct clock pulse 2 kHz max. (output from 0500), 1.5 kHz max. (output from 0501) 20 kHz max. (output
from 0500), 1.5 kHz
max. (output from
0501)
Memory switch 16
Memory backup Program memory: EEPROM, programs retained for 10 years min., rewritable 50,000 times min.
Data memory: data retained for 2 months min. by capacitors (at 25°C (77°F))
Expansion unit 4 units (max.) 3 units (max.)
Peripherals Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01), memory cards M-2 & M-3, card driver Z-1
1-394 Appendices

For KV-10/80 users

General Sepcifications
Power supply 24 VDC (+10%-20%)
Maximum Base unit KV-10R(W): 75 mA max. KV-80T(W): 300 mA max.
Current KV-10T(2W): 65 mA max. KV-16R(W): 105 mA max.
consump- KV-24R(W): 130 mA max. KV-16T(2W): 70 mA max.
tion KV-24T(2W): 75 mA max. KV-40R(W): 220 mA max.
KV-80R(W): 400 mA max. KV-40T(2W): 115 mA max.
Expansion KV-8ER(W): 35 mA max. KV-8EYT: 60 mA max.
unit KV-8ET(2W): 20 mA max. KV-16EX(W): 25 mA max.
KV-8EX(W): 15 mA max. KV-16EYR(W): 150 mA max.
KV-8EYR(W): 80 mA max. KV-16EYT(W): 100 mA max.
Others KV-P3E(01): 65 mA
Ambient temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122°F)
(No freezing) 0 to 45 °C (32 to 113°F) [KV-P3E(01)]
Withstand voltage 1500 VAC applied between power terminal and I/O terminal,
and between terminals and housing (1min)
Noise immunity Noise generated by noise simulator:
1kV p-p max., 1 ms and 50 ns
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude of 1.5 mm max.
applied in each of X, Y, and Z directions (2 hrs)
Insultation resistance 50 mΩ min. between power terminal and I/O
terminal, and external terminals and housing
(measured by 500 VDC megohmmeter)
Environment No excessive dust or corrosive gas allowed
Weight Base unit KV-10R(W): approx. 130 g KV-80T(W): approx. 500 g
KV-10T(2W): approx. 120 g KV-24R(W): approx. 250 g
KV-16R(W): approx. 200 g KV-24T(2W): approx. 220 g
KV-16T(2W): approx. 180 g KV-40R(W): approx. 340 g
KV-80R(W): approx. : 600 g KV-40T(2W): approx. 270 g
Expansion KV-8ER(W): approx. 120 g KV-8EYR(W): approx. 140 g
unit KV-8ET(2W): approx. 100 g KV-8EYT(2W): approx. 130 g
KV-8EX(W): approx. 130 g KV-16EYR(W): approx. 240 g
KV-16EX(W): approx. 180 g KV-16EYT(W): approx. 190 g
Others KV-P3E(01): approx. 230 g
Rated voltage and current 24 VDC 7 mA (terminals 000 to 005)
5 mA (other terminals)
Threshold voltage (ON) 19 V
Threshold current (OFF) 2 mA
Response time 25 µs/8 to 12 ms (OFF → ON)
(selectable by program) 75 µs/8 to 12 ms (ON → OFF)
Appendicies
Interrupt response time 25 µs (OFF → ON)

(terminals 000 to 003) 35 µs (ON → OFF)
High speed counter response time 10 kHz max.
Appendices 1-395

For KV-10/80 users

Output specifications
Type of output Relay BJT MOS-FET
Rated load 250 VAC/ 30 VDC 0.3 A 30 VDC 0.25 A
Max. voltage at OFF — 30 VDC 30 VDC
Leak current at OFF — 100 µA max. 5 µA max.
Residual voltage at — 1V —
ON
Resistance at ON 50 mΩ max. — 1Ω max.
Switching OFF→ON 10 ms max. 50 µs max. 350 µs max.
time (terminals 500 on (terminals 500 and 501)
KV-80T(W): 3 µs max.) 2 ms max.
(other terminals)
ON→OFF 10 ms max. 450 µs max. 150 µs max.
(terminals 500 on
KV-80T(W): 20 µs)
Relay service life: Mechanical: 20 million operations min.

Electrical: 100 thousand operations min. (20 times/min)
I/O circuit configuration

■ Input circuit (relays 0000 to 0005)
3k Ω
Internal circuit
*4.3k Ω
IN
510 Ω
24 VDC
+ COM
Photocoupler insulation
+
• *4.3 kΩ used only for terminals connected to relays other than 0000 through
0005.
• Input from both NPN [(+) connected to COM] and PNP [(–) connected to COM]
type transistors are applicable.
■ Output circuit (relay contact)

Internal circuit
OUT
L
COM
~
Power supply for operating +
Appendicies
relay 24-VDC power is

internally supplied. +
• Applicable only to the KV-40R, KV-24R, KV-16R, KV-10R, and KV-8ER.

• A separate power supply is required for the load.
1-396 Appendices

For KV-10/80 users

■ Output circuit (MOS-FET)
NPN
Internal circuit
OUT
L
COM
MOS-FET +
photocupler
+
• Applicable only to the KV-40T2W, KV-24T2W, KV-16T2W, KV-10T2W, KV-

8ET2W and KV-8EYT2W.
PNP
COM
Internal circuit
OUT L
Insultating
power
supply
■ Output circuit (BJT)
OUT
L
Internal circuit
Photocoupler
insulation
COM +
• Applicable only to the KV-10T and KV-8ET.

Appendicies
Appendices 1-397

B.2 Module Specifications

KV-300 CPU
Input specifications
10 inputs (0000 to 0009)
Input modes 24 VDC input mode 5 VDC input mode
Rated voltage 26.4 VDC max.
Input voltage and current 24 VDC 5.3 mA 5 VDC 1 mA
Threshold voltage (ON) 19 V 3.5 V
Threshold current (OFF) 1.5 mA –
Threshold voltage (OFF) – 1.5 V
Common ground 10 I/O per common terminal
Input time constant Normal: 10 ms ±20%
When HSP instruction is used: 25 µs ±20%
When special utility relay 2813 is ON: 10 µs ±20%
(for both OFF/ON and ON/OFF switching)
High-speed counter maximum 30 kHz
response time
Output specifications
4 outputs (0500 to 0503)
Type of output Transistor NPN
Rated load 30 VDC 0.1 A
Maximum leakage current at OFF 100 µA
Maximum residual voltage at ON 0.3 V
Common ground 4 I/O per common terminal
Maximum switching time 10 µs (for both OFF/ON and ON/OFF switching)
I/O circuit structure

Input circuit Output circuit
1.6kΩ
OUT (with resistor)
Load Current-driven
Internal circuit
– + load
Internal circuit
4.3k Ω
IN OUT
Load Voltage-driven
– + load
5V/24V
switching circuit
+ COM
Photocoupler insulator
+ Overcurrent
+ Insulating protector circuit
power supply COM
Appendicies
• Both NPN inputs ([+] common) and PNP inputs ([-] common) are available.
• Use a separate power supply for load.
1-398 Appendices

KV-C16X/C32X Input Modules

Model KV-C16X (16 inputs) KV-C32X (32 inputs)
Connection to Connector (conforms to MIL Standard)
external equipment
Input mode 24 VDC 5 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC
Maximum rated 26.4 VDC
voltage
Input voltage and 24 VDC 5 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC
current 5.3 mA 1 mA 5.3 mA 1 mA
Threshold voltage 19 V 3.5 V 19 V 3.5 V
(ON)
Threshold current 1.5 mA – 1.5 mA –
(OFF)
Threshold voltage – 1.5 V – 1.5 V
(OFF)
Common ground 16 I/O per common terminal 32 I/O per common terminal
Input time constant (OFF → ON) (ON → OFF)
(3-way switchable) (HI) 25 µs ±20% (HI) 75 µs ±20%
(MID) 1 ms ±20% (MID) 1ms ±20%
(LOW) 10 ms ±20% (LOW) 10 ms ±20%
Maximum current 15 mA
consumption
Approximate weight 80 g 95 g
Circuit structure
Internal circuit
4.3k Ω
IN
5V/24V
switching circuit
+ COM
+
Note: If the number of simultaneously ON inputs exceeds the specified limit, the
module may be damaged.
Refer to the following graphs for the recommended limits.
KV-C16X KV-C32X
Continuous/simultaneous
ON rate (%) Continuous/simultaneous
ON rate (%)
16°C 29°C
100 15°C 27°C
100
90
90
80
80
70
60% 70
Appendicies
60 24 V input 60%
60 24 V input
50 50%
26.4 V input 50 50%
40 26.4 V input
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient temperature (°C) 0 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient temperature (°C)
Relation between ambient temperature and Relation between ambient temperature and
continuous/simultaneous ON rate continuous/simultaneous ON rate
Appendices 1-399

KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Output Modules

Model KV-C32T (32) KV-B16R (16) KV-B16S (16)
Connection to Connector Removable terminal block Removable terminal block
external unit (conforms to MIL Standard)
Type of output Transistor (NPN) Relay Triac
Rated load 30 VDC 0.2 A 250 VAC/30 VDC 2 A 250 VAC 0.3 A
(8 A per common) (1.2 A per common)
Peak load – 5A 20 A
overcurrent
Maximum leakage 100 µA – 2 mA
current at OFF
Maximum residual 0.5 V – –
voltage at ON
Maximum – 50 mΩ –
resistance at ON
Common ground 32 I/O per common terminal 8 I/O per common terminal 8 I/O per common terminal
(*1) (2 terminals) (2 terminals)
Maximum OFF→ON 10 µs 1/2 cycle + 2 ms
switching 10 ms (50 Hz) 12 ms
time ON→OFF 100 µs (60 Hz) 10.3 ms
Maximum current 55 mA 150 mA 85 mA
consumption
Approximate weight 70 g 200 g 200 g
Circuit structure
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
OUT OUT
OUT Load Load
Load
Insulating COM
power + COM
supply Photocoupler
insulator COM +
+
+
Note 1: (*1) The KV-C32T has 2 COMs that are common within the module.
Note 2: Relay service life:
Mechanical: 20 million operations minimum
Electrical: 100,000 operations minimum (20 times/min)
Note 3: Relays are not replaceable.
Appendicies
1-400 Appendices

KV-R8X/R16X I/O Terminal Modules

Model KV-R8X (8) KV-R16X (16)
Connection to external unit Terminal block
Maximum rated input voltage 26.4 VDC
Input voltage 24 VDC 5.3 mA
Min. voltage at ON 19 V
Maximum current at OFF 1.5 mA
Common ground 8 I/O per common terminal 16 I/O per common terminal
Input time constant (OFF → ON and ON → OFF)
(3-way switchable) (0 ms) 25 µs ±20%
(1 ms) 1 ms ±20%
(10 ms) 10 ms ±20%
Current consumption 25 mA 30 mA
Approximate weight 130 g 180 g
Circuit structure
Internal circuit
IN
4.3kΩ
510 Ω
+ COM
+
CAUTION
Appendicies
Appendices 1-401

KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules

Model KV-R8T (8) KV-R16T (16) KV-R8R (8) KV-R16R (16)
Connection to Terminal block
external equipment
Type of output Transistor (NPN) Relay
Rated load 30 VDC 0.3 A 250 VAC/30 VDC 2A
Maximum leakage 100 µA —
current at OFF
Maximum residual 0.5 V —
voltage at ON
Maximum — 50 mΩ
resistance at ON
Common ground 8 I/O per common 16 I/O per common 4 I/O per common 4 I/O per common
terminal terminal terminal (2) terminal (4)
Maximum switching 50 µs 10 ms
time
(for both OFF → ON
and ON → OFF)
Current consumption 35 mA 50 mA 85 mA 150 mA
Approximate weight 130 g 180 g 160 g 240 g
Circuit structure
+
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
OUT OUT
Load Load
– +
– + COM
+
Power supply
+
for output
Note: The KV-R8R/R16R has a replaceable relay (part no. OP-35400). Refer to
page 1-377 for replacement procedure.
These relays are interchangeable with the KV-80R and KV-16EYR.
Appendicies
1-402 Appendices

KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules (RUN Output)
Type of output Transistor (NPN)

Rated load 30 VDC 0.1 A
Maximum leakage current at OFF 100 µA
Maximum residual voltage at ON 1V
Operating conditions ON when communication is enabled.
OFF when communication is disabled for more than
100 ms.
Circuit structure
Internal circuit
RUN
Load
0V +
24V 24V
Note: The KV-R8X/R16X has no RUN output.
CAUTION
KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module

Transmission specifications
Communication mode 1:N 2-wire communication

Connection Multi-branching or multi-drop
Transmission rate 1.25 Mbit/s
Maximum transmission delay 500 µs
Transmission distance 120 m (total length) (See Note)
Maximum number of I/O terminal modules Input terminals: 5 (80 inputs)
Output terminals: 5 (80 outputs)
Total: 10 I/O terminals (160 I/Os)
Transmission media 2-core cable (VCTF 0.75 mm2) (See Note)
Error control method 2-bit reverse check
Maximum current consumption current 50 mA
Approximate weight 100 g
Note: The transmission distance varies with the type of transmission cable used.
Cable type Total length of cable permitted*

Appendicies
AWG 18 twisted pair or VCTF 0.75mm2 120 m

AWG 16 twisted pair or VCTF 1.25 mm2 120 m
RG-58 coaxial or 3D-2V (50Ω) 200 m
• *Refer to page 189.
• Use unshielded cable.
CAUTION
Appendices 1-403

B.3 Dimensions
KV-300
KV-U4 KV-U5 KV-R1A
27.3
90 90 35.4
90
4 4 4
60 31.7 4.4 25 85
KV-300
27.3
90 35.4
115
88.5
4.4 25 3.6 79.7
85
108
(35) 100
KV-C16X/C32T KV-C32X
27.3
90 35.4
90
4 4
4.4 13.1 4.4 18 85

(45) 100
Appendicies
KV-B16R/B16S/AN6 KV-L2
27.3
90 90 35.4
4 4
4.4 35 4.4 35 (68) 88
1-404 Appendices

KV-R16R/R16T/R16X
2 x ø4.6
(mounting hole)
7.2
50 42 35.4
KV-P3E
5.2 157 35 90 29.5

165 59.3
KV-R8R/R8T/R8X 2 x ø4.6
(mounting hole)
7.2 168
50 42 35.4
5.2 107 35
115 59.3 70 24
For KV-10/80 users

KV-80R(W)/80T(W) KV-40R(W)/40T(2W), KV-U3
4x ø5 mounting hole 2x ø5 mounting hole
99 35.4 90 111 99 35.4 90 111
160 39 78 39
200 43 110 43
KV-24R(W)/24T(2W) KV-16R(W)/16T(2W), KV-16EX(W),

16EYR(W)/16EYT(2W), AD4, DA4
2 x ø5 mounting hole
99 35.4 90 111
99 35.4 90 111
48 39
31 39
80 43
65 43
KV-10R(W)/10T(2W) KV-8ER(W)/8ET(2W), KV-8EX(W),

KV-8EYR(W)/8EYT(2W)
2 x ø5 mounting hole 2 x ø5 mounting hole
Appendicies
79 35.4 70 91
99 35.4 90 111
44 39
60 43 19
39
38 43
KV-U2 KV-U3 2 x ø5 mounting hole

78 35.4 90 99 35.4 90 111
50 39
50 35 78 43
58 39 110
70
Appendices 1-405

Appedix C. Ladder Program List Visual KV Series only
Appendix C. Ladder Program List Visual KV Series only
The following is a list of instructions and the reference pages that give the application
examples for the instructions.
Reference
Instruction page
ANL 3-61
ORL 3-63
One-shot circuit 3-70
Off-delay circuit 3-70
On-delay circuit 3-71
Flicker circuit 3-71
Long-duration timer 3-74
Accumulator timer (Retained during power failure) 3-74
Large capacity timer 3-74
Multi-level setting 3-74
Counter multi-level setting 3-75
Multi-level UP/DOWN counter 3-77
One-shot circuit using differentiate instruction 3-79
Alternating circuit (DIFU instruction) 3-79
Detection of chewing gum packs 3-81
Alternating circuit (SFT instruction) 3-83
Resetting internal utility relays 3-84
Repeat shift circuit 3-84
Asynchronous shift register 3-85
High-speed fetching of input data 3-88
Emergency stop circuit 3-91
Input sequence check 3-101
Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement 3-101
MPS/MRD/MPP 3-104
Enabling double coil 3-112
Conditional branching 3-113
Process progression 3-116
Pulse interval measurement 3-120
A/D data measurement 3-121
Nesting structure of subroutine 3-123
Calling subroutine from interrupt program 3-124
Data memory shift 3-130
Changing preset value of internal counter using BCD digital switch 3-132
Changing timer setting value 3-139
Changing setting values of multiple timers 3-139
Appendicies
Changing the counter setting value 3-141

Transferring current counter value to data memory 3-142
Transferring content of data memory as setting value of a timer 3-142
Outputting input (ON/OFF status) of basic unit directly to 3-143
expansion output unit
When BCD digital switch (2 digits) is connected to inputs 0000 through 3-144
0007 and toggle switch is connected to inputs 0008 through 0015
First-in first-out (FIFO) 3-145
Multi-level counter 3-148
When comparing values with no specific range 3-148
Setting the upper/lower limit 3-149
Changing the CMP setting value 3-149
1-406 Appendices

Appedix C. Ladder Program List Visual KV Series only
Total count 3-152

Comparison of absolute values 3-154
Multiplying the counter current value by DM value 3-156
Total count average 3-158
Fetch input data separately 3-160
Output of BCD 2-digit data 3-162
Separate input of 2-digit BCD 3-163
Judgement of matching data 3-165
Fetching four-digit data of BCD digital switch (inputs 0004 through 0011 3-168
for low-order 2 digits and 0100 through 0107 for high-order 2 digits) to
transfer them as counter setting value
Separate input of BCD 3-168
Error input count 3-170
UP/DOWN count 3-173
Total count 1 3-174
Total count 2 3-174
Output of error input No. in BCD 3-178
Display of 7-segment LED 3-178
Output of 4-digit BCD data 3-181
Output of 8-digit BCD data 3-182
Input of 4-digit BCD data 3-182
Interrupt with a signal converter 3-198
Interrupt with a high-speed counter 3-199
Measuring the ON time of high-speed pulses 3-200
Measuring the period in which a target passes between two points 3-201
Comparing encoder values 3-217
24-bit high-speed counter (single-phase input) 3-224
Ring counter: When using a 16-bit high-speed counter 3-226
Ring counter: When using a 24-bit high-speed counter 3-227
Program using a digital trimmer 3-229
Program for speed control 3-230
Program for basic operation of the frequency counter 3-232
Program for synchronous control 3-232
Cam switch 3-236
To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0500 3-242
To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0501 3-243
To output a clock pulse of 500 µs (2 kHz)-period and 200 µs-width 3-245
from output relay 0500
To output a clock pulse of 500 µs (2 kHz)-period and 200 µs-width from 3-247
output relay 0501
Direct clock pulse output: Stopping the pulse output at a specified pulse 3-249
count
Appendicies
Direct clock pulse output: Ramp-up/down control 3-251

Ladder example of ramp-up/down control 3-259
Ladder example of the jog operation 3-260
Ladder example of automatic operation (palletizing operation) 3-261
Ladder example of a return to the zero point 3-262
Ladder example of an automatic operation (continuous operation 3-263
with wait status)
Ladder example of a pulse motor application circuit 3-264
Appendices 1-407

Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6]

Voltage conversion table
■ ±10 V range
.00 .10 .20 30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90
+10 32000 32320 32640
+9 28800 29120 29440 29760 30080 30400 30720 31040 31360 31680
+8 25600 25920 26240 26560 26880 27200 27520 27840 28160 28480
+7 22400 22720 23040 23360 23680 24000 24320 24640 24960 25280
+6 19200 19520 19840 20160 20480 20800 21120 21440 21760 22080
+5 16000 16320 16640 16960 17280 17600 17920 18240 18560 18880
+4 12800 13120 13440 13760 14080 14400 14720 15040 15360 15680
+3 9600 9920 10240 10560 10880 11200 11520 11840 12160 12480
+2 6400 6720 7040 7360 7680 8000 8320 8640 8960 9280
+1 3200 3520 3840 4160 4480 4800 5120 5440 5760 6080
+0 0000 320 640 960 1280 1600 1920 2240 2560 2880
-0 0000 65216 64896 64576 64256 63936 63616 63296 62976 62656
-1 62336 62016 61696 61376 61056 60736 60416 60096 59776 59456
-2 59136 58816 58496 58176 57856 57536 57216 56896 56576 56256
-3 55936 55616 55296 54976 54656 54336 54016 53696 53376 53056
-4 52736 52416 52096 51776 51456 51136 50816 50496 50176 49856
-5 49536 49216 48896 48576 48256 47936 47616 47296 46976 46656
-6 46336 46016 45696 45376 45056 44736 44416 44096 43776 43456
-7 43136 42816 42496 42176 41856 41536 41216 40896 40576 40256
-8 39936 39616 39296 38976 38656 38336 38016 37696 37376 37056
-9 36736 36416 36096 35776 35456 35136 34816 34496 34176 33856
-10 33536 33216 32896
■ ±5 V range
.00/.50 .05/.55 .10/.60 .15/.65 .20/.70 .25/.75 .30/.80 .35/.85 .40/.90 .45/.95
+5.0 32000 32320 32640
+4.5 28800 29120 29440 29760 30080 30400 30720 31040 31360 31680
+4.0 25600 25920 26240 26560 26880 27200 27520 27840 28160 28480
+3.5 22400 22720 23040 23360 23680 24000 24320 24640 24960 25280
+3.0 19200 19520 19840 20160 20480 20800 21120 21440 21760 22080
+2.5 16000 16320 16640 16960 17280 17600 17920 18240 18560 18880
+2.0 12800 13120 13440 13760 14080 14400 14720 15040 15360 15680
+1.5 9600 9920 10240 10560 10880 11200 11520 11840 12160 12480
+1.0 6400 6720 7040 7360 7680 8000 8320 8640 8960 9280
+0.5 3200 3520 3840 4160 4480 4800 5120 5440 5760 6080
Appendicies
+0.0 0000 320 640 960 1280 1600 1920 2240 2560 2880
-0.0 0000 65216 64896 64576 64256 63936 63616 63296 62976 62656
-0.5 62336 62016 61696 61376 61056 60736 60416 60096 59776 59456
-1.0 59136 58816 58496 58176 57856 57536 57216 56896 56576 56256
-1.5 55936 55616 55296 54976 54656 54336 54016 53696 53376 53056
-2.0 52736 52416 52096 51776 51456 51136 50816 50496 50176 49856
-2.5 49536 49216 48896 48576 48256 47936 47616 47296 46976 46656
-3.0 46336 46016 45696 45376 45056 44736 44416 44096 43776 43456
-3.5 43136 42816 42496 42176 41856 41536 41216 40896 40576 40256
-4.0 39936 39616 39296 38976 38656 38336 38016 37696 37376 37056
-4.5 36736 36416 36096 35776 35456 35136 34816 34496 34176 33856
-5.0 33536 33216 32896
1-408 Appendices

Current conversion table

■ 0-to-20 mA range
.00 .10 .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90
+20 32000 32320 32640
+19 28800 29120 29440 29760 30080 30400 30720 31040 31360 31680
+18 25600 25920 26240 26560 26880 27200 27520 27840 28160 28480
+17 22400 22720 23040 23360 23680 24000 24320 24640 24960 25280
+16 19200 19520 19840 20160 20480 20800 21120 21440 21760 22080
+15 16000 16320 16640 16960 17280 17600 17920 18240 18560 18880
+14 12800 13120 13440 13760 14080 14400 14720 15040 15360 15680
+13 9600 9920 10240 10560 10880 11200 11520 11840 12160 12480
+12 6400 6720 7040 7360 7680 8000 8320 8640 8960 9280
+11 3200 3520 3840 4160 4480 4800 5120 5440 5760 6080
+10 0000 320 640 960 1280 1600 1920 2240 2560 2880
+9 62336 62656 62976 63296 63616 63936 64256 64576 64896 65216
+8 59136 59456 59776 60096 60416 60736 61056 61376 61696 62016
+7 55936 56256 56576 56896 57216 57536 57856 58176 58496 58816
+6 52736 53056 53376 53696 54016 54336 54656 54976 55296 55616
+5 49536 49856 50176 50496 50816 51136 51456 51776 52096 52416
+4 46336 46656 46976 47296 47616 47936 48256 48576 48896 49216
+3 43136 43456 43776 44096 44416 44736 45056 45376 45696 46016
+2 39936 40256 40576 40896 41216 41536 41856 42176 42496 42816
+1 36736 37056 37376 37696 38016 38336 38656 38976 39296 39616
0 33536 33856 34176 34496 34816 35136 35456 35776 36096 36416
■ 4-to-20 mA range
.00 .10 .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90
+20 32000 32320 32640
+19 28000 28400 28800 29200 29600 30000 30400 30800 31200 31600
+18 24000 24400 24800 25200 25600 26000 26400 26800 27200 27600
+17 20000 20400 20800 21200 21600 22000 22400 22800 23200 23600
+16 16000 16400 16800 17200 17600 18000 18400 18800 19200 19600
+15 12000 12400 12800 13200 13600 14000 14400 14800 15200 15600
+14 8000 8400 8800 9200 9600 10000 10400 10800 11200 16000
+13 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000 6400 6800 7200 7600
+12 0000 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600
+11 61536 61936 62336 62736 63136 63536 63936 64336 64736 65136
+10 57536 57936 58336 58736 59136 59536 59936 60336 60736 61136
+9 53536 53936 54336 54736 55136 55536 55936 56336 56736 57136
Appendicies
+8 49536 49936 50336 50736 51136 51536 51936 52336 52736 53136
+7 45536 45936 46336 46736 47136 47536 47936 48336 48736 49136
+6 41536 41936 42336 42736 43136 43536 43936 44336 44736 45136
+5 37536 37936 38336 38736 39136 39536 39936 40336 40736 41136
+4 33536 33936 34336 34736 35136 35536 35936 36336 36736 37136
Appendices 1-409

Appendicies
1-410 Appendices

Index
KVNKA Index_Inst.p65 411 08.3.11, 11:22 AM

Index — For Visual KV User’s Only

The following is the index with some descriptions for your reference.
Purpose Title Page

A
Access Window, changing device value in Device mode 1-87
Access Window, changing modes in Selecting modes and setting/resetting key lock 1-82
Access Window, displaying directions in User messages 1-97
Access Window, displaying errors in Error messages and error status 1-97
Access Window, error display in Error List 1-372
Access Window, increasing device selection speed in Turbo function 1-83
Access window, part names functions of Part names and functions of the Access Window 1-82
Access Window, switching the KV PLC between RUN and
System Mode 1-94
PROGRAM (stop) modes in
Access Window, using digital trimmer in Digital Trimmer Mode 1-84
Application instructions, learning about Application instructions 3-36
Arithmetic instructions, learning about Arithmetic instructions 3-38
B
Basic instructions, learning about Basic instructions 3-34
C
Cam switch function, setting item for Device used for cam switch function 3-233
Cam switch, using KV as Cam switch function 3-233
CE marking, acquiring Restriction on acquiring the CE marking (2)
Command transmission between KV and personal computer Communication command/response list 3-310
Command transmission, when error occurs during Error code list 3-316
Communication port, specifications of Communications Specification 3-306
Contact comments, transmitting them to KV PLC Contact comment save function 3-27
Contacts, protecting Contact protection 1-69
Conventional KV series, differences with Compatibility with conventional KV peripheral units (4)
Current consumption General specifications 1-4
D
Data memory, functions assigned to Data memories 3-19
Direct clock pulse, outline of Outline of direct clock pulse output 3-237
Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio using ON/OFF ratio of 1:1 3-238
Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with variable pulse width Variable pulse width 3-238
Pulse output setting with the high-speed counter
Direct clock pulse, setting item for 3-238
comparator
E
Expansion unit, checking operation of Connection information for expansion units 1-75
Expansion unit, connecting Connecting Visual KV Series expansion units 1-71
Index
Expansion unit, maximum number to be connected to Number of connectable units 1-73

Expansion unit, setting its height flush with AC-type basic
Expansion unit spacer 1-66
unit
External output, disabling Output prohibition function 3-26
F
Forcing input ON/OFF without switch Input refresh disabled function 3-26
Frequency counter function, setting item for Devices used with the frequency counter 3-231
High-speed counter, increasing measurement range of 24-bit high-speed counter 3-221
High-speed counter, measuring frequency with Frequency counter function 3-231
High-speed counter, outputting pulses using Direct Clock Pulse Output 3-237
High-speed counter, reading current value of Reading the current value of the high-speed counter 3-211
High-speed counter, resetting the value to other than "0" Preset function 3-215
1-412 Index

Purpose Title Page

High-speed counter, resetting the value to "0" Resetting the high-speed counter 3-214
High-speed counter, selecting input source for Count input method 3-212
High-speed counter, specifications of Specifications of high-speed counters 3-208
High-speed counter, specifying the preset value of Preset value of the high-speed counter comparator 3-211
High-speed counter, using, as ring counter Ring counter function 3-225
I
Input time constant of basic unit, changing Input time constant change function 3-23
Input time constant of expansion unit, setting Input time constant for expansion units 1-76
Interrupt instruction, outputting relay status independent of scan
Direct Input/Output 3-197
time
Interrupt instructions, learning about Interrupt instruction 3-41
Interrupt programs, instructions that cannot be used within Instructions that cannot be used 3-196
Interrupt, reading current value of high-speed counter by Input capture 3-195
Interrupt, setting input condition for Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input 3-195
Interrupt: when several interrupts are executed Interrupt priority 3-196
K
Cautions when using the previous version of ladder
KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV, using (5)
support software
KV-P3E(01), entering instructions using Function No. list (alphabetical order) 3-41
KV-P3E(01), functions available with Function Nos. list 1-216
KV-P3E(01), operating Basic programming operation 1-200
M
Memory card, capacity of Storage capacity 1-230
Memory card, replacing battery of To replace battery 1-238
Multi-step comparator operation of DM, executing Multi-step comparator mode 3-234
O
Output, disabling output from KV Output disabled function 3-26
P
Panel mounting of KV Attaching a unit directly to a panel 1-66
Personal computer, receiving data from Receiving text data 3-318
Personal computer, transmitting data from KV to Transmitting text data 3-319
Program capacity, calculation of Calculating the byte count used 3-4
Program capacity, learning about Program capacity 3-4
Programs, saving into memory card Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] 1-230
Pulse motor, driving Parameter setting procedure 3-255
Pulse output at desired frequency Specified frequency pulse output function 3-228
Relay Nos. assigned to basic unit Relay list 3-5
Relay Nos. assigned to expansion unit List of relays in expansion units 3-6 1
Relay Nos., assigning Assigning relay Nos. 3-8
Index
S
Saving current value of counter/DM into ROM LOAD and SAVE modes 1-96
Scan time Scan time 3-3
Sensors or other devices, connecting to KV Wiring procedures for basic units 1-67
Special utility relays, change in status of, when arithmetic Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic
3-186
instruction is used flags) by arithmetic instructions
Special utility relays, functions assigned to Special utility relay list 3-86
Specified frequency pulse output function, setting item for Device used for specified frequency pulse output 3-228
T
Temporary data memory, functions assigned to Temporary data memory 3-21
Timers/counters, maximum number of Timer/Counter list 3-18
Index 1-413

Index — For KV-300, KV-10/80 User’s Only

A F
A/D converter ........................ 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4] FOR: Repeat Start .................................................. 3-125
A/D conversion table ........... 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [AD4]
ADD/@ADD: Add .................................................... 3-150 H
AND: And .................................................................. 3-58
ANB: And Bar ............................................................ 3-58 High-Speed Counters .............................................. 3-276
ANDA/@ANDA: And A ............................................ 3-159 HKEY: 16 Key Input ................................................ 3-131
ANL: And Load .......................................................... 3-61 HSP: High Speed ...................................................... 3-86
Application Instructions ........................... 3-36, 3-45, 3-95
Arithmetic Instructions ........................... 3-38, 3-48, 3-134 I
ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert ................................... 3-183
Assignment of Data Memory ..................................... 3-19 INC/@INC: Increment Memory ............................... 3-172
Assignment of I/O relay numbers .............................. 3-22 Indirect Addressing of Data Memory or Relay ........ 3-127
Input Relays ................................................................ 3-9
B Instruction List .................................................. 3-34, 3-42
INT: Interrupt ........................................................... 3-192
Basic Instructions .................................... 3-34, 3-42, 3-56 Interface [RS-232C] ................................................ 3-306
Baud rate ...................................... 2-136, 1-247 [KV-L2] Internal register ....................................................... 3-135
Break signal ............................................................ 3-308 Internal Utility Relays ................................................ 3-11
Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1 ....................... 3-278
C Interrupt Instructions ............................................... 3-268
I/O distribution ...................................................... 1-187
C: Counter ................................................................ 3-72 ITVL: Interval Timer ................................................. 3-117
CALL: Subroutine Call ............................................. 3-122
CMP/@CMP: Compare ........................................... 3-146 J
COM/@COM: Complement .................................... 3-171
Commands [Serial communication] ........................ 3-310 JMP: Jump .............................................................. 3-106
Communications .......................................... 2-135, 3-306
CON: Connect ......................................................... 3-102 K
Connector wiring .................................................... 1-72
CTC: Counter Comparator ...................................... 3-204 KEEP: Keep .............................................................. 3-80
CTH1: 16-Bit Counters ............................................ 3-204 KV-10/16/24/40/80 ........................... 1-167, 1-175, 1-177
KV-300 ........................................................ 1-166, 1-170
D KV-AD4 .................................................................. 1-334
KV-AN6 .................................................................. 1-312
Data Memory ............................................................. 3-19 KV-B16R/B16S/C32T ............................................ 1-172
D/A converter ........................ 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4] KV-C16X/C32X ...................................................... 1-171
D/A conversion table ........... 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [DA4] KV-DA4 .................................................................. 1-334
DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory ........................... 3-172 KV-L2 ..................................................................... 1-240
DI: Interrupt Disabled .............................................. 3-193 KV-R1A/R16X/R16R/R16T/R8X/R8R/R8T . 1-173, 1-174
DIFD: Differentiate Down .......................................... 3-78 KV-U4/U5 .................................................... 1-168, 1-169
DIFU: Differentiate Up .............................................. 3-78 KV mode [KV-L2] .................................................. 1-253
Dimensions ........................................................... 1-404
DIN rail (mounting) ............................................... 1-180 L
Direct Clock Pulse ................................................... 3-276
Display Interface Mode [KV-L2] .......................... 1-244 LD: Load .................................................................... 3-57
DIV/@DIV: Divide ................................................... 3-150 LDA/@LDA: Load A ................................................ 3-140
Index
DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer ................................... 3-176 LDB: Load Bar ........................................................... 3-57

DW: Data Memory Write ......................................... 3-136
M
E
Macros ...................................................................... 2-72
EI: Interrupt Enabled ............................................... 3-193 MC: Master Control ................................................... 3-89
END: End .................................................................. 3-94 MCR: Master Control Reset ...................................... 3-89
ENDH: End Hi ........................................................... 3-94 Memory Card ........................................................ 1-230
ENDS: End Stage ................................................... 3-106 MEMSW: Memory Switch ......................................... 3-92
Environment requirements ................................... 1-64 Module names ...................................................... 1-175
EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A ............................. 3-164 Mounting Environment .......................................... 1-64
Error code list ....................................................... 1-372 MPP: Pop ................................................................ 3-103
Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................... 3-29 MPS: Push .............................................................. 3-103
1-414 Index

MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer ........................................ 3-176 System Configuration (Memory Card) ............... 1-196
MRD: Read ............................................................. 3-103 System specifications [Visual KV Series] .......... 1-382
MUL/@MUL: Multiply .............................................. 3-150 System specifications [KV-300 Series] .............. 1-392
N T
NEXT: Repeat End .................................................. 3-125 TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD ................................ 3-180
Non-procedure mode [KV-L2] ............................. 1-292 TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN ..................................... 3-180
NOP: No Operation ................................................... 3-94 Temporary Memory ...................................... 2-172, 2-176
Timers and Counters ............................................... 2-169
TMH: 0.01-s Timer .................................................... 3-68
O
TMIN: Trimmer In .................................................... 3-138
OR: Or ....................................................................... 3-60 @TMIN: Trimmer Setting ........................................ 3-138
ORA/@ORA: Or A .................................................. 3-161 TMR: 0.1-s Timer ...................................................... 3-67
ORB: Or Bar .............................................................. 3-60 TMS: 1-ms Timer ...................................................... 3-69
ORL: Or Load ............................................................ 3-63 Transmitting text data .............................................. 3-319
OUB: Out Bar ............................................................ 3-65 Troubleshooting ................................................... 1-372
OUT: Out ................................................................... 3-65
Output Relays ........................................................... 3-10 U
UDC: Up-Down Counter ............................................ 3-76
P
Peripheral equipments ........................................ 1-176 W
Port1/Port2 [KV-L2] .............................................. 1-245
Positionning control ................................................. 3-296 W-DE: Wait Down Edge ............................................ 3-98
Programming examples .......................................... 3-324 W-OFF: Wait OFF ..................................................... 3-96
W-ON: Wait ON ......................................................... 3-96
W-UE: Wait Up Edge ................................................ 3-98
R
RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert ................ 3-183 X
Receiving text data .................................................. 3-318
Relay/Memory/Memory Switch Lists ....................... 2-167 @xxxx: Differentiation ............................................. 3-137
Relay/Memory Nos. ................................................. 2-167
Relay No. List .......................................................... 2-167
Relay Nos. and Functions ....................................... 2-167
RES: Reset ............................................................... 3-66
RET: Subroutine Return .......................................... 3-122
RETI: Return Interrupt ............................................. 3-192
RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A ...................................... 3-169
ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root ................................ 3-185
RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right ...................................... 3-169
RS-232C cable connection ..................................... 3-307
RS-232C Protocol ................................................... 3-306
RS-422A [KV-L2] ................................................... 1-248
S 1
SBN: Subroutine Entry ............................................ 3-122
Index
Serial Communication ............................................. 3-306

SET: Set .................................................................... 3-66
SFT: Shift .................................................................. 3-82
SLA/@SLA: Shift Left A .......................................... 3-166
Special Utility Relays ............................................... 2-174
SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A ....................................... 3-166
STA/@STA: Store A ............................................... 3-140
Station No. [KV-L2] .............................................. 1-246
STE: Step End ........................................................ 3-114
STG: Stage ............................................................. 3-106
STP: Step ................................................................ 3-114
SUB/@SUB: Subtract ............................................. 3-150
System configuration .......................................... 1-166
Index 1-415

Index — Software/P3E (handheld programmer)
Index — Software/P3E (handheld programmer)

A MULTI-MONITOR [P3E] ........................................ 1-212
ACCS ..................................................................... 1-234

ALL CLEAR [FNC60] [P3E] .................................. 1-217
O
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR OFFLINE EDITOR START (OFFLINE EDITOR):
(DM ALL CLEAR): [FNC64] [P3E] ................... 1-219 [FNC67] [P3E] .................................................. 1-221
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET OFFLINE EDITOR STOP (QUIT OFF-L EDIT):
(L-RELAY ALL RST): [FNC65] [P3E] ................ 1-219 [FNC68] [P3E] .................................................. 1-221
ON/OFF MONITOR [P3E] ..................................... 1-215
B
Break signal ............................................................ 3-308
P
Printer Setting, Defining Environment Strings .......... 2-77
C Printing examples ...................................................... 2-81
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK (PROGRAM SIZE):
CLEAR [P3E] ......................................................... 1-232
[FNC75] [P3E] .................................................. 1-229
Comments (Relay comment, Line comment) ............ 2-46
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED
Compile ..................................................................... 2-75
(COMMUNICATION—): [FNC66] [P3E] ........... 1-220
Converting N.O./N.C. ................................................ 2-65
Copy, move and delete ............................................. 2-69
COUNTER CLEAR (CTR CLEAR): [FNC62] [P3E] 1-218
Q
Customizing KV-LADDER , Quitting software ....................................................... 2-16
Defining Environment Strings ................................ 2-19
Copy, move and delete operation ............................. 2-52 R
D READ TRIMMER SETTING (TRIMMER MONITOR):
[FNC73] [P3E] .................................................. 1-228
Data Communications between KV Registration of cursor position and
and Personal Computer ....................................... 3-306 jump to registered position ................................... 2-59
Display mode ........................................................... 2-19 RELAY ON/OFF (FORCED SET/RESET):
Double coil check ...................................................... 2-76 [FNC71] [P3E] .................................................. 1-226
Replacing relays ........................................................ 2-64
E RS-232C cable connection ......................................... 2-7
RS-232C Protocol ....................................................... 2-3
Edit screen ................................................................ 2-27
Entering symbols ....................................................... 2-37
Environment requirements .......................................... 2-3
S
Error message list ................................................... 2-156 SCAN TIME MONITOR [P3E] ............................... 1-212
SCROLL [P3E] ...................................................... 1-202
H Search ....................................................................... 2-58
Searching Program [P3E] .................................... 1-207
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR):
Selecting display mode ............................................. 2-19
[FNC61] ............................................................ 1-217
Setting print range ..................................................... 2-77
Handheld Programmer KV-P3E .......................... 1-196
Simulator Mode ......................................................... 2-84
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR
Simulator screen ....................................................... 2-86
(HIGH SPEED CTR CLR): [FNC63] [P3E] ........ 1-218
Starting and quitting software ................................... 2-16
I Starting edit mode .................................................... 2-29
Starting the Monitor Function .................................. 2-139
Installing Ladder Builder .............................................. 2-9 Starting the Simulator ................................................ 2-86
SYNTAX CHECK (PROGRAM CHECK):
Index
J [FNC74] [P3E] .................................................. 1-228

Jump ......................................................................... 2-58 T
L Temporary Memory ................................................... 3-21
Time Chart Monitor ................................................. 2-157
Ladder Monitor ........................................................ 2-134 Time Chart Viewer ....................................... 2-148, 2-167
Ladder Simulator ....................................................... 2-84 TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE
Line comment ........................................................... 2-46 (CHG: T/C SET-V): [FNC70] [P3E] .................. 1-224
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE
M (CHG: T/C CURT-V): [FNC69] [P3E] ............... 1-222
Macros ...................................................................... 2-72
Memory Card [P3E] .............................................. 1-230 W
Monitor Mode .......................................................... 2-134
Monitor screen ........................................................ 2-143 WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY (DM WRITE):
MOVE CURSOR [P3E] .......................................... 1-202 [FNC72] [P3E] .................................................. 1-227
1-416 Index

1
Index
Index 1-417

Index
1-418 Index

Safety Precautions
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:
This instruction manual describes the operation and function of the KV Series PLC.
Read this manual carefully to ensure safe use and maximum performance from your (1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
KV Series PLC. one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defec-
tive must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspec-
Symbols tion and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
messages carefully. does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishan-
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury. (electric dling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Compo-
WARNING shock, burn, etc.) nents which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only sugges-
tions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
CAUTION (3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally
in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifica-
Note: Provides additional information on proper operation. tions state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
Conventions (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
This manual describes the operation/function of all Keyence KV Series PLC. INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note following conventions when you use. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
Visual KV (Series) KV-10AR/AT/DR/DT KV-16AR/AT/DR/DT
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSE-
KV-10xx, 16xx, 24xx, 40xx KV-24AR/AT/DR/DT KV-40AR/AT/DR/DT
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
Conventional KV (Series) KV-10R(W)/T(W) KV-16R(W)/T(W)
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF
KV-300 (Series) KV-24R(W)/T(W) KV-40R(W)/T(W)
KV-10/80 (Series) KV-80R(W)/T(W)
DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED
KV-300 GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
TION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS
AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
General Precautions ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers
or damage limitations may not apply.
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and perfor-
mance of the KV Sereis PLC. BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or
delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifica-
• We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage tions, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/
in the event a problem occurs. Samples.
• Do not open or modify the KV Series PLC or use it in any way other than de-
scribed in the specifications.
• When the KV Series PLC is used in combination with other instruments, func-
tions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and
the surrounding environment.
• Do not use the KV Series PLC for the purpose of protecting the human body.
Note: The built-in display may show the error message "Error 40" blinking the very
first time you turn on the power supply to the Visual KV Series. Press any key
(1) 1-419
Visual KV Series
96M0364
INDEX
1 2 3
1
Installation Support Programming
Software
User's Manual
Installation
1. Configuration and 1. Programming
Specifications 1. Introduction
2. Instructions
2. System Installation
3. Access Window
2. Editor
3. Interrupts Visual KV Series
3. Simulator
4. KV-D20 Operator 4. High-speed Counters
Interface Panel
5. KV-10/80 Hardware
4. Monitor
5. Appendices
5. Positioning Control 1
User’s Manual
6. Interrupts, High-speed
6. Handheld
Programmer
7. KV-L2 Serial Interface
Counters, Positioning
Control
7. Serial Communication
Installation
Module
8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O 8. Programming
Module Examples
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima, Higashi-Yodogawa-ku, Osaka, 533-8555, Japan PHONE: +81-6-6379-2211
AUSTRIA GERMANY MALAYSIA SWITZERLAND

Phone: +43-2236-378266-0 Phone: +49-6102-36 89-0 Phone: +60-3-2092-2211 Phone: +41 43 455 77 30
BELGIUM HONG KONG MEXICO TAIWAN
Phone: +32 2 716 40 63 Phone: +852-3104-1010 Phone: +52-81-8220-7900 Phone: +886-2-2718-8700
CANADA HUNGARY NETHERLANDS THAILAND
Phone: +1-905-696-9970 Phone: +36 14 748 313 Phone: +31 40 20 66 100 Phone: +66-2-369-2777 How this manual is organized:
CHINA ITALY POLAND UK & IRELAND The Visual KV Series User’s Manual is composed of 3 separate
Phone: +86-21-68757500 Phone: +39-2-6688220 Phone: +48 71 36861 60 Phone: +44-1908-696900
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
CZECH REPUBLIC JAPAN SINGAPORE USA
Phone: +420 222 191 483 Phone: +81-6-6379-2211 Phone: +65-6392-1011 Phone: +1-201-930-0100 Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.
FRANCE KOREA SLOVAKIA
Phone: +33 1 56 37 78 00 Phone: +82-31-642-1270 Phone: +421 2 5939 6461
A5WW1-MAN-0069
Copyright (c) 1999 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

084024E 0079-3 96M0364 Printed in Japan

AS 53102 Visual KV SG 96M0364 GB WW 0079-3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AS 53102 Visual KV SG 96M0364 GB WW 0079-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Visual KV Series

AUSTRIA GERMANY MALAYSIA SWITZERLAND

Copyright (c) 1999 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

■ Restriction on compatibility with low-voltage directives (IEC-1010-1)

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 3 09.8.4, 19:01

● AC power built-in type newly added

● Excellent Access Window

● User message setting function

● Program write in RUN mode

● Equipped with two serial ports

● Easy Ramp-up/down control function

● Equipped with two 24-bit high-speed 30 kHz, two-phase counters

● Specified frequency pulse output function

● Frequency counter function

● Cam switch function

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 4 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

● Input time constant change function

● Double memory backup functions

Compatibility with Conventional KV Series Peripheral Units

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 5 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Cautions when Using the Serial Port

• Programs can be transferred and monitored using either communication port A or

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 6 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 7 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 2 System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 3 Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only]

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 8 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 3 Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 5 Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Only]

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 9 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications Visual KV

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 10 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 2 System Installation Visual KV

Chapter 3 Access Window Visual KV

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 11 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel Visual KV

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 12 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware KV-300, KV-10/80

Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 13 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module KV-300

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 14 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module KV-300

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 15 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit KV-10/80

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 16 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 2 Editor KV-300

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 17 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 18 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 19 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS 2-215

KVNKA Front_Inst.p65 20 08.3.11, 11:21 AM

Chapter 3 Interrupts Visual KV